Parker Richard D.

The Black Horseman

The Black Horseman (The Temple Islands Series)

Richard D. Parker (2012)

The Temple Islands Series

Book One: The Black Horseman

Book Two: Assassin of the Heart

Book Three: Elsewhere

Book Four: The Best of all Possible Worlds

For my family,

Guinea pigs to my imagination

Copyright © 2012 Richard D. Parker

All right reserved

The Black Horseman is a work of fiction. Names, characters, places and incidents either are the product of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, events, or locals is entirely coincidental.

I

Once thought to be a friend, the sun now revealed its true colors as endless rays of light and heat poured down without mercy or hesitation. The split personality that ruled the heavenly body was exposed, translucent as a rainbow conjured by a prism, artificial beauty and artificial kindness. Cast aside were the times when the sun smiled down upon the boy’s happier days; the sun had become the emotionless torturer, burning and blistering any bare skin it touched. There was no escape, no reprieve and no hope. The sun did not care that the boy was scalded and blazing red. It did not care that he was stripped naked, his skin beginning to bubble or that he was slowly dying of thirst. The sun rained its clean, clear rays down upon the earth with no thought to the boy tied tightly to the scaffolding. The sun cared not that he’d been beaten, scratched, pinched and raped, and as the moments sauntered slowly by, Gwaynn was finding that his cares were also slipping away, carried off with the sunshine.

The pain in his wrists was now gone, though blood still oozed from the burns made by the ropes that held him.  The pain in his shoulders, which an hour ago was excruciating, had fallen off to a dull ache. He hung completely limp, just a bit too short to stand and take his weight from his arms. Earlier, he’d watched as the tips of his toes created small grooves in the dust beneath him, but now, though his eyes were open, his vision was blank. His long dark hair was slick with sweat, and his white skin had begun to change, first to pink and then to an angry red before finally the skin on his shoulders took on an alarming shade of purple. The burn promised exquisite pain…if he lived that long. Gwaynn was no longer sure he would, and surprisingly he cared far less than he had only an hour ago. He was dimly aware of his twin sister, Gwynn, crying softly as she hung next to him, but he did nothing to try and comfort her. She was just as naked, and just as burnt, and though they were both fifteen, she had the luxury of being almost two inches taller, and so could stand on her feet and thus take her weight from her wrists and shoulders, at least up to about a half an hour ago. She was finally tiring, and the pain was knifing through her arms as her legs finally began to give way.

Gwaynn dimly heard his mother from the far end of the scaffold, speaking softly to his sister. They were the first words any of them had uttered since the Zani had finished with them. The soldiers had taken it relatively easy on Gwaynn, only a few paid him any special attention and that, though painful and mortifying, was over very quickly. His mother and sister, however, were repeatedly raped, sometimes slow, but mostly hard and fast. He knew it was far worse for his sister, who up to now had never known a man. She screamed through most of the first few men before finally falling completely silent in spite of their continued grunts, pokes and prods.

Now, as she cried, Gwaynn wanted to say something. She was closer to him than anyone in the world, close as only twins could be. He tried to speak, but found that he could no longer raise his head, and when he tried to talk, found that his tongue was swollen and would not work properly, so he gave up the attempt. She’d always been the strong one anyway. She’d been strong earlier as well. Gwynn was the one to challenge the Deutzani soldiers as they entered their private rooms. Gwynn was the one to boldly move forward, while he sat cowering with his mother, who’d held onto him and whispered soft words of comfort.

‘Coward,’ his mind shouted as he sat frozen, but still he had done nothing. He hated himself as he watched his twin sister move against the enemy, though it did little good for any of them in the end. The scaffold awaited them all.

Sometime later he woke and was surprised that he had slept, though still not truly sure he had, except that something was different. The sun had left the courtyard and moved off behind the high walls of the keep behind them. They now hung in the shade, glorious shade, and Gwaynn could not remember feeling anything quite so wonderful.

Gwynn was no longer crying. Gwaynn tried to lift his head and was surprised when he succeeded. Pain shot through his neck and shoulders, and he gave an involuntary whimper. He looked over at his sister and mother; both hung limply, heads down, their loose hair hiding their faces. Gwaynn painfully glanced around the courtyard. It was not very large, with the keep and main quarters running along the western side, the stables to the south, and the main gate along the eastern wall. At the moment there were only three Zani near the gate. He wondered vaguely where all the other soldiers had gone, and a ray of hope went through him that perhaps his father and older brothers were not dead, as was reported, but were in fact leading an army back to rescue them all. Hope fled as he watched the soldiers come to attention as a man rode through the gate. He was dark, dressed all in black and he rode upon a black horse. Gwaynn shivered. The dark man was followed by two additional riders, also wearing black and finally by two very large black dogs. At first Gwaynn did not understand, and then he heard his mother begin to cry.

As the man rode closer, Gwaynn could see that his pants and cape were trimmed in red, and at last he understood. This man was an Executioner from the Temple Islands. This man was death; this man was the Black Horseman. Despite his growing fear, Gwaynn studied him closely as he rode slowly around them and over to the stables, once there he dismounted. His companions followed him and likewise dropped from their horses. Gwaynn watched them from the corner of his eye, unable to turn his head farther without a great deal of pain. One of the men took the reins from the Executioner and led all of the horses into the stables. The other man leaned against one of the wooden posts supporting the roof, and watched as the man from the Temple Islands walked slowly toward the scaffolding, the dogs following eagerly behind him.

The man moved without hurry, around to the front of what was left of the Massi royal family. He glanced only briefly at Gwaynn, his eyes lingering for a long time on Gwynn before they finally moved to his mother.

“My name is Tar Navarra,” he said just above a whisper, and Gwaynn could hear the pride in it. “Are you the Lady Marie Addent Massi?”

Gwaynn’s mother said nothing, but the Executioner seemed unconcerned.

“Are you the Lady Marie Addent Massi?” he asked again. But again, no one answered. The man’s eyes went back to Gwynn, moving slowly along the soft lines of her body. Gwaynn saw that his sister was now awake and watching everything intently, but she made no move or sound, like a rabbit stilled by the gaze of a wolf. The Executioner threw back the right side of his riding cape and slowly drew a single kali from its scabbard. In all, the weapon was perhaps three and a half feet in length and about three inches in width at the base. It was tapered to a point that looked needle sharp. The kali was the primary weapon of the Temple Islands and was almost always used in pairs. Even now, some debated whether the weapon was a long knife or a short sword but such conjecture did not cross the minds of any of the people hanging before the Executioner.

Gwynn’s breathing became loud and shallow as Tar Navarra’s eyes found hers for a moment before mercifully moving back to her mother’s.

“Are you the Lady Marie Addent Massi?” he asked for the final time.

Still Gwaynn’s mother said nothing.

“Yes…yes, she is the Lady Marie Addent Massi,” Gwynn blurted, hoping that the fact that they were royalty made all of this a mistake somehow. “I’m her daughter, the Lady Gwynn, and this is Gwaynn, my brother.”

Gwaynn stared at his sister, amazed at her courage, but he still felt in his heart that it would do no good. This man planned to kill them all.

Lady Marie said nothing, did not even acknowledged the outburst. The Executioner looked over at Gwynn and smiled slightly for just a moment.

“She was the Lady Marie Addent Massi,” he said, his voice slow and soft as a baby’s sigh. “Now,” he continued, glancing again at Gwynn, “she is just food for my dogs.” Then with an unhurried motion he drew his blade along the Lady Marie’s midsection, low on the stomach below her belly button and just above her protruding hipbones. A thin line of blood instantly appeared behind the blade as if drawn there. Tar Navarra stepped neatly back and to the right so that he now stood directly in front of Gwynn. He watched the young girl’s face closely. At first nothing happened.

“Aaaaah,” the Lady Marie said seconds after being cut. It was not a sound of pain, and in fact, she felt very little, but more a sound of surprise and wonder. Blood was running freely now over her pubic area and down the front of her thighs, then suddenly her intestines bulged out of the cut. They held for a moment but then streamed out of her, uncoiling rapidly at her feet, the fluid turning the dust to mud.

“Aaaaaah,” she said once again, as the Executioner took another small step back to avoid the mess. The Lady Marie looked up at him briefly, feeling very light, but still she felt no real pain. She looked down once more at what used to be her innards. Tar Navarra nodded to the dogs and they immediately moved forward and began to feed. The Executioner watched as Gwynn’s face became as mask of fearful ugliness and she began to scream. He sighed in disappointment and turned his attention back to the Lady Marie, who was watching the dogs with an almost fascinated expression on her face. She watched, making no sound, until slowly the light began to leave her eyes and her head slumped between her arms and she saw no more.

The Executioner just stood and watched as the dogs tore into, and began to devour the Lady Marie’s bowels, and all the time he said nothing. The dogs growling and eating were the only sounds to be heard in the courtyard…besides Gwynn’s screaming. The gruesome sight before her was too much to take with a calm demeanor, no matter what her courage. She barely noticed as the Executioner stepped closer to her, but her screams stopped abruptly as he reached out and began to stroke her left breast. His hand lingered a while then moved down her side and cupped her buttocks before moving slowly upward again. His thumb teased Gwynn’s dark nipple which stood out against her flawless skin. As he played, the Executioner smiled slightly, his eyes moving reluctantly from the nipple to stare into Gwynn’s intense green eyes.

Gwaynn watched helplessly, hoping his sister would find someway for them to get out of this nightmare.

‘Perhaps if she let him’…he considered but then shook his head to chase the thought away.

“Please,” Gwynn whispered to the Executioner, almost like a lover. He smiled gently at her and then quickly slashed her throat just below the jawbone. Her eyes went wide with surprise as she stared at him. He stared back, still smiling and still stoking her breast as she tried and failed to draw another breath. She turned her face to Gwaynn, her eyes wide with panic. Her mouth was open, gulping, and Gwaynn could tell she was desperately trying to take a breath. He was breathing rapidly, as if he could somehow breathe for the both of them, but it did not work. He watched her struggle, all the while acutely aware of his disappointment in her. She was the strong one. She won at everything she did, yet somehow she had failed to save the two of them. Gwaynn was shocked, dismayed and above all, disappointed.

Tar Navarra also watched as she struggled for air and was still stroking her bloody nipple as she died.

Gwaynn hung motionless, and stared at his sister, shock keeping him still and silent as Tar Navarra moved in front of him. The man smiled at him, but Gwaynn was paying very little attention. His mind screamed at him, Gwynn is dead! Gwynn is dead! Gwynn is dead, over and over again.

“You are the Prince Gwaynn Massi?” the dark man asked in an almost friendly way.

Gwaynn said nothing, just nodded his head weakly. He cared very little now what happened to him, half of his soul was gone; the half he loved the best. He barely noticed what was going on around him and did not notice that the Executioner’s eyes were a bright blue.

“Good,” the man whispered, and began to raise his kali. He stopped abruptly as an arrow shot through the air and struck him in the right shoulder knocking the wind out of him, the force of the blow hurling him to the ground. A second later a dog yelped and then another, then the courtyard was suddenly alive with Massi soldiers. Gwaynn tried to turn his head to see what was going on, but his muscles betrayed him. He was actually surprised when the ropes holding his wrists to the scaffold were cut and his arms were free to fall. Pain and relief coursed through his shoulders. He would have fallen had he not been caught by strong arms. He was lifted seemingly without effort and thrown up over a broad shoulder. Gwaynn sighed and then gasped as the man beneath him began to run, though he headed not out of the stronghold, but back toward the keep. Gwaynn used his remaining strength to glance up. His eyes riveted on his dead sister’s naked body, the scene bobbing this way and that as he was carried away.

The man beneath him ran quickly, followed closely by several other soldiers. Someone behind was shouting orders, but the man carrying him never paused and just continued to run, not even slowing as he hit a flight of stairs. Gwaynn knew that the man had to be Lancer Karl, easily the largest and strongest man Gwaynn had ever met. And though Gwaynn was thin and only weighed one hundred and fifteen pounds he was sure no other man could sprint across the courtyard and up three flights of stairs while carrying him. These thoughts were dim as Gwaynn hung limply over the man’s shoulder, numb to everything around him. He was only vaguely aware of the fact that they had burst into his father’s private rooms.

“Traveler, now’s the time,” Gwaynn heard his father’s Weapons Master, Afton Sath say, but could he not see him. “Is the Prince alive?”

“We got to him in time…the Queen and the Princess…” Karl began, but stopped as Gwaynn let out a sob.

“Put him down while the Traveler works…make it fast man…” Afton Sath spat as Karl lowered Gwaynn into one of the oversized chairs.

“Let’s bar the door,” Gwaynn heard and opened his eyes. His head hurt, as did his arms, and he was dizzy, but still he watched as they pushed anything they could find in front of the one door to the room. Then he turned his attention to the Traveler. He had met a Traveler once during a dinner held by his father, but he had never watched one work before. They were very rare, and very expensive.

Gwaynn watched as the man hummed quietly to himself while moving his hands and arms about in a strange, exotic pattern. Master Sath suddenly stepped in front of him and blocked his view.

“Master Sath…” Gwaynn croaked and nearly began to cry from the gratitude he felt for this man, but he fought it down.

“Hush lad. Karl get him some water and find him something to wear,” Sath ordered and then turned around as sounds were heard on the stairs outside the barricaded door. Karl brought the water and Gwaynn drank it greedily from the dipper. He had forgotten just how thirsty he was, and it revived him greatly.

Sath moved over closer to the door. “Hurry man,” he barked at the Traveler, who showed little sign of increased speed. The man seemed oblivious to his surroundings as Karl brought Gwaynn one of his father’s shirts and a blue cape to wrap up in.

Gwaynn dressed himself slowly, most his attention on the Traveler, whose hands were still busy, carving intricate patterns into the air before him. Gwaynn could now make out a blue-green sheen in the air as it slowly expanding directly before the Traveler.

“Hurry” Sath yelled again as several loud bangs rattled the door. The Traveler paid the distractions no mind, but he began to weave his arms about faster. If there was a pattern to the movement of the Traveler’s hands, Gwaynn was unable to recognize it. The blue-green color in the air grew brighter and a shimmer began to appear, but everything was out of focus. The air in the room seemed to move and crackle, as the banging at the door became harder and more insistent. Everyone in the room remained quiet. Karl was holding a large wardrobe in place before the door, pushing all of his considerable weight against it. Master Sath helped him, but half his attention was on Traveler.

The shimmer suddenly became round and Gwaynn could make out a landscape in the center of the room, a landscape with green grass in the foreground, then what appeared to be a small town in the distance and finally the sea beyond. The Traveler’s arms continued to weave a tapestry in the air, and the scene in the bubble grew more focused. The sun was just setting in the bubble as the scene finally cleared.

The latch at the door finally gave way to the continuous barrage place upon it, and with a lurch the door moved inward a few inches.

“Travel,” shouted the Traveler and Karl looked quickly over to Master Sath, who nodded. Karl immediately released the wardrobe moved across the room and scooped up Gwaynn into his arms. Without a word, or a look back, he moved to and through the bubble. Gwaynn had never traveled in such a way before and he was surprised when all the hair on his arms stood on end; he could even feel the hair at the nape of his neck do likewise. He felt a slight resistance, for just a moment, like the two of them were walking through a film of warm water, then his ears popped, and they were through to the other side. Karl ran nearly twenty paces in the grass and then stopped and turned. He set Gwaynn on the ground, who was surprised to see that the bubble existed here in the meadow before the town just as it had back at the keep. In the bubble, Gwaynn saw his father’s favorite room, and off to one side the Traveler, who was still concentrating, and Master Sath.

The old Weapons Master raised one hand, as if in greeting and then drew his kali, and with the same grace he always displayed, he struck the Traveler across the neck. The bubble instantly disappeared with a loud pop.

“Master!” Gwaynn yelled and tried to rise.

“Was his idea,” Karl said softly. “Couldn’t be havin’ the Zani follow us that closely. As it is, we’ll be lucky to get away.”

Gwaynn tried to rise to his feet, but failed. “Master!” he yelled again, unable to listen to what was being said, unable to comprehend another loss.

“Master,” he said again, this time just above a whisper.

“My Prince,” Karl said kneeling before the young man. He leaned down so their heads were nearly the same height. Gwaynn did not listen; his eyes were still focused on the spot where the bubble used to be. Karl took him by the shoulders and shook him just a bit.

“My Prince, it was necessary. Master Sath knows the back passages of the keep better than anyone. If it is possible to elude the Zani and find us, he will. He knows we go to the Toranado, and he will follow if it is safe. The Traveler had to die, or we would have been pursued and they would have us before we could escape this land.”

It was not a long speech, unless you knew Karl, but it served its purpose. At that moment something died within Gwaynn, but also something was born, the need to strike back, the need for revenge, the need to kill Zani.

“You are not to call me ‘My Prince’ anymore,” he told Karl. “Now I am just Gwaynn to you,” he said, clenching his fists.

“Yes,” Karl agreed, then stood and gingerly helped Gwaynn to his feet.

Gwaynn turned carefully around and studied the small village. “Where are we?”

“Heron,” Karl answered. “Can you walk?”

Gwaynn thought about it a moment then nodded. “Yes. Why here?”

“Your father’s plan, just in case everything went wrong,” Karl said as they began to walk slowly toward the town. “We have a house set up with everything we will need, and a trireme is waiting to take us to the Toranado, the only family your father ever trusted.”

“My father’s plan,” Gwaynn said with enough venom that Karl looked up at him. “What of the plan to protect Solarii and the Massi?” he asked simply. “How could the Zani have defeated us so easily?”

Karl shook his head. “No boy, do not think badly of your father. Was not his fault and was not only the doing of the Zani. The High King’s Temple Knights had a hand in it.”

“The Temple Knights?” Gwaynn asked, shocked.

“Yes, at least three cohorts of them,” Karl answered with a look of disgust on his face.

“But why?”

Karl shrugged. “You’ll have to put that question to the High King.”

Gwaynn thought about his father, his brothers, his sister and mother and a great wave of sadness threatened to overwhelm him, but another feeling crept around the edges of his consciousness, a feeling of relief, relief that he had survived. He shuddered and then looked up at Karl. “Come, let us go,” he said shaking his head in an attempt to drive away unwanted thoughts. They moved off, Karl in the lead. He took them directly into the town, which was open to any and all travelers. The sun was below the horizon now, and it was quickly growing dark, which was advantageous, especially since Gwaynn was wearing nothing more than a shirt and a cape. Attention was one thing they did not want.

Karl soon moved off the main track and they circled around to the east before heading back northwest where they entered the grounds of a wealthy merchant’s house situated close to the wharves. Karl knocked three times, waited then knocked four times, waited then knocked once. A large, severe looking, middle-aged woman opened the door. She studied them both for an instant then ushered them quickly in.

“Ooooh….ooooh. It is true then, Solarii has fallen,” she stated as she led them to the back of the house toward the kitchens. A tall, thin man met them on the way. There were two more men waiting in the kitchen, obviously soldiers. All of them looked very serious, very sad.

“It’s true then?” the thin man asked. Karl nodded.

“We need something to eat,” he added and sat at the large wooden table that dominated the center of the room. He motioned for Gwaynn to do likewise. Gwaynn hesitated for a moment then sat.

“Sire…” the woman said and moved off to fetch stew for the two of them.

“There will be no more of that,” Karl said. “For his safety his name is Gwaynn, nothing more.”

The woman sobbed, but shook her head.

“The King then…and the others?” one of the soldiers asked. Gwaynn looked down at the table and then began to pick at his fingernails.

Karl again nodded. “Contact Captain Tul. We leave at first light,” he added and the soldier stood and left without a word.

The woman returned with two bowls of warm stew and placed it before them. Gwaynn’s stomach growled loudly and he immediately started on it. “Thanks Karla…I’m starving,” Karl said and nodded as Gwaynn looked up.

“Me sister,” he said sheepishly, “and her husband Paulo.” The thin man nodded but said nothing. Gwaynn paused in mid bite, remembering his own sister, now dead…for how long? He could not say for sure, and then he thought of his mother and her bowels, and gagged. He slowly put down his spoon, sat still for a moment then pushed the bowl toward the middle of the table.

“The stew is not to your taste?” Karla asked. Gwaynn just shook his head.

“What is it?” Karl asked, but Karla moved behind the boy and softly gripped his shoulders.

‘He looks so like the King,’ she thought.

“He’s had a day,” she said for Gwaynn. “Come…Gwaynn, I’ll take you up to your room.”

Gwaynn, afraid if he had to explain he might start to cry, agreed. He rose and followed her from the kitchen without a word.

“Try and sleep,” Karl said after him. “If everything is set we will leave just before sunrise.”

Gwaynn heard him, but did not respond; instead he followed Karla up a flight of stairs and down a narrow hall, and into one of the far rooms. The room was small, dominated by a large bed. There was a table with a pitcher of water, a chair that sat before a window, and a fireplace, which was presently cold. Karla led him to the bed, and gently removed his cape.

“I’ll fetch you a nightshirt,” she said, but Gwaynn grabbed her hand before she could leave.

“My…my father’s shirt will be fine,” he whispered. “Don’t go.”

Karla hesitated for a moment and then they both sat down. He went willingly and then without a word leaned into Karla until she put her arms around his shoulders.

He sat quietly for a moment, and then started to cry, gently at first, but then harder as his grief overwhelmed him. He wept but made no noise. He cried for nearly a quarter of an hour, and all the while his mind taunted him with one word. ‘Coward.’

ǂ

While Gwaynn was crying, many miles away to the east and south, Afton Sath, moved carefully through the small dark tunnel that led from the kitchens of the keep, deep underground and then to the south. It ran underground for just over five miles. He was not sure how far he had come through the dark, damp tunnel, but the cold was beginning to seep into his bones, and he knew if he was to survive he needed to find the exit before his strength gave out. He was sure his old body would betray him if he had to spend the entire night underground. But his torch had sputtered and gone out over an hour ago, and he was forced to go very slowly through the pitch black, feeling his way carefully through the loose rocks that littered the tunnel floor. A fall at this point could very well prove fatal, and he, in his sorrow and hatred, would not allow himself to die before he had one more opportunity to strike a blow against the treacherous Deutzani. Unfortunately his thoughts continued to dwell on the day just past. It had been a disaster beyond anything imaginable, not only had a trusted ally attacked, but the defenses of the country had crumbled far too easily. Also there was strong evidence that the High King’s Temple Knights had aided the enemy. Why, Sath did not know, but he wanted to live to find out.

He stumbled slightly and put his face and hand through a thick web, which bracketed the tunnel. He didn’t flinch and even felt a small wave of hope, thinking perhaps he was nearing the end of the tunnel. Earlier in the journey he had heard the sounds of many small scurrying feet, but those had diminished the farther he made his way from the castle. His right shoulder was aching from having to hold his hand up and out in front of him in an attempt to keep from slamming his head against a rocky outcropping. His left hand glided along the wall of the tunnel.

He actually moved out of the tunnel and entered the large cavernous area without realizing it until he kicked a rock and the sound echoed in the chamber. He felt a wave of relief, but did not increase his speed as he continued to feel his way carefully forward, one hand still out in front and one hand on the rock wall. It was not long before he felt a puff of fresh air. In it he could smell the forest and the ocean beyond, and within moments he was at the cave mouth; He stepped out to see the stars and the quarter moon above as tears welled in his eyes.

He breathed a sigh of relief, but he was not yet safe. He was still only five miles from Solarii, the capital of the country, with enemy troops all around and he suspected a good portion of them were dedicated to finding him or his body. He moved out of the cave and headed down a steep wooded hill. He still moved carefully, but just as fast as his seventy-year-old body could safely carry him.

When he made it to the bottom of the hill it took him nearly a quarter of an hour to find the thin game path he knew was there, but in the dark it was not easy to locate. Once he had found it, he immediately began to march away from the northern town which had been his home for nearly fifty years. He would make his way south, avoiding the many small hamlets along the way, which would be obvious targets for the Zani invaders, instead he would go cross country and head for the southern outskirts of a the large town of Millvale. Yes, he would head to the Fultan’s, a mid-range noble family, which specialized in brewing ale. But they were also relatives, cousins of his late wife. The two of them had visited the estates of Thomas Fultan several times in the last few years before his wife died. She enjoyed the heated springs situated not far from the main house and Sath enjoyed the ale. If the Fultan’s managed to survive the invasion, which Sath thought likely given the remote location of the estate and their obvious lack of influence, it would be a perfect launching point to wherever he finally decided on heading permanently. Now the only problem was getting to Millvale undetected.

II

Karl woke Gwaynn very early the next morning. The boy was confused for a moment, and then the memories of the day before struck him like a hammer blow.

‘Gwynn is dead,’ he thought listlessly. Not that he had ever truly forgotten the fact. All through the night, dreams haunted and reminded him of the previous day’s horror. Through most of the night visions Gwynn was being raped. She implored and begged Gwaynn to save her, but he did not. He just watched, remaining quiet to save himself. He made no move to help her even when she turned to him, her intestines hanging from her naked midsection, and pleaded.

‘Keep the dogs away. Please, keep the dogs away.”

But in his dreams he had done nothing, nothing at all.

“Karl,” Gwaynn said, softly rubbing his forehead, trying his best to dispel the horrible visions running through his mind.

“Come lad,” the big man said laying a hand on Gwaynn’s shoulder. “The mornings will be the worst for a while now,” he added and set clothes on the foot of the bed.

Gwaynn sat up and looked about the room, but thankfully Karla was gone. He was surprised he had slept at all.

“Last night was no picnic,” the boy answered sitting up and dressing, wincing from his sunburn as he pulled on a shirt.

Karl chuckled despite the emotional pain. “No, no picnic,” he replied as Karla moved into the room. Gwaynn made a move to cover up, but then shrugged and stood, pulling his pants on. Karla appeared not to notice his nudity.

“I’ve packed you two some food, a lot of food ‘cause I know how much Karl eats,” she said as Gwaynn added a leather vest. He was pulling on some old worn boots when she knelt before him. He stopped and looked at her, smiling ruefully.

Karla smiled back, tears in her eyes. “Come back to us soon, my King.”

Gwaynn could not speak, so he just nodded, shifted his feet inside the boots. They were big but fit reasonably well. He stood and tried not to look at Karla, but found that he could not help himself.

“Thank you,” he said choking up slightly, but he somehow maintained control and she seemed to sense that he wanted to keep his composure.

“You need to get moving,” she said to help cover his emotions. “The Zani will soon spread all throughout the land, and it will be easier to come here by sea. We may not have much time.”

“She’s right,” Karl said and they moved one after another down the hall and then the stairs. They paused at the front door for only a moment and then without saying good-bye stepped out into the cool morning air. The sky to the east was a deep purple-black, the sun not yet above the horizon. One of the soldiers from the night before ran to meet them.

“Sir,” the man said to Karl. “The Zani are coming.”

Karl cursed and stopped walking. “By sea?”

The soldier shook his head and Karl started walking again. “No, by land. About fifty foot soldiers.”

“How long?” Gwaynn asked, nearly jogging to keep up with Karl’s long strides, but he noticed that the soldier was moving his legs rapidly also, which made him feel better.

“About an hour away, Sire,” the soldier added and bowed his head slightly. Karl let the lapse go. They had time, and habits that spanned generations were hard to break. They continued to the docks in silence, all of them moving very rapidly. The soldier led them to a trireme that was bustling with activity, preparing to caste off. There was a man with long black hair waiting for them.

“Sire,” he said as they approached, then bowed low from the waist. “The Londalay is at your service.”

Karl said nothing.

Gwaynn bowed his head slightly. “I thank you Captain. Please inform your crew that they must address me as a regular traveler. For whatever reason, the Zani have targeted the royal family. If you continue to treat me as royalty it will be noticed and put everyone in danger.”

Captain Tul stared at the boy for a moment and then smiled. “You, and your party may board, young Master.”

Gwaynn bowed and moved past the Captain. Karl turned to the soldier before following. “Gather what men you can and head for Koshka, it’s a small southern village along the Scar mountain range. If Afton Sath lives he will make for the town. Stay hidden; stay safe. Let the people know our King still lives. Let the people know to stay quiet. He will return when he can, but for now we must go into hiding.”

“Luck,” the soldier said with a salute.

“Luck,” Karl answered then turned and followed his King up the gangway and onto the ship that hopefully would take them to freedom.

The Londalay was an average sized trireme as the ships go, but you could not convince Gwaynn of that fact. It was about a hundred and forty feet long, had four decks, including two decks devoted only to oarsmen of which there were about a hundred, all of them free men paid from the profits of the trading ship. The oarsmen occupied the middle two decks with the lower hold for the trade goods. The upper deck was used as quarters, and to move additional cargo if it was needed. On this trip there would be no trade goods.

In addition to the oarsman, there was one large mast placed directly in the center of the deck, it supported a single large rectangular sail. Gwaynn and Karl waited near the mast until Captain Tul boarded and motioned for them to join him. They moved toward the back of ship where an awning was set up near the tiller to keep them out of the sun during their voyage.

The Captain gave an order, which was barked out by one of his lieutenants, and the oars from the lower deck were dropped down in the water. A steady beat boomed from a drum below and they slowly began to get underway. Gwaynn could not help himself and stood, then moved to the side of the ship. He immediately noticed that only one level of oars was working at the moment, the lower deck. Gwaynn concentration was such that he failed to hear Captain Tul come up beside him.

“Only half the oarsmen are working,” Gwaynn commented.

“Yes,” the Captain answered. “It is how most merchant ships operate. Half on, half off, for rest. It would appear strange if we bolted out of the harbor with all oarsmen pulling.”

They stood silently for a time until the ship reached the middle of the harbor, then the Captain turned.

“Full sail,” he said and his order was repeated. The sail was quickly hoisted, catching the first rays of the rising sun. The sail immediately billowed out, catching the wind. Their speed increased dramatically. Gwaynn turned to look at the Captain.

“No sense in dallying about the harbor, however,” he said with a smile, but Gwaynn did not smile back as he continued to watch the activities of the ship closely. All went smoothly, but as they cleared the harbor three additional triremes were spotted coming up from the northeast. The Captain moved to the far side of the ship to get a closer look. Karl and Gwaynn joined him.

“Merchants?” Karl asked, but the Captain shook his head.

“No, too large and they are coming with all oarsmen, maybe two hundred oars in the water,” the Captain answered. “And from their position, I would say they began their journey sometime last night.”

Gwaynn and Karl exchanged a look. “Should we go to all oarsmen?” one of the lieutenants asked from behind the Captain.

“No, not yet. As I was just telling our young Master here, it would look out of place with all of our oarsmen going. They have no idea who we are, so let’s appear to be the innocent merchant. We should excel at it.”

And so they continued at their current pace, trying to hurry but also trying to appear as if they were in no hurry. The three approaching triremes were just over a mile away as the Londalay cleared the harbor and headed southwest toward the Toranado. Gwaynn, Karl and the Captain moved to the stern and kept a close watch on the three ships.

“Perhaps they are just heading for the harbor,” Gwaynn said softly.

“Perhaps,” the Captain answered. “We shall know very soon.” It took only about ten minutes for the triremes to reach the mouth of the harbor, and two indeed turned and entered, but the third kept coming on very fast, still pulling all oars. They were still distant, but gaining steadily.

“All oars,” the Captain said with a look of concern, and his order was immediately shouted and obeyed. The additional oarsmen were apparently ready and waiting for just such an order. The speed of the ship increased almost immediately, and it took nearly twenty minutes or so before Gwaynn could tell that the trireme behind was still gaining on them. Captain Tul, however, did not seem too concerned.

He smiled down at Gwaynn. “They’ve been pulling all oars for quite a time now. It will be tough for them to continue the pace.”

Gwaynn nodded, and felt Karl put a hand on his shoulder. Together they watched as the chasing trireme slowly gained on them. It was only a quarter of a mile away when its speed began to slack, after that the distance between the ships seemed to hold steady. Gwaynn turned and moved to the awning where the Captain was sitting with two of his lieutenants. The Captain looked up as Gwaynn came into view.

“Their speed has fallen off?” Captain Tul asked.

Gwaynn nodded. “How long can we hold this speed with all oars?”

The Captain smiled at the boy’s astute mind. “Several more hours at least, but our pursuer will have to keep up their speed also. Come sit and relax, I think we will win this race,” he said.

A lieutenant stood and offered his spot to Gwaynn, who hesitated, then moved and sat next to the Captain.

“Why?” Gwaynn asked. “They have more oarsmen.”

The Captain nodded. “Yes, but their ship is a war ship. It is much larger and heavier, built for ramming. We were built light for speed and we are carrying no cargo. They will falter,” he added confidently. But after nearly three hours the ship chasing did not falter, and when the sky suddenly grew very dark and the seas grew heavy the pursuers actually began to gain once more. The wind was blowing hard from land, filling the sail and making it more difficult to control the ship and keep it on course. On the Inland Sea, triremes normally move to land and anchor during storms. The ungainly ships were not built to handle large swells. But at the moment, the Captain did not feel that this was possible.

“They are gaining,” Gwaynn informed him. “Larger, heavier ships move through rough seas better I assume.”

The Captain grunted.

“Do we know who they are?” Karl asked his eyes weak over long distances. Gwaynn frowned at him.

“Very definitely Zani,” he answered. The large Zani flag was clearly visible to him even though it was flying from the stern of the following ship. He could also see several men standing on the bow of the ship watching him watching them.

“Captain,” said a lieutenant. “We should make for land. This storm looks to be a very bad one.”

The Captain studied the sky and indeed it looked none to good. The clouds blowing off the land to the south were dark gray and billowing, but farther to the south, near the horizon they looked almost black. Karl and Gwaynn stood silently by waiting for the Captain’s decision. The swells now were nearly ten feet high, making the boat pitch and roll alarmingly, especially to the newcomers. Both Gwaynn and Karl knew that to make for land was a death sentence for each of them. Still neither said a word.

The Captain noticed their silence, especially the boy’s, and was much impressed. The lad was smart, there was no denying that, and would know just what landing the ship would mean for him. His silence spoke volumes for both his courage and character.

“Lieutenant Hobbs hard to port. Take us north, dead with the wind,” he finally said, and to his credit Hobbs relayed the order without hesitation. In the swells the ship turned slowly, allowing the trireme behind to gain on them quickly, but then the wind finally filled the sail of the Londalay and they streaked off toward the north. Their pursuer seemed to hesitate then they also began to turn toward the north, but then the rains came hard and steady and blotted them from sight.

Lightning filled the sky and the thunder rolled over the waves far easier than the Londalay, but the crew kept the ship heading due north, as wave after wave crashed into the bow.

“Hobbs, see to the boy,” the Captain yelled through the noise of the storm. Hobbs nodded as the Captain gave orders to trim the sail, before it drove them sideways into the teeth of the swells. The ship would rely on the oarsman, already tired from the chase, to keep them on course.

Hobbs came over and showed both Gwaynn and Karl how to run a rope, which looped around their waist. It would keep them from being washed overboard by the high seas. It was a measure of safety but it also meant that if the ship went down they would be pulled down with it. All through the morning and well into the afternoon they fought the storm. The ship weathered it extremely well, but the oarsmen were very near exhaustion and the Captain knew that if they were to survive, the storm must begin to abate soon.

“Captain!” Karl yelled holding stubbornly onto Gwaynn’s shirt as they both fought to keep their feet on the pitching vessel. “We can’t take much more. Where are we headed?”

The Captain smiled. “The Temple Islands, but if we make land it will be in the sunshine. The Islands are still at least a day away on calm seas.”

Karl’s eyes grew big. “Can you swim?” He asked Gwaynn, who looked up at his big friend but said nothing.

The crew fought the storm for nearly two more hours before the first of the oarsmen collapsed from exhaustion. The ship grew sluggish as more men fell, then began to founder as the remaining men lost their battle with the sea. Waves turned the ship and crashed into it seemingly from every side. Sailors, those with enough strength left, fought the rolling of the ship and clamored to the top deck. The Captain was near the stern when a large wave hit them, spraying them all with a wall of water, when it past the Captain was gone.

“Remove the rope Karl,” Gwaynn yelled into the wind. Karl, though he stood right next to Gwaynn did not hear, so he yelled once more, then once again until the big man understood. They untangled themselves just as the ship was hit by a mighty roller. It struck them and the ship listed nearly thirty degrees. Karl gripped the rail with one arm and Gwaynn with the other, neither believing the ship could right itself, but for a moment it did, then the next wave hit and they were both washed overboard and into the sea.

Gwaynn went completely under and panicked. He kicked strongly, fighting for several seconds but still did not reach the surface. This is the end, he thought, strangely confident that he was right, then his head broke free of the waves and he gulped in precious oxygen. A wave caught him and he rode it high into the air. The Londalay was nearly a hundred yards away already. He fought the wave and frantically looked about for Karl. At first he could not see him, but then the big man popped to the surface only a few feet away. Gwaynn swam to him. They reached each other and turned just as another wave struck the Londalay. This time it rolled, snapping dozens of oars. The sound of the groaning hull could be clearly heard over the noise of the storm. They saw several men fall into the sea as the ship finally flipped completely over. Seconds later another wave hit the ship hard and when it passed, the Londalay was gone.

The two rode the waves together for a few moments looking for other survivors, but they could not see any. The rain continued to pour down on them, limiting their visibility, so they could not be sure whether or not any other sailors were struggling to survive.

“Take off your clothes,” Karl yelled, knowing that the heavy wool would drag them down eventually. Gwaynn nodded and did what he was told, though he was reluctant to give up the garments he had just so recently acquired. His head bobbed below the surface several times while he was trying to slip out of his pants, but soon enough he managed to shed himself of everything and once again he was completely naked. Karl had drifted a few yards away and Gwaynn could tell that he was still struggling with his clothes. Gwaynn swam toward his friend, but the sea was teasing them, keeping them apart; playing with them as a boy might play with ants. Gwaynn eventually came close enough for Karl to reach out and grab, but naked now, Gwaynn’s arm slipped from his grip, so he had to try once again. They finally got close enough to clutch at each other, both impeding the other’s ability to swim, but each happy to be close never the less.

Gwaynn fought to keep is head above water, amazed at the size of the waves that lifted them up and then let them down. On and on went the endless cycle of rising and falling. It was on the crest that Gwaynn spotted debris floating near the base of the wave and pointed it out silently to Karl. The big man nodded and smiled.

“Grab a hold,” Karl yelled and turned his back on Gwaynn, who put his arms around the man’s neck and held on tightly, but still used his legs to help keep them both above water. Karl waited until they crested once more, spotted the debris field again and immediately began to swim strongly in that direction. It took them nearly a half an hour to get close enough to actually see what was floating on the water. There were several oars and other bits of wood that would do them no good, but there was also a large section of planking and Karl slowly made his way closer until they reached it.

Karl, breathing hard from his exertions, half climbed onto the planking, which measured nearly six feet square, and immediately dropped his head down and closed his eyes. Gwaynn climbed from Karl’s back and scrambled onto the makeshift raft next to him. It felt good not to have to tread water for a bit, though both did have to fight to stay on the planking as the sea continued to try to dump them off every few minutes. Silently they rode the waves, up and down, up and down, and the rain continued and the lightning crashed until the afternoon turned to night.

They fought to survive together and the storm waned so slowly that neither noticed when it finally stopped nor sometime later when the seas finally grew calm once more. They both slept, though very fitfully, each amazed when the sun moved above the horizon announcing the fact that morning had come and they were still both alive.

Karl woke first, thirsty and looked about the calm seas. He held out the hope of spotting other survivors, but deep inside he knew he would find none, and he didn’t. He turned to check on Gwaynn and found the boy awake and looking across the sea.

“Se…” Karl tried to say and then swallowed. Gwaynn looked toward him. “See…see anyone?” He finally managed knowing the boy’s eyes were far better than his own.

Gwaynn shook his head, also very thirsty. He wished he had thought to drink more of the rain that was coming down so plentifully last night. He felt like crying, but didn’t, and in fact, he knew he never would again, not that he was going to survive very long out here. Even if they didn’t drowned they would surely die of thirst before they reached land, if they ever reached land.

“I have to survive,” Gwaynn said softly.

“You will lad,” Karl said, mistaking the boy’s statement for fear. “You will. Come,” he added checking the sun. “We need to start moving if we can..moving north. Hopefully we’ll stumble across the Islands.” Together they worked themselves around to the other side of the makeshift raft, and without a word began to swim.

They both kicked for nearly an hour before Gwaynn began to seriously tire. Karl grabbed him and hoisted him up higher on the planks.

“Rest a bit lad. We’ve all day to swim,” he said, a smile in his voice, though he did not have enough strength to put one on his face. Gwaynn said nothing, just closed his eyes and concentrated on the movement of the raft in the water. Karl continued to kick, but he could not be sure of his exact direction, and being low in the water as they were their line of sight was very limited. Swimming, however, gave him something to do other than thinking of their impending deaths. At the moment Karl had strength to spare.

Gwaynn sprawled on the raft for several hours before Karl noticed how red his back was becoming, and cursed softly to himself. After spending most of the previous afternoon naked in the sun tied to that damn scaffold, Karl had now let him lay exposed in and out of the water.

“Gwaynn, get back in the water,” Karl croaked. “You’re burning to a crisp, and starting to smell good.” The boy didn’t react, and Karl nudged him, and then again before Gwaynn groaned and looked about. He didn’t say anything, and showed no sign that he had even heard Karl, so the big man reached up, and as gently as he could, pulled the boy back into the water.

“You’re burning,” he explained, but Gwaynn remained quiet, and they both just held on and floated with the current for several more hours before suddenly Gwaynn began to kick again. Karl, who was half sleeping, woke and looked over at the boy, who was smiling at him.

“I’m sure this is the right way,” he said so softly Karl almost didn’t hear him though he was less than a foot away. Karl smiled at him and began to kick also, though both kicked very lazily and rested often before starting up once again. They found a rhythm and kept it up most of the afternoon before each stopped to rest again.     Dehydration was now setting in for both of them, and thinking clearly was becoming difficult even when they had thoughts. For the most part, they just hung on, mostly out of habit and instinct, and floated. Night came without either noticing, but when Karl finally did he used nearly all of his strength to haul Gwaynn back up onto the planks. Karl pulled himself half out of the water, knowing that he was likely to tip the boy if he was to try and haul himself all the way on top. He was not even sure the raft would hold his full weight, so he continued to hang on, his legs dangling in the water, kicking off and on the entire night.

Morning found Karl neither refreshed, nor rested, and he did not bother to even pull the boy into the water when the sun drew higher in the sky. He just continued to float and kick. The morning passed just as the night had, but with Karl resting more and more, and Gwaynn draped face down on the wet planking. Karl was not even sure the boy was alive anymore, but did not have the strength or inclination to check. Long stretches of time passed without a coherent thought, neither was holding out any hope of surviving, but living on just the same. How long he had been in the water, Karl could not say and it was nearly an hour before sunset when he first noticed the call of birds. He could hear them plainly and vaguely realized that he had been hearing the sounds for quite a while. He raised his head and looked about. The gulls circled over his head and flew up and down just above the wave tops.

‘Land must be somewhere close,’ Karl thought and his heart soared. He looked around for any sign but found it hard to focus, so he rested a moment, and then tried again. It took a few minutes, but finally from the crest of a wave he spotted land close, not even half a league away.

“Prince,” Karl croaked, barely above a whisper. “Land.” Gwaynn did not respond as Karl began to kick weakly, trying to steer them to salvation.

“Prince…” He said again, this time even softer than the last time. Gwaynn still made no move, and Karl gave up, not having the strength to continue. He just kicked and kicked, sometimes catching sight of the land growing closer, but mostly he just kicking mindlessly. Without thought he continued to swim, finally hearing the breakwater, knowing they were getting very close. He was not aware of how close until the waves began to lift them higher, and suddenly the surf flipped Gwaynn off the raft and threw Karl head over heals, tearing the planking free of his grip. Karl struggled to right himself underwater, and was surprised when his feet touched sand. He pushed off and shot to the surface just in time for the next wave to crash into him; it sent him reeling once more. When he finally managed to surface again, he looked first for the next wave and somehow managed to ride over the top of it, then he frantically looked about for Gwaynn. He spotted the boy’s light skin not far away. He was face down in the sea. Karl fought his way to him, exhausted, catching him just as the next wave struck them. Karl held on, however and with what strength he had left, tried to guide them both to land. The waves helped, pushing them up until finally the big man was able to crawl more than swim his way up onto the beach. He pulled Gwaynn up after him, and with a final titanic effort drew them both out of the water and as far up on the beach as he could manage before he collapsed from the effort and was still.

ǂ

Far to the south, in the former Capital City of the Massi, King Arsinol Deutzani was not amused.

“The Rattan just returned to port; the Captain is reporting the Calais is missing at sea as well as the Londalay,” Ja Brude, the King’s advisor said entering the former throne room of the Massi royal family. He glanced curiously at the three suspended women hanging from a hastily erected scaffold in the center of the room. All three were completely naked and Ja’s first impression was that the one on the far right could not rightly be called a woman. But after closer inspection he saw that though she was indeed young, she was clearly not a child. She was thin, much too thin, with underdeveloped breasts and nearly straight hips. Her body was closer to that of a young boy than a woman, except of course for the genitalia. Ja Brude kept his face carefully neutral as he gazed at her. She was built exactly to the King’s liking.

“The boy has escaped,” Arsinol stated, letting his anger rise, which did not bode well for the Massi women before him, but of course, they were unaware of the danger.

“That is far from certain,” Ja answered, his eyes lingering on the naked bodies of the three before him. The thin woman’s breasts were small, really not much more than nipples and he paid them no mind. His taste did not follow along the lines of his King’s, rather his attention remained fixed on the full breasts of the woman in the center. She was older, though far from old, perhaps thirty, perhaps not, but her breasts were large and swayed as she moved however slightly. Her head hung down so that her face was hidden beneath a swath of black hair, but her hips were wide and her thighs had a milky softness which made her dark triangle of pubic hair stand out all the more. Ja felt a surge from his groin. The King would not choose that one, he was sure. Perhaps, with a bit of persuading, she could be saved just for him, after all what was the fun of conquering new lands without a little rape… a little pillage.

“The storm was a bad one, and it seems unlikely that the Londalay could have survived, she being lighter and less able to handle high surf than our large war ships,” Ja said never taking his eyes from the center girl.

“No,” Arsinol said standing; the eyes of the women tied before him rose in unison, hoping for pity, hoping for mercy, but they saw none in his eyes as he picked the horsewhip from the table. “My heart tells me he has survived. I’ve given my youngest daughter to the High King in exchange for the destruction of the Massi. They must be killed…all of them. There must be proof.”

Ja shrugged. He knew the King doted on the Princess Audra, who, admittedly, was very beguiling for one so young. But even Arsinol must admit that he received a very good price for her, beauty or no. Brude’s attention went back to the hanging women and he unconsciously licked his lips, watching as the three sets of feminine eyes followed the whip in the King’s hand, much like a cornered rodent eyes an approaching snake.

“And Navarra will be laid up for at least a month from his injuries,” the King added as he moved in front of women, becoming excited by the fear freely displayed on their faces. “Injuries caused by Massi treachery,” he added then slowly moved behind the prisoners, taking in the pale plump backsides of the two on the left and the small tight one on the far right. He studied that one, hips narrow. His view was disrupted as the young woman, her curiosity and fear getting the best of her, turned to look back at him.

“Eyes front!” he yelled and lashed out at her, the whip leaving a bright red slash across the lower half of her small globes. The woman cried out in surprise and fear, her breath hissing through her lips as the pain began to spread. Arsinol smiled. Yes, she would be the one for tonight, he thought and with the decision made, concentrated the whip on the center woman, and the one on her left. Their cries rang out in the large hall as stroke after stroke fell. Ja watched avidly, as the two attempted to avoid the lash, but their range of movement was limited. There was no escape for them.

Fifteen minutes later they both hung limp and silent, blood running from numerous cuts, most of which were on their buttocks, but a few were on their lower backs and upper thighs. The girl on the right continued to whimper, waiting for the lash to visit her again. Arsinol watched her as she steadfastly remained looking forward. He smiled to himself. She would do. Then he swung the whip just one more time and slashed across her upper thighs. She screamed in surprise and waited fearfully for more, but the King took his knife and cut her from the scaffold. He pulled her out of the room and to his private chambers without another word. Ja waited until he was gone then moved to the women left standing. He placed his hand on the left breast of the woman he favored, lifting it slightly to feel it’s weight. She remained frozen, head down, though he could tell from her breathing that she was still in quite a bit of pain. He cut her down. He would take her from behind so he could see the welts.

“Give her to the men,” he said, indicating the lone woman left standing. The two remaining guards looked at each other and then back to the woman and smiled.

III

Late the following afternoon Tar Kostek ran along the beach with two of his pupils. They were running on the wet sand right at the water line in an effort to build leg muscle. Both pupils held promise, but the younger female, Vio, was a natural, and Kostek was sure that one day she would be the Island’s top runner. Her stamina now was already extremely impressive and she had no trouble keeping up with either of them, even though Kostek was a Tar, which meant proven one, and Krys was the current top runner in Kostek’s quarter. Young though she was, Vio was second and closing. They were not racing for speed now however, but instead for endurance. Vio, naturally playful, as were most thirteen year olds, noticed a large group of gulls flying up ahead and increased her speed, curious as to what had drawn them all together. Krys, seeing her pulling ahead increased his speed as well, a natural competitor. Kostek let them go. They had already made over five miles and he was beginning to tire. No one could out run age it seemed.

He watched from slightly behind as Krys came up along side Vio, but she was not having it and increased her speed even more. Krys matched her. Kostek sighed and sped up as well, as did Vio and soon they were all racing along close to full speed until Vio suddenly stopped. She bent over breathing hard, but was staring intently at something up ahead. Krys ran past her a ways, thinking she was at the end of her endurance, but he had not gone too far before he came up short also. Kostek slowed, but continued to run until he was even with Vio, who was now walking slowly forward.

The naked bodies that attracted the gulls stood out starkly against the white sand. At first Kostek thought that the birds were feeding on both, but after a moment he could tell that they were for some reason leaving the smaller of the two alone, and instead concentrating on the larger body. He and Vio quickly caught up to Krys, who had stopped moving, then they all rushed forward together. The gulls screamed in protest and scattered up into the air. Kostek ran to the smaller body, because it was very clear that the larger of the two was already dead. Vio and Krys came up behind him.

Kostek turned over the body over. It was a young man, a boy really, whose skin was burnt a blistering red, and whose lips were chapped and swollen. At first Kostek could detect no signs of life, but then he felt a very faint heartbeat.

“Is he alive?” Vio asked, her gaze going from the boy to the decaying body of the larger man and back.

“Yes,” Kostek said. “Please give me your water.” Vio did as she was asked and Kostek very carefully wet his fingers and put them to the boy’s lips. There was no reaction, but the Tar kept at it very patiently. Finally the boy’s tongue moved seeking water.

“Vio, you need to run back and bring help. Krys and I will move the boy to shade,” Kostek said simply, looking about for any possible shelter. “Tell them to bring the wagon.”

Vio nodded, looking down at the boy with concern. Krys handed her his water skin, but said nothing.

“Hurry Vio,” Kostek added without raising his voice. The girl jumped in any event, then without a word headed back the way they had come at a strong, steady pace.

Kostek continued to drip water between the boy’s lips but knew that they had to get him out of the sun, and soon.

“Krys, find some shelter, as close as possible. Needn’t be much, we just have to get him into some shade,” he said and the lad immediately set off. He returned only a few minutes later and together they carried the survivor gently up the beach until they reached a tall dune with wild grasses growing on the seaside. At this time of day the height of the dune effectively blocked the sun. They put the boy down carefully in the sand and then each pulled up clumps of sea grasses. They laid them out carefully, forming a crude bed and then moved the boy one last time. Then they settled down to wait, Kostek tending to his patient almost constantly.

It was completely dark before anyone arrived. Tar Bnall came upon them first on horseback. Vio, riding double, was holding tightly to his waist, guiding the way. Earlier Kostek had ordered Krys to build a large fire some distance away in the sand, so it was, in fact, very easy to locate them. The fire was large enough to provide warmth and light even at a distance. Krys continued to feed the fire even as they arrived.

Bnall pulled his mount up short and dismounted. Vio jumped smoothly off the back of the horse then grabbed the reins, though she truly wanted to run and see how the boy was doing. Patiently she led their mount to a clump of thick grasses and hobbled him before running back to satisfy her curiosity.

“The wagon should be arriving within an hour. Tar Amon has Endid driving it so we will have to hope it gets here in one piece,” she heard Bnall explaining. Amon was the High Tar of the Island and Endid was the youngest Tar, in only his first year and the first new Tar in nearly seven.

Kostek smiled at Vio. “You’ve come quickly. You must have run very fast.” He said studying her. She nodded, glancing from the Tar to the boy.

“He’s stable and should survive,” he reassured her. “Now I need you to watch over him while Tar Bnall and I, bury the other unfortunate.” Vio nodded, grateful for the confidence her Tar was showing in her. She immediately sat down and took the water from her master, who smiled once more, then rose and left to do more grizzly work.

Vio wet her fingers and placed them on the boys’ lips, fascinated by him. A shipwreck survivor! She could hardly believe it. Her eyes moved down his body, which was still naked and seemed to be glowing red in the firelight. She could see goose bumps rising as the wind blew softly across his skin.

“Krys,” she said. He was still busy feeding the fire. “Fetch the blanket from Naddy.” Naddy was the horse she had arrived on. “I think his burn is making him cold,” she explained. Krys threw the piece of driftwood he was carrying onto the fire and then moved off to do as she asked. He returned in a few moments and helped her unfold and cover the boy.

“Who do you think he is?” Vio asked and Krys shrugged.

“There’s no telling,” he answered.

Vio dripped water in his mouth again and the boy groaned softly. “I’ll bet he’s someone important. Maybe he was on his way to the Temple Island to see the King.”

Krys laughed. “More likely he was just a scullion working on some merchant ship.”

Vio said nothing, just studied the boy. “His hair is sure cut nice for a scullion, and look at his nails.” The boy’s nails were well trimmed and Krys had to admit if the boy was a commoner he was a particularly vain one.

Tar Endid and the wagon arrived just before Kostek and Bnall entered the firelight, both tired from digging in the sand by hand. Vio stepped back and watched as they loaded the boy into the back of the wagon, then she climbed up next to Tar Kostek and Krys for the return trip to Sol.

Gwaynn woke two days later just before lunchtime. He found himself in a small room that held only a bed, a small end table and a cart with a pitcher of water on top. There was one window, a large one, along the south wall of the room. It was open and warm air flowed in carrying the smell of flowers and the sea. Gwaynn studied his surroundings. He was alone for the moment, but didn’t really mind. His thoughts were occupied with his recent past and it was nice to have a moment to try to absorb all that had happened to him. He had no idea how he had gotten to the room, the last thing he remembered was floating with Karl on the sea, and being extremely thirsty. As a matter fact, he was still thirsty now.

He tried to sit, but found he was too weak, so he dropped back onto the pillow, and waited. He passed the time by gazing out the window at the clouds moving across the clear blue sky. He waited for nearly a half an hour and tried to rise several times before he finally succeeding in hoisting himself to a sitting position. He was happy with his accomplishment, but did not know how he was going to reach the pitcher of water. He was still going over his plan when two people abruptly came into the room. An old man and young woman entered, both stopped short when they saw him. They appeared to be as surprised as he was by the sudden meeting.

“Excellent,” the old man said with a genuine smile. He walked over to Gwaynn, his back slightly hunched with age. “How do you feel this morning?”

“Thirsty,” Gwaynn answered in raspy voice.

“Yes, yes of course. Forgive me,” the man added and poured Gwaynn a tall glass of water. Gwaynn drank it in one breath and handed the glass back for more. The man obliged.

“I’m Pugg,” the man said by way of introduction. “Doctor.”

Gwaynn nodded but said nothing; he just continued to drink his water, this time a little more slowly.

“And this is Vio,” Pugg added, curious about the boy before him. “She was the one who found you…saved you actually. You would not have survived if she had not happened by.”

Gwaynn looked at the young woman. She smiled at him. He nodded but did not smile back. Pugg waited for the boy to introduce himself but was disappointed.

“Are you hungry?” the doctor finally asked.

Gwaynn thought about it a moment. “Yes, I’m famished,” he replied.

“Famished,” Pugg repeated. “Vio, could you tell Alynn to fix up something for…our guest. Say what is your name?”

Gwaynn hesitated for a moment, a hesitation that both Pugg and Vio noticed, but he could not think of a good reason not to tell them…at least his first name.

“Gwaynn,” he finally said.

“Please to meet you Gwaynn,” Pugg said smiling again.

Vio turned to go to the kitchens, but stopped at the door. “Nice to meet you Gwaynn,” she said, echoing Pugg’s thoughts.

Gwaynn was silent for a moment and she turned to go once more. “Nice to meet you both,” he answered. “And thank you,” he added. She smiled and left. Gwaynn finished with his glass of water and felt infinitely better. He held the glass out for more, and Pugg refilled it once again.

“How do you feel?” The doctor asked.

“Much better,” Gwaynn answered feeling stronger by the moment. He leaned over, fighting a brief dizzy spell and set the glass on the table near the bed. He sat back up slowly. His back felt tight and there was still a bit of pain from it when he moved. He put up a hand and reached around. His skin felt hot.

“You have a severe burn, but it is healing nicely. The pain should subside in another couple of days. How long were you in the water?”

Gwaynn tried to recall exactly how long, but he couldn’t really remember much of it, including how or when they ever reached land. “I’m not sure,” he finally answered.

“I don’t even remember getting to the beach.” Gwaynn struggled to remember and then it hit him. “Karl…where’s Karl?”

“Karl?” Pugg repeated though he suspected the boy was referring to his dead companion.

“He…he was my friend. He was with me when the ship went down in the storm. We floated on a raft together.”

The doctor hesitated for a moment, not wanting to give the boy the bad news while he was still so weak, but when he looked into his eyes he realized there would be no getting around this subject.

“We don’t know how long you were on the beach before Vio and Master Kostek happened by. You were barely alive, and frankly I’m surprised you are recovering so quickly,” he began. Gwaynn had aged immensely over that past week and immediately realized what was coming. His face must have betrayed his thoughts.

“I’m…I’m sorry. He was already dead when we found you. It was over before we had a chance.”

Gwaynn sat on the edge of the bed in silence, just looking at his hands. The doctor stood by him silently, just waiting. His patience paid off.

“He saved my life,” Gwaynn began softly. “More than once he saved my life. He saved it on the sea…I don’t even know how we reached the shore, the Captain said we were still at least a day from the islands, and that was on a ship. I remember being in the sea. I remember Karl finding the raft, and kicking for…maybe two or three days, but then I don’t remember anything. I don’t remember kicking anymore or coming ashore.”

Pugg took a deep breath. “Well your friend must have been alive then. I don’t believe either of you could survive the breakwater unconscious, so he must have helped you ashore. Plus you were found together, side by side.”

“He saved me in the sea, and he saved me…before,” Gwaynn said then slowly moved back and dropped down to a prone position. He was still there when Vio returned with a tray of food and some honeyed water.

“I didn’t know what you liked so I got you a little of everything,” she said smiling, oblivious to the mood in the room. She brought the tray over to Gwaynn and placed it across his midsection.

“Perhaps we should prop you up,” Pugg said and moved over and grabbed him by the arm. Vio moved to the other side and assisted him also. Gwaynn said nothing and allowed them to prop pillows behind him until he was fairly comfortable and in an upright position. He wasn’t sure he could eat and truly was not interested, at least not until he looked down at the tray of sweat meats, several cheeses, dates, grapes, and some dark berries with which he was unfamiliar. His stomach rumbled, and he plucked some cheese from the tray. He took a bite, enjoying the flavor and without thought he ate more and more until he was surprised to find the tray empty.

Pugg was already gone before he finished, but Vio had stayed around, talking about people Gwaynn didn’t know and things he could not relate to, but he didn’t mind. Her voice was pleasant enough and it kept him from thinking about other unpleasant things. When he had finished eating, Vio took the tray but made no move to leave and continued to tell him about daily life here on the island. Gwaynn just listened, taking an occasional drink of water. Soon, however, he grew sleepy.

“Vio,” he said, interrupting her. She looked up at him surprised, but happy he was finally talking. “Could you help me back down? I’m tired.”

“Yes, yes,” she answered, content to help in any way. She removed most of the pillows and placed one leg on the bed to get better leverage as she held Gwaynn’s shoulders and lowered him gently down.

“Thank you,” Gwaynn said only semi-conscious of her touch. He was surprised to find that he could barely keep his eyes open. He saw her smile but was asleep again before she left the room.

The next day nearly all of Gwaynn’s strength had returned. Food, water, and a bed to rest in did wonders for exhaustion, plus he was young and his body was strong. Although he spent the day entirely in bed on Pugg’s orders, by evening he was anxious to rise and have a look about. He knew he was strong enough. He felt fine, but the doctor insisted that another day of rest would be a benefit and Gwaynn was too grateful to argue with him. Vio had not come to visit and Gwaynn was surprised to find that he was thinking of her despite all the more important thoughts that should have occupied his mind.

Just before sundown the doctor knocked and entered with a tray of food and slightly chilled water. Gwaynn sat up quickly, as the door opened and could not keep the disappointment off his face at the arrival of the doctor. Pugg noticed and smiled.

“Vio is off training on the north end of the island. She’ll not return for several days.”

Gwaynn shrugged. “I’m feeling much better,” he said and set the tray aside and moved to the edge of the bed. At first he thought the doctor might try to stop him, but the man said nothing, just watched, as Gwaynn, his legs still red from the sun, pushed off and stood in his nightshirt. It was truly no effort and as he walked around the feel for his balance returned almost instantly. His legs felt strong. He felt normal again.

“Good,” Pugg said watching closely. “I would say by tomorrow you should be well enough to leave the infirmary.”

Gwaynn frowned and moved back to the bed. He pulled his linen blanket back over him and gathered the tray close and began to eat.

“Where will I go?” he asked worried again. The world, once a place of beauty and wonder, was now filled with enemies.

This time Pugg shrugged. “Well, that will be up to you, and perhaps Tar Amon.”

Master Amon. Gwaynn had heard of him. He was the High Tar of the Island and a legendary swordsman. Even the High King did not cross the High Tar of Noble Island.

Gwaynn ate silently wondering what he should do; where he should go, and what his fate would be. He had no worries about Amon betraying him to his enemies. All of the Temple Islands were neutral, even the High King rarely chose sides in a dispute, and then only in an effort to end the conflict. It had been nearly three generations since the Temple Knights took to the field in battle, unless what Karl had told him was true, that the Knights had aided the Deutzani and fought against his people and family. The Knights were a deadly force, and not one of the families wanted them to be unleashed. Gwaynn could scarce believe that his father would have done something so foolish as to antagonize the King and his Knights. The legendary Knights were too well trained, an unstoppable force against which no one wanted to be pitted. Even the threat of such deployment had been enough to stop many wars in the past. It was only a fool who would go against the High King and his Knights. His father was no fool. Then the thought finally hit him. Why did the High King allow the Deutzani to attack and occupy Massi lands and kill the Massi royal family? To these questions, Gwaynn had no answers, and now he did not have anyone he could even ask. His mind went round and round as he ate, but he found no solutions, and of the doctor he asked no questions.

Pugg waited until the boy had finished his meal, surprised at the quiet reserve he found in him. It was something rare in one so young. But then he already knew that this was no ordinary boy. He was uncommonly quiet and circumspect even for someone who had survived a shipwreck and lost friends. He spoke very little of himself and changed the subject at the first possible moment when he himself was the topic of conversation. That he was of gentle blood was no longer in question. His speech and manners clearly gave that away, and though the boy let very little pertinent information slip about his true identity, Pugg was beginning to suspect he knew. He would talk to Tar Amon tonight about his suspicions. If he was correct, such news would bring about a firestorm. What the Tar would do about it however, was anyone’s guess.

ǂ

Afton Sath moved quietly in the night, now very near to his goal. He had spent the last couple of days deftly avoiding not only Zani patrols but also any local folk who might inadvertently report his travels. He patiently waited on the edge of the Fultan estate watching the main house closely. The Fultan’s had a very successful ale business and were relatively wealthy because of it, though from the modest size of the estate their wealth was not overly apparent. Beth Fultan, had died four years back in childbirth, and never believed in flaunting their wealth. She was generous to those who were in need, and Thomas, her husband also embraced such sentiments. It made them both very popular with the local community. Normally the estate bustled, going about the business of creating the country’s best ale, but today the estate was unusually quiet throughout the afternoon and early evening. Sath spotted only a minimal number of employed workers on site and most of them had left early in the day. From his previous visits, he knew that the Fultan’s also kept a minimal house staff, which if he remembered correctly consisted of one cook, a maid and her young daughter, plus Wellman, an old houseman who had been with Beth’s family for decades. The rest of the family consisted of Samantha, Thomas’ eldest at sixteen, perhaps seventeen, Arabelle, who Sath thought was about eleven, and the baby, a four year old named Karly, but everyone called her Beth after her mother who had died giving her life.

On occasions throughout the afternoon Sath caught sight of the two younger girls, but had seen nothing of Thomas or Samantha. Once the sun was completely down, but before it was utterly dark, he hopped the wooden rail fence and moved carefully toward the main house. He eased his way toward the back, covering his approach with the barn, and then a small tool shed that sat adjacent to the southeastern corner of the house. Carefully, quietly, he made his way past the shed and along the back wall of the main house and had nearly reached the door when Wellman opened it and stepped out into the night.

Sath maneuvered silently behind him. “Wellman,” he whispered, but the old man apparently did not hear because he did not react at all.

“Wellman,” Sath said louder, and the old man quickly stood straighter and looked about.

“Who?”

“It’s me. Afton Sath.”

Wellman smiled and stepped closer. “So it is,” he said and nodded.

“Is it safe here….now?” Sath asked and Wellman frowned.

“There are no Zani here, if that’s what you mean,” Wellman answered then without a word headed back to the house. “Patrols have come and gone, searched a bit, but left us well enough alone so far. They moved on farther to the south, but did help themselves to our reserves of ale.”

“That’s good,” Sath answered, perhaps a well ranking Deutzani knew of the ale brewed by Thomas Fultan, if so, it might keep him and his family safe.

“Come in, come in. Master Thomas will want to see you,” Wellman added holding the door open for Sath, who stepped inside. He entered the kitchen area, which was large and at the moment unused, though there was a bright fire burning in the large pit on the northern wall. “Sit,” the old man added, motioning to the sturdy wooded table and chairs across from the fire. “I will fetch Master Thomas.”

Sath sat, relishing the warmth of the kitchen, and just the fact of being indoors after nearly three full days in the elements. He didn’t have long to wait before a squeal sounded in the hall and bounding around a corner came Beth, running as fast as she could. She was followed closely by Samantha. The little one took no notice of Afton’s presence and continued her run, glancing back to see if her older sister was still following. Sam, however, had come up short when she spotted the stranger sitting at the table. It took her several moments before she recognized the haggard looking man before her.

“Uncle?” she asked as if trying to convince herself. Sath smiled.

“Samantha, you are growing into a truly lovely young woman,” he said, meaning it. She was tall, with a thin willowy frame. Her nose was maybe a bit too wide and her mouth a bit too large, but she had a full head of long, thick russet brown hair. It was her shining feature and framed the flawless white skin of her face perfectly. But what truly caught his attention were her bright, almost luminous, green eyes, which now sparkled with friendliness. Sath immediately worried that such beauty was not an asset in a conquered country and he feared that Samantha would grow to rue her looks before all was put right once more.

“Uncle!” Beth yelled finally spotting the old man sitting in the kitchen. She had stopped running immediately after discovering she was no longer being chased. She approached her Uncle confidently as Samantha moved forward and hugged Sath.

“You escaped,” Samantha stated in disbelief. “We heard that Solarii had fallen, that the King and all…that everyone close to the royal family had been killed.”

“Uncle,” Beth repeated and grabbed hold of Sath dirty sleeve. She tugged at it incessantly not willing to be ignored. Sath looked down at her and grinned.

“Well hello little Beth,” he said wanting to pick her up, but unable to trust his strength just yet. He had gone several days without food now and he was no longer young. He satisfied himself by sitting down again and pulling her into a loose embrace.

Beth endured the hug, then stepped back wrinkling her nose at his smell. “Would you like some sugared biscuits?” she asked.

“Beth!” Samantha said loudly.

“I would, I would,” Sath answered at the same moment, smiling.

“Me too, but we don’t have any,” Beth answered holding her hands up, showing him they were empty.

Sath sat silent, stunned for a long moment, then broke into a chuckle.

“It is a new trick of hers,” a voice said from the door, and Sath looked up to see Thomas standing there. Their eyes met, sharing their danger and worry.

“Sam, take Beth to bed and send Murl in here. We have a guest who is hungry.”

Samantha, though she wanted to stay more than anything at the moment, scooped up her sister and left the room without a word.

“I thought Sam was Elizabeth at first,” Sath said when she’d gone.

Thomas frowned, a look of pride and hurt mixed together on his face. “At times I become confused myself,” he answered and then his frown deepened. “You can not stay,” he added, and sat next to Sath. He reached out and took Sath’s left hand in his, to try to soften his words.

“I know,” Sath answered. “I’m only planning on a few days and then I will head for Koshka.”

“Koshka?”

Sath nodded. “It is close enough to the mountains for escape if need be, and far enough from the Scar Ridge that it is not likely to get much notice from the Zani. If you are to send any of our passing soldiers to find me, send them there.”

Thomas nodded then gave a forced smile. “I’m glad you came. Tell me everything,” Thomas said as Murl, the best cook in three counties entered, and greeted the former Weapons Master of Massi.

IV

Gwaynn was dressing in clothes given to him by the doctor when the High Tar of Noble Island entered the room.

“Ah, you are awake already. That is good. I am Amon. I would like to walk with you,” he said standing before Gwaynn, who studied him silently. The High Tar was old, but not ancient. He had long silvery hair, tied behind him in a single tail, as was the style of the Tars. He was not overly tall, but neither was he short. His skin was deeply tanned and had some wrinkles, but there was evidence of muscle beneath the skin, though he looked neither quick nor strong. His bright crystal blue eyes were the only feature even remarkable about him; otherwise he looked like any number of men past their prime and heading quickly toward old age.

Gwaynn said nothing, suddenly nervous, but the High Tar waited patiently for him to finish dressing.

“You are feeling better?” Amon asked as he led the way of out of the room. Gwaynn looked about curiously. He arrived at the infirmary unconscious and had not left the room since his arrival. He was surprised to find that the door to his room opened into a much larger one, containing a great number of beds, two of which were currently occupied by young men, both of whom stared at Gwaynn with curiosity. Amon paid them no mind and silently led Gwaynn across the room and out a set of double doors.

They stepped outside and into the beginning of a bright and beautiful day. Gwaynn blinked at the sunshine, not accustomed to its’ intensity after nearly a week indoors. Amon led him down a manicured path of small pebbles, and silently let the boy study his current surroundings. There were numerous buildings in the immediate area, most in the opposite direction from which they were heading. All of them were made of stone, and newly white washed. Most were smaller than the infirmary, but one was much grander. It was on the far side of the courtyard, and was several stories tall. Four mighty columns supported the portico, and carved into the eave, near the top were several statues of what Gwaynn took to be past Masters.

Amon, however, was leading him away from the courtyard. They headed down a steep incline toward the beach and the sea beyond. Now, without the chasing Zani, or the threatening storm, the Inland Sea was beautiful beyond words. The water was calm; a clear blue-green with small waves gently breaking on the white sands below. The sea seemed so tranquil that Gwaynn found it hard to believe that just a week ago, this same sea was trying desperately to kill him.

“You are feeling better?” Amon asked once more when they reached the sand. They walked toward the water and then turned south.

Gwaynn suddenly realized that the High Tar had already asked him this question once, and that he had not answered. He felt his face grow hot.

“Yes…yes I’m feeling much better. Thank you,” Gwaynn answered.

“I am glad,” Amon replied. They walked a good distance in silence, Gwaynn just waiting for the Tar to speak once more. Amon smiled after a bit. Pugg was correct. The boy was very reserved.

“You have been with us over a week now,” Amon began, and Gwaynn became suddenly alert. “But you are healing rapidly. It will soon be time for you to go.”

Again Gwaynn said nothing. His mind was buzzing with the possibilities of where he would go, what he would do. He had no idea what would become of him. He was sure that if he left the Temple Islands the Zani would hunt him down, and eventually find him. He had to make sure that did not happen until he was ready to be found.

“I can not stay then?” Gwaynn asked.

“Stay?” Amon asked.

“Yes,” Gwaynn replied.

Tar Amon shook his head. “In order to attend the Island you must have been invited and your presence approved by the High King.”

Gwaynn was silent for a time while they walked along the water line, weaving slightly so that they came higher up the beach when a wave threatened to soak their feet. “Perhaps I can serve, help with the livestock, maintenance, anything?”

“Our support personnel are actually part of families that have been on the Island for countless generations,” Amon began. “It would be highly irregular to admit someone from the outside, highly irregular indeed.”

“An exception could be made though?” Gwaynn asked hopefully.

“There are always exceptions,” Amon answered with a smile. “But for what reason? Would it be made just to save a fisherman’s son from the drudgery of his former life?”

Gwaynn said nothing.

“You have not told us anything about who you are,” Amon observed. “Should an exception be made for an unknown?”

Gwaynn thought about this for such a long time that Amon began to believe that the boy would indeed stay silent.

“It may be dangerous for you to know who I am,” Gwaynn finally answered, impressing the High Tar. ‘Indeed it could be dangerous,’ Amon thoughtfully agreed.

“It is a very dangerous time,” the Tar replied as they continued down the beach. “And there is risk for us in either case is there not?”

Gwaynn still admitted nothing; in his mind admitting who he was increased his own danger many times over.

“Prince Gwaynn was said to have escaped the Deutzani attack on the Massi,” Tar Amon stated in an even tone. “King Arsinol Deutzani was said to be livid, even killing several of those in charge of the offensive.”

Gwaynn’s head jerked up and looked at the High Master of the Island. Amon held his hands up, palms out, hoping to calm the boy. “Who was killed?” Gwaynn asked and actually took a menacing step toward the Tar, who was not intimidated.

Amon shrugged at the question. “A few lieutenants, but no one of any real importance. King Arsinol cannot afford to give anyone of real value up at this time.”

“Why? Will the High King intervene once more?” Gwaynn said his voice rising in anger.

Amon frowned. Could it be possible that the boy was aware of the High King’s rash decision? If so the boy may indeed have to die, otherwise chaos could be charging down on them all. As he silently studied the determined young man, Amon realized that the boy’s death would not come at his hands, or any Master under him. “What do you mean by that remark?”

“The Zani could not have defeated my father so easily without the help of the High King and his Temple Knights,” Gwaynn stated his voice low and calm.

“So you admit to being Prince Gwaynn Massi.”

Gwaynn sighed and nodded. The High Tar knew in any case. “The High King aided the Zani,” he accused once more.

“Perhaps,” Amon said evenly. “Perhaps the Deutzani just used surprise and superior tactics?”

“The Temple Knights were there,” Gwaynn insisted.

“You know this for fact?”

Gwaynn shook his head positively. “Yes.”

Amon sighed. “Yes, the Temple Knights were among the Deutzani,” Amon admitted, again wondering why the High King would be so foolish.

“Why would the High King help the Zani?”

“Yes, why indeed,” Amon wondered once more. “The High King, of course, is not aware of our knowledge in his little deception….nor of yours.”

“Little deception?” Gwaynn asked, suddenly very angry.

Tar Amon bowed to him. “My apologies. I have misspoken.”

They walked for nearly a mile in silence then Amon led them to a large piece of driftwood well up on the beach away from the ever-pounding surf. He sat and invited Gwaynn to do likewise, but the boy stubbornly remained standing for a time, then he realized how tired he was and joined the older man.

“We are very interested in knowing just why the High King would jeopardize his rule and upset the delicate balance of the High Families,” Amon finally said, suddenly looking much older to Gwaynn than he had earlier.

Gwaynn had no answers for him.

“You have become a very great danger to not only the Deutzani, but to the High King himself,” Amon finally stated. “You are right to keep your identity close. Let no one else know. I would call you Karl if I could, but too many people here already know you as Gwaynn.”

Gwaynn cursed to himself. He should have thought to use a different name, but still Gwaynn was not all that uncommon, perhaps he could make it work.

“We have students from all the High Families, including I believe two from the Massi,” Amon explained, and Gwaynn’s heart fell. He had completely forgotten about the two Massi students here. Krys was the name of one. He was older, his studies near completion, Gwaynn thought. The other was a young girl, only eleven, in her first year, but he struggled to remember her name. The girl he had never met, but Krys had come to the castle several times in the last few years, and Gwaynn remembered him well. He was a fantastic swordsman, tall, blonde and very handsome. Gwynn was smitten with him, pretty as he was. Yes, Krys of the Massi was sure to recognize him.

Amon could easily read the dismay on the boy’s face, and smiled. He had a very quick mind, but he would have to learn to keep his thoughts from forming on his face so readily.

“Master Krys was one of those that found you on the beach. He’s told no one but me and I have given him strict instructions to hold his tongue, even though I think such instructions were unnecessary. Both he and Lady Bethany are dismayed by the turn of events, but as yet there has been no trouble between them and the three Deutzani students.”

“There are Deutzani here?” Gwaynn asked intensely, abruptly standing.

Tar Amon turned a hard look on the boy and Gwaynn suddenly realized that this man was Tar of all Tars, and he could now see why in the old man’s eyes. “If you are to stay, there will be no trouble. We, on the Noble Island, are from all families. The students here had nothing to do with the attack on your country, and will not be subject to any repercussions. Am I clear?”

Gwaynn held the High Tar’s eyes. “Yes Sir,” he answered.

“Good,” Amon said, somehow knowing he could believe the boy standing in front of him. “If you wish you may stay on the Island for a time. Becoming a student, of course, is out of the question, but I will set you up to serve Tar Kostek’s quarter.”

A great weight suddenly lifted from Gwaynn’s shoulders, and he could not help but smile at the Old Tar before him. Amon smiled back. “You will report to Leek. His family has been in charge of that quarter for nearly three hundred years. He is expecting you, a distant cousin of the family.”

“Thank you,” Gwaynn said, meaning it.

Amon nodded. “Keep to yourself, attract no attention and you should be able to live reasonably well.”

Gwaynn nodded.

“So, we should be getting back,” Amon said and started to rise. He stopped as Gwaynn stepped forward and took hold of his arm.

“I would like to know if you discover anything about the High King’s motives,” he said, the intense look back on his young face, and it was Amon’s turn to nod, wondering how they had overlooked this boy. Royalty rarely came to them on the islands, but Gwaynn was the youngest of three male children born to the Massi. The High King would have approved such a proposal Amon was sure. It was a shame.

They began their walk back in silence, but after a short way Gwaynn turned to him. “I was wondering if Executioners ever visit Noble Island.”

ǂ

Leek was an old man, a grandfather, and a quiet man. He took to Gwaynn almost immediately, and he was thankful for the help in his quarter. He had three sons himself, but only one, Lane, the eldest, had chosen to stay on the island. Another was aboard the trading vessel Ari Baan, which came to port nearly every year, and his youngest was a merchant in Caul, a port city in Cassinni. Leek’s lone daughter did not survive childhood, but Lane and his wife Shari gave him four granddaughters. Their ages ran between six and seventeen years old, so female help around the quarter was not a problem.

For his part, Gwaynn was surprised to find that he actually liked the physical labor, working around the quarter with Leek and Lane. Both were reserved men, but hard working and patiently showed Gwaynn how to perform all manner of odd jobs from replacing tiles on the roof of the dormitory, to fashioning a hinge for the broken shutter on one of the kitchen windows. He learned to tend the garden, and to feed the livestock under the families care. He found he loved to work outside, and felt a great sense of accomplishment at the end of nearly every day. He was especially proud of the hinge he helped to fashion, and even went so far as to work on several additional hinges in his spare time. So they would have spares, he told Leek, who agree it was a sensible course.

Gwaynn worked hard and spent nearly all of his free time exploring the island. Noble Island was nearly ten miles wide and just over fifty miles long. It was the second largest of the Temple Islands, second only to King’s Island. The island was distinctly shaped, low, flat, sandy land on the western side, but as you headed eastward the land rose higher and higher, became heavily forested and finally culminated in the magnificent Mount Erato, on the extreme eastern end. From a great distance, when the island was very near the horizon, it looked like a great boot sitting on the water, which explained why nearly all of the local fishermen and sailing merchant men referred to it as Boot Island, though never when they might be overheard by a Tar.

The flat sandy western side of the island housed the school, and was split into quarters, each overseen by a local family, and run independently by a single Tar. They were the Mele, Mneme, Aoede, and Clio quarters, but why they were named such was lost in the ancient history of the island. Leek and his family were assigned to the Mele quarter, and had been associated with the group for over ten generations now. Master Amon himself had come out of the Mele quarter, which was a great source of pride for Leek and his family.

Each quarter contained eight students with a new student arriving each year and another one graduating every year. The number of students was always the same, and had been for over four hundred years. The Mele were located on the extreme south of the island. The main hall, adjacent to where Leek and his family lived, was the gathering place for all the students at the end of the day. There they would eat, visit and entertain themselves. It was surrounded by numerous out buildings including four which constituted the students quarters, two students to a building. Gwaynn slept in the loft of the Leek family house, which had a small window that overlooked the walkway leading up to the main hall.

For nearly a month, Gwaynn was quite content, though never truly happy. His work distracted him sufficiently so that he did not dwell on his recent past, and he absolutely loved the isolation of exploring the island in his free time. He traipsed all over the western half of the island going from the southern port town of Hymnia to Euter, the northern port town and back in a single day, twenty miles round trip. Both towns were small; just over a hundred inhabitants lived in each, and were kept small by the Island’s council who had to approve any and all new citizens. Most applicants were encouraged to find livelihood elsewhere, but the towns were necessary to the life of the school so were tolerated, but strictly segregated. Any violation of this separation by the students or the townspeople was dealt with harshly. Students could be expelled from the school and townspeople could be banished. Such rulings had occurred in the past, but they were extremely rare. Gwaynn, however, was not a student, but part of a serving family and thus could safely go from town to school without any repercussions. In fact, the only area of the island off limits to him was Erato, the extreme eastern side of the island, where the old Masters lived in meditative isolation on the surrounding slopes of the dormant volcano.

Of course his travels eventually led him deep into the forests of central Noble, but he never had the time to go any farther. But this was just as well, since to go any farther was forbidden. It was said that Tar Nev lived and practiced on the slopes of Mount Erato. Tar Nev was a legend both on and off Noble Island. He once was the Weapons Master to the High King himself; a Tar of exceptional ability, and it was claimed, the best swordsman the island had ever created. One day, without explanation Tar Nev left the service of the High King and returned to Noble Island. Such a thing had never happened before and it was thought that the King may unleash the Knights on the masters of Noble

Island in order to find and kill the disloyal Tar, but nothing of the kind happened, fueling Tar Nev’s legend even more.

Gwaynn had no desire to see the old Tar, or meet him; he just enjoyed the freedom and isolation of his long hikes. For many weeks he was satisfied with the arrangement he’d made with Tar Amon, but one windy afternoon, after his chores were completed, he happened across Vio, Krys, Tam and B’dall practicing with their katas on the beach. A kata was a baton about three feet in length and made of wood; each student wielded a pair, one in each hand, and used them with mind numbing skill.

The four students were down close to the water, where the sand was mostly level and wet. Gwaynn, coming from inland was above them, high on a grassy dune. He stopped immediately and watched them practice moves so intricate that it would take years to master just one. He dropped to his knees, fascinated. Vio worked with Tam, another girl, even younger, while Krys was paired off with B’dall. Each pair moved with grace, skill and speed, but for some reason Gwaynn’s attention kept returning to Vio. She moved like no one he knew, not even Master Sath could have matched her grace. She moved with such ease, such elegance, that it looked to Gwaynn as if she were made of liquid, flowing this way and then that to counter an attack or initiate one. For a while, Tam held her own, but then Vio moved past and through her defenses. Once Tam was touched, they would stop and Vio would talk to the younger student, Gwaynn guessed it was to give some instruction, and then they would return to their original positions and start over with their forms.

They practiced for several hours until the sun was low on the horizon, while Gwaynn remained riveted in place, watching every move the students made very closely. Back home, in Massi, Master Sath was in charge of his training, and until now Gwaynn thought he could match his own skill against anyone his age. Of course, he knew about the Temple Island Weapons Masters, but had never seen any his age at work. Master Sath was the only graduate Gwaynn had ever met from the islands. It was growing dark when the student finished their practice, but Gwaynn remained as the four students stripped and waded out into the sea to cool off.

Gwaynn frowned, not sure he ever wanted to swim in the sea again. But they didn’t swim long, and were soon out and dressed. They headed off in the direction of the hall, but Gwaynn stayed on the dune until late into the night, thinking.

By the next morning he had made up his mind to ask Tar Kostek if he could at least practice with the other students even if he could not formally train with them. He worked with Lane all morning in the bean fields south of the hall, but they finished up early in the afternoon, ate and when Gwaynn was done for the day he took a seat in the shade of the hall to wait for the students to return from their training.

Leek found him there soon after. “Come Lad, Prolly will need your help as well,” the old man said in his slow, relaxed style.

Gwaynn was annoyed for a moment but it past quickly. Reluctantly he climbed to his feet and followed Leek off toward the barns.

“Prolly?”

“Yep, her water broke not fifteen minutes ago. Karin is with her now, but may need some help with the birthin.”

Karin was Lane and Shari’s eldest daughter. Gwaynn still had no idea who Prolly might be, but he followed Leek into the barn and soon found out that it was one of the draft horses. Prolly was down, lying mostly on her side but her head was up and her tail swishing back and forth in an almost drowsy manner. Karin was kneeling at Prolly’s south end, her left hand hidden up inside the horse.

Gwaynn groaned when he saw her.

Karin grimaced at him. “You here to take over?”

He grinned at her sheepishly, and then gave a startled look over at Leek.

“Er…I hope not,” he answered, looking to the older man for rescue.

“You just watch, and fetch anything we need,” Leek told him, amused by the lad’s obvious relief.

“How’s the foal?” Leek asked his granddaughter. The girl moved her hand about inside the horse and then nodded.

“Coming head first and nearly here already,” she said, and glanced over at Gwaynn.

“Could you bring another lantern?” she asked. Gwaynn hurried to obey, surprised to find that he was fascinated by the impending birth…disgusted, but fascinated. He rushed back, but despite Karin’s prediction, the foal did not come for nearly three hours. And when it did it took the three of them to pull it, covered in slime and blood, out of Prolly. The sight of the blood gushing from the womb tempered Gwaynn’s mood, so that he did not smile with the others as the long legged colt took its first shaky steps to its mother.

“Would you like to name him?” Karin said, oblivious to the change in Gwaynn’s mood.

Gwaynn shook his head. “Him?” he asked, thinking for some reason the colt should have been female.

“Well, yes it’s a him,” Karin answered as if it was obvious. “Would you like to name him?” She asked again.

Leek cleared his throat but said nothing. He had noticed the stricken look on Gwaynn’s face as he tried to wipe the blood from his hands. The boy had been through something, that was plain, but he decided against saying anything. It was against the old man’s nature to push, knowing that everything would come around in time.

Gwaynn shook his head again, and started to walk out, wanting to head to the water pump and clean the blood from his hands.

“Ah, come on, name it,” Karin insisted. Gwaynn stopped at the stall door. At the moment he could only think of one name, Navarra, but if they named the colt that he might have to kill it.

“I can’t think of a name,” Gwaynn said and made to leave.

“Nothing, not one, comes to mind,” she asked, still playing, unable to understand the boy’s reticence. Gwaynn shook his head but still hesitated at the door of the stall and then a name came to him.

“I can think of one,” he finally said and smiled very briefly. Karin smiled back at him.

“I like it when you smile,” she said lightly. “You should do it more.”

The smile fell from his face, which was not what Karin had intended, and her face reddened.

“I’m sorry,” she blurted, not understanding all the emotions going through Gwaynn.

“Let the lad be,” Leek finally said, trying in his own way to come to her aid.

But Gwaynn waved him off. “I’m fine,” he said. “I think we should name him Karl,” he added and despite himself smiled again. He wondered what the big man would say if he knew a horse was named after him. Well, it was a draft horse, so Karl probably would have thought the name a good one.

With all the excitement over the coming of the new colt, it wasn’t until late the next day that Gwaynn cornered Tar Kostek as he was leaving the hall for his own quarters.

“Leek tells me you helped deliver a new colt?” Kostek said as the boy rushed out to meet him.

Gwaynn nodded, brushing the question aside.

“He also tells me you’re working hard. That is good to hear,” the Tar added as he continued to walk.

“Master…” Gwaynn began haltingly, but then decided it was best just to get his question out in the open. “I was wondering if it might not be possible to practice with the students.”

Tar Kostek stopped walking and turned to stare at the boy. Gwaynn held up his hands. “I understand that I can not train with them, but what of practicing. It might do them good to have another person to work with, and I know I could benefit them in some ways,” he said hurriedly, trying to make his entire point before it was summarily rejected.

“Practice with them?” Kostek repeated his voice unconsciously harsh, but his mind played with the idea.

“Just practice…not training,” Gwaynn added, trying to create a distinction between the two with his voice alone, though most of his hope was already beginning to fade.

Tar Kostek stood where he was for what seemed a very long time to Gwaynn. The Tar said nothing, just stood frozen, looking off, out into the night. Finally he started, and looked back down at Gwaynn.

“I’m not sure,” he said slowly. “Let me put it to Tar Amon, and see what he thinks of the idea.”

Gwaynn couldn’t help but let out a loud sigh of relief; his dreams were still alive and intact. Kostek eyed the boy for another moment longer and then continued to his own cabin. “Practice must not interfere with your duties to Leek,” he shouted back without turning around.

ǂ

Tar Navarra spun and struck, bringing his wooden kata down upon the Deutzani soldier’s left forearm with enough force that the man dropped his weapon, which clattered on the stone floor. Navarra followed it up with a kick to the face for good measure then with practiced ease he turned on the other two soldiers who were his sparring partners by default rather than choice.

Both King Arsinol and his advisor Ja Brude watched with interest, Arsinol from the former throne chair of the Massi, and Ja, one level lower and in a much less ornate chair. Arsinol loved the throne room. It was large, nearly fifty paces across and double that in length, and the ceiling was a full three stories above them. There were three enormous fireplaces, the largest directly behind the King and one on each of the longer walls. Hanging on the walls, covering nearly every inch of space, were large intricately woven tapestries that were both beautiful and functional, as insulation. It was a room fit for a King…a King of two countries.

Navarra moved between the two remaining soldiers, a wolf among lambs. He toyed with them, showing off his skill and though his King believed he could control the man, Navarra made Ja very nervous. The man was too deadly and enjoyed dealing out death a little too readily for Ja’s peace of mind. He watched as Navarra quickly dispatched his other two opponents. It was neatly done, though the Executioner still grimaced a few times when he had to block strong blows with his right arm. He was still feeling pain and not yet fully recovered from his recent injury.

With two of the soldiers still unconscious on the floor, Navarra wiped his brow and joined the King on the platform. He sat without being asked, without a bow of respect. Ja caught the slight but said nothing. King Arsinol, however, appeared not to have noticed.

“Your health is improving rapidly,” Arsinol commented. “I will want you to begin hunting for the prince soon.”

Navarra shrugged. “He is dead. Where do you suggest I search the bottom of the Inland Sea?”

The King frowned, disliking the man’s tone, but knowing the Executioner was still needed, and still deadly. Arsinol would never forget how easily Navarra had killed his former Weapons Master a few years prior. The Executioner had played with the man before finally slicing open his lower abdomen.

“I want to see a body. I want proof,” Arsinol finally answered.

“The people of Massi would be easier to control if there was proof to the end of the royal line,” Ja chimed in.

“I control them easily enough,” Navarra answered as if bored, and slung one leg over the arm of the chair in which he now rested. “Speaking of royal line, I suppose congratulations are in order.”

“Killing them is different from controlling them,” the King retorted, but smiled, thinking of his daughter’s upcoming nuptials to the High King. It was finally coming to pass, after years of planning. And though he had many strong, ambitious sons, it was ironic that it would be his youngest daughter who would lead him to the highest throne in the land. Ironic maybe, but not surprising, Audra was such a beauty. The High King Mastoc was smitten with her from the first time he set eyes on her, though the girl had not yet reach the age of twelve at the time. Ja Brude was the first to notice the lust in the old King’s eyes, and together they had played it very shrewdly. The two of them had dangled Audra before the King at every opportunity, and like a large fat pike, they had finally landed him, earning the Kingdom of Massi in the process.  Even now it was hard to believe that the old King finally agreed, and that he, Arsinol Deutzani, would soon be “father” to the High King and then, in time, grandfather to the future High King. It mattered not to either of them that Audra who was now fourteen was nearly thirty years junior to her betrothed. She would be queen of the land, and that was indeed a fair trade for happiness. Arsinol turned his attention back to Navarra who was sipping wine and eyeing one of the men on the ground as he slowly came around.

“Let your spies find the boy then, and if they do I will crush all hope in the Massi people,” the Executioner said with a smile, “meanwhile I will begin to hunt the Weapons Master who helped him escape, this Afton Sath. He will be worth hunting, and killing.”

Arsinol had only a minor interest in catching the former Massi Weapons Master, who was an old man and would not live long in any case. But it was true that the man could become a rally point for the people and thus a threat, however slight.

“You hunt your Weapons Master then,” the King muttered. “You will be free until I return from the marriage festivities. But when my spies find the boy…who is alive… you will come and finish the job.”

Navarra smiled, rising from his chair “But of course M’lord,” he answered and left the room without being dismissed.

V

“It’s your quarter, so the final decision belongs to you,” Tar Amon told Kostek early the next morning. The day was starting off near perfect, not a cloud in the sky, warm but with a nice westerly breeze blowing in from the sea. Mornings were by far the best time of the day, Amon thought to himself as his colleague wrestled with the problem before them.

“But you agree that it is a good idea?” Kostek asked looking for help.

Amon shrugged. “Good for the boy, certainly. He will need all the help he can get if he is to survive. Good for your students may be another matter.”

“How so?”

“Gwaynn is at least fifteen, and while he’s sure to have had some training he will be no better than another first year, probably worse. Tam has only been here three months and she may have already surpassed him in skill,” Amon asserted. “Will practicing with someone so beneath their skill level truly improve your other students, or will it just distract them?”

“Yes, but remember he has been trained by Afton Sath,” Kostek argued, knowing that the old Massi Weapons Master was seriously considered for Tar rank upon his graduation.

“Hmm, yes. In his time, Master Sath was certainly the best of the families Weapons Masters,” Amon answered. “But remember he is now well passed his prime.”

“I see your point,” Kostek commented. “I would like to work with Gwaynn, late in the evenings after the day is over, just to see his skill level and then decide.”

Amon smiled. “That’s cutting a fine line. We are only supposed to train students sanctioned by the High King.”

Now it was Kostek’s turn to smile. “Well, in a way it was the High King who put Gwaynn here. Without his involvement with the Deutzani the boy would undoubtedly still be home in Solarii in his bed.”

Amon laughed. “Yes, that is most definitely true. All right, work with the boy. Test the level of his skill. I am sure he will be determined, but whether he has talent or not, we shall have to see.”

Tar Kostek bowed and as he left he couldn’t help wondering just what he had gotten himself into.

Two days went by before Kostek was able to pull the boy aside, but he caught up with Gwaynn one evening while he was finishing his dinner with Lane, Shari, and their four daughters. Kostek knocked and waited but when no one came to the door he let himself in; the entire family was talking and laughing loudly and they were unaware of his presence in the far room. The family chatter was animated and cheerful though Gwaynn, as always, was reserved. It was obvious to the Tar though, that the boy was enjoying the banter of his foster family and they seemed to be at ease with his presence. Kostek was gratified that Gwaynn appeared to be fitting in so well.

“I do not,” Mille protested loudly, turning red as she did so. She was the third daughter. She sported long blonde hair and deep indigo eyes, eyes which she kept riveted on Gwaynn as much as possible. A habit two of her sisters noticed. At the moment they were giving Mille grief for it, much to her and Gwaynn’s discomfort. The entire family fell silent the moment Tar Kostek entered the kitchen.

“I beg your pardon for the interruption,” Kostek said, aware of the anxiety he was causing. He was the master of the quarter, and this family served him and his students. Natural lines were drawn. It was as rare for him to visit as it was for anyone of the Leek family to present themselves in his drawing room in the evening. They were at different social levels and each in their own way respected the other’s privacy.

Lane jumped to his feet. “Not at all, join us,” he said motioning for Kostek to take a seat. Clearly everyone was uncomfortable with this idea, but good manners insisted on the invitation.

“No, no,” Kostek said holding up a hand and gesturing for the women to remain seated. “Gwaynn, I would like to have a word with you.”

Gwaynn looked about as he slowly rose to his feet. All the girls were smiling at him, especially Mille, as was her mother Shari. Lane and Leek just nodded to him. Kostek led him out of the room and into the night.

“Forgive me for interrupting your dinner,” Kostek began as they slowly walked toward his own quarters.

Gwaynn shrugged. “We were finished with the meal,” he explained, not daring to hope that this was about his practicing with the other students. He didn’t have long to find out.

“Tar Amon has agreed to let you “practice” with the other students,” Kostek explained and immediately Gwaynn’s heart soared, and his face broke into a wide smile. Kostek held up a hand in an attempt to curb the boy’s enthusiasm.

“However, it is my responsibility to train these students,” he began and Gwaynn’s smile began to falter. “Training to be a Master of Arms is demanding enough without any distractions, and I will not have their training impeded by anyone…even you Gwaynn.”

The boy sagged before Kostek’s eyes, and his head was down so that he could not see the smile on the Tar’s face. “If I allow someone of limited ability to work with my students do you think that person would enhance their training or impede it?”

Gwaynn made no reply.

“Therefore you will practice with me, until I deem you proficient enough to work with some of the others.” Kostek watched as the statement sunk in. The boy’s head suddenly came up, his eyes bright. Kostek smiled. “Your first lesson will be tomorrow, seven in the evening. Meet me at my quarters.”

For Gwaynn, the next day seemed to drag on for an eternity, even though Leek kept him busy most of the morning collecting honey from the beehives located maybe a quarter of a mile from the hall. There were twenty hives in all, which constituted all of the bees on the island. Leek was very proud of them and was happy to share the honey with the other quarters, and was all the more popular for it.

While gathering the honey, Leek himself wore no protection at all, but he allowed Gwaynn to don a protective mask and pair of thick gloves. He showed Gwaynn how to calm the bees with a smoker and then gently remove the slats on which the bees formed their combs. The older man stressed slow, even movements, so as not to alarm the bees. Gwaynn watched as Leek extracted the first batch of honey with practiced ease.

“Most importantly, don’t panic,” Leek said as he watched Gwaynn remove a slat. “They’ll not sting you if you don’t panic…well mostly they won’t, every now and then you may get a rascal that will sting ya for no good reason, but mostly they’re as gentle as a lamb.”

Gwaynn was a bit nervous, especially the first time a number of bees landed on his unprotected arms, but they soon flew off without hurting him and his confidence grew. By the time they finished collecting Gwaynn was sure they would have enough honey to last them the entire month. That evening at supper, however, they all had honey on fresh made biscuits. Gwaynn ate more than his fair share, but no one seemed to mind and Leek even winked at him, proud of his honey. Finally, though, supper was over and Gwaynn excused himself, then without another word headed outside and over to Tar Kostek’s residence.

Gwaynn knocked softly but Kostek opened the door almost immediately and then motioned for Gwaynn to enter. Gwaynn moved past him, but Kostek paused at the door for a moment, checking to see if they were being observed. He spotted no obvious onlookers, and so he quickly closed the door.

Gwaynn moved inside a few feet, surprised at the large open space that dominated the interior. In fact, the entire dwelling was visible from the door and only consisted of three distinct areas. The largest area was obviously open for sparring, the floor was well padded and the walls around the room bristled with many different kinds of weapons. There were no windows, but a large fireplace did run along the north wall. There was another, smaller fireplace on the south wall, in what was obviously the kitchen. There were two chairs and an undersized table near the smaller fireplace, and a number of pots and pans hung from the low ceiling and walls. Directly above the kitchen was a loft, where Gwaynn could just make out a bed, with one lantern perched on a bedside table. Except for the many weapons, the place was very sparse.

Without a word Kostek moved from the door and from the wall took down two practice katas and tossed them to his new student. Gwaynn snatched them out of the air and checked them for weight and balance. Tar Kostek moved farther into the room and collected his own katas where they hung next to the fireplace.

“Master Sath taught you to use these I presume?” Kostek asked, and took up the “on guard” position.

“Yes, though I was not the most driven student at the time,” Gwaynn admitted and took up his place across from his new teacher.

“Well, let us see…” Kostek began, but stopped as Gwaynn attacked. It was a basic attack move that the Tar countered easily, but Gwaynn was nonplussed and smoothly moved into another attack, this one only a bit more sophisticated. Kostek turned it away also. Gwaynn kept coming however, and Kostek decided to let him. Effortlessly he blocked every move, never attacking himself, wanting instead to see just how far the boy could go. To his credit, Gwaynn never seemed to become impatient or frustrated, he just continued to attack relentlessly, even copying a move he had witnessed while watching Vio spar. This move did surprise Kostek, though he still blocked it with relative ease. Kostek waited until Gwaynn began repeating attacks before going on the offensive. Kostek quickly scored a number of hits but Gwaynn still showed no sign of becoming frustrated. The boy took the hits silently, but on the following attack Gwaynn copied the Tar’s moves with surprising skill. Kostek blocked the attack and used another even more intricate counter move that left Gwaynn sprawled on the ground. Without a word, Gwaynn jumped to his feet and once again took up the attack, and used a fair likeness of Kostek’s most recent counter attack. Only a slightly raised eyebrow showed the Tar’s surprise. The boy learned amazingly fast, and as far as Kostek could tell favored neither hand, which was impressive; most amateurs tended to favor one hand over another, however slightly.

Kostek repeated the counter attack, and was gratified that the boy managed to block it this time using nearly the same counter moves he had employed when Gwaynn had tried the move back on him.

“Excellent!” Kostek said, holding up his hands to pause the action. “For not being a driven student, Master Sath appears to have taught you at least the…” Gwaynn dove in to attack once more, this time using the counter he just learn with at least two variations, one of them quite subtle, and Kostek was sure that it would have worked on a student, but Kostek was a Tar, and blocked it and countered with another move both hard and fast. Gwaynn caught the right kata, but the left caught him in the back of the head and he pitched forward, but at the last minute he tucked into a roll, and was on his feet in an instant.

‘Youth’, Kostek thought with admiration, then had to move quickly to blunt another attack, this time an almost perfect imitation of the one he had just performed. Kostek was astounded! Then, on a whim decided to really see what the boy could learn. First he drove Gwaynn back with a flurry of moves, and then Kostek retreated to the far side of the practice area.  But before Gwaynn could mount another attack, he launched one of his own, a master attack, using not only katas, he also incorporated several kicks which clearly surprised the boy, who took a hard heel to the chin. The kick launched Gwaynn into the air and he slid on his back half way to the kitchen. He got to his feet a little slower this time and Kostek smiled to himself, though outwardly he was careful to remain stoic. Through many years of teaching on the Temple Islands he’d observed early on that it was very hard to teach anything to an angry pupil, and smiles in combat, even mock combat, rarely induced anything but anger.

Gwaynn stood for a moment shaking his head, clearly stunned, then he took a deep breath and to Kostek’s utter amazement came at him with a flurry, kicks included almost exactly as they were used a moment before. The kicks were crude however, and did not connect with the master, but while Kostek was ducking from a kick, a well-aimed kata struck him in the shins. Kostek danced back, not injured, but well aware that the boy had scored a hit on him, and a planned hit at that.

“Very good,” Kostek said, astonished. Gwaynn should not have been able to score upon him…few students below third year ever scored a hit on a Tar, and it was very rare even for third year students.

They continued to practice for nearly an hour, Gwaynn attacking, Kostek blocking and counter attacking. Over and over Gwaynn mimicked the attacks and defensive moves Kostek demonstrated. The boy had remarkable body control, although it was his mental discipline and calm that utterly impressed the Tar. Kostek dropped the boy nearly a dozen times and did not take another hit himself, but there were a few more close calls which told him the first was no fluke. With time and hard work he now believed Gwaynn may be able to score against him regularly. Finally he called a halt to the session, Gwaynn was sweating profusely and his arms hung at his sides, betraying what the work out had cost him, and even Kostek, who was very fit, was beginning to feel the effects of fatigue.

“We must get your stamina up,” Kostek commented and Gwaynn nodded, having no trouble admitting he was exhausted. “You will run with us in the morning,” the Tar added and watched as Gwaynn broke into a grin.

“You may not be grinning tomorrow, and this will not interfere with your other duties,” Kostek explained.

Gwaynn nodded, using the cotton towel the older man handed him to wipe the sweat from his forehead. Kostek watched him closely as the boy cooled down, and noticed that he showed no outward signs of satisfaction.

“Despite your earlier misgivings, you seem to be an excellent student,” Kostek said.

“Master Sath would not have agreed with you a few months ago. I…” Gwaynn began trying to explain his past apathy for fighting, something that caused his former teacher, and his father many hours of frustration.  “I feel different now, almost possessed,” he continued, thinking only of Gwynn. It was a new thought for him and he found it intriguing.  “Plus, I’m a bit more driven,” he finished and then with a bow excused himself, thinking perhaps a splash in the sea might be welcome after all.

ǂ

Leek woke Gwaynn nearly an hour before sunrise the next morning and after a few moments of confusion, his head cleared and he remembered why he was being awaken so early. He came instantly alert and dressed as fast as he ever had in his life, then made his way out into the cool, early morning air. The stars were bright, but there was just a hint in the eastern sky of the coming sunrise. Master Kostek was waiting near the center fire pit with his eight students. Krys and Vio greeted Gwaynn quietly, but the rest of the students just eyed him curiously.

Kostek clapped Gwaynn softly on the shoulder. “We run to the point and back every morning, ten miles in all. Do your best. I’ll be waiting when you finish,” he said matter-of-factly. Gwaynn thought he could at least keep up with some of the younger students, but as they set out he quickly realized they were setting a pace that he could not hope to match for even two miles, let alone ten. Gwaynn initially fell in behind Vio, but discovered that she was the one who actually led the pack and he was forced to fall back. He watched her up ahead, running apparently effortlessly, but he soon fell so far behind that the sight of her was blocked out by the students running behind her. Soon the entire group was so far up ahead Gwaynn stopped trying to keep up and fell into a slower rhythm all his own. He ran along, very aware of his heart thumping steadily in his chest, somehow keeping time with the waves pounding onto the nearby shore. Being so close to the ocean, he thought of Karl and all the big man had done for him, all he had sacrificed. As long as Tar Kostek was willing to train him, Gwaynn knew that Karl’s sacrifice would be at least worth something. He ran on, thinking about their time in the ocean and how afraid he was of dying, and how Karl continued to give him strength until at last he had not an ounce left for himself. Gwaynn would train, and train hard, not only for the memory of Karl, but also for his mother and sister, his lost home, but mostly because he never wanted to feel helpless and weak again, as he had hanging from the scaffold back in Solarii. Better to fight and die than to feel that way again, he thought, better yet, to fight and live, which was what Gwaynn planned to do. He blinked out of his thoughts as he caught sight of a lone runner coming his way. He knew instantly it was Vio. He unconsciously picked up his pace a little, though his legs felt like lead. He was sure he would never be able to run all the way back to the quarter without stopping and walking at least part of the way.

Vio closed on him rapidly and surprised him by stopping, jogging in place for a moment then running backwards along side him.

“You are doing well,” she said, and Gwaynn got at least a little satisfaction from the fact that she was breathing hard and sweating, though not nearly as much as he was at the moment.

Gwaynn only nodded in reply, not feeling as if he could answer without gasping.

“You have made it this entire way on the run?” She asked.

Again Gwaynn could only nod.

“Excellent, I struggled to make it to the point on a run my first time. You only have about half a mile to go. I think you will make it,” she added with a quick smile that made Gwaynn somehow want to run even faster…but he didn’t.

“I’ll see you,” she said by way of good-bye and abruptly changed direction and headed back toward the quarter. Gwaynn ran on feeling better, though he was still very tired. Now, however, he knew there was no way he would stop before he reached the point.

Kostek came into view shortly thereafter, closely followed by several other students. Gwaynn could recognize Krys, and B’dall just behind him. Krys nodded but said nothing. B’dall passed shortly after, but ignored Gwaynn completely. Farther back ran the last of the Mele quarter including, Tad, who was in his sixth year, William, fifth year, Tam, first year, Hotch, fourth year, and finally Stephen who was in his second. This group was well back of Kostek and a good deal farther from Vio, and the fact that the students in the quarter ran at different speeds lightened Gwaynn’s heart even more. He passed the last group with a nod and they all yelled out encouragement to him as they went by.

Gwaynn was very tired now, but the point was in sight and he just wanted to make it all the way there without stopping. He ran on, very aware of the pain in his legs, but forced himself to keep moving. He followed the shoreline, which turned sharply to the south and looking up he was surprised to see a ship under sail out on the horizon. As it floated serenely past, its white sails caught the first full rays of the early morning sun. He watched it curiously until suddenly the point ended and Gwaynn dropped to his knees, breathing heavily. He stayed put for several long moments, watching the ship sail away before getting to his feet once more. He waded into the sea, splashed about in the water then turned and headed back toward the quarter. He walked for only about five minutes before surprising himself and breaking into the slow jog, which he held nearly all the way back.

Tar Kostek was waiting for him by the path, which led from the beach and back up to the quarter.

“Very good, very good,” he said smiling, but Gwaynn found he was too tired to smile back, or even stand up straight. “Much better than expected.”

Gwaynn said nothing for a while and just rested on his knees in the sand. Kostek waited patiently next to him, saying nothing.

Finally Gwaynn’s breathing began to slow, and without standing, looked up at his new Master. “Will we be training tonight?” he asked hopefully.

Tar Kostek shook his head. “This is your training,” he answered. “First you must beat one of my students in the run; then we can continue our weapons training, but not before,” he added thinking Gwaynn may protest. But the boy merely looked up at him still breathing faster than normal then he nodded and got to his feet. Gwaynn stripped out of his clothing and waded out into the ocean. Kostek left him there to cool down, wondering once more how they managed to miss the boy.

Over the next three weeks Gwaynn showed no sign of improving, in fact his performance actually grew worse as the first week wore on. But, gradually during the next two, his stamina improved, though the results were not plainly visible. Tar Kostek, who had trained a great number of students over the years, had expected this, since the adrenaline of the first day could not be sustained over time. He also expected Gwaynn to show signs of frustration and discouragement. The boy, however, kept his feelings well hidden and continued to rise early every day and run behind the other students. Kostek let him continue without a word and as if it had happened very suddenly, Gwaynn’s speed began to increase. One morning Kostek was surprised when he made the turn at the point and could see Gwaynn in the distance, trailing Hotch and Stephen, but plainly visible for the first time. Kostek smiled to himself and unconsciously picked up his own speed. He was still second, and still well behind Vio, who it seemed, was born to run. Ever since her dash to rescue Gwaynn, she had dominated his group. Kostek was looking forward to the year-end Competitions. Vio would surprise them all. He was still second behind her followed closely by Krys. At the moment they were well ahead of B’dall, who carried far too much hereditary bulk to excel at long distance running. B’dall’s pride and determination however, seemed to be enough to nearly always keep him close behind his Master. But it was in Vio that Kostek was most proud, though unfortunately she was such a fast runner that she no longer even pushed the other students to higher levels.

Kostek was careful to show no sign of emotion as he passed Gwaynn on his return run but inside he was urging his new student on. It would be an incredible feat if Gwaynn could match even his slowest students after less than a month, though oddly Kostek was sure the boy could be among his fastest. Gwaynn had an inner fire that could not be stoked by any soul other than the one within. It burned bright in the young prince, who was just on the verge of becoming aware of his power and control over himself. Plus, he, like Vio and William, had a runner’s physique, long limbs and a light core. Kostek ran on and at the finish found Vio, still dripping from her dip in the sea, patiently waiting for him. Kostek raised an eyebrow as he passed her and dropped to a walk, breathing hard. Krys finished just behind him and almost immediately stripped and waded out into the warm water. Kostek continued to walk about, cooling down slowly before stripping and wading out into the sea. He was walking out of the water, balanced against the gentle waves and moving tides of sand, when B’dall finished and walked on past him. Kostek turned to give Vio a look.

“You think he has a chance then?” Kostek asked coming up to Vio after he’d dressed.

“I think one day he might push me,” she replied as some of the other students came into view. They were still at a far distance, perhaps half a mile away.

Kostek raised his brows once more as Krys joined them.

“High praise,” he said.

“Running, he reminds me of me,” she answered with a shrug. “Yesterday I told him about the day we found him on the beach, and the run I had to make in order to save his life. Before that run I thought I was giving my all in every race.”

Kostek looked down at her once more as she shrugged again. “I wasn’t giving anything even close,” she added.

They stood together and waited; though Kostek noticed that B’dall after cooling in the ocean did not, and instead moved up the path to the dorms. William and Tam soon appeared in the distance pushing each other hard. Tam was Mele’s first year, but like Vio she was a natural runner and pushed William almost every day, though he was four years her senior. Kostek knew there was a small measure of infatuation on her part, but it was a natural byproduct of their training. Young love blossomed very easily and with very little effort. For his part William seemed to indulge the young initiate, and even appeared to enjoy her company. They streaked by, William a step ahead of Tam today, but he did not gloat. Tam was beating him two times out of three these days, and soon he would have trouble keeping up. Tad and Hotch finished next and in the distance Kostek could make out another pair of runners. They were running single file, in the jerky motion of the over-tired, pushing each other beyond what each alone could achieve.

“That’s Gwaynn in front,” Vio said her voice betraying her excitement. Master Kostek looked down at her curiously. In all her three years, Vio had shown not the slightest interest in any boy on the islands and instead devoted herself entirely to study and practice. He said nothing however, just turned back to watch the runners as they approached. At this distance, he could not tell if Gwaynn was in the lead, but he trusted the eyes of his student and just as they got close enough that he could tell them apart, Stephen moved out from behind Gwaynn and began to pass. Gwaynn increased his speed, and soon they were approaching side by side, each determined, each giving everything they had, until finally at the last moment Stephen surged ahead and past his Master just ahead of his new rival. Both boys almost immediately fell to the sand, panting hard, completely exhausted.

Kostek turned and watched each of them, pride for both filling him up. Gwaynn, because he was improving faster than he thought possible, and Stephen because his squat muscular frame was made for power and not speed, only his heart allowed him to hold off the new comer in the end.

“Excellent, both of you. Truly excellent,” he said and with Vio in tow, moved up the beach.

The next day Gwaynn beat Stephen, by fifty paces and was closing in on Hotch.

ǂ

It took nearly a week for Navarra and a hand picked group of men to find the secret passageway that led from the upstairs study to the kitchens below. And it took another two days to find the secret way into the caves, then the long, dark tunnel, which led, away from the castle grounds. Navarra insisted on following the tunnel the entire way, knowing that where the tunnel would finally emerge would tell much about the direction the old Weapons Master might have taken. Navarra believed he already knew, but this exercise would allow him to delve deeper into the mind of the man he was chasing.

The peninsula of Massi was like a broken finger sticking out into the Inland Sea with the Zani Empire on one side and the Toranado and the Scar Mountains on the other. The Capital of Solarii was placed, in Navarra’s opinion, in the worst possible position, approximately on the first knuckle of the extended finger. For a preeminent naval power it may have worked, but the Massi were anything but, and it was a simple matter to attack the finger at the second knuckle and pinch off Solarii from the rest of the country. Very similar in fact with the art of interrogation, chop a finger at the knuckle and everything falls in line. The Massi were no different.

If he was on the run in this odd peninsula of a country, Navarra would head south, to the base of the Scar mountains and if need be into the mountains themselves; there it would take several armies to root out a single man.

Navarra spoke little on the long trip through the tunnel, and when he and his men finally broke out into fresh air he was surprised to find that they had only come five miles. It had seemed like much more.

“From here he could’ve moved to Heron,” the young Sergeant to Navarra’s left suggested. “Following behind the pup he helped save.”

Navarra grunted. Lindsay was the Sergeant’s name, and he was the only one of the group that had the courage to offer an opinion, at least in the Executioner’s presence. Navarra was beginning to respect that, and the young Sergeant’s mind, which was proving to be sharp and insightful. But that did not keep him from disagreeing with him.

“No, he will not leave his homeland so readily. Afton Sath will have moved south, toward Millvale, and then down deeper in country,” Navarra answered. “Send someone for horses…and dogs. We will head to Millvale immediately.”

VI

Kostek walked slowly through the night, his mind occupied by his latest training session with Gwaynn. The boy’s improved stamina was giving his new master fits. The lad had scored two hits on him tonight, and scored at least one nearly every night in the last week. His growing skill could no longer be ignored. The Tar was sure that Gwaynn could at least match the skills of Hotch, his fourth year student, which was beyond belief. Clearly, Gwaynn retained more of his training with Master Sath than he realized, but it was hard to know for sure because Gwaynn was not like any other student Kostek had ever worked with. The boy was relentlessly aggressive, recklessly so, and Kostek knew that eventually such aggressiveness would need to be tempered. But at the moment he was at a loss as to how. Gwaynn fought fearlessly, and when Kostek stressed that every hit he scored would have meant death on the battlefield, the boy had just shrugged.

“I’ve already died twice,” he’d answered and dove in once again for the attack. Kostek shook his head at such an aggressive style of fighting and as he moved up the steps to the Grand Hall he wondered how his students would handle it.

Tar Amon was waiting for him at the top of the stairs.

“Our visitor is progressing?” Amon inquired softly, with a hand outstretched in greeting.

“Faster than I would ever have thought possible,” Kostek answered, as Amon led him inside and to his private rooms.

“He has potential then?” Amon asked, not fully realizing Gwaynn’s quickly improving abilities. Kostek did not hold it against his Master. He would not have believed it was possible either. Kostek took a seat in a cushioned chair in front of a small oak desk as Amon moved behind it.

“Potential to be the Island’s best pupil,” Kostek answered. Amon’s head came up swiftly and he raised his eyebrows, but said nothing for several moments.

“Our best?”

Kostek nodded his head silently.

“This must be kept quiet,” Amon finally said, breaking the silence and surprising Kostek. “Especially now,” he added and handed an official looking letter to his most trusted comrade.

Kostek read the letter, which actually was an invitation to celebrate, for the High King of the Islands had announced his intentions to wed the Lady Audra Deutzani, daughter of King Arsinol Deutzani.

“I think we have the reason for the High King’s decision to aid the Deutzani in the attack on the Massi,” Amon stated when Kostek looked up from the paper he was holding.

“The Lady Audra?” Kostek asked trying to understand.

“The youngest. She is only just turned fourteen,” Amon explained. “She is said to be extraordinarily beautiful.”

“Fourteen?” Kostek said, thinking aloud, knowing that the High King Mastoc was nearing forty. His first wife, Queen Eleanor of the Montoray, had died in childbirth nearly ten years ago giving birth to Princess Anya. Prince Nigel, their only son was already nineteen.

Amon nodded. “Arsinol demanded a high price for his youngest.”

“If it gets out that the Temple Knights aided in the downfall of the Massi for a woman…for a girl, it will mean civil war, possibly war without end.”

“Those were my thoughts exactly when Gwaynn first came to us.”

“Yet you let me begin to train him?”

“I’ve already decided that the boy’s fate will not be decided by us,” Amon said.

“But we are helping him!” Kostek protested.

“We began helping him when we saved him from death on that beach so many months ago.” Amon answered calmly.

“I will stop training him immediately,” Kostek said realizing fully just what a danger the boy posed for the Noble Island.

“You will continue to train him, but quietly. Select one student, I think you know who, to train with him also, but all involved must know of importance of secrecy.”

Kostek shook his head. “It is far too dangerous. If this gets out…”

“When,” Amon interrupted. “When this gets out, and it will, all of it. The High King will not be able to keep this quiet indefinitely, already there are whispers moving across the land of treachery. There is danger from the High King, and there is danger from the Families. The danger from the Families is far greater.”

“How so?” Kostek asked, not truly understanding.

“The High King is not likely to attack Noble if he finds out we know of his involvement in the Massi downfall. Any action he takes against us must be explained, but when the word finally gets out to the Families of the Kings treachery toward the Massi, their wrath will be great, and directed against any they feel aided in the injustice. We must not be seen as a puppet to the High King.”

“You think he will fall then?”

Amon shrugged. “He may survive, but we will do what is right…always.

Kostek nodded, having long since realized that the current High Master of Noble Island was a much deeper thinker than he would ever be. Over the years, Kostek had come to know himself very well and had no illusions that he would out-think anyone. Kill them with many weapons, yes, out-think, no.

“I want you to tell Gwaynn about the upcoming nuptials,” Amon added and stood signifying that the meeting was nearly over.

Kostek also stood. “You think that is wise?”

Amon shrugged. “I promised him,” was all the High Master said.

Kostek bowed slightly and took his leave, suddenly feeling very uneasy about the future.

ǂ

Master Kostek worked with Gwaynn privately at night for the next three weeks, though the boy continued to run with his students in the mornings. His running continued to improve steadily and he was beginning to push William and Tam. If anything, the boy’s fighting style was becoming even more aggressive as he grew more and more familiar with his Master’s tendencies. At times it was all Kostek could do to keep from injuring Gwaynn so frantic was the pace his young opponent set. Frankly, Kostek was more than a little anxious about setting Gwaynn on one of his other students for fear that an injury would occur. Injuries were not uncommon, but they were to be avoided whenever possible. But after several weeks went by Kostek knew that he could delay no longer, so now he waited, working lightly with Vio until Gwaynn arrived home. He was later than usual having worked with Lane in the fields on the western side of the island.

Kostek had chosen Vio to work with Gwaynn even though he was sure Master Amon had meant for him to work with Krys, another Massi youth. But Kostek had noticed a calmer, more relaxed Gwaynn when the young woman was near him. She should temper his violent style. Plus he believed Gwaynn’s aggressive manner may well help Vio to improve. At times she lacked aggressiveness and appeared reluctant to put her opponents away.

“Beware,” Kostek warned as he worked through some intricate moves with his most natural pupil. He believed that Vio may one day become a Tarina herself; if that is the path she wished to follow. “Gwaynn is very, very aggressive, and fights with a certain amount of recklessness.”

Vio frowned, concentrating on working through the move correctly. “Is he good?” she asked as they finished and stepped away from one another.

“Very,” Kostek answered just as a knock came at the door. He motioned for Vio to open it, and when she did, the Tar noticed that the young man’s demeanor changed immediately. Kostek then knew his decision was the correct one.

“Vio,” Gwaynn said softly, with a fair amount of surprise.

“Gwaynn,” Vio answered with a smile and a toss of her head. “Master Kostek has chosen me to begin working with you,” she added, as if her presence demanded some sort of explanation.

Gwaynn smiled openly. Ever since he had spotted Vio working with Tam on the beach those many days ago he had fantasized about sparring with her. Her moves were so smooth and clean. She moved like an artist.

“Do you need time to prepare?” Kostek asked taking a seat on the floor well off of the mat, but in a position where he could see all of the action taking place. Gwaynn shook his head negatively as he removed his footwear, pulled his preferred katas from the wall and moved into position opposite Vio. They both gave a little bow, neither smiling but both excited about the coming competition, then Gwaynn waded in.

Somehow Vio managed to survive the initial onslaught from Gwaynn even though the ferocity of the attack surprised her even after the warning from Master Kostek. She finally managed to drive Gwaynn off and nearly scored a point herself. But she had little time to relax and collect herself before Gwaynn was on her again with a skill she would not have thought possible from one so new to the island. He used very deceptive moves, which included kicks far in advance of anything Tam was using. He continued to attack and she continued to give ground until finally he made a slight mistake and she scored a hit on his left thigh.

“Excellent,” she told Gwaynn as they moved back to the center of the mat, bowed and again Gwaynn attacked. This time Vio was ready for it, or at least thought she was until a well-placed kick hit her square in the chest and dropped her hard on the floor.

“Oh,” Gwaynn said, just as surprised as Vio and he moved forward to see if she was all right, but she was already getting to her feet, rubbing her chest and smiling ruefully at Gwaynn. Kostek sat quietly watching, saying nothing.

“Excellent,” she repeated moving back to the center of the mat. They bowed. Gwaynn again moved in, but this time a bit more slowly and Vio quickly made him pay with a similar kick to his chest, followed quickly by a snap kick to the chin. Gwaynn’s head was rocked back and he tasted a bit of blood from a small split in his lower lip. He wiped some blood away with the back of his hand.

“Excellent,” he echoed as he moved back into the center, a return smile now on his face.

They went after each other for nearly an hour, Gwaynn still aggressive but more tempered, Vio still smooth and relaxed, but necessarily more aggressive. Kostek smiled inwardly as he watched. These two were perfect for each other and he knew Vio would be a handful for whoever was matched against her at the year-end Competitions. She was a surprise last year, this year Kostek would be surprised if she did not make it to the finals. It was just a shame Gwaynn could not compete, for he would astound them all.

Over the next week, Kostek continued to watch over their sparring bouts and it was very obvious that both benefited from working with the other. Gwaynn also continued to run with all of the students in the mornings and was improving rapidly on that front also. He was now pushing B’dall, and Kostek’s eighth year student was struggling with the fact that a relatively new student was about to best him at a contest. B’dall, though talented, had always had an inflated opinion of some of his abilities. He was a strong fighter with the katas and at hand to hand, but was less talented with the bow, and though his strong sense of competition kept him near the top in the morning run, he was never a gifted runner. Kostek knew that he was already performing at his peak and with age would do nothing but decline. At last year’s games, B’dall finished second with the katas, fourth with the staff, and third with the open hand, but was tenth in the bow and ninth in the all island run. Against four eighth years and four other seventh years the second place finish with the katas was truly impressive, as was his third place finish in hand to hand. He was a truly gifted fighter, but his strength was power and reflexes, not foot speed. Kostek, however, couldn’t seem to get it across to the youth that knowing what strengths you possess and what strengths you lack was a very important part of knowing yourself, which was the greatest strength of all. Kostek would be interested to see just how his oldest student handled getting taken by his newest.

But Kostek was not destined to see the drama unfold, because the following day four Travelers suddenly appeared outside the Grand Hall, including Zarina Aleecia, the High Traveler, who had long been a friend and ally of Tar Amon.

“This marriage is causing such a stir,” Aleecia said as she and Amon sat on the western veranda, drinking lemon ice and watching the sun slowly set over the waves of the Inland Sea.

“How so?” Amon asked calmly, feigning ignorance.

Aleecia smiled at him. “Coming so soon after the Deutzani defeat of the Massi, and all the shocking rumors that surrounded that episode, people are beginning to talk of conspiracy. Plus the girl is so young,” Aleecia answered with a nod of her head.

Amon face remained passive and he made no comment. Zarina Aleecia, like many Travelers, was long of limb, tall and thin, and very delicate looking. She was past middle age, Amon knew, but she still had a full head of silvery blonde hair that she wore very long, the tips coming nearly to mid-thigh when down, and her face maintained a youthful appearance, helped by her large, bright eyes and small elfish features. She was very beautiful. Amon studied her long, graceful neck as she sucked on some ice, her attention on a boat making it’s way slowly by in the distance.

“You’ve heard none of this I suppose,” she finally said, baiting her friend. She knew Tar Amon well and correctly guessed that he was just attempting to draw out what she knew.

Amon shrugged. “We hear many things,” he replied. “Many disturbing things, but they are as yet unconfirmed and we are not willing to make any decisions based on rumors.”

Aleecia smiled. “Yes, it always pays to be cautious. But one rumor has me very intrigued,” she added, pouring another tasty bit of ice into her mouth. She sat silent for a long moment letting the ice melt of its own accord before speaking again. Amon sat patiently, saying nothing.

Aleecia glanced at her friend, her face emotionless. “The word is spreading that Gwaynn, the young prince of the Massi, escaped with his life during the last hours of the battle.”

Amon nodded. “So I have heard.”

“They say he escaped aboard a trireme, but was lost at sea,” Aleecia added. “Lost heading for the Temple Islands,” she added softly.

“Indeed,” Amon said simply. “If true, the loss would be unfortunate. It would be interesting to find out just how the Deutzani defeated the Massi so easily, and against all odds. It should not have been so.”

“Yes,” Aleecia agreed. “It is also being said that the boy reached the islands and is now in hiding.” She laughed lightly. “But he is not on The Isle of Light, nor do I gather he is on the Temple Island with the High King, and we both know if he landed on the Sinis Island there would be no rumors other than his quick death.

Amon still said nothing.

“And that leaves Helles, Lato or Noble Island, on any of the three I think the boy could have found refuge…if the rumors can be believed.”

Amon took a drink from his cup, the ice melting quickly now. Aleecia watched him closely, but the old man gave no sign one way or another and she sighed. She knew she would get nothing from him now. She was sure the boy was on Noble Island, but she was hoping to get Tar Amon to admit it, so she could offer help.

“If the boy was on Helles or Lato, could you find out?” he finally asked, feigning curiosity, but wondering just how much she knew. He had no illusions about the Traveler’s capabilities. Their ability to move soundlessly from distant places had long made them the very best spies in all of the land, though the Travelers themselves always scoffed at such talk, claiming that spying was beneath them. Still they always managed to have the right information at the right time.

Aleecia shrugged and uncrossed then re-crossed her long legs, watching Amon with a smile, as he watched her with a frown, wondering if she was so curious that she would attempt to use sex as a way to get the knowledge she wanted.

“Perhaps,” she finally said.

“I’ve heard there was an Executioner involved with the killing of most of the Massi family,” he blurted just to watch her flinch.

Aleecia nodded. “Yes, we have heard that also. We lost Dom in the fall, so we cannot be sure, but it does seem likely. Arsinol has employed that boastful man Navarra as Weapons Master. Plus he would not want to dirty his own hands with the death of an entire royal family.”

Amon winched inwardly at the mention of an Executioner as Weapons Master, but at least she had the decency not to refer to him as a Tar.

Aleecia sighed again. She liked a man who could hold his tongue, but Amon took it to extremes.

“If the boy is indeed on Helles or Lato,” she finally said looking out across the now dark ocean, the breaking waves iridescent in the moonlight. “I believe we will offer them the use of a pair of additional Travelers, in case anything untoward arises.”

Amon’s eyes jerked toward her and she smiled inwardly though very careful to show no emotion on her face.

“You would risk involvement?” he asked.

“What risk? We have Travelers in every land. We move from place to place when we want and why we want. We are on Helles, we are on Lato. I have long thought we should have an exchange, a pair of Travelers here for a pair of Tars on Light. I know I would sleep better should such a thing be arranged.”

Amon sat back as if thinking about the idea for the first time, though he had long toyed with the notion, even despite the present situation. In the past the High Tar’s had forbidden the presence of Travelers on Noble Island, preferring to move the slow way over the sea in exchange for complete privacy. Aleecia was not the first High Traveler to offer such an exchange.

“The idea does have merit,” he finally said, and Aleecia allowed herself to smile. She knew she finally had her answer. The Massi Prince was indeed on the island. That knowledge was good to have. She would protect the boy if she could, but if she had to, she would give him up. High King Mastoc was not a man she would want to cross. He was brazen enough to do just about anything, as his involvement in the Deutzani attack aptly showed.

“Yes it does,” she answered.

“I will think on it,” Amon said suddenly standing. He led her back through the Hall and to the upper floors, his mind racing. Tori, Aleecia’s private maid was waiting for her in her rooms.

“I have a bath prepared Ma’am,” Tori said as she opened the door.

“Very good,” Aleecia answered and turned back to Amon.

“Think carefully my friend,” she said. “I think it could benefit us both.”

ǂ

By a strange coincidence, Afton Sath reached Koshka, within the hour of Navarra and his men riding into Millvale. The arrival was less noticed in Koshka, and less welcome in Millvale, where Navarra immediately paid a visit to the Magistrate while his men roamed the town asking questions of the locals. Millvale already had a small garrison of Deutzani troops stationed within it, but was still under Massi governmental control. It would take months to place reasonably competent men in posts to govern all the small towns within the land, meanwhile the locals were allowed to keep the daily trade flowing. Conquered lands were only good for the income they could generate. Money, however, was not what motivated an Executioner.

The search came to not, as Navarra expected. Afton Sath would not be so foolish as to pass through a town unless it was absolutely necessary, to do so would jeopardize him and the safety of the towns people. But that did not concern the Executioner.

“You seem convinced that the Sath has not passed this way,” Navarra stated softly to the Massi Magistrate, who cowered along with the other town leaders before him. As Navarra watched the man grovel he grew annoyed.

“No M’lord, I would have heard of such a visitor,” the man said licking his lips. He was young for such a post but looked the part. He had a pinched, weasel like face and his eyes darted about nervously, first to Navarra, then to Lindsay and finally the rest of the Zani soldiers.

“Just where could he have gone then?” Navarra asked, keeping his voice even and soft, performing for the crowd. “He would need food. He would need water. Sath is an old man; surely you do not think he could cross the whole of Massi without food or water?”

The man’s eyes darted about faster. Navarra made only the slightest motion to Lindsay, who signaled another, and that soldier moved over to Kronos, Navarra’s black stallion. He removed a pair of large, dark wooden blocks that were hung across the horse’s haunches like saddlebags. The soldier carried them, with effort, to a large oak that grew in the town’s center and quickly began to tie the blocks together with a pair of strong leather thongs.

“Perhaps…” the man stammered, eyes now on the block waiting beneath the large branches which were whispering and swaying in the early morning breeze. “Perhaps he went to the Fultan’s.”

“The Fultan’s?” Navarra asked, all but whispering.

“Yes, yes,” the Magistrate answered clearly warming to the idea. “Thomas Fultan. His estate is about two miles southeast of town.”

“Estate?”

“Yes,” the man said, his head bobbing with enthusiasm. “Thomas has grown wealthy from his ale business…Fultan ale. He was very loyal to the King,” the Magistrate added hopefully.

“Well, we will have to investigate,” Navarra said and motioned again to Lindsay, who with one quick motion drew his kali and struck the back of the Magistrate’s right knee. The man fell to the ground screaming as the other town folk bounced away with astonishing speed. Lindsay and two other soldiers quickly bound the man’s hands behind his back and grabbed him by the underarms and pulled him through the dust, still screaming from his wound, to the block.

The Magistrate’s head was forcibly turned so it faced left and was placed in a shallow indentation. It was held in place by another leather thong, which was pulled tightly over the man’s head, just above the ears, finally the thong was tied off on hooks on each side of the block.

“Please…please,” the Magistrate begged. “Master Sath has not visited here for nearly a year,” he pleaded, somehow trying to save his life that was quickly coming to an end.

Navarra did not answer, but walked slowly to Kronos and removed an axe he used for just such an event. He could have done the job easier with his kali, or even a long sword, but the axe added a bit of drama, a bit of showmanship, that he liked. It was an axe the Black Horseman himself might have owned. The handle was long and the head was large, curved and very sharp. The blade gleamed in the morning sunshine like a child’s eyes lighting on a puppy.

Navarra moved to the side of the Magistrate, who was murmuring softly and he held the axe out before him so the blade rested lightly on the taunt skin of the man’s neck.

The Magistrate wet himself as the blade went up in a high arc.

‘I should have had breakfast, the doomed man thought crazily and then the blade came down and ended all such desires. The head came away cleanly and the body, free from the block, only seemed to realize it after a long moment and slowly fell off to one side.

Navarra glanced around at the stunned crowd, relishing the fear he saw in their anguished faces. “Perhaps the next Magistrate will be more forthcoming with his aid,” he said still speaking softly then turned to Sergeant Lindsay.

“Mount up. We will pay a visit to the Fultan’s directly.”

ǂ

Gwaynn and Vio were resting after another bout of sparring. For the last two hours they’d worked with each other, mostly with katas but they also worked at hand to hand and just for fun, the staff. Gwaynn was already her equal with katas, which was definitely an accomplishment because she was one of the most gifted students to come along in many years. Vio was also benefiting from their sessions, just as Tar Kostek had hoped. She was improving rapidly, a fact her fellow students from the Mele quarter were coming to notice. Tonight Gwaynn had defeated her with katas, but lost in hand to hand. He was still learning the many techniques needed to excel in such combat, and she completely dominated him with the staff, which he was finding to be a cumbersome weapon to learn.

“While I am gone,” Kostek said as he warmed some soup, “there will be no nightly bouts between the two of you.”

Gwaynn glanced at Vio, who was looking back at him, but neither spoke as Kostek brought two bowls of thin chicken soup to the table, placing one in front of each student. They both waited to eat as their Master turned back to fill his own bowl. They just continued to sit, glancing at one another to see what reaction the other might have to the news.

“There will be no bouts,” Gwaynn finally promised. “How long will you be gone?” he asked, as Kostek sat and immediately began to eat.

“A week only, possibly as long as ten days,” he answered and they all ate the rest of their late meal in silence.

“He may still run?” Vio finally spoke as she finished her soup, which was very good, not too heavy after such a strenuous workout.

“Uuum,” Kostek grunted as he ate. He swallowed. “Yes, yes he may run. We have made no secret to the fact that he works with us in that capacity. Tar Endid will be staying on Noble and working with all four quarters while the rest of us are away.”

Kostek stood. “Vio, I will see you in the morning, now I need to speak with Gwaynn alone.”

Vio nodded, wondering at the abrupt dismissal. “See you in the morning,” she said to Gwaynn and gathered her things. He made a conscious effort not to watch her every movement, the tension inside him finally easing as she stepped out the door. He leaned back, relaxing.

“More?” Kostek asked as he rose to fill another bowl for himself.

Gwaynn shook his head. Exercise always blunted his appetite and besides Shari fed him very well.

Kostek returned with a full bowl, sat and ate a few bites before stopping. “I am sure you’ve heard the High King is to marry,” he said without looking up and took another spoonful into his mouth.

“Yes,” Gwaynn answered, wondering just where this was going.

Kostek nodded but continued to eat for another moment before stopping. “What you probably haven’t heard is to whom he will be wed.”

Gwaynn remained quiet but instantly became very alert.

“The Lady Audra Deutzani,” Kostek said and pushed the now empty bowl away and sat up to his full height. He glanced at the boy, who still said nothing.

Gwaynn knew her. He had met Audra several years ago but she was just a young child then. Thinking on it, he decided she must still be considered a child. Finally Gwaynn nodded. “Thank…thank you for telling me.”

“Wasn’t my idea, was Master Amon’s.”

But Gwaynn was only now half listening and though he kept his face carefully neutral, inside his mind was racing. This would definitely explain why the High King had unleashed the Temple Knights on his homeland. It also made it clear that if Gwaynn ever moved against the Deutzani he would find another enemy in the High King, not that he had any notion of moving against the Deutzani, at least not in any future other than his fantasies.

“You understand what this means for you?” Kostek finally said, feeling for the boy, who had already lost so much.

Gwaynn looked over at him and nodded.

“It would be better if you resigned yourself to be just Gwaynn,” Kostek added, wondering again just how long the boy would survive.

Gwaynn just shook his head. “Better it may be, but that is something I will never do,” he answered, stood and without another word, left his master’s house.

ǂ

Thomas Fultan saw the Zani soldiers coming up the road nearly half a league before they arrived at the gate. The sight of so many of soldiers coming toward the house made his breath catch in his throat, but it was when he recognized the figure out front as an Executioner that his stomach truly lurched. Gale, who was busy creating a mash from the hops, which was the very beginning of the brewing process, noticed that Thomas was no longer working and followed his gaze.

He gasped as Thomas turned to him. “Gale, please go into the house and warn every one of our pending guests.”

Gale put down the large ladle he was using to stir the concoction and with obvious nervousness wiped his hands down with a towel.

“Do not hurry,” Thomas added his voice was calm but his mind screaming at him for ideas. The Executioner’s presence could only mean one thing…Afton Sath.  He could only hope that they were just here searching and not acting on any definite knowledge.

After a moment Wellman hobbled out and joined his master and friend and they waited together silently as the party of horses and men rode up the lane and came to a stop before them.

“You are Thomas Fultan?” One of the Sergeants asked abruptly and Thomas took it as a good sign that no one showed any sign of dismounting.

“I am,” Thomas answered, surprised at how relaxed his voice sounded to him. His eyes traveled over the Sergeant, who was a great bear of a man, so tall that his legs hung down far beneath the horse, giving the illusion that he was astride a pony.

“How may I help you?”  Thomas asked, his eyes now wandering over the rest of the party, before finally landing on the Executioner, who was looking around the estate with interest. Thomas saw the man’s nose wrinkle at the smell of the mash and felt a sense of relief. Many people found the smell slightly offensive. It gave the Executioner a more human quality that he too should find it so.

“I want everyone in the house, outside directly,” the Executioner stated without any emotion and turned his eyes on Thomas, whose relief at the human qualities of the man before him vanished in a blink.

“Of…of course,” Thomas stammered, his voice no longer relaxed. “Wellman,” he added and the old man hobbled back inside.

“I have heard of your ale,” the Executioner commented, and Thomas gave a forced smile.

“I hope you liked it.”

“I do not drink ale,” the man answered and fixed his unblinking blue eyes on Thomas and held him in his stare. Thomas, unable to take his eyes away, stared back, only partially aware that he was beginning to sweat. The man before him was a killer, of that Thomas had no doubt, and for a moment he wondered just what it was about the man that signaled his deadly intent. He was not big, this Executioner, nor did he have a particularly malevolent look. His features were dark, but with clear blue eyes. He was clean cut and dressed as well as any nobleman. The door behind Thomas opened and the Executioner’s gaze shifted, releasing Thomas, and as the man watched Thomas’ friends and family emerge, it hit him just what was different about him. His face showed no emotion, nothing at all. Even the marble statues in the great halls of Solarii showed more emotion than the man in front of him. Thomas shivered despite the warmth of the day, and he suddenly found the Executioner smiling at him. The smile made him all the worse.

“Is this everyone?” Navarra asked mildly, looking over the group standing before him, his eyes lingering on the oldest daughter, the striking one with brown, no red hair. She looked up at him defiantly, as only the very young could do. His gaze traveled up and down her body, though her long skirts effectively hid her figure. Nice chest, he thought before coming back to her face. She pulled the little one standing by her side closer, and Navarra had the distinct impression she wanted to cross her arms in front herself. He smiled again, the second time in as many minutes. It did not make anyone feel any better.

“Yes,” Thomas answered.

“And they are?”

“Wellman, my houseman; Gale, who helps with the ale; Samantha, Beth and Arabelle, my daughters and Murl, my cook and housekeeper,” Thomas answered.

“Ah,” Navarra began while dismounting. Sergeant Lindsay and the others immediately followed suit. Thomas’ heart sank. “We are looking for Afton Sath. He was here.”

Thomas blanched, though struggled hard to control his face. Wellman and Murl could be counted on not to give information away easily, but his daughters were another thing all together. They had all spent hours coaching Beth, knowing that this day would come, but Thomas despaired that the little one would be able to keep the secret under any sort of pressed interrogation. “We have not seen Afton Sath. If he was here he did not announce his presence,” he answered, spelling out for everyone their position on the matter.

The Executioner turned to stare at him for several long moments and then his gaze moved down the line to Wellman before finally settling on Samantha. He moved forward until he stood directly in front of her.

Striking, he thought, looking directly into her eyes. Predictably, she stared back, still defiant. “When was Afton Sath here?” he whispered to her, his voice soft, as if they were two lovers in bed.

Samantha continued to look into his eyes, afraid that if she looked away it would be construed as guilt. “Afton Sath has never been here,” she answered back a little too loudly. Navarra was close enough that he felt her breath on his face, but he moved closer still, his face stopping less than a foot from hers.

“Never?” he whispered, captivated by the flush of her cheeks, her flawless skin. He moved even closer until Samantha began to fear he would attempt to kiss her, or perhaps do worse to make her talk. If he did, she was not at all sure her father would be able to hold his tongue and that could mean death for them all.

“Never,” she answered firmly, finally dropping her eyes.

Navarra stood there, very close and completely still, but said nothing.

“Uncle,” Beth said from down below, breaking the spell which surrounded them.

Navarra glanced down. The little girl was looking up at him expectantly, gently pulling on his riding cloak to get his attention.

He knelt down. “Uncle?” he asked.

“She calls every strange man uncle,” Arabelle explained, her voice fast and high pitched.

“Uncle,” Beth said again, then curled one finger at Navarra, motioning him to come closer still, like she would share a secret with him.

Navarra bent forward and she moved her mouth close to his ear.

“Would you like a sugared biscuit?” she whispered, though everyone in line could hear her in the quiet of the morning.

Navarra frowned, not expecting the question. “Yes,” he answered spontaneously, humoring her.

Beth leaned back and held up both hands apologetically. “Sorry we don’t have any.”

Navarra jerked in surprise, anger suddenly on him, wondering if the little girl was trying to play him for a fool.

“Has Afton Sath been here?” he barked at her, showing his temper.

The little girl went wide-eyed with fear. “Afnnsath,” she stammered, butchering the name. “Is he a dog?” she asked, clearly holding back tears.

Navarra stood up without answering. He realized then that Afton Sath could not have come by here. He turned to Thomas. “If he turns up you will report it immediately or pay the consequences. It would be unfortunate to lose such a charming family,” he added briskly.

Thomas nodded as he watched the Executioner turn away and mount his horse. No one in line dared to breathe or show any relief. Once he was on Kronos, Navarra paused to stare at Samantha for another few moments, he noticed that her breast were moving up and down quickly with her breathing, but otherwise she showed no emotion, then he turned his horse and they headed back the way they had come.

VII

The next evening Gwaynn waited on the extreme western side of the island. He sat on the very edge of a high, rocky bluff, listening to the waves crash onto the shore below. He was gazing out at the horizon, in the direction of the King’s Island. In fact, on extremely clear days, the Island of the High King could be glimpsed in the far distance; at least for those with very sharp eyes. Gwaynn sat quietly, enjoying the breeze coming off of the sea, and watching the stark, white birds drift overhead as they rode the winds.

He waited for nearly an hour before he finally heard footsteps very close behind. He spun around, startled even though he was expecting a companion. He stood up and nodded to the newcomer, who bowed low.

“I have come as you requested, my King.”

“Am I?” Gwaynn asked standing and looking down at the prone young man before him.

Krys took the opportunity to look up at his new liege. “Yes,” he answered, “now and unto death.”

Gwaynn stood in silence for a long moment and then signaled for Krys to rise. “Very well; if you mean what you say I have a request of you.”

“Anything, my King.”

“After the year end Competition, during your leave, I wish you to go and visit the seaport of Heron. There you are to look up a man named Paulo and his wife Karla. You may tell them, and only them, that I am alive and with their help I would like you to start a search.”

“A search for what?”

“Not what, but who,” Gwaynn went on. “I would like you to search for Afton Sath.”

Krys gasped. “The Massi Weapons Master! You believe he lives?”

“My father’s Weapons Master,” Gwaynn corrected, holding up a hand. “You will be my Weapons Master, and yes I believe that Afton Sath may be alive. If anyone could have escaped the castle at Solarii it would be Master Sath.”

Krys stood still, shocked at the idea of being the King’s Weapons Master, even if the Kingdom of the Massi was no more. It was a great honor, one that he would not take lightly.

“Is there anything I should tell him if I find him?” Krys asked.

Gwaynn shook his head. “You need not tell him anything, just inform him that I live and will be returning home in time.”

“Do you wish me to stay on Massi?” Krys asked, dreading the answer.

Gwaynn shook his head. “Not unless it becomes absolutely necessary. I would have you finish your training if at all possible.”

Krys could not help but smile and Gwaynn smiled back, feeling much older than his new Weapons Master, though Krys was his senior by several years.

“Speaking of training…” Gwaynn said and removed two sets of katas from the satchel at his feet. “I promised Master Kostek that I would not train with Vio while he was gone, but I made no promises about sparring with you.”

Krys frowned. “You have been training with Vio?”

Gwaynn nodded. “Yes and Master Kostek. Beware, I have learned much,” he added with a bow.

Krys caught the katas thrown to him and returned the bow, moments later he was on his back, completely shocked by his new lord’s skill. Gwaynn held out a hand, face passive.

“Please use all your skill,” he said with a nod of his head and they continued.

ǂ

The next morning Gwaynn ran stronger and faster than ever before, beating B’dall by a full fifty paces, but he still was not even within sight of Vio’s finish, which was his goal. Krys finished just ahead of him and was now stripping to take a plunge in the water. Vio, hair still wet, was waited for him, standing in the wet sand at the edge of the surf.

“Excellent,” she said with a large smile on her face. “You are getting closer and closer to me,” adding as she walked with him while he cooled down. They turned around in time to see B’dall finish. The scowl on his face foretold his mood, but he said nothing as he passed them.

“Do not mind him,” she said just above a whisper. “It took him nearly a week to get over the fact of losing to me when I first bested him. He doesn’t take it very kindly. It makes him a good fighter but less of a Noble person. He cares little for Philosophy,” she added then shrugged. “His loss, his struggle.”

“I’d give him a wide berth,” Krys said, clamoring out of the surf and aware that they were gazing in B’dall’s direction. “He was the same way when I first beat him. He lost the race but he took it out on me for weeks with the katas and the staff. He’s tough and likes to try to intimidate.”

Gwaynn watched B’dall as he trudged up the sandy slope toward the Mele quarter; his large shoulders hunched a little and both hands clenched in fists.

“I don’t think he ever accepted the idea of my competing in any way with the rest of the students here…even running,” Gwaynn said then began to strip off his sweaty clothes. Vio suddenly turned pink, but said nothing. Gwaynn didn’t notice but Krys did and smiled, then moved up and after B’dall. Nudity, within the family structure was neither flaunted nor shunned, though in public it was naturally tempered. Mele quarter was considered family, so such displays were thought to be reasonable and was common even for those younger, at an age when they developed a natural shyness about their bodies. All of the students cooled down in the sea after the run, though some moved off a distance. Before coming to Noble Island, Gwaynn struggled with his own bashfulness, but after his recent experiences he now gave it little thought.

Vio, on the other hand, was very aware of Gwaynn, and her awareness had been growing stronger the last few weeks. In the past, boys had never interested her, girls either for that matter. She just never paid any of them the slightest attention. She knew others who acted the fool, sometimes for more than one person at a time. Tam, for instance, never seemed to shut up about William, but it didn’t bother Vio, she just didn’t understand it, at least not until a couple of weeks ago.

At first she thought it was the sparring and the fact that Gwaynn was so good at it that kept drawing her mind back to him, but then she had the dream. It was a dream like no other, intensely erotic, just her and him, both nude sitting close and touching, then kissing. She woke, panting hard, the dream still vivid in her mind. Even now, nearly two weeks later when she thought of it she could feel her face flush and her pulse quicken. She watched as Gwaynn swam and waded about in the waves, occasionally giving her brief glimpses of his young body. She knew she should just turn and head up to the quarters, but she found she couldn’t. She wanted to be here to see him, naked or otherwise she didn’t care. She wanted to talk with him and to spar with him. She couldn’t wait for Master Kostek to return.

She lingered on the beach, trying not to seem obvious, urging him with her mind to hurry. He, however, seemed content to take his time. Vio glanced over and spotted Tam and William running in the distance, each pushing the other to greater speeds, though clearly both were near exhaustion. She groaned inwardly. Gwaynn would not be out of the water before they finished. She started to turn and leave, but then stopped again. If she left she would not get to see him again until tomorrow morning. She sat down hard in the sand, suddenly angry, but determined not to leave until she could speak with him. Finally, he swam toward the shore and rode the waves into an easy walk toward the beach. Vio watched him, while trying to appear not to watch. She glanced over as Tam and William finished, William just ahead, both were panting hard and bending at the waist in an attempt to catch their breath. Gwaynn slipped his loose fitting, white cotton trousers back on and was drying his hair with his shirt as he walked toward her.

William and Tam walked by, Tam giving Vio a knowing little smile that only increased her anger.

“I never thought I would enjoy the water again,” Gwaynn said standing over her, his bare chest glistening in the early morning sun.

“Well you took your time,” Vio said, her irritation plain in her tone and smoothly got to her feet.

Gwaynn’s brows furrowed a little, wondering at her anger, but he made no reply as they began to make their way up the sandy hill that led inland toward their quarter.

They walked along the path in silence for a good distance. Vio hoping, praying that he would say something, anything, but he remained silent, which increased her frustration with him.

“I want to spar again,” she finally blurted as they closed on the out buildings, which surrounded the Leek’s family home. She stopped a bit in front of him and turned to face him, forcing him to stop also or walk directly into her.

Gwaynn gave another half frown. “Master Kostek will return…”

“I want to spar tonight,” she cut him off, repeating her request because she couldn’t get herself to say what she truly wanted to do with him, even to herself. “Come on, haven’t you missed it?” she added trying to act nonchalant.

Gwaynn smiled at that, but was still thrown off by her request. It was not like her to flaunt the rules. “Yes,” Gwaynn answered. “But I sparred a bit with Krys the other night…”

“Krys!” She interrupted, angry once more. “So you will spar with him but not with me now.”

Gwaynn took a step backward as if he was afraid she might attack him, but Vio stepped forward and poked a finger at him.

“Master Kostek would not like to hear of it. He does not want anyone to know about your training, your skills,” she argued her voice rising.

“But…” Gwaynn tried to answer, knowing anyone within fifty paces would now know about his training.

“Fine then, you just spar with Krys,” Vio stammered and spun on her heels and marched away leaving a thoroughly bewildered Gwaynn in her wake.

ǂ

Gwaynn’s encounter with Vio was still on his mind that afternoon as he, Lane and the rest of the family worked in the gardens on the eastern part of the main house. Today they were harvesting carrots, and though Gwaynn and Lane worked quietly, Shari and her girls chatted continuously, subjects seemingly changing with every row they finished. Lane stayed on the far side working with Mari, his youngest, while Shari worked with both Karin and Deirdre, and that left Gwaynn and Mille, which was just what Mille wanted. They were both on their knees digging and pulling at the buried vegetables, and Mille was always very close to Gwaynn. She accidentally brushed up against him several times before Gwaynn became aware of his surroundings. He looked up at the girl, who was near the same age as Vio, though she could not look or be any more different.

Mille was thin and fair with long, white blond hair, a trait that ran through her entire family. All the girls had long blond hair, as did their mother Shari, and even Lane, though his was cropped so short it was hard to tell if his hair was blond, or even there at all. Originally they came from the Kotas, the northern lands that eventually came under the control of the Palmerrio family. Blond hair and blue eyes was a common trait of the people of the north. Mille looked up at Gwaynn and smiled shyly and he noticed for the first time just how wonderful she looked. Indeed, all the Leek women were exceedingly attractive. He heard Deirdre snicker and looked over, both she and Karin were watching him closely and again his forehead furrowed in confusion. Deirdre batted her eyes at him until Shari elbowed her, though she was smiling also. Gwaynn looked back at Mille, who was blushing and he wondered just what was going on.

Mille looked as if she was about to say something but instead turned her face down and began working on the carrots once more. Gwaynn studied her profile, her long hair was pulled back and out of her face, he noticed the soft blond hairs that grew at the nape of her neck, then thought again of Vio.

Mille’s features were in sharp contrast with Vio’s, who was dark. Her ink black hair was cropped short just below her ears. She had tanned skin and large dark eyes. And where Vio was very fit, athletic and tough, Mille, even with her short life of hard work and service, was all softness, like new grass in springtime. Mille continued to work, but she was aware that Gwaynn was looking at her and kept her face turned slightly toward him.

“You will catch Krys soon,” she said, as he finally resumed his duties. Gwaynn stopped again. He was not surprised that she knew of his running, for that was common knowledge among the Leek family. It was a source of pride that one among them would be so included even if Gwaynn was not a true son. He was surprised however, that she was following his progress.

“You’ve been watching?” Gwaynn asked, curious, flattered, and a little concerned.

Mille looked up and blushed again. “Yes…well we all get up and watch the finish some days,” she answered, not mentioning the fact that she was the one who watched most days.

“Father was especially proud the day you beat Stephen. We all watched, though father told us not to celebrate, but it was all we could do to keep from cheering,” she said her words coming out in a gush. “Surely you noticed the smile on father’s face. It was there all day.”

Gwaynn shrugged. He had not noticed, in fact, he was not sure he could remember Lane smiling…ever.

They continued to work, Gwaynn in silence and Mille chatting away about her new horse, the kittens their cat Sunshine gave birth to the previous week, and food. Mille was apparently very hungry and was making Gwaynn so. The family stopped about an hour before sundown and headed back to the house to clean up before Shari and Karin began preparing supper.

The evening was spent eating, talking, telling stories and laughing. It was a typical night in the household with Gwaynn sitting on the floor close to the fire and Mille sitting close by, though not close enough to touch. They both spent the rest of the night stealing glances at one another.

That night, though his body was very tired his mind was awake and racing in all manner of ways, mostly in the directions of Mille and Vio. Yesterday, he hardly had a thought for girls, now such thoughts seemed to be consuming him alive. It was not until well after the witching hour that he finally nodded off.

ǂ

The next morning came very early for Gwaynn and he groaned softly when Leek nudged him awake. He lay in bed, sleepy for a moment then his mind was racing once more, so he got up and climbed down from the small loft he shared with the old man. Leek and Lane sat in the dark kitchen, the only light coming from the small fire in the cooking hearth. They would soon enlarge it for the morning cooking, but that could wait until Shari was up and about.

Gwaynn glanced at the back room door where the girls slept, but quickly turned and headed in toward the two men. He grabbed a slice of day old bread then headed out to relieve himself. He went to the side of the barn, as was his habit and gazed up at the morning stars, sighing with satisfaction. He popped the last bite of bread into his mouth, and then turned to head back to the well to get a drink before going down to the beach. But as he rounded the corner of the house, Mille was there waiting for him, still in her long, white nightdress. He immediately stopped moving, but somehow she was still getting closer, then suddenly she jumped into his arms and quickly kissed him. He stiffened for a moment. She was very small, soft and smelled vaguely of flowers, and he quickly found himself returning her kiss with more enthusiasm than he would have thought possible. She held him tight and he returned her embrace. Mille’s skin was still very warm having just come from her bed, and Gwaynn’s head was spinning when they finally broke. They stared at each other for a long moment until somehow he managed to tear his gaze from hers and he walked down to the beach for his morning run in a daze. He felt all out of focus and that morning he lost to B’dall by a good margin, and he was very disappointed to find that Vio was not waiting for him at the finish as she had always done in the past. He swam longer than usual since she was not waiting on the beach, then dried and headed up the path feeling like he was somehow losing control of his own life. It was a bewildering, fuzzy feeling he was not sure he liked…not sure at all.

He spent the day with Leek gathering cattle from the hilly regions of the island’s interior.

“Storm coming,” was all Leek said by way of explanation, though the sky was a cloudless blue. Gwaynn found that he was disappointed at first not to be around Mille, but quickly decided it would at least give him time to think on what had happened, and maybe sort through some of his thoughts which seemed to be all jumbled. He wasn’t sure what was happening to him. He had no experience with girls and he seemed unable to think of Mille in any kind of coherent fashion. His mind kept playing the morning kiss over and over again. Thoughts of the encounter gave him a pleasant warm feeling that started from somewhere inside and then spread until his entire body seemed to be tingling.

The day passed with Gwaynn lost in his thoughts, which fluttered about landing mostly on Mille, but occasionally on Vio as well. Neither of the girls knew who he truly was, both thought he was just a tragic boy from a shipwreck, a commoner like themselves. He knew his long term goals contained neither of them, and though it was not rare for those of noble blood to take a tumble with a commoner, it was nearly unheard of to take one as a wife. Even though the thought of taking a tumble with Mille made his stomach lurch and his heart jump in his chest, he doubted that she would be satisfied with just a tumble, and for some reason he could not even picture taking a tumble with Vio, alluring as she was.

“Oy!” Leek yelled, frowning. “Wipe the grin from your face and walk down into those trees.  A few of the buggers like to hide amongst ‘em.”

Gwaynn, jumped at the sound of the man’s voice, blushed, then nodded and moved off down the hill. He was still a distance away from the copse when he realized that Leek was correct. There were at least three head milling about inside the trees. The first one he caught sight of was a young bull calf, about three months old. Despite being young, the bull was already very large. For some reason seeing the young bull brought back thoughts of his large friend Karl, then of his former life, now seemingly long gone. He had only been on the island for….just over four months now, but it felt much, much longer. He thought of his Mother and how he missed her and suddenly he was overcome with grief, though his eyes remained completely dry. He thought of his sister and her execution, something he had not done now for weeks, and suddenly was angry. He would avenge them if he could, and not run away from his destiny, but any of that would have to wait until he was ready.

“Come on,” he said and moved around the calf with a stern look. He began to steer the calf out of the woods knowing that his mother would soon follow, which she did as did the two others that were with them. He continued to steer the young bull across the hilly grasslands toward the main buildings, but he only had to go a little past half way before he was able to turn back. He now knew that from there the cattle would continue to the barn on their own.

He worked with Leek into the early afternoon until all the cattle were moving back toward the main buildings.

“Storms coming,” Leek said, nodding toward the western horizon as they walked side-by-side back to the main house. Gwaynn’s stomach rumbled loudly as he looked at the dark clouds coming in the distance.

“Hear the thunder all ready,” Leek added with a straight face, referring to the noise coming from the boy’s abdomen. Gwaynn smiled, but it fell away as they moved closer and closer to the main house and he realized that though he had all day to consider what to do about Mille, as yet, he was unable to come to a decision. His mind raced for a solution, but not fast enough, as the house approached rapidly, seemingly on its own accord. They reached the door well before he was ready. They entered and there in the kitchen helping her mother prepare the early evening meal was Mille and her younger sister Mari. All the women fell suddenly quiet as they turned toward the newcomers and Mari put her hand over her mouth to silence the laughter that was threatening to bubble out of her.

“Grandpa!” she yelled and ran and jumped into the old man’s arms. Leek smiled widely and swung her about. Mille glanced at Gwaynn and then quickly away, suddenly shy.

“Grandpa,” Mari said as he set her back on the ground. “Mille and Gwaynn….”

“Mari!” Shari and Mille yelled together so loudly that the young girl fell immediately silent, Mille turning a bright shade of red.

Shari shook her head at her chastised daughter and Mari frowned.

“Mille, why don’t you take Gwaynn out and fetch the others,” she said, knowing that the only way to release the tension would be for her daughter and Gwaynn to be alone for a spell.

Mille nodded and moved to the door, making no signal for Gwaynn to follow, but he did so in any case. Once outside Mille seemed to grow more relaxed but Gwaynn felt as if he was still tied in knots. He wanted to touch the girl again, as he had never wanted to touch anyone in his life, but he dared not. They walked to the barn, each very aware of the other, but neither able to break the barrier that had somehow sprung up between them.

Clouds covered the sun and a strong gust suddenly hit them. Gwaynn could smell rain on the wind and he wondered how Leek had known a storm was coming so early in the day. He was jerked out of his thoughts as a small, warm hand slipped easily into his own. He glanced down at it and then over to Mille, who continued to look straight ahead, though she gave a quick squeeze with her hand. Gwaynn returned it and they both knew that, for the moment, everything was all right.

Just before they reached the barn Karin stepped out, and though Mille quickly jerked her hand from Gwaynn’s, her older sister noticed the contact before it was broken. Karin smiled and shook her head, studying Gwaynn who had a hard time meeting her eye for some reason. Deirdre followed.

“Suppers ready,” Mille said and with a glance at Gwaynn turned and moved ahead of him back to the house. Deirdre smiled at him as she passed, but Karin simply waited until they were both far enough up ahead not to over hear.

“I’m glad you’ve picked Mille,” she said quietly, and not for the first time wished that Gwaynn was a bit older.

“Picked Mille?” Gwaynn asked.

“Deirdre would have you I’m sure,” Karin continued, ignoring his question, “but she would have liked anyone. Mille is a bit more discriminating.”

Gwaynn was still confused. He had not actually picked anyone, though at present he could honestly say, right now, at this moment, Mille was the one person he would like to have alone. His royal life had been well regimented and his experience with young girls very limited. As far as he could remember he’d never been alone with a girl near his age with the exception of his sister. He never noticed this fact at the time because girls up until a few days ago did not interest him. They simply never crossed his mind.

“I like Mille,” he answered with a shrug and when she looked at him knowingly he flushed. “I like Deirdre too….and you and Mari,” he added quickly.

“You’re sweet,” she added, laughing at his discomfort, and began to move toward the house. “Just concentrate on Mille for now.”

Gwaynn knew he should tell them who he was, but he also realized that the more who knew, the more danger he was in. He decided to keep quiet for now, but would be sure to let Mille know before anyone could get hurt. He followed Karin and was soon inside the bustling house, which was beginning to feel very much like home.

ǂ

After dinner it was completely dark outside and the wind was beginning to gust strongly, but as yet, it had not started to rain. When everyone was finished eating, Mille and the rest of the girls stood and began to clear away the remains of the meal.

“Mille, take Gwaynn out and fetch more firewood before the rains start,” Shari said to her daughter, but gave no indication that she was in on any conspiracy. Deirdre visibly pouted, but Shari ignored her. As a mother, she understood all too well which way the wind was blowing at the moment. On the island, the facts were simple. There were very few eligible men available to her girls. Oh, there were a number of boys in town, but as a family they did not get away very often and then there was Getty Reed, the eldest boy of Tom and Jovana Reed. He was of a proper age for Deirdre, and Jovana seemed to think he was sweet on her, but Deirdre had yet to notice any of his charms. Up until the time Gwaynn had arrived, Deirdre seemed to have her mind set on a student…any student. Throughout the year she cycled through most of them. First she fancied William and then Stephen and then Krys. Getty, the son of another caretaker, was not even close to strumming her heartstrings.

But Mille was a bit more particular and had shown little or no interest in the boys surrounding her, unlike her older sister who flitted from one to another like a hummingbird feeding. Well, Mille’s mind had finally settled on a boy, and Shari was not about to let Deirdre distract him. And besides, over the past few months Shari had grown fond of Gwaynn. There was something exotic and mature about the boy. Even though he had a tragic past, what with the shipwreck and all, Gwaynn still managed to exude a quiet inner peace that would have attracted her immensely had he come along when she was younger. All in all she wanted Gwaynn to be happy and felt that Mille was the best match for him.

Without a word Gwaynn followed Mille outside, where she smiled shyly at him then took his hand and led him away from the house, and much to his surprise, away from the firewood.

“Let’s check the storm first,” Mille said, speaking loudly to be heard over the noise of the wind.

Gwaynn was less enthusiastic than the girl who led him by the hand, but he did not resist. She walked swiftly down the path to the beach, pulling him along. As they moved he watched the wind attack her blonde hair, working hard to pull it from the thong that held it back and out of her face. The thong was losing, but Mille paid it no mind. She stopped at the top of the rise that overlooked the ocean. Her hair broke loose and was now whipping nearly straight behind her, but they both ignored it, their attention riveted on the sea. The main part of the storm was still out near the horizon. Lightning lit the night sky brilliantly, briefly illuminating the distant waves. Near the shore those same waves, large and powerful, crashed against the beach and rode up high onto the sand.

“Isn’t it…” Mille shouted, but paused to watch the force of nature with wonder.

“Unspeakable,” Gwaynn finished for her, but he spoke barely above a whisper and she did not hear. He was remembering that last time he was in a storm on this very same sea. But even so, he allowed the girl to lead him down the pathway and closer to the pounding surf, such was the power she held over him. Once at the bottom of the hill they walked out on the beach, but not overly far, and well away from the surging water. The noise of the waves was tremendous, though down closer to the shore the wind was somewhat lessened however it still came in violent gusts.

“Gwaynn,” Mille said and pulled him to her. They stared into each other’s eyes for several moments before moving into a mutual embrace. They kissed hard and long, pressing closer and closer to one another, oblivious to the noise and wind around them. They dropped to the sand as one, first to a kneeling position and then Mille was on her back and he moved on top of her. They continued to kiss and explore even as the first raindrops hit the sand around them. The rain became steady before they finally noticed and broke apart, sitting and panting and glancing around. The rain grew harder as they stood. They instinctively ducked from the lightning, which was now all around them, thunder boomed as they ran back up the path, laughing, neither noticing the lone female figure watching them from the top of the ridge.

ǂ

The next morning Gwaynn was up before Lane came to wake him. The three ate in silence as usual, but Gwaynn was barely aware of the other two men. His mind was swimming with thoughts of Mille and he lingered as long as he dared to see if she would wake, but she did not.

“We’ll be busy checking the storm damage, don’t dally after the race,” Leek said as Gwaynn moved out the door. He was a bit disappointed with Mille, but still feeling high about the previous night never the less.

It was much cooler as he stepped out into the dim morning air and made his way down to the beach. The rest of the students were already milling about, stretching and running in short bursts to get warm. The sea was much calmer than the previous evening, but a large swath of sand was still heavy and wet. Nearly all of the students greeted Gwaynn, but Vio just stared at him strangely and said nothing. Gwaynn wondered at her behavior, but did not have time to dwell on it as B’dall lined them up and they began to run without any signal.

From the very beginning of the race, Gwaynn felt light and strong and he took up position directly behind Vio, which was his normal tactic. Today however, through the first half of the race and all the way to the turn he did not slowly fade behind, as was usual. At first he thought Vio was just having an off day, but as they made the turn he noticed that Krys and the others were well behind. As a group, the rest of the runners gave him little signs of encouragement as he and Vio passed by on the return run, all of course except B’dall, who merely scowled and would not meet Gwaynn’s eyes. Even Vio, from her position just ahead, spoke short words of encouragement every now and then.

“Here we go Gwaynn,” she said when they were within half a mile of the finish, and she began to speed up and finally pulled away from her new shadow. Gwaynn found he had nothing left and was unable to increase his speed though he tried desperately. He finished in all nearly a hundred yards behind her, which was much closer than anyone else had in quite a long while. She waited for him at the finish, still moving about to cool down. When she joined him, he was too winded to speak at first so they just walked together and slowly caught their breath. They both stripped and plunged into the sea, and were just emerging when Krys finished his run and was followed shortly thereafter by B’dall. Both Gwaynn and Vio were half-dressed and Krys was nearby, bent at the waist when B’dall reached them. Without a word he swung out and struck Gwaynn in the face with an elbow as he passed by.

Gwaynn, who had not yet pulled on his shirt, was watching as B’dall approached and was even aware of the blow coming, since it was not disguised all that well. But he forced himself to take it; otherwise he ran the risk of exposing his private sparring sessions. Though the blow caught him flush and hurt, not being able to defend against it, hurt more. He took the elbow almost directly in the mouth. His lip split and was starting to bleed even before he hit the sand. B’dall stopped and turned, intending to stand over Gwaynn, but to his surprise both Vio and Krys jumped between him and his victim, each of them crouched and ready in a fighting stance.

“Why did you do that?” Krys asked, advancing aggressively on the eldest student in the group. His assertiveness surprised and unnerved B’dall, who slowly began to retreat. But it was the look a pure anger on Vio’s face that really made him pause. He shook his head with a growl, then turned and moved up the path without any explanation.

“You should have defended yourself,” Vio said having witnessed the entire episode, understanding that B’dall threw the elbow with no deception. It was a blow Gwaynn could have blocked or avoided easily.

“No,” Gwaynn said, as Krys helped him to his feet. “No one is to know of my training. Master Kostek was very adamant about that,” he added, pausing here and there to spit blood out of his mouth. His lip was swelling quickly.

Vio frowned, wondering whether or not she could have taken a blow like that or would the years of training and instinct take over before she could think about it. That Gwaynn could have restrained himself impressed her more than his running and she was about to say so.

“Gwaaayyyn,” a cry sounded from above and they all turned in unison to see Mille running down the sandy hillside, worry written plainly on her face.

Gwaynn blushed and Vio scowled. Krys looked at his Prince with one eyebrow raised but made no comment as the girl hurried down the dune to the beach. Gwaynn liked Mille and over the past few days could think of no one else, but at the moment he was embarrassed by her attention.

“Are you alright? I saw him hit you. Oh my…look at your lip. We need to take you to see Pugg,” she said in one fast flowing stream of words.

“Um vine,” Gwaynn mumbled, his lip growing past the point where talking plainly was possible. He stopped her from using her skirt to wipe away the blood and used his own shirt instead.

Vio stormed off without another word, but Krys just stood there grinning at him. Gwaynn could see Tam and William coming up the beach and so he allowed Mille to lead him away before they arrived.

“I saw your finish,” Mille said as they moved up the bank. “That was the fastest you’ve ever run. Just wait until I tell father. He already thinks the world of you.” She continued to talk nearly non-stop all the way to the infirmary, but Gwaynn did not mind and just silently watched her lips and mouth. He like the way they moved and he liked the way she tossed her head about animatedly, causing her loose hair to flutter about.

ǂ

Tar Navarra and his party were now deep into Massi territory having zigzagged their way down the country side, hitting every town and hamlet on their way to find some clue as to the passing of Afton Sath. All through the journey thoughts of the Fultan girl buzzed through Navarra’s mind like a persistent horse fly. At times he caught himself repeating her name over and over like some kind of sick mantra, and he found this disturbing. This, and the fact that they’d come across no clue of Sath’s movements, did nothing to improve his mood.

“Perhaps he did head to the coast and leave by trireme,” Sergeant Lindsay said. He was aware of the Executioner’s bad mood, but knew there was nothing to be done for it except for possibly another Massi execution. Four more town magistrates had met their end to Navarra’s axe, but still, no one revealed any knowledge of Afton Sath’s whereabouts. Either they didn’t know or they were taking such secrets to the grave.

Navarra did not want to admit it, but he was beginning to suspect that Sath indeed might have left the country. They should have come across some clue to his passing. Navarra still could not believe the former Weapons Master would abandon his countrymen, but he was also having trouble believing that they had yet to come across even a hint of his movements. No, Navarra thought, he would not have fled the country. It was far more probable that Sath had traveled completely cross-country avoiding all contact, not only shunning towns, but any country people as well.

“No, I think he is still in Massi,” Navarra said, spotting a rider coming very fast down the road in their direction, a long plume of dust in his wake. The Executioner pulled to a stop and waited. Lindsay signaled his men to fan out and rode forward alone to meet the approaching rider.

Navarra watched as they met a good distance away and spoke together for a brief moment, then both turned and moved to him.

“King Arsinol requests your immediate return to Solarii,” the rider spoke. Sergeant Lindsay wisely remained quiet.

Navarra’s temper flared. If they left the hunt for Sath now, his trail would go utterly cold.

“Did the King state his reasons?” he asked, openly attempting to stay calm.

The rider’s horse moved backwards, though it was not clear if the horse or the rider initiated the movement. “They have found the Massi Prince,” he said, suddenly very wary. The Executioner had a fearsome reputation for killing those who displeased him. “He is hiding on Noble Island.”

Tar Navarra sat very still, then suddenly lifted his head. “Then let us return to Solarii,” he finally whispered, much to the relief of the others.

VIII

Gwaynn’s swollen lip did not keep him from running the next day, nor did the fact that he’d worked late the previous day helping to repair the storm damage. The damage, though considerable, was less than Lane expected.

Again Gwaynn finished the run trailing only Vio, but after the finish B’dall just avoided him, and surprisingly Vio did as well. It bothered Gwaynn that she departed so quickly, but he did not have time to dwell on it because later that morning the Tars returned.

They appeared suddenly, along with a number of Travelers, several Healers and one Scholar. Gwaynn was on the infirmary roof with Lane repairing a wooden gutter when the group suddenly appeared outside the main hall.

Lane, who was perched on the very top of his tallest ladder, noticed that the lad’s attention was not on the job and turned, half expecting to see his daughter waltzing up the road. He watched as the arriving group looked about for a moment, then as one, moved into the Grand Hall, led by Tar Amon and Tar Kostek.

“Let’s hurry and finish up,” Lane said with a frown. He could not remember when so many visitors from so many different islands were all on Noble at the same time.            “Master Kostek may have something else planned for us to do,” he explained.

Gwaynn nodded, very happy to see the Tars return. He hoped it meant that he would begin sparring with Vio again. All that afternoon he worked hard and fast, helping Lane fix the last of the most pressing damage. It was late in the day when Gwaynn noticed several Tars emerging from the hall, Tar Kostek was among them. Gwaynn hoped to catch his attention but Kostek walked off to the south in the direction his group of students usually trained in the early evening. He did not approach close enough to Gwaynn for him to ask about this evening.

When it was time for the students evening meal, Gwaynn conveniently found himself working on a fence, which ran along the south pasture. He was near the path that led to the student’s quarters so he was confident they would pass close by once they finished their training for the day. Lane was working in the same pasture, but nearly a quarter of a mile away.

Gwaynn was shoring up the fence posts with rocks when he could and marking those that would need additional support in the near future, but he was also keeping a very close eye out for Vio and the others. It was nearing sundown and he was actually afraid he would be called into to eat, when finally the group of tired students appeared over a rise, walking briskly home. Gwaynn could hear them talking but they were too far away for him to make out just what they were saying. He scanned the group, finding Vio and Krys, but was disappointed that Master Kostek did not seem to be among them.

As they moved closer, Gwaynn was surprised that it was B’dall who veered away from the others and approached him.

“Won’t be winning anymore races now, will you?” B’dall said with a smirk, and Gwaynn noticed that Vio, Krys, William and Tam, stopped on the road to listen, but not one of them approached closer.

“What do you mean by that?” Gwaynn asked, puzzled.

“Come on B’dall. Leave him be,” Krys said.

“Leave him alone,” Tam agreed, but Vio just stood there with her head down.

B’dall smiled at him. It was not a friendly smile. “Master Kostek just let us know. You’ll be going to Lato to live with the Scholars…hey maybe you can race them,” he added, reveling in the look of shock on Gwaynn’s face.

“You never belonged here anyway,” B’dall added, then turned to join the other students. Gwaynn stood silently as they moved off, his mind in turmoil. At first he thought Vio would pass without even a glance in his direction, but at the last moment she looked up and met his eyes, hers shining with tears unshed. The look on her face was enough to convince him of the truth of B’dall’s claim.

Gwaynn spent a subdued evening with Leek and his family. He sat, not saying much of anything, his mind darting this way and that about his possible future. Mille was concerned, but the rest of the family dealt with his silence without much thought. They were becoming accustomed to Gwaynn’s reserved personality and it was only natural for the youth to have some down times after all the tragedy that had befallen him in his short life. For his part, Gwaynn was not truly aware of the family around him; even Mille was far from his mind. One thing he was sure of however, he did not want to leave Noble Island.

After he picked at the food in front of him for the required length of time, Gwaynn stood and excused himself and went outside, desperately hoping that Master Kostek would arrive and tell him it was all a mistake and he would not be leaving. But as the evening slowly turned into night, Kostek did not appear either to let him know any news or to recommence his sparring sessions with Vio.

Mille however, did appear. Gwaynn, who was sitting on a fence out in front of the house, saw her emerge. He said nothing as she approached and stopped next to him leaning on the fence. They both remained silent for several long moments.

“Are you all right?” the girl finally asked.

Gwaynn shook his head. “No. B’dall says that I’m to be leaving for Lato Island,” he answered bluntly, seeing no point in drawing out what was bothering him. Mille gave him a stricken look.

“Lato…but why?” She finally asked.

Gwaynn just shrugged. “I was hoping Tar Kostek would come by and let me know. It could just be B’dall playing with me,” he added, hoping but not truly believing it. Krys or Vio would have let him know if it were otherwise. Mille moved closer and leaned her head against his chest, but did not say anything, and in the dark Gwaynn could not see the tears slowly sliding down her face. They waited together silently for over two hours more but Kostek still did not appear and so finally they went back inside together.

Gwaynn expected a sleepless night, but surprisingly he dropped right off and was a little disorientated when Lane nudged him awake in the morning.

“It’s time,” the man said so Gwaynn rose and pulled on his pants before he remembered that he would be leaving. He sat back on the bed, considering his options for a moment then making up his mind he stood and moved downstairs. As usual he grabbed a slice of bread, nodded to the two men sitting in the kitchen, and walked out into the early morning air. He stretched, relieved himself from the night then headed down to the beach for his morning run.

Krys, Vio, William and Tam were down on the beach when Gwaynn approached.

“Morn,” Gwaynn said.

“Morn,” both William and Tam said in unison. Vio nodded but said nothing.

“I’m sorry,” Krys added but Gwaynn waved him away.

“We will see,” Gwaynn said more hopeful than he felt and then watched as the other students topped a rise and headed down to join them. B’dall approached, but he said nothing and just smirked at Gwaynn. Tar Kostek was not with them, nor apparently would he be joining them, because they all lined up and began to run.

At the two-mile mark, Vio and Gwaynn began to pull away from the rest of the students. Gwaynn was tucked in behind her, as was his normal position of late, but for some reason just before the turn he moved over, sped up and past her, actually reaching the point ahead of her. Vio had not trailed at the half way point now for more than six months and she smiled despite her heavy heart. Her competitive spirit however, caused her to speed up, but as she did Gwaynn did likewise. They had an enormous lead when they finally passed the students heading the other direction and they were holding to their pace. When the finish finally came into sight, both were near exhaustion, but both continued to run all out. They even increased their speed the last quarter of a mile. Gwaynn was still in the lead and was determined that the girl would not pass him, not today. As they came down to the end Vio managed to run side by side with him and together they flashed toward the finish. But just at the end, Gwaynn with his last ounce of energy, lunged through the finish just ahead of the girl who could not be beaten. They both collapsed on the ground, panting hard and then Gwaynn turned over and threw up his morning bread.

“Very, very impressive,” said a voice to their left. Gwaynn looked over and saw Tar Kostek moving down a dune toward them. It was several moments before either could talk, but Kostek just stood above them, waiting. Finally Gwaynn caught his breath enough to stand, his legs very wobbly. He moved over until he stood above Vio, who was still breathing hard and he extended a hand. She smiled and took it and he helped her to her feet. Together they began walking around, getting their wind back.

Eventually they headed back to where Kostek stood.

“It’s true then,” Gwaynn stated. He had to know. “I am to go to Lato Island?”

Vio stopped where she was, all attention, looking closely at her Master.

“Yes,” Kostek said. “That appears to be the decision.”

“Do I have anything to say about where I go?”

Kostek frowned. “That is not up to me. I am to take you before the Council this afternoon. They will make the ultimate decision. But know that whatever they decide, it will be in your best interests.”

Gwaynn nodded but said nothing, and moved off down the beach with Vio following. He stripped and ran out into the sea. She followed him. They swam about, not speaking, just enjoying the cooling wetness, until finally she swam over to him.

“Will you go?” She asked, only her head above water. They were in very deep.

“I’m not sure I will have a choice,” Gwaynn answered, facing her. They were only a few feet apart, but she would not go closer.

“I hear it is a beautiful island, gardens everywhere,” she added quietly. Gwaynn had no answer for that and began to move toward the beach.

“Gwaynn,” Vio said.

“Yes,” he answered without turning, still moving slowly away from her.

“Gwaynn,” she said again. This time he stopped and turned back to her, noticing a hint of panic in her voice.

“The…the other night,” she began and he noticed that her face was growing red, “the night of the storm. I…I saw you here on the beach with that girl.”

Gwaynn said nothing, but he felt his face grow hot as well. He looked at Vio, who stared back, her dark eyes growing impossibly large.

“Do you love her?” Vio asked, barely above a whisper.

Gwaynn frowned, having never actually thought about it. “I like Mille,” he answered and Vio scowled at her name. “You’d like her too.”

“I’m sure,” Vio answered, gathered her courage and moved a bit closer.

“Do you love her?” Vio asked once more.

Gwaynn rubbed his face. “No,” he answered finally. “I like Mille, but I cannot become too involved with anyone.

Now Vio frowned, her heart soared with the first part of his answer and fell with the last.

“But why? I will not be on Noble Island forever,” Vio answered then blushed even harder as she realized just what her statement revealed.

Gwaynn smiled at her, truly touched, but shook his head. “No, I am a danger to anyone close to me, plus I have other things to do. Perhaps the Council is right; maybe it is time for me to go.”

“But Gwaynn…” Vio began.

“Prince Gwaynn Massi,” Gwaynn interrupted, unsure of why he told her, knowing it was stupid and dangerous. He could not help himself, but somehow he knew that she would never betray him. “That’s who I am. My family is dead. I will be dead too, if my enemies ever find out who I am and where I am.”

Vio was shocked into silence and looked at him in horror; suddenly she burst into tears and fled from him.

“Vio,” he shouted, trying to follow, but she waved him off and literally ran from the beach naked, gathering her clothes as she went.

ǂ

Tar Kostek came to collect Gwaynn just after he’d finished pushing his mid-day meal around on his plate. He came on horseback and Gwaynn was surprised to find that Lane had saddled up Prolly for Gwaynn to ride. They were on their way to Herra, the largest town on Noble, located near the center of the island. It was where the Council convened.

“It’s only a bit over ten miles,” Master Kostek said with a slight smile. “You could run it easily, but horses will be a bit more dignified.

Gwaynn nodded and swung up easily onto the horse. He’d not been on one for a long time but like nearly all royalty, he was a very accomplished rider. He turned the horse and was about to spur her into a trot when Mille rushed outside, followed closely by Deirdre and Karin. They all waved goodbye and Gwaynn waved in return then without looking back he headed off after his Master.

Despite the circumstances, Gwaynn found that he enjoyed the trip and even smiled as they entered Herra, which was located on the slopes of a pair of rolling hills. The immense Grand Hall was perched on the summit of the highest hill and was visible for many miles. It was heavily columned and made completely of white granite, which gleamed brightly against the dark blue of the sky.

As they made their way across the Parm River, Gwaynn noticed many small galleys docked along its banks. The low quarter, around the river, was the shopping district and at the moment it was very crowded and noisy. They rode through without stopping, though Gwaynn turned this way and that, looking at the brightly clothed shoppers. They made their way up and up, past more shops and then later a housing district. The higher they went the larger the buildings became. Near the top most were all made of white granite.

No one was waiting outside the Grand Hall when they arrived but two boys quickly appeared to lead their horses off. Gwaynn nodded at them but said nothing, and followed Kostek up the stairs without a word. On either side of the stairs was a large statue of a Weapons Masters, each in a classic fighting stance. The stone Master on the right sported a pair of kali, and the one on the left a long sword. Gwaynn was studying the artwork as he climbed, so he failed to notice that Tar Amon and Tar Endid were waiting for them at the top of the steps.

“The Council is waiting in the Sparring Hall,” Tar Amon said, placing a hand on Gwaynn’s shoulder.

“You are the High Tar,” Gwaynn stated, just a little accusatorily.

Amon nodded. “Yes, but it is the Council as a whole that will make this decision.”

“The decision has not been made then?” Gwaynn asked.

Amon smiled slightly. “The final decision has not been made as yet. First they would like to see you fight. But be aware that not all on the Council are privy of your true lineage.”Amon answered.

Gwaynn nodded, not truly understanding. How could they make a decision if they were not aware of who he was, and why was a decision even coming before the Council if that were the case?

Amon saw the boy’s confusion and berated himself for not better explaining the situation earlier.

“Only a few on the Council know the entire story, but the High Traveler and the Master Scholar both now know your true name. The Master Scholar, Putal, would like you to spend time on his island, though he does not fully realize the danger that would put his people in. He is not convinced that the High King is attempting to shift the balance of power, and feels that if the King was involved in the downfall of the Massi it was done so out of weakness and love. He believes that if the High King became aware of your continued existence he may yet return you to the throne of Massi and thus end the danger to the land. The Council is here to decide whether or not to grant his request that you be sent to Lato.”

Gwaynn nodded as if understanding, though he had a feeling he was missing something vital, but he asked no more questions as they crossed the portico and went through a set of large, heavily carved mahogany doors.

They immediately entered into a long hallway, which ran to the right and left, but they crossed this and went through another set of carved wooden doors. This pair opened into a very large room with a ceiling several stories high.

Gwaynn looked up at the rectangular ceiling far above and saw that it was painted royal blue with a gleaming gold sword running through the middle, the symbol of the Weapons Masters. There was also a balcony directly above, where a large number of people stood staring down at him. As they made their way farther into the room, Gwaynn’s attention was diverted to the large white marble dais that dominated the eastern end of the room. On the dais sat seven men and three women, all were elderly in Gwaynn’s estimation. He noticed that the seat directly in the center was unoccupied and wondered about it briefly. Behind the Council was a set of risers where another twenty to thirty people sat, most of them were much younger than the group that sat before them.

Tar Kostek placed a hand on Gwaynn’s shoulder easing him to a halt, while Tar Amon continued up and took the seat in the center of the Council. Gwaynn raised an eyebrow. Once in his place, Tar Amon banged a gavel to get everyone’s attention.

“Gwaynn, you have been called before the Council to determine whether we shall grant the request of Master Scholar Putal that you be put under his care for the remainder of your youth.”

Someone coughed from behind and above Gwaynn, but otherwise everything was quiet.

“Normally, we would defer to the judgment of Master Putal, but Master Kostek insists your fighting skills are worthy of Noble Island,” Tar Amon paused as a murmur went through the crowd. “If your skills are deemed worthy of our island it may be decided that you should remain and continue to study with us,” the gallery grew restless, for it was obvious that Gwaynn was not a formal student and had not been approved by the High King. The buzz of the crowd seemed to annoy the High Tar slightly. “However, even if we grant you leave to stay and study, you will never be given the rank of Weapons Master, or that of Tar.” He finished, and the crowd finally went quiet.

Gwaynn nodded, but otherwise stood impassive.

“Tar Endid,” Amon said addressing the large red headed instructor. “You have the honors,” he added, motioning to Gwaynn.

Endid bowed to the Council and removed a pair of kata from his belt, while another acolyte brought Gwaynn a pair. Endid then turned and bowed to Gwaynn, which he returned and then they both faced off, each in a classic stance, prepared to fight. They both remained poised and ready, unmoving until Amon addressed them once more.

“You may begin!”

Despite the audience, and the fact that so much was riding on his performance, Gwaynn fought as he always did since coming to the island, attacking relentlessly. Tar Endid was caught completely off guard by the skill of his young opponent and it was all he could do in the first moments of the fight to keep from being scored upon. Endid actually laughed aloud, marveling at the proficiency of the boy, but he somehow managed to deflect the initial onslaught, and then began to find the rhythm of this aggressive young man. It still took him, a Tar, an inordinately long time before he scored his first hit. He was elated at his victory, then immediately realized just what that meant. ‘They could not lose this boy!’ Endid thought. ‘If he left now it would be a tragedy.’

He was about to say as much but Gwaynn, who had backed off, bowed and then attacked again. He came at Endid with even more speed and ferocity than he had in the opening moments, but this time Endid was prepared and met the attack with a ferocious counter attack of his own, driving the boy back. Then Gwaynn stumbled, and almost fell, but as Endid moved in, he was met with a powerful kick to the midsection. The Tar doubled over and dropped to his knees, surprised beyond comprehension.

The Hall was utterly quiet, the audience above shocked and the Council sat in silence. Gwaynn backed off and bowed once more. He waited, ready for his opponent to rise and do battle. Tar Endid stood and faced the Council gave a half bow, then turned to Gwaynn and smiled. This time it was Endid who attacked and kept up an unremitting attack, never giving the boy a moment’s respite until finally he scored a glancing blow on Gwaynn’s left shoulder. Both stopped and backed away from the other once more. Each bowed and then continued. The sparring went on for another half an hour, with Gwaynn only scoring two more hits versus Endid’s ten, but it was clear to all present that the boy had truly exceptional skill. Even Tar Amon, who had been informed repeatedly by Master Kostek of Gwaynn’s talent, was taken by surprise and watched most of the sparring match in astonishment.

When they finally finished their bout, Tar Endid slapped Gwaynn on the shoulder, and turned to the Council. “He must stay!” he shouted emphatically. Noise immediately erupted from the balcony above but this time Gwaynn could tell it was of a positive nature.

Tar Amon stood and held out his hands, motioning for quiet. It took several long moments but finally the Hall sputtered into silence once more.

“It is now obvious,” Amon began, “that this bout was not a waste of our time as some have suggested.” He glanced down the table to his left. Several of those on the Council smiled ruefully at him. “And it is also obvious that we made a grave selection error some five years ago…”

“Tar Amon…” interrupted a voice almost directly behind the speaker. Amon turned. It was Master Scholar Putal, “if I may interrupt.” Master Putal was a tall man with a full head of silvery hair. He stood very straight and moved with a certain meticulous grace down to Tar Amon’s side.

“The boy has skill,” Putal began. “Even I can not deny that, but this decision should not be made on fighting skills alone.” The Master Scholar turned and addressed Gwaynn directly. “Knowledge too can be a powerful weapon against your enemies and it is knowledge that we of Lato Island will give you. Knowledge beyond your ability to fathom and not just of the current situation, but knowledge spanning back in time through the now and into the second age of man, and some believe even beyond that, back to the first age and the very beginning of time itself.”

Putal shifted his attention back to Tar Amon and the Council. “Perhaps the decision should be the boy’s. Perhaps we should give him the knowledge he needs to choose and allow him to decide for himself.”

A murmur went up through the crowd and then a gasp as another man stood from the very back of the risers. He moved down and walked around to the front of the Council.

“Tar Nev, Tar Nev,” whispers filtered from the gallery above. Gwaynn frowned and then just gawked at the man. The man bowed to the council once and then turned to study the boy before him more closely. Tar Nev was the most famous Tar of his day, he was also simply the strangest Master Gwaynn had ever laid eyes upon. He was shorter than Gwaynn had expected, but with a full head of long, bushy dirty blond hair. It was not tied back, or even controlled in any way and looked strikingly like a field that a farmer had allowed to go fallow. Not a hair style one would expect to see on any Tar, let alone one of the Masters. His face was slightly grizzled, but he possessed startlingly gray eyes, that almost seemed to glow in the light of the hall. It was his eyes that gave the Master a slightly youthful appearance despite his obvious years.

“I will train Gwaynn,” he said simply and the Hall exploded with shouts, both cheers and protests. Tar Nev was the latest of a long line of Solitary Tars going back generations to Tar Ephs himself. Over three hundred years ago, Ephs, whose skill with weapons was unsurpassed at the time, broke off from the traditional school and refused to teach until very late in his life. He finally took a single exceptional student, who he trained and who likewise grew to dominate every other Tar of his generation, and so it went through the ages. One Tar, one student. Tar Nev, who was said to be the greatest of all the Solitaries, had yet to take a student…..that is, until now.

Both Master Putal and Tar Amon stood speechless, while Endid gazed at Tar Nev with something close to awe. Putal bowed to Tar Nev and without a word slowly turned and moved back to his seat. He knew that if the Solitary Tar had finally made his choice for student, nothing and no one would stand in the way of that decision.

Tar Amon looked at Tar Nev then down to Gwaynn, who was looking from one to the other, just as shocked as the rest of the Hall by this development.

“He is yours to train,” Amon said.

Nev nodded and turned to Gwaynn, who looked up at the strange, infamous man in front of him.

“Come. We will talk a moment,” Nev said and they left the Hall together.

ǂ

Late that evening Gwaynn returned to Leek’s home to collect the few belongings and clothes he now owned. Supper was over, but Shari collected enough leftovers to fill up the growing boy.

“Tar Nev!” Leek said loudly to Gwaynn, his eyes shining with pride. “It was thought that perhaps his legacy would be lost by his refusal to choose an acolyte.”

Gwaynn nodded, but said nothing, his mouth full of bread.

“Tar Nev has come to the Competitions the last twelve years,” Shari added refilling Gwaynn’s cup of cider, “and chosen no one.”

“After last year it was thought that Vio might be chosen, but now…” Leek said and Gwaynn was truly surprised to see a small smile on his face.

“She is very good,” Gwaynn added in between bites, his mind flirting with the thought of his sparring partner and their last encounter, and as always when his mind turned to Vio it invariable slid toward Mille. He had yet to see her since his return.

“Where’s Mille?” he asked blushing, though he tried to sound nonchalant.

Shari smiled. “She’s down on the beach collecting night crabs with Mari.”

Gwaynn nodded and finished his meal as quickly as he could, which even for his age was remarkably fast. He took his leave; anxious to see Mille as soon as possible, wanting to be the one to tell her he would not be leaving the island, though they would no longer be living under the same roof.

He stepped outside, thinking to head directly to the beach, but Master Kostek stood just outside the door.

“Greetings,” Kostek said. “Walk with me a moment Gwaynn,” he added and began to move off toward his quarters.

Gwaynn was a bit impatient, after all he had just spent the day riding back with his old Master, and only a year ago he may have begged off, but now he just took a deep breath and followed. They entered the older man’s quarters and Gwaynn was hit with a wave of nostalgia, suddenly he wanted to see Vio just as badly as he wanted to see Mille.

“Vio is on her way but will be delayed,” Kostek said as if reading the young man’s mind even though his back was still turned.

“I rarely use this set anymore,” he said by way of explanation. “My favorites are a bit longer now, but these were my first,” he added, then turned and removed a set of short, beautiful tapered swords from a leather casing. He handed them to Gwaynn, who held them as if they were treasure. The swords, kali they were called, were about three and a half feet in length though a good foot of that was the grip and pommel. They were highly polished and Gwaynn would have taken them for new except for the few nicks in one of the blades and another on the hand guard.

“I carried these for a long time,” Master Kostek said. “My master presented them to me when I graduated. I would like you to have them now.”

Gwaynn looked up at the man, stunned.

Kostek smiled down at him, though he noticed for the first time that Gwaynn had grown since coming to Noble. “The grips are black sharkskin,” Kostek explained. “It is the best, keeps them from slipping even when your hands become sweaty. I’ve insisted on such grips ever since owning this pair,” he explained, trying to cover the awkward first moments for the young man.

Gwaynn, who had once owned a set far more expensive than these was very moved, and for a moment could not find the words.

“I thank you,” he finally managed, barely above a whisper.

Kostek was surprised to find that he was also becoming emotional. He clapped Gwaynn on the back. “You’ll get some use out of them…do not doubt it.”

Gwaynn agreed with a grim smile then held them out, spinning them about to get the feel of them. They were perfectly balanced and Gwaynn instantly knew that though his old pair may have been bejeweled and laced with intricate carvings, they were infinitely inferior to this pair.

“Thank you,” Gwaynn repeated and made his leave, using the excuse that he still had to gather his things for the return trip to the far side of the island, but he promised to return shortly to say his goodbyes to Vio. Once outside he tucked his new Kali into his belt and quickly moved down the path, which led to the beach.

The moon was up and nearly full, bathing the path in a silvery glow. Wild grasses grew tall on either side of the pathway and seemed to give off a pale yellow light of their own. They swayed softly in the light breeze, which was coming off the sea and nearly hid the small girl from Gwaynn’s sharp vision, but he caught the odd shape out of the corner of his eye and stopped. At first he thought Mari was simply trying to hide from him. But when he left the path, moving toward her, she did not jump up as he was expecting, instead she still lay completely motionless.

“Mari?” Gwaynn said softly, the hair on the back of his neck standing up. He stopped above her, but before bending down he carefully took in his surroundings. He thought to call for Mille but remained quiet. Something was not right. Finally he bent. Mari, who was lying face down in the sand, still made no move and with much trepidation Gwaynn reached out and took hold of her shoulder. He turned her over and her arms flayed limply. There was a deep cut in her forehead, which had bled copiously from the look, but it was now just oozing a bit of blood. She was unconscious, but when Gwaynn put a hand to her chest he could feel her heart beating and he sighed with relief.

He rose to his full height and again thought to call for Mille, but something kept him from doing so. He made his way back to the path, this time moving cautiously. He still had yet to spot a soul when something flew out of the night at him. He jumped, and then instinctively crouched down as a heavy object landed with a thud not far from where he was squatting. At first he did not recognize what he was looking at and it took several moments for him to realize he was looking at a human head. But the moonlight was bright and eventually Mille’s hair and facial features came into focus. Her mouth was open in a silent scream. Her eyes were wide and clear and though they were still blue, they were now blank of all feeling.

“Were you looking for her?” A voice asked from out of the darkness.

Gwaynn froze in a crouch for a long moment, staring at the mouth he had so recently kissed. His heart pounded, his ears roared and he took little notice of three additional black shapes that rose out of darkness around him. All together they moved silently toward him, but only one was close enough to present an immediate threat.

Gwaynn slowly rose to his feet, pain and anger beginning to well up inside him.

“I’ve been looking for you Prince Gwaynn Massi,” the voice, smooth and deep, said just loud enough to be heard, then a shape stood and Gwaynn saw him not twenty paces away, the Executioner Tar Navarra.

Gwaynn stared at him, but said nothing; instead he pulled the set of kali from his belt and tested their balance once again in the moonlight.

“Ah,” Tar Navarra said, like a sigh.

Gwaynn took a step forward, suddenly aware of someone rushing at him from behind and just a bit from his left. He sensed the sword stroke rather than saw it. He ducked, spun around and dove into a roll on top of the sand. The sword passed harmlessly over him, but as he passed the legs of his assailant he swung out and sliced through the meat and tendons of his right calf. The man screamed as Gwaynn finished his roll and rose to his feet once more, facing away from Navarra, but he was now facing the other two men who were rushing to attack him.

“Stop!” Navarra yelled. “I will deal with him, just keep him from escaping.”

The two men stopped in their tracks and took up positions to the left and right of the path. They kept their distance, stopping some thirty paces from Gwaynn, who had now turned to face Navarra. Gwaynn checked over his shoulder several times, but the men held their distance, so he started forward, passing the groaning man on the ground who gripped the back of his leg in an attempt to stop the bleeding. The man feebly swung his sword at Gwaynn, who deflected the blow effortlessly with one kali and sliced, through his neck with the other. As Gwaynn passed he heard the dying man behind him struggling for air, thrashing about to no avail. Gwaynn was unmoved.

“The cub has claws, I see,” Navarra said, but instead of his kali, he drew his long sword and then waited patiently for his quarry to come to him.

Gwaynn moved forward steadily then when he deemed himself close enough he rushed in to attack. Navarra parried the blows as Gwaynn streaked by. The Executioner was surprised at the boy’s courage and speed, but he was not fast enough, Navarra launched a powerful kick which struck the small of Gwaynn’s back and sent him sprawling in the sand. Navarra whirled and swung a deathblow, torn between toying with his victim and ending it quickly before any Weapons Masters were alerted.  He opted for the safe path, aiming for the back of the boy’s head. The blow struck only sand, as Gwaynn vaulted out of the path of the oncoming steel with a dexterity that was truly amazing.

“Ah…youth,” Navarra said, though the boy’s speed was beginning to unnerve him a little.

Gwaynn rolled to his feet and attacked once more, but again the Executioner managed to block every blow before sending Gwaynn to the sand again with a vicious elbow to the side of the head. Though the blow stunned Gwaynn and he hit the sand flat on his back he still managed to roll up and over onto his feet again in one fluid motion just in time to parry another swipe of the sword.

“I see your time on the island has not been wasted,” Navarra said and began his own attack. Gwaynn, who was not as adept at fighting someone skilled with a long sword, had trouble doing anything but back peddling. It took all of his ability to keep the sword from hitting home, and though he was not aware of it, his skill was beginning to frustrate the man before him. Navarra, an Executioner, was accustomed to overpowering his opponents almost at will. The boy had indeed become a threat, both to him and his Lord.

They continued to battle, Gwaynn growing dismayed that he was utterly unable to penetrate the Executioner’s defenses. Not a single one of his attacks had managed to come close to drawing blood, though he himself was bleeding from several nicks, one on his arm and another on his left thigh. Only his speed had allowed him to avoid the deadlier thrusts.

Navarra, however, was oblivious to the boy’s dismay, in fact, he was growing tired and a bit concerned that Prince Gwaynn showed no signs at all of fatigue. It seemed to Navarra as if the boy could go on fighting all night. Navarra knew he had to end this, and soon.

“Gwaynn!” a voice yelled from above, distracting the boy. Navarra took advantage of the moment and struck. Instinct told Gwaynn that the blow was coming a fraction of a second before it was to land, and he jerked his face out of the way. Still, the very tip of the razor sharp weapon sliced through his upper cheek, less than an inch from his right eye. Gwaynn dove away, hitting the sand with his shoulders, rolling and coming to his feet, instinctively running from his opponent. Navarra took another swing at him but missed by a good margin. He risked a look over his shoulder and spotted two figures rushing down the path. Both carried weapons. He watched as his men turned to engage them. When he turned back, he had just enough time to skip back from another attack.

‘The boy’s relentless,’ Navarra thought, with a hint of admiration. He would make an excellent Executioner.  He shrugged off the thought and sent a blow at the Prince, which would have cleanly parted his head from his shoulders, had it landed, but Gwaynn blocked it with relative ease. The cut on his face was bleeding freely now, but that did not keep him from coming on. Navarra blocked another attack and sent a kick that connected solidly with Gwaynn’s injured cheek. He sprawled backward in the sand, Gwaynn was back up quickly, but obviously stunned. Navarra was dimly aware that one of his men was down and screaming from a mortal wound, but he had the boy now and moved in for the finishing blow.

“You fought well,” Navarra purred, as the Prince staggered, shaking his head to clear it. But as Navarra began to move closer, he noticed three more figures top the rise at a run. Without hesitation they raced down the path toward him. Weapons Masters all. Navarra cursed, but did not hesitate. He turned and ran down the beach away from Gwaynn and away from his new enemies. Up ahead, not more than a quarter of a mile away, a half dozen Deutzani men, waiting by a long boat.

“Prepare!” Navarra yelled. Though winded, he managed to make himself heard. He was gratified to see three immediately begin to push the boat into the water, while the other three rushed forward a bit. All had bows and quickly notched arrows. They let a volley fly over Navarra’s head and into the direction of his pursuers. He heard a loud grunt which told him that one of the arrows had struck home. The pursuit broke off as he ran out into the water and pulled himself into the boat. Once aboard he finally glanced back, the Massi Prince was still attempting to come after him, fighting against the Tar who held him.

The men navigated the boat quickly out of the breakwater, far enough from shore that they all knew that they were now safe, at least for the moment. Navarra jerked a bow from the hand of a man nearest him and held out a hand for an arrow, which quickly appeared. He drew back the string as far as he was able, and though the boat was rocking and pitching in the waves, he let fly a near perfect shot and the instant it was gone he knew it would hit its mark. But the man holding Prince Gwaynn looked up into the impenetrable black sky and seemed to see the missile coming; with slow, deliberate movements he pulled Gwaynn to the left just before the arrow buried itself in the sand where the boy had stood a moment before. Navarra glared at them for a moment as another arrow was placed in his hand. He did not draw it, however, and turned from the receding shore.

“Let’s get to the ship quickly. They will launch against us as soon as they are able,” he said to those with him. “We must be well away when they do.” He received no argument on the matter, just stronger pulls on the oars.

It was Nev who held Gwaynn back; Nev, who kept him from exposing himself to more arrow fire; Nev, who kept him from racing out into the water to chase his enemy.

“You’ve done well lad,” Nev whispered in his ear, but did not relax his grip.

Krys and Vio ran up to the beach to join them and together they all watched as the long boat moved farther and farther from shore, until at last it was lost into the darkness.

“Who was it?” Krys asked confused and upset by the murder of the local girl. At first no one said anything, but then Gwaynn shrugged off the hold of his new mentor. He looked up the beach. Lane, Shari, and the rest of the family were coming, along with Tar Amon and Kostek.

“It was Tar Navarra,” he said evenly, much more calmly than he felt, “the Executioner who killed my mother and sister, the High Executioner for the Deutzani.”

Vio groaned but said nothing, and without a word they all turned and moved back up the beach toward the others.

That night Gwaynn was once again hanging from the awful scaffold in Solarii, the dogs fighting over his mother’s entrails, and Gwynn weeping at his side. But when she turned to him, she was suddenly transformed and it was Mille who gazed at him, a look of horror on her face.

“Keep the dogs away! Please, keep the dogs away.” She pleaded.

IX

It was a full week before Gwaynn and Tar Nev set off toward Mount Erato and the forests of Noble Island. They waited until after Mille’s burial, which was held on an absolutely gorgeous day; spring was coming fast to the islands. Gwaynn stood stone faced next to Leek during the ceremony, while Lane and his family grieved around him. Mari sported a thick white bandage that covered most of the top of her head, but she was recovering nicely. She smiled shyly at Gwaynn several times during the day but he didn’t smile back.

‘No one should be buried on a beautiful day,’ Gwaynn thought, feeling guilty about Mille’s death though the family did not blame Gwaynn for the tragedy, and their goodbyes, though brief, were heartfelt and sincere.

Once on the road Gwaynn said little, which suited Nev just fine. Living alone as he did, he was accustomed to silence and believed most people talked far too much in any case.

Gwaynn rode on Prolly.

“A loan,” Leek had said, telling Gwaynn he could return the mare when he finally left the Island. Nev rode a large strawberry roan named Ardent, who tried to bite Gwaynn every time he got too close.

“Ardent’s not partial to company,” Nev said by way of explanation, so Gwaynn kept his distance. They stopped in Herra for a night and were treated as distinguished visitors. The next morning they left early and entered the forest, the home of the Solitaries. They followed a path barely wide enough to accommodate the horses, and Gwaynn had to constantly watch for low branches that hung over the trail. It was hard and slow riding but within a dozen miles the forest opened into a wide grassy meadow that was set at the foot of the Erato Mountain. On a hill, near a bubbling stream that would eventually become the Parm river, sat a cabin, white washed and brilliant in the late afternoon sun. There was a flower garden to the south and behind Gwaynn saw a corral and a small out building.

Gwaynn frowned when he saw the picturesque, almost feminine setting. Nev noticed his look and chuckled.

“I’m a Solitary, not an animal,” he said with a smile. “The cabin was built almost fifty years ago by the folks of Herra for Tar Chillar, my Master. Now and then they travel up and repair what needs repairing and give it a new once over with paint.”

Gwaynn looked at Nev for a moment then back to the cabin and nodded. “The flower garden?” he asked.

“Oh, I tend to that,” Nev said, as they rode the rest of the way in silence.

“That man,” Nev said, after they had unsaddled the horses and set them to grazing, “on the beach….the Executioner.”

Gwaynn glared at Tar Nev wondering why he would bring that up at this moment.

“I don’t want to ever hear you call him a “Tar” again,” Nev ordered flatly, then pulled two sets of katas from inside the out building and tossed a set to Gwaynn. “And now I will show you why.”

Gwaynn caught the katas out of the air. He was tired from riding all day and a bit hungry, but that did not diminish his desire to discover what skills this Solitary possessed. Gwaynn had been curious about the Tar ever since the Council meeting. Everyone held him in high esteem, but outwardly Gwaynn could not tell why this was so. Nev was well passed middle age, though perhaps not yet old. He was less than average height, almost stocky, with broad, powerful looking shoulders and thick wrists, not someone you would believe possessed any speed or finesse.

Nev led him into the fenced area that Gwaynn had taken for a corral earlier. Inside the dirt was soft and loose. Nev headed toward the center then turned to face his new acolyte.

“Prepare,” he said and it was his only warning, because once Gwaynn raised his katas, the Tar attacked.

Before Gwaynn knew what had happened he found himself on his back, his right kata knocked clean from his grasp and out of the fenced area. Nev backed away as Gwaynn sat up, shook his head clear and stared up at the Tar above him. The sun was setting directly behind Nev’s bushy yellow hair and lit it like some sort of bizarre masculine halo. Gwaynn shook his head again, then stood and gathered in his missing kata. Inside his mind was racing, wondering what had just happened. He said nothing, however, just took up his position and raised his katas; moments later he was disarmed once more and again on his back. Nev walked over and retrieved the missing kata and then helped Gwaynn to his feet. Gwaynn took back his weapon and rubbed his left shoulder where apparently he’d been struck by a hard blow, but he was not aware of when.

“You may attack me this time,” Nev said, bowed and then made ready. Gwaynn returned the bow and then rushed in, but a moment later was disarmed; this time both katas went flying from blows so hard and fast Gwaynn could hardly believe it. He stood utterly still, his mouth hanging open.

“Fetch them,” Nev said. “And attack again if you still find the need.” Gwaynn walked off, thoroughly embarrassed to be doing so. He thought his time on the island had turned him into a somewhat competent fighter, but now his confidence was beginning to waver. When he returned to the center of the corral, he bowed and while consciously holding firmly to his weapons he moved in and attacked once more. This time, however, his attack was much more cautious. The outcome, however, was no different. He was again unarmed with fast, powerful blows and again ended sprawling on his back. Nev reached down to help the boy to his feet.

“I would have killed you on the beach very quickly,” Nev said, “any true Tar would have.”

“How…how,” Gwaynn stammered.

Nev smiled at him. “You are skilled, possibly more than I was at your age, but it takes years and years to earn the title of Tar. The Executioners may well be skilled, and some may take the title of Tars, but they are not and never will be.”

Gwaynn looked down at his empty hands once more. “But how?” He asked not understanding how he could be so easily disarmed, not once but three times.

Tar Nev chuckled.

“That is a secret of the Solitaries, which goes back countless generations, all the way to Galen Dawkins himself. It is a secret I will teach you,” Nev said and slapped Gwaynn lightly on the shoulder. Gwaynn winced and Nev threw back his head and laughed. It was a laugh that Gwaynn would soon get used to, though now at the beginning he found it odd that a Master, a Solitary would find humor in so many things.

“I will tell you that though it is a great secret, at its heart, it is surprisingly simple. But for now, I’m hungry. Let’s eat and we will start you true training in the morning.”

ǂ

“You have failed to kill him once more,” King Arsinol Deutzani said quietly, his anger barely contained. Tar Navarra seemed nonplussed, but Ja Brude sat perfectly still, his eyes never leaving the Executioner, as if he expected the man to attack at any moment.

“Our little dance was interrupted,” Navarra answered dimly, realizing that if the young Prince’s skill with weapons continued to improve it would be highly unlikely that he would be able to handle him alone. This was not the type of information he would share with the King or anyone else, but he was not above using an army to kill, if need be. He was an Executioner, what mattered was death, not how it was achieved.

“It seems there are Tars on Noble Island, and they have grown fond of the boy,” he added sarcastically, but was not about to go into the whole story behind the failure. Sergeant Lindsay and the others would also hold their tongues, if they knew what was good for them.

“I want him dead!” Arsinol yelled between bites of pork, slamming the handle of his knife on the table as he spoke.

“He will die,” Navarra stated simply.

“How? How will he die?”

“The Competitions are coming at year’s end,” Navarra said with a smile. “I believe it is still open to all the peoples of the Inland Sea.”

King Arsinol smiled in return.

“It would be dangerous to do such a thing with so many eyes present,” Ja finally spoke up.

Navarra turned to look at him, his stare making the King’s advisor uncomfortable.

“Accidents happen,” Navarra and the King said in unison and everyone smiled.

ǂ

Gwaynn woke early, Mille’s death still weighing heavily on his mind, but thankfully he remembered no dreams from the night before. The eastern sky was just beginning to glow from the light of the sunrise to come. Tar Nev was already up and waiting for him, sitting cross-legged in the grass field in front of the cabin. Gwaynn walked quietly over to him.

“You are eager to start?” Nev asked without turning around.

Gwaynn smiled. “No more than you,” he answered at which Nev chuckled.

“That is true. I have waited a long time for this day,” the Tar answered, rising gracefully to his feet.

“Here is the first big secret,” Nev said, his twisted smile barely showing in the darkness of the early morning. He was holding out a set of katas. Gwaynn frowned. He already had a pair of practice katas, but he reached out and took the new pair, he nearly dropped them. They were heavy, very heavy. Gwaynn transferred one to his left hand and lifted them, gauging their weight. He looked up at Nev questioningly.

“Five times the weight of a normal set,” he explained. “Practice with these and your blows will be fast and powerful. Come,” he added and began to walk up past the cabin. He stopped along the side wall and picked up a pair of logs from the pile and motioned for Gwaynn to do likewise. Gwaynn tucked his new katas in his pants, very aware of their weight and selected two larger logs, hoping to impress his new master. Nev just raised an eyebrow and led him out back and onto a path that led up the slopes of Mount Erato. They followed the trail as it slanted up through the fields of grass and onto the more rocky slopes. Before they’d gone a half a mile, the path began to switch back and forth so as not to be too steep to navigate and it wasn’t long before Gwaynn wished he had chosen smaller logs. He shook his head in disgust at his earlier wish to impress. They were only about a quarter of the way up the mountain when the sun suddenly popped up above the horizon. Gwaynn stopped a moment to look back. He was surprised that he could see Herra below in the distance and beyond that the lower part of the island. The sun was a bright red ball shining through a bank of clouds just above the gleaming Inland Sea.

“It is beautiful,” Nev said and then without another word turned away and led Gwaynn higher and higher up the mountain.

Gwaynn was breathing rapidly and his legs were shaky and tired by the time Nev stopped just over three-quarters of the way to the top. Nev set his logs on the ground and Gwaynn followed suit by dropping his own, flexing his arms from the pain.  The Tar then led Gwaynn to a rocky overhang and they sat on the very edge, their legs dangling out over a quarter of a mile drop off. From here, the whole of the island was visible, including the port towns of Hymnia and Euter.

“It looks much smaller from up here,” Gwaynn said as he sat next to his new Master.

“Excellent,” Tar Nev said. “But is it smaller?”

Gwaynn frowned. The question made no sense. Of course the island was not smaller. It stayed the same size no matter where you viewed it, but he refrained from answering right away. Tar Nev must have had a reason for such a question.

Nev smiled, noticing the boy’s hesitation. “Well?” he asked.

“No, the island is not smaller. It just appears so from up here,” Gwaynn answered curious about where all this was going.

“Hmmm,” Nev answered tilting his head a bit. “So you are saying that our perceptions have no affect on the outside world?”

Gwaynn thought for another moment and then nodded his head. “Yes. The island is the size it is no matter what I think.”

“Well,” Nev said sounding for the entire world like he was not sure of this answer. “We will see.”

The Tar stood and Gwaynn rose with him. “The second secret,” Nev said, “is yet another simple one. You must make your way to this cave everyday, rain or shine.”

Gwaynn looked about and in the side of the mountain, hidden by a large boulder and a stump of a tree was indeed the mouth of a cave. Nev led the way past the boulder, picking up his logs as he went. Gwaynn followed and immediately noticed that the mouth of the cave was quite large, almost twice his height and nearly three times as wide, but it wasn’t until they stepped into it that Gwaynn noticed that the cave actually had three separate openings. The one they entered was actually the smallest and was located on the far left. Inside was a cavern almost two hundred yards deep. The ceiling was about twenty feet high and nearly flat. It was held up by three massive, natural stone columns. It was darker inside than out but it only took Gwaynn’s eyes a few moments to adjust. Near the center of the cavern and close to one of the columns were the remains of a large fire pit. Nev walked over to the pit and placed his logs onto a stack of wood. Gwaynn dropped his also.

“Please bring up two logs everyday,” Nev said then sat down, crossed his legs and leaned his back against the rock column. “You may bring a smaller pair if you wish,” he added with a smile. Nev motioned Gwaynn to sit next to him and he did so, then the Tar pulled out a feather.

“The final secret is by far the hardest to master,” he said and held the feather up in front of him, but slightly above his head. He held it there for a long moment, gazing with a slight smile into Gwaynn’s eyes, which darted from the man before him to the feather above. Finally Nev released the feather and it began to slowly float down to the cave floor. It paused midway down, but it was several long seconds before Gwaynn realized that it had completely stopped and was no longer moving downward. In fact, it was not moving at all.

Gwaynn frowned and glanced at Tar Nev, who was still smiling, his eyes on Gwaynn’s and not on the feather at all. Gwaynn glanced back and forth a few times but the feather was perfectly motionless, hanging midway between them.

“How?” Was all Gwaynn could manage, his attention riveted on the still stationary feather. He passed a hand over it and then under it, but the feather still did not move. Finally he blew a puff of air at it expecting the ends of the feather rippled but they did not.

“Are you doing that?” he asked, his mouth popping open. “How is it possible?”

“Why would it not be possible?” Nev asked.

“Gravity,” Gwaynn answered simply. He knew, everyone knew, from as long ago as old Earth, the law of gravity.

“Oh gravity,” Nev said still smiling. “I have not broken that particular law. I have not interfered with gravity, that would be much harder than what I am actually doing,” Nev added then was thoughtful for a moment. “Though I am sure it would be possible to do such a thing.”

“What are you actually doing?”

Nev broke into a laugh. “What I am doing is very similar to what a Traveler does, except a Traveler creates a bubble in space in order to move from one location to another, and I am creating a bubble in time.”

“A bubble in time?” Gwaynn asked, confused.

Nev nodded. “This was common knowledge when Galen Dawkins first led our people to this land; the same can be said about the mystical abilities of the Travelers. The ability and knowledge went hand in hand, but over the centuries, though the innate ability remained, the knowledge was lost to all but a few. Manipulating space-time is now something only the very elite can do, but the ability to do so is engineered into all of us.”

“Space-time?”

Again the Tar nodded and smiled. “Yes, time and space are irrevocably linked. What is time but the measurement of solid objects moving through space? The world spins. We call it a day. The world revolves about the sun. We call it a year. We move through space and we move through time, but very few understand what a fascinating feat that truly is.”

Gwaynn frowned.

“But remember, all speed is relative, speed of movement or speed of time, each is forever linked, though such knowledge is far from intuitive.”

“Relative?”

Nev chuckled again and stood. “I move left,” he began and moved to Gwaynn’s left. “Relative to you. I move right….relative to you. I am moving fast or slow, relative to something either stationary or moving at a different speed. If there was but one thing in the universe, there would be no speed, there would be no time.”

“To alter your speed through space is comparatively easy. All living animals can do it, but all living things march through time in regimented fashion, like prisoners heading for the gallows. This does not have to be so. It is possible to alter the speed of time. Your body will do it naturally in times of great danger and I will show you how to accomplish the feat consciously.”

Gwaynn rubbed his forehead, which suddenly hurt. “But is such a thing possible?”

Nev laughed again, knowing that he was stuffing his new pupil’s head to the breaking point. “Well, yes! It is done naturally in nature. This was understood long ago. Gravity effects time, as does speed. Both stretch the fabric of time so that it passes differently to those in different locations. If nature can do this without conscious thought, why not man…consciously. It is not so amazing. To a tree the fact that you can walk and move through space is miraculous, but trees are easy to impress. I’m telling you now space and time are one, moving through one is no different than moving through the other and even trees can move through time.”

“And I can do such a thing?” Gwaynn asked, as the feather finally continued its decent to the cave floor.

“You can,” Nev answered with a nod and retrieved the feather. “It is possible for us because centuries ago, on old Earth, our ancestor Galen Dawkins was altered, changed at the molecular level. Unknowingly he was given the ability to control the nature of his atoms, even his electrons. As his descendants, we also have that power. We have the ability to make our bodies, down to our very atoms, coherent.”

“Coherent?”

Nev laughed. “Enough for now. Just be aware that you too will be able to manipulate both space and time.”

Gwaynn’s eyes flew suddenly wide. “You can Travel,” he stated.

His master nodded, encouraged by his new protégé’s mind. He reached into a sack he carried at his waist and pulled out an apple. He tossed it to Gwaynn and retrieved another for himself.

“I must warn you,” Nev said taking a bite of fruit. “This secret should not be used lightly. It takes a great deal out of you.”

“I can learn to do this?” Gwaynn asked, still suspicious.

Nev nodded. “You have been engineered to do so,” he answered and took another bite of his apple then he pulled out a small block of cheese, which he shared with Gwaynn, though the Tar ate most of it. Gwaynn sat silent, thinking, hardly noticing when Nev plucked out a handful of sugar cubes from his pocket, these he did not share with Gwaynn.

“Depending on the strength of the bubble, you will need to eat large amounts of food and possibly sleep as well. It takes a good deal of energy which must come from somewhere.”

Gwaynn was silent for a moment, pondering this new information then he glanced up at Nev.

“Can all Tars Travel?”

“They all have the ability, but not the knowledge. Please keep this information close. Neither the Travelers, nor our good High King would be too thrilled to know that some Tars can now Travel.”

“Can other Solitaries travel?”

Nev nodded then began to build a small fire in the pit. “Yes, but only a handful of them. Most still do not even realize it is possible. Most feel it is a skill only a Traveler can master, though what the Travelers themselves believe I do not know.”

Gwaynn sat thinking while Nev got the small fire going. Once it was burning pleasantly the Tar handed the feather to Gwaynn.

“To accomplish this thing is very difficult in one way and extraordinarily simple in another. Once you can do it you will look back and wonder how it was ever possible that it was beyond you.”

Gwaynn nodded, completely attentive to what the man before him was saying.

“First you must learn to control yourself, your mind and body,” Tar Nev said very seriously. “You have come a long way in controlling your body, and for one so young, your mind is surprisingly calm. But it was your attitude that truly made you attractive to me. You have a strong, persistent positive attitude despite the many tragedies that have befallen you. And that my young friend, is a very rare thing. Many both older and wiser than you have fallen into despair and cynicism and in that dark hole all learning ends.”

Gwaynn shifted uncomfortably, but said nothing.

“First I will teach you to meditate,” Nev continued, “and it is here in the cave that you will perfect what I teach you.”

“Meditate?”

Nev chuckled. “Yes, your mind must be under perfect control if you are to learn how to master time. It is not so hard,” he added placed another small log on the fire. “To begin I would like you to picture a man…the very first man. A man before family, before friends, before language; does he have thoughts this man with no language? What does he see when he first emerges from his own cave and looks out onto the world around him? Think on these things for a spell, or just sit and focus on your own breathing. Work on this for several hours each day and I will let you know when we can move on.”

ǂ

For nearly four months Gwaynn’s life fell into a routine of sameness. Everyday he awoke just after sunrise and climbed the mountain to the cave. Everyday he sat and contemplated about the man with no name, no knowledge, and no language and everyday he descended again to work in the garden for an hour and then spar with Tar Nev for the last five hours of daylight. He was thankful for his time alone, which he spent in thought. He could feel himself, his inner being, begin to calm. Even when thoughts of Mille or his family rose to the surface, his demeanor remained passive as he studied how these thoughts affected him, how his breathing became heavy along with his heart. His mind was becoming more disciplined and his body was becoming stronger by the day. Already he was beginning to see and feel the difference caused by working with the heavier katas. His arms were stronger, his grip was tighter and his reactions faster, but he was still no match for his instructor, who could plant him in the soft, loose soil of the sparring grounds at any time.

Only once in the four months did Gwaynn feel he was close to a breakthrough. One afternoon when he emerged from the cave, he looked down on the island and sea spread out below him and suddenly he saw the world in a whole new way. There were no trees, no water, no beach and no island. Everything is one to someone with no language, no thoughts. There is no division. The world before him blurred in his eyes, like an impressionist painting viewed through water. Suddenly he knew he could manipulate time just as he manipulated his own fingers and he rushed back into the cave. He sat with his legs crossed took a deep breath and held the feather out directly before his face, and let it go. It floated serenely down to the cave floor. Gwaynn frowned and picked it back up, concentrating, attempting to flex his new knowledge. He held the feather out once more, and again it floated all the way to the floor. Over and over he tried and over and over the feather floated to the floor despite his efforts to hold it in time. Gwaynn shrugged, disappointed but still convinced he was on the correct path. He picked the feather up, then without another thought about it made his way down the mountain.

“Everything is one,” he said to Nev as he sparred with him near dusk and his Master smiled.

“Yes…yes. That is good…essential. You’ve discovered what many of the great philosophers teach us,” he said excitedly. He dropped his katas and sat down quickly on the soft dirt floor of the pit. He motioned for Gwaynn to do likewise.

“You’ve controlled your mind,” Nev continued once Gwaynn was sitting across from him. “Not such an easy task to be sure, but your patience is impressive. Now, you will begin the process of learning to control your body…completely.”

Gwaynn only nodded, wondering where his bushy haired mentor was going to take him to now. “I understand that everything is one, but as hard as I try I cannot stop the feather from falling,” Gwaynn told Nev.

Nev laughed. “I’m not stopping the feather…that would be very hard. No I’m controlling my own passage through time instead. When I move faster through time the feather seems to slow and if I move very fast the feather appears to stop, but believe me, the feather is still falling at the same speed…every time.”

“First you must control your breathing,” Nev said and closed his eyes. After a moment Gwaynn did the same.

“Listen to your breathing, control it…in and out…consciously,” Nev instructed his voice soft and even. “Easy enough,” he added. “Now concentrate on your own beating heart. Can you feel the beats?  Can speed them up, and slow them down? Practice slowing your heart. Practice this everyday and when you master it I will show you how to lower the energy state of your very atoms. When you can do that and bring them to the very lowest state imaginable, your entire body will vibrate in unison and then unimaginable things will be possible.”

Gwaynn worked on mastering his body, his internal clock, for another three months. Most days he could not tell if he was making any progress at all, but on others he could actually feel his heart slow and he would enter a state of utter relaxation in which his awareness did not diminish, but rather, it seemed to expand. On these days he would emerge from the cave feeling very refreshed and strong. It soon became apparent to him that on such days his sparring was also heightened. On these days he felt he even pushed Nev to the limits of his fighting abilities.

Nev however, said very little about his performance, and never asked how his meditations were going. It seemed he taught by pointing the way, then remaining silent. When Gwaynn asked him about it one night, just before they went to bed, Nev just laughed.

“It’s obvious isn’t it,” he answered blowing out the oil lamp so that the light from the small fire in the hearth lit him dimly from the side, giving him and his hair an ethereal look. “Teachers can only show the path, students must walk it. It is up to each of us alone which paths we walk and which we stubbornly refuse to follow. Only you can control what you will learn and what you will not.”

The next morning, Gwaynn sat on the ledge, which overlooked the island. He stared out over the lush green of the forest to the blue water beyond and thought about what his Master had said the night before and found that he agreed completely. Master Sath had tried to teach him a great many things, but at the time, he was not willing to walk the path, so he learned very little. For his entire life, he had been his own master, but until right now, this very moment, he had been utterly unaware of that fact. In the past, he had focused on the small things that others would make him do…practice this…read that…act like this and not like that. It gave the illusion that others were ultimately in charge of him. This, however, was never the case. He was always his own master, able to do anything, but never willing to accept the consequences of actually taking control. But not anymore, he was aware of his power now. He would make his own decisions now even if it meant failure and death.

He calmed himself and banished such thoughts from his mind. He measured his breathing, released the pressure in his body and relaxed, slowing his heart, slower and slower. He was unaware when he dropped back onto the rock, unaware of the passage of time. Slower and slower his body functions fell, but inside his mind darted about faster than the speed of light. In all the universe, it was only with information that this was possible.

Nev found him lying peacefully at the edge of the precipice in the late afternoon sun. To anyone else, he would have appeared dead, or very nearly so, but Nev immediately knew that the lad had made a breakthrough and shook his head. His decision to accept Gwaynn as his student was obviously the correct one. The lad was the one, Nev was sure. He would begin the revolution. He would begin the process of bringing back the old knowledge to all the people of the Inland Sea. It was time. The Temple Islands had monopolized such things long enough, after all, each of them belonged to the Quantum Race.

ǂ

Gwaynn woke almost two days later. He sat up in his bed in the cabin, gripped with hunger and thirst. He swiveled in bed, smiling, not the least disoriented. He knew where he was; he knew where he had been. He stood on shaky legs and went to the water pump in the small kitchen. He pumped and drank for several long moments before finally satisfying his immediate need. Nev was outside, tending the garden. Gwaynn could hear the light digging sounds coming through the open windows of the cabin. A warm breeze blew inside and brushed his face. Gwaynn smiled again and walked to the door, his legs growing more solid underneath him by the second.

He pulled open the door and was struck by the vision of the world before him. He stared for a long moment at the trees in the distance and closer, the tall grasses blowing in the wind, the occasional insect which flew through the air and the call of the birds. He smiled broadly and stepped out into the day. The sun felt glorious on his face and arms as he moved across the front of the house and around the corner to the side. Nev was crouching down, his back to Gwaynn, but the Tar had heard the water pump and the front door, so he turned and met Gwaynn’s eyes and immediately noticed the twinkle in the boy that had not been there before.

“You’re back,” he said in his own light-hearted way.

Gwaynn smiled at him. It was the first true smile Nev had ever seen on the boy’s face. It looked good there.

“How’s your sister?” Nev asked and was not surprised when Gwaynn broke out laughing. Nev smiled back.

“You knew!” Gwaynn said. “She’s good. I…I spent years with her. She’s good.”

Nev smiled. “She would be the one to show you the way back,” he said. “And just in time too. We will be leaving in the morning.”

“Leaving?”

“Yes, we will be heading to Herra for the year end Competitions.”

“The Competitions,” Gwaynn answered and then nodded as if he already knew this.

ǂ

The trip to Herra was filled with conversation as Gwaynn told of his experiences over the last few days. Time had slowed for his body, but not his mind and while his body was near death, his mind was learning to control itself on the very lowest and highest levels. In his mind, his teacher was Gwynn, with her bright smile and ever-present confidence. But her presence did not surprise him, for in his youth she was the only person to whom he ever truly listened. He adored her; hung on her every word and watched her every move. In his mind, she showed him many, many things. Her teachings spanned many mental years and he absorbed it all, needed it all. In two days he had reclaimed the lifetime with her that he had thought lost on that fateful day during the fall of Solarii. He woke knowing it was not truly so, that Gwynn was an illusion of the mind, but he was happier, more at ease with his true past than at any time in his young life.

“You have taken step one…a very important step,” Nev said as they rode. “The others will come much more easily. It came faster than I expected.”

Gwaynn said nothing to that and they rode in silence for a time.

“It truly felt like I experienced a lifetime in those few days,” Gwaynn said and then almost shyly, like he was afraid of making a mistake and looked over at Nev.

“Is…is Gwynn still alive…somewhere?”

Nev nodded his head. “Your question is imprecise; but I will say that she does not live in this world, not in this reality. Make no mistake, as an individual in this universe, she is gone. For you, in this lifetime, she is dead. But in others…”

“In others?”

Nev nodded again. “There are countless worlds marching in stride with our own, countless Gwynn’s surviving…and dying, but that is for another time.”

Gwaynn sobered and was thankful when the trail narrowed and they had to ride single file for a spell. It gave him time to think and consider. Even if Gwynn was dead to him, he was still glad of his experience. It left him with the feeling that he was close to his twin once more. As the trail widened again, his spirits rose.

He spurred Prolly alongside then had to veer away sharply as Ardent tried to take a bite out his leg. Gwaynn scowled at the beast.

“What is the next step for me?”

“Next step?” Nev asked playfully. “You can already control time. Did you not just experience nearly a lifetime in a few days?”

Gwaynn fell silent, considering this question. “Yes, but I cannot hold a feather in mid air?”

Nev laughed and pulled his horse to a stop. “Can you not?” he asked and leaped from Ardent’s back. Gwaynn pulled Prolly up and dismounted, tying her reins to a nearby tree.

“And just what is so important about that?” Nev asked searching his pockets. “Do you have a feather?” he asked and Gwaynn searched his own pockets. He didn’t find one and shook his head.

“Never mind,” Nev added then pulled Gwaynn to the center of the trail and they sat down, as always cross-legged in front of each other.

“Control yourself…” Nev ordered. “Stay completely conscious.” Gwaynn did as he asked, slowed his breathing, slowed his heart.

“Can you feel your body? Can you feel your individual fingertips, the place behind your knees and the center of your back?”

Gwaynn opened his eyes. His Master sat there before him, then suddenly he was gone, and then a moment later he was back.

Gwaynn’s heartbeat increased. “You…you disappeared,” Gwaynn said astonished.

Nev shook his head. “No, from my vantage point I moved normally. I stood, tied off Ardent and returned. But I did so in a different time frame than you inhabit. It is no different from what you did. You moved to a slower level of time and experienced many years in only a matter of days, at least in your mind. I did the same thing, but brought my body along. Once I make the jump, relative to me, I seem to be moving normally, but all else is nearly standing still. The feather falls at the same speed…that’s a law. I’m not changing that, instead I’m changing the rate I move through time.”

Nev took a bite from an apple that seemed to just appear in his hand. “It is not something anyone can do for very long. It drains energy at an awful rate. Traveling through space is much, much easier.”

Gwaynn was silent for a time considering, he opened his mouth to speak, but Nev held up a hand.

“Start with your fingers…the tips first, feel them each individually, down past the blood flowing through them and down past the cells themselves. It time you will feel the beat…the vibration of your body and the universe, when that occurs, you will be able to stretch the fabric of time.” Nev said and got to his feet. “It should be easy,” he added with a smile. “Your mind controls time on a subconscious level already, you are just knowingly taking over.”

They rode the rest of the way to Herra without talking. Nev enjoying his surroundings and Gwaynn lost in thought. It was near mid-day when they topped a slight rise and the trees suddenly thinned. Directly below them lay Herra. Even from this distance, Gwaynn could tell it was bustling with activity. Many ships lay anchored along the Parm.

“You practice…I will wait,” Nev said and led them down to the city. “But do not be tempted to use this power in a fight; to do so and not succeed would be disastrous. Plus it may take years for you to master the concentration needed to become coherent. In a fight, manipulating time would take too much of your concentration away from the actual here and now. This is not to be used lightly, and for now, no one else is to know of it.”

This was the first time Nev had ever forbade him anything, but Gwaynn had no inclination to rebel. What the Tar demanded made sense, and Gwaynn knew he would have kept such knowledge close, even without the warning.

Herra was alive with activity, not only were nearly all the inhabitants of Noble Island descending upon the small city, but there were people of means from many lands arriving to watch the upcoming Competitions. Gwaynn saw banners from all the major Families, including the Palmerrio, from the northwest, the family Toranado from the west, as well as some minor families like the Cassinni and the Rhodono’s. There were likely others, but in the swell of the crowds, Gwaynn was not aware of them upon arriving. He also saw a host of others from the many islands, including several Travelers and they even bumped into Putal, the High Scholar.

“Your training is going well?” the old man asked, with a look that clearly revealed his disapproval of Gwaynn’s chosen path.

“Very,” Gwaynn and Tar Nev said as one, and Putal could only nod and continue on his way.

They passed by countless booths selling all manner of foodstuff, drinks, crafts and wares. Many a crier attempted to catch Gwaynn’s attention and perhaps any coin he might have on him, though some instantly grew somber as they caught sight of Tar Nev. Whispers tumbled about in their wake. It took Gwaynn nearly an hour before he became accustomed to the looks of awe he was getting from those who recognized his Master. Many a merchant quickly offered free drinks and sweetmeats when their eyes landed on the famous Tar. Gwaynn took his cue from Nev however, and politely declined all offers, at least until they came to a large tent set up on the northern outskirts of Herra directly off the main road. Nev guided Gwaynn into the tent and they quickly found a table, though moments before all had been taken.

“Nev!” yelled a large man with extremely bushy hair and a long dark beard. He had black eyes, which sparkled behind a particularly large nose, which was faintly tinted red. He moved quickly forward, a smile on his large face and grabbed Nev in a bear hug. The man actually lifted the Tar from the ground. Gwaynn watched the entire greeting in stunned disbelief. Up until now, few were even bold enough to greet Tar Nev, let alone swallow him up in a hug.

“Good to see you again Jon,” Nev said when he was finally released. He was smiling broadly at the much larger man, who ushered them both deeper into the tent and showed them to another table near a long bar.

“How’s the Carol-Anne?” Nev asked, as a pint of dark ale was set before him. Gwaynn was not truly surprised when a similar pint was placed before him.

“Ooooh, she’s fine, just fine. Strong and fast as ever, moored her in Euter three days back and then hauled the supplies overland,” Jon answered and winked at Gwaynn. “So it is true then, ye finally took on a lad for training.”

Nev smiled. “Yes, it’s true enough. Jon, I’d like you to meet Gwaynn. Gwaynn this is Jon, my brother, my only family, though he is large enough and eats enough for any two families.”

Jon threw his head back and laughed, causing most of the customers at other tables to look about, wondering at the disturbance. Many smiled when they saw it was Jon before going back to their own drinks and conversation. Jon was a well-known, well-liked trader of the Inland Sea, and most considered his ale second to none, except perhaps Fultan ale.

“So help your older brother out a bit,” Jon said, still smiling at Gwaynn. “I’m always in need of a little extra coin for food and drink. Who do you favor to win the Competitions?”

Nev shrugged. “Tar Kostek has a very strong team this year,” he answered glancing at Gwaynn, who smiled back. “Who would you pick among his team to win with katas?”

Gwaynn paused for a moment, wanting to pick Vio or Krys, but B’dall was definitely stronger and more experienced than the other two.

“Possibly Vio,” he finally said. “But if your food is on the line I would go with B’dall with katas, the staff, and hand to hand.”

Jon nodded his demeanor completely serious now. “Vio…Vio, isn’t she Kostek’s third year?”

Gwaynn smiled. “Yes.”

Jon whistled. “You seriously think a third year could compete for the championship?”

Gwaynn shrugged. “She is quite skilled,” he answered.

Jon grunted and then smiled. “Well, then she could be the one to earn me some coin.”

“And this Krys?”

“Excellent with the bow, fast with the katas, but still I think B’dall is the strongest from the group in everything but running and the bow.”

“Yes, he seems to be the favorite,” Jon answered, rambling about his favorite subject, “at least with the staff. But Tar Endid has an eighth year student, Seth I believe is his name, he is said to be quite fast and strong, and deadly with the katas. He finished higher than B’dall last year, though they did not face each other directly.”

Gwaynn shrugged. “It’s your stomach,” he answered.

Jon laughed and clapped him hard on the back. “So it is. So it is.”

X

All day long, Gwaynn kept an eye out for Master Kostek and his students, and even though he spent a good deal of the afternoon wandering the makeshift market alone, he did not spot any of his former companions, nor did he see Leek or his family. As he searched, he found himself at times trying to catch sight of Mille in the crowd, and a sharp pain in his heart always followed.

They stayed the night in Jon’s wagon, despite the fact that they had several offers for much more luxurious arrangements. The wagon suited Gwaynn just fine and he slept well in one of the hammocks placed near the ceiling despite the fact that Jon, located just below him, snored louder than most people could yell.

Gwaynn woke early, and with great difficulty, slipped out of the hammock without falling on Jon, then stepped outside in the crisp morning air. It was overcast and gray, and the damp smell of rain was in the air. Gwaynn frowned, the Competition was due to start around noon and he wondered if it would be called off or delayed, due to the weather. Very few people were up and even fewer were moving around as Gwaynn once again began to stroll about the market. He was used to walking or running first thing in the morning, so without a thought he walked clear through the town and across the river to the western side, where a great many tents were erected. He just crossed the main bridge over the Parm when he saw Leek, holding hands and walking with Mari. His heart lurched and for one brief moment he felt a strange inclination to turn away and hide among the tents before they spotted him, but instead he took a deep breath and made his way in their direction.

“Gwaynn!” Mari yelled when she finally set eyes on him. She pulled her hand free from Leek and ran to Gwaynn, jumping into his arms, hugging him fiercely. She looked and smelled like a little Mille, and he was instantly relieved that he had not turned away from them.

“Have you come to watch the students of Mele compete?” She asked but did not wait for an answer. “We are going to explore the Tent City while Mama cooks breakfast,” she said with a delighted smile, then leaned in close and whispered. “We’re having bacon,” she added and moved her eyebrows up and down several times. “You can come, couldn’t he Grandpa,” Mari implored as Gwaynn put her back on the ground, groaning loudly as he did.

“You must be bigger. You are getting too heavy for me,” Gwaynn told her.

“Gwaynn is always welcome at our table,” Leek said with an actual smile for the boy, and they all continued on with their explorations together. They strolled for a quarter of an hour before a light rain drove them back to the cover of the family tent.

Everyone was thrilled to see him again, though there was an underlying sadness to the meeting. Even Deirdre was subdued and did not attempt to charm him as usual, but the breakfast was nice, and Gwaynn was glad he went.

“Where is Tar Kostek and the students?” he asked Lane, as he prepared to take his leave. They stepped out of the tent, and though Lane was answering him, his words went unnoticed because not a hundred paces away, walking regally through the tent city was King Arsinol Deutzani and trailing just behind him was the Executioner Tar Navarra. Without thinking, Gwaynn made to follow them and was surprised to find that Lane was holding him back. Something of his murderous thoughts must have shown on his face because Lane, though angry and upset himself, only shook his head sadly at Gwaynn.

“It’s him, is it not?” Lane whispered, still holding Gwaynn by the arm.

Gwaynn nodded.

“Not here,” Lane added.

Gwaynn tried to shrug the man off, but Lane, who was strong from years of work, held fast.

“Oh, I would love for you to kill him now, so I can see,” Lane explained, still trying to control the struggling young man. “But for him to die now, you would have to die also…I would not see that.”

Gwaynn finally succeeded in throwing off Lane’s grip and the older man made no move to reestablish his hold. Gwaynn turned.

“Mille would not want you to die,” Lane said fiercely to Gwaynn’s back. Gwaynn stopped, but did not turn. Lane could hear him breathing rapidly, but slowly the boy relaxed bit by bit.

“Come,” Lane added. “I will take you to the Mele camp.”

Gwaynn nodded and the two of them set off. Gwaynn was surprised that they followed along in the path of King Arsinol. Anger threatened to engulf him several times as the pair ahead of them occasionally passed into view among the bustle of people and tents. The temporary city was now awake and there was a definite air of excitement as the day’s events drew closer.

The tents eventually grew sparse until Lane led them to a boundary of sorts. There was a large open area, beyond which, were the colorful tents of the various quarters. The tents of the competing students were separated neatly from each other as well as the general population. The two followed the beaten path, which led over to the segregated camps of the students. The way was loosely guarded by a pair of Tars, already up and alert, though it was highly unusually for anyone to encroach on the privacy of those set to compete.

King Arsinol and Navarra had just passed the sentries and were moving farther into the camp when Lane and Gwaynn began to cross the field. They did not speak, though both were sharing very similar destructive thoughts, and they both moved almost hypnotically after the man that had altered each of their lives so catastrophically.

They were stopped by the pair of the Tar sentries. Gwaynn did not know either, though he dimly recognized one. Lane, however, knew them both.

“Tar Awl…Tarina Grace,” he said by way of greeting, giving each a curt nod as he spoke.

“Lane Noble…Master Gwaynn,” answered the Tarina. She was an older, handsome woman of perhaps forty, lean and wiry as female Tars tended to be. She had long jet-black hair and intense eyes which seemed to see directly into Gwaynn and read all of his intentions clearly. She reminded him a bit of Tar Amon. “Your business please. Lane, you know the students should not be distracted before the coming events.”

Lane nodded. “We will be brief. Gwaynn would like to wish the students of Mele quarter luck. He’s been running with them in the mornings.”

Her face remained passive as she passed her eyes over Gwaynn, but she finally agreed. “Very well, but do not tarry. King Arsinol also requested to visit that quarter, and together you are likely to cause…” The rest of her words were lost to Gwaynn as his face flushed and his ears were filled with a silent roaring. He began to move mechanically into the camp, ignoring Lane as he took his leave from the Tars. Gwaynn moved quickly and surely, and as if by instinct his steps were true. He rounded a tent and there not twenty paces away stood the King of the Deutzani and a pair of students from the Mele quarter. He did not feel it as Lane caught up and placed a hand on his shoulder. Gwaynn just stared, pain filling his chest, as his enemy King gave words of encouragement to B’dall and Vio.

“We have students from all the Families,” Lane said, but Gwaynn made no sign he’d heard. He was about to depart, his desire to see anyone now completely driven from him, when Vio turned away and began to leave the group. Gwaynn paused as Arsinol reached out and took hold of her arm. She turned back and for some unknown reason looked past her King and caught sight of Gwaynn, watching. Their eyes locked, neither able to look away, until Gwaynn finally turned, bumped into Lane and fled. He did not see the anguish on Vio’s face as she jerked her arm from Arsinol’s grip and fled herself.

ǂ

Gwaynn ran into Nev just outside the student area.

“I thought I might find you here,” his Master said simply, nodding to Lane who was following behind. “Come, the archery contest starts this morning. The kata competition doesn’t start until later. Nev then looked over at Lane, who was eyeing him with barely concealed awe. “You may join us if you like.”

“Thank you, no.” Lane stammered, truly honored. “I must go and join my family. Perhaps we will see you there,” he added, as much to Gwaynn as the infamous Tar.

Gwaynn nodded and followed where his teacher led.

“T…the Executioner Navarra is here,” he said quietly as they walked, his mind still numb from the fact that Vio was Deutzani. He was not sure how much more he could take. Everyone he cared about either died or turned out to be his enemy.

“Yes, I saw him,” Nev answered, his voice even. “He was with the Deutzani King.”

“I am going to kill him,” Gwaynn said just as evenly.

Nev chuckled. “Yes, I’m sure you are.”

“What’s funny?” Gwaynn turned suddenly angry.

Nev stopped also. “How could I not find it all so humorous?” He waved his hands to the sky in an all-encompassing way. “Life would be monstrous if it were not so.”

Gwaynn scowled, tired of the man’s philosophy, so many words that did so little.

“Words,” he answered.

“Yes,” Nev nodded gravely. “And what are words, ideas, thoughts. Do they, can they, make a difference in what is real? Perhaps not. Perhaps they are just pretties, bandied about to relieve the suffering of the weak. Perhaps our words are just as powerless as any bark, chirp, or bray from an animal. Just so much noise, then again perhaps not. Perhaps that is all Man is. Perhaps Man, though he appears to be flesh and bone, is truly only words and thoughts. So when you say “I will kill him.” I laugh, because of the words and the thoughts and the result that will inevitably follow. I know you will kill him. You know you will kill him, but our poor Executioner does not. Only he remains ignorant of both word and action.”

Gwaynn shook his head. Not sure if he would ever entirely understand the man before him.

“Riddles,” he grunted.

Nev smiled. “Yes, a riddle,” he answered and they moved off to the archery fields.

The competition with bows was hampered a bit by the light drizzle that fell all morning, but the crowds were large, though not as large as they would be at some of the more popular events. Plus the initial rounds were between those of the younger and less skilled students. The upper classmen would not begin to compete until the following morning against the victors of today. Vio, an underclassman, was of course competing. Gwaynn resolved not to watch her, but his eyes kept coming back to her no matter how hard he tried to keep them away. She was not faring well, though the bow was never her strongest skill. She was clearly out of sorts, missing shots that were only moderately difficult even for her, and in the end she lost to a second year in her second round.

Gwaynn was surprised to find that he felt badly for her, though why he should feel so was a mystery to him. His thoughts, feelings, his whole being were in utter turmoil. He eyes were still on Vio as she unstrung her bow and stuffed it forcefully into her bag.

“Perhaps you should go to her,” Nev commented, attentive to his pupil as always.

“She’s Deutzani,” Gwaynn stated as if this settled the matter.

Nev raised an eyebrow. “She also was Deutzani yesterday when you spoke of her so highly.”

Gwaynn shrugged, still watching the girl.

“Ah well, if she has changed so much from the person you knew…” Nev answered standing. “I believe I will take in some lunch before the staff competitions. Will you come?”

Gwaynn paused. Nev smiled inwardly.

“I will meet you at the tent,” Gwaynn said and moved down the rows of seats to the ground and headed off toward Vio, who was still packing her things away.

Nev watched him go, scratched his head and marveled at the foresight and wisdom of Tar Amon.

Gwaynn had no such thoughts as he approached Vio. She was facing away from him so was unaware of his approach. Gwaynn noticed that her long sleeved, white shirt was damp from the constant mist and was clinging to her, exposing the shape of her back and shoulders. She stood and turned as he drew near. Her eyes grew wide as she saw him. She paused a moment then turned back to her bag without saying anything.

“You’ve done better,” Gwaynn said softly, moving around her.

Vio paused, a scowl on her face. “Why are you here? Only to mock my performance I suppose?”

Gwaynn took a step back, surprised at her anger. “No,” he said suddenly feeling awkward.

“You shouldn’t be talking to me,” Vio said her anger suddenly turning to sadness. “I’m Deutzani. You should hate me.”

Gwaynn was silent long enough for Vio to glance up, having expected him to answer.

“But I don’t,” he said softly, as eye contact was made. Her face flushed and she quickly looked away.

“I will cheer for you,” he added and she looked into his face once more and gave him a small smile. “I expect you to do better,” he chided and then headed off to find Tar Nev.

“Gwaynn,” she said after he had gone ten paces and he turned back to her. “I will never return to the Deutzani.”

The vision of his mother, cut open, innards rolling out into the dust flashed in Gwaynn’s mind, and his eyes watered momentarily transforming the world into his own personal watercolor painting. He blinked rapidly, embarrassed, not trusting his voice; finally he nodded to Vio, turned and carefully headed off across a muddy field.

ǂ

The next few days flew by, and all with an air of celebration. Food and drink stands sprung up everywhere flooding the air with delicious smells. There were also gaming tables for those who could not lose enough betting on their favorite student, and many temporary shops selling everything from blankets and cookware, to clothes and weapons of all kinds. Crowds that were not otherwise engaged with the ongoing Competitions milled about the shops and food tents. The Competitions drew all types of people, from all across the kingdom. Royalty, soldiers, entire peasant families, and of course thieves, all made their way to Herra. Lesser trainees, those not granted Tar status, were in charge of keeping order, and for the most part order was maintained even in the face of the occasional pickpocket. There were of course fights, which broke out in the drinking and gambling tents with annoying regularity, but that was to be expected.

But Gwaynn was unaware of such troubles, for he had no money; nor did gambling and drink interest him. He and Nev ate, mostly as honored guests, at many a tent. Lambs meat, spiced with pepper sauce and sold on a skewer quickly became Gwaynn’s favorite and he enjoyed a taste whenever possible. Otherwise he was immersed in the Competitions. Watching all that he could, and at times bemoaning the fact that he could not compete himself. Both he and Nev were spectators at nearly all the kata matches, as well as a majority of the hand to hand bouts, and as many with the staff as they could catch. It was hard to go to them all since many events took place at the same time. Jon often sat with them, especially during the kata matches, and Gwaynn was always glad when he did. Jon was loud and enthusiastic and not afraid to let everyone know who he was pulling for, which in most cases was Vio, as he had taken Gwaynn’s recommendation to heart. Gwaynn was gratified at the noise the large man made, which occasionally drew the attention of Vio, at least when she was not fighting and she smiled up at Gwaynn on several occasions.

“That little minx is making me a rich man all by herself,” he laughed as Vio defeated a sixth year student under Tar Bnall and advanced once more. Gwaynn was not aware of the fact that Jon’s boisterous cheering also attracted the attention of several others pulling for Vio, namely King Arsinol and the Executioner Navarra.

“The boy watches without a care,” Arsinol growled, both men aware that Gwaynn almost never looked at them, and when he did it was if he did not even recognize or care that they were present. “He looks to be very comfortable, probably feels quite safe,” the King added, his anger at the man to his right growing.

“Yes, but Nev is ever watchful,” Navarra answered, nonplussed by his King’s anger. Arsinol looked and sure enough the Tar was staring at them both. Arsinol blanched slightly. He did not like the look of the man’s eye. Something about his face said that he should not be made an enemy lightly.

Arsinol turned his head and raised a hand as if scratching his nose, to hide his mouth. “Everyday with that man makes Gwaynn harder to kill. The Massi Prince must not be allowed to return home. You should have killed him by now. He has twice slipped through your fingers; perhaps you are not so deadly after all.”

Navarra turned to the Deutzani King inwardly growing angry, but he was deadly calm on the outside. “I will kill him today, if that is your wish.”

Arsinol frowned. No, the boy’s death would have to wait. The other families would turn on him instantly if they knew of his involvement in the death of the Massi royal family. If such a thing were to get out, the High King would not have any choice but to openly oppose him, not to mention that Noble Island would also be openly against him. It was not a pleasant thought. The Tars from Noble Island had not gone to war in more than a thousand years, and in that instance they wiped out all opposition and placed High King Mastoc’s ancestors in power. A power they still held to this day.

“No,” Arsinol said quietly, his face still averted from the watchful eyes of the distant Tar. Navarra was both disgusted and satisfied by the fear he saw in the old King’s face. “I cannot be tied to his death,” the Deutzani King finally added.

“Death could come from many unexpected places,” Navarra answered, then turned back in time to see B’dall brutalize an upstart seventh year from Tar Carlett’s quarter in a hand to hand bout; the win placing him in the finals.

Tar Kostek had a fine group of students, with nearly all of them out performing the other students in their age group. The only exceptions were Stephen who struggled with the staff and was defeated by a first year, William, who lost to all the other fifth years in katas and hand to hand, and of course Vio, who had lost early on with the bow. In all other classes, however, Vio was excelling, as were Hotch, Krys and B’dall, even Tam was putting on a good performance, winning the first year crown in katas, the staff and the bow.

It was Vio, however, who was drawing the most attention at this year’s games. She electrified the crowd early yesterday, narrowly losing to an eighth year of Tar Endid’s in the semi-finals in hand to hand. The day prior she nearly made it the quarterfinals with the staff, and followed it up the next morning by defeating Seth, an eighth year from Mneme quarter in the semi-finals of the kata competition. She not only beat the eight year, she did so convincingly ten hits to five. She became the only third year student in the last hundred years to make it to the kata finals and was very much a crowd favorite because of it. Yes, Tar Kostek and the Deutzani family were having a very successful competition.

The morning of the kata finals Gwaynn waited outside of Mele camp, hoping for a chance to see Krys or Vio, and by chance, both of them emerged together with William and Tam. They were moving away from him into the fog, which hung over the river, but he broke into a jog and soon caught up with them.

“Sir,” Krys said bowing his head slightly before he could stop himself. Both Tam and William looked at him oddly, but said nothing and though word of Gwaynn’s true identity was beginning to spread dangerously, most were still unenlightened.

“Congratulations on making the semifinals in katas,” Gwaynn said to Krys, who’d lost to B’dall in the final match the previous day. Still making it to the final four was considered a great success for any seventh year. “Master Kostek must be proud of all of you,” he added though he was looking directly at Vio. They all beamed in youthful pride, each realizing that as a group, they were doing quite well.

“Are you nervous about your upcoming match?” he asked Vio directly. There was a formality in his voice that he did not want, but for some unknown reason he felt tense whenever he was near her.

She shook her head. “Not really I’ve made it this far.”

“I’ve been watching B’dall closely. He likes to feint in low with his left before coming in for a head shot with his right,” Gwaynn added using his hands to demonstrate. “He favors it.”

“Giving a few lessons,” a voice came from out of the fog behind him. Gwaynn turned, but already knew it was B’dall. “It’s a bit presumptuous, since you’ve been on the island only a year, and are not a true student. Is the training on Noble Island so poor that just anyone can teach here?” He walked up, purposefully getting close to Gwaynn, hoping to make the newcomer either take a step back or feel inclined to defend himself. But the younger boy did not move.

“Anyone can learn. Anyone can teach,” Gwaynn answered.

B’dall only grunted and then turned his attention to Vio. “I will give you a few lessons this afternoon…traitor,” he spat at her, eyes blazing.

Vio said nothing, just stared back at him.

“You’ll be fortunate if I don’t break up that pretty face of yours,” he added, walking so close to her that she had to step aside or be run into.

“I will be glad when he finishes,” Tam said softly, afraid that B’dall might overhear; though he was already lost in the fog. “He is getting unbearable.”

William shrugged. “He’s been the most dominant student in our quarter for over ten years, which…I guess would go to anyone’s head.”

“And it doesn’t help to have his King fawning all over him,” Vio added.

“His King?” Gwaynn asked.

“I told you I was never going back,” Vio snapped, and Gwaynn held up his hands in consolation. “I’ve already discussed with Master Kostek about the possibility of continuing to train on the Island after my schooling ends.

“What did he say?” Tam asked excitedly, as they all began to stretch for a short run. Gwaynn joined in without asking.

Vio looked at the ground. “He said it would be a Council decision but at the rate I was progressing he could not foresee any problems. He was sure Tar Amon would put in a good word about me.”

“I’m sure he will,” Gwaynn added, and the rest agreed.

“Remember only two miles this morning,” William said as they all took off down the river together. “No need to tire yourself out before this afternoon.”

Vio agreed and they all fell in step, at least until she and Gwaynn began to pull away.

ǂ

That afternoon the arena was packed to capacity and then some, as the general populace prepared for the match that was the highlight of the entire Competition; the kata finals. The fog had long since burned off, and there was a strong southeasterly breeze clearing the sky, pushing what clouds remained quickly across the deepening blue. Workers were still busy laying down sawdust on the damp arena floor to draw out any further moisture as Vio and B’dall entered led by Tar Kostek. Gwaynn was sitting in the Council’s box with Tar Nev on one side and Tar Amon on the other. Tar Endid, who was selected as judge for the match, was down on the arena floor with the two students, who apart from their dark Deutzani features could not have looked more different. Obviously Vio was female, but aside from that she was lean and wiry. She looked very small next to the broad shouldered and powerful B’dall. Their physical differences necessitated that they each develop different methods of fighting. Vio relied mostly on speed and guile, where B’dall relied on power. It would be a classic conflict of styles.  The Tars, and in fact, most of the more knowledgeable spectators, were eager to see the distinct techniques clash.

The air in the arena was electric as both students and Endid walked to the center of the floor, Vio testing the footing as she went. It’s passable, she thought as together the three bowed to Tar Amon and the rest of the Council, then in unison they bowed to all four corners of the arena. The crowd grew very quiet as the two students stepped back and bowed to Tar Endid, then to each other and without a word the fighting commenced. Vio immediately darted in for a quick surprise strike, but B’dall was ready and though he had to retreat, he managed to hold her off without either scoring a hit. Vio quickly backed away before B’dall could counter, her left foot slipping just a bit.

Gwaynn, who watched from his seat above, was on edge, far more nervous in the stands than he would have been on the arena floor.  He noticed Vio’s foot slip and frowned. The dicey footing would definitely favor B’dall and his lumbering style. Vio would have to be very careful or her opponent would get in a few easy points, and it only took seven strikes to win.

Vio was thinking much the same thing as she caught and righted herself from the slip, then she circled B’dall, testing the footing once more, which seemed adequate in most places, but she did come across another area which was a cause for concern. B’dall made a move to come in, but slowed as Vio skipped back away from him. Still he came on, quickly realizing that his opponent could not use all of her speed. He maneuvered after her, unaware that he had a slight smile on his face.

B’dall continued to pursue and Vio continued to attack quickly then pull away, never wanting to get into a long engagement where her opponent’s power could be brought to bear. The first few minutes of the contest were a slow, methodical feeling out of each other’s abilities. B’dall was almost always the aggressor and he finally worked Vio into a small damp area near the back of the arena close to the north wall, and then he moved in very quickly. He attacked and she parried, the smile never leaving his face until she ducked under one of his especially hard blows and made contact on his elbow with her left kata. It was a glancing blow, unlikely to cause any real pain or handicap, but it was spotted by Endid, who shouted and raised one hand for Vio. The crowed cheered, as B’dall backed away then moved in again, now a grimace on his face and with three powerful blows knocked Vio’s right kata aside and came down full force on her left wrist hard enough to break it. A gasp went through the crowd as Vio yelped and dropped her kata, dancing back. She managed to block another blow with her remaining right kata before moving off to relative safety.

Endid yelled again and raised his hand in B’dall’s favor. B’dall did not hesitate now that he had his opponent at a distinct disadvantage. He rushed in and attacked. Vio, with only one kata, parried, ducked and retreated with no thought of attack, no thought of scoring a hit, only hoping to hold off her relentless attacker. She held her wounded arm close to her body, which hampered her balance and speed. Yet she somehow managed to deflect or dodge a half dozen fast, powerful attacks with one arm before finally scoring another miraculous hit with a kick to the knee of B’dall, who went down with a curse. Vio retreated quickly as he rose and tested his leg. It held but he had to flex his knee several times to drive away the numbness. The crowd roared its pleasure.

B’dall began to advance once more as the crowd, which clearly favored Vio, continued to buzz in amazement. This time B’dall just continued to press forward, working his way in as close as possible before striking Vio hard on the left hip, and then quickly on the right shoulder, using almost the exact attack Gwaynn had warned her about. She tried to back away, berating herself for falling for a technique she had been told to watch out for, when her left foot slipped out from under her. Her right hand flew up but not fast enough and B’dall’s right kata struck her full in the side of the jaw. Vio saw stars as blood and pain filled her mouth. She was only dimly aware of another blow coming down on her left collar bone breaking it, before another struck the bridge of her nose, and then another on her right shoulder.

Gwaynn watched with horror as B’dall struck blow after blow, not stopping, not relenting before an obviously defenseless foe. He managed to strike her six times before Tar Endid stepped in and stopped the contest. Gwaynn was surprised to find he was on his feet, not moving, making no sound, just staring at the Vio’s prone body lying on the floor of the arena. She was not moving and at first he feared the worst, but then his attention was diverted as B’dall made another lunge for her, but was held back by Tar Endid, then B’dall backed away and looked up directly into Gwaynn’s eyes.

“Your next,” he mouthed or possibly said. It was hard to tell with all of the noise in the arena. Some booed, some cheered but it seemed everyone present was yelling something and then Pugg rushed in and was at Vio’s side.

“Come. Let us leave now,” Nev yelled almost directly into Gwaynn’s ear, but Gwaynn made no move. “We can make our way to the hospital tent and meet her there,” his Master added and gradually he got Gwaynn’s attention. Gwaynn looked at him and nodded. They quickly picked their way through the crowd, followed closely by the Tars Kostek and Amon.

Their progress was relatively unimpeded because for the most part the crowd remained in their seats, most shouting, booing, cheering or screaming incomprehensibly. Once on the mulch covered ground they were completely unhindered and exited the arena without delay. They reached the hospital tent before Vio and Pugg, and it was all either Nev or Kostek could do to keep Gwaynn from running back out to find her. As it was, he paced the tent continuously, never pausing even for an instant.

“Quite a scene you’re putting on for a young Deutzani woman,” Nev finally said with a tilt of his bushy head. The comment surprised both Tar Kostek and Gwaynn, who immediately stopped pacing and just glared at his Master.

“She will be fine,” Nev said leaning close and whispering into Gwaynn’s ear. Gwaynn wondered how he knew, but moments later Pugg pulled back the tent flap and held it in place as two other men brought Vio in on a stretcher. She was conscious, her eyes bright with unshed tears. She broke into a rueful smile, which made her wince, when she spotted Gwaynn waiting for her. There was a bulge in her nose and a good deal of drying blood on her chest and neck, and her eyes were beginning to blacken, but Gwaynn thought she looked wonderful and couldn’t help but smile back. She tried to sit as soon as the stretcher was placed on a table, but a sharp pain in her right shoulder insisted that it might be better to lie still.

“How are you?” Kostek asked only slightly more worried for her than he was for B’dall, his other student; the one who had lost complete control.

Pugg moved in closer to examine her once more in the privacy of the tent, keeping her from answering her Tar directly. He worked on her for nearly ten minutes, examining nearly every part of her body, much to her embarrassment. Finally he spoke to her as well the others present. “She has a broken left clavicle and wrist and her right shoulder has a very deep bone bruise, as does her hip bone. She has a broken nose and she lost a tooth, but thankfully her jaw was not broken, other than that I would say she will live.”

Everyone sighed with relief. But Pugg was still frowning. “Master Kostek, what could possibly have gotten into that boy? I believed he meant to kill her.”

Tar Kostek shook his head and then rubbing the back of his neck, looked up at the physician. “I’m not sure,” he said and then motioned for Tar Nev and the doctor to follow him outside, leaving Vio and Gwaynn alone.

“I’m sorry,” Vio mumbled, and Gwaynn could still see that there was blood in her mouth. He turned and from a table behind him grabbed a small linen cloth, then moved back to Vio.

“Nothing to be sorry about,” Gwaynn replied, desperately trying to hold in his emotions. “Can you open your mouth?” he asked and she complied very gingerly. He carefully dabbed at the blood on her teeth and beneath her lower lip, before she reached up and took the cloth from him and moved it farther back, closer to where the kata had struck her jaw. She pulled away the cloth and it came out bloody so Gwaynn retrieved another for her and this one she held in place for a long time. Gwaynn pulled up a stool, and just sat with her, lost in his thoughts and unaware for a long time that she was crying silently.

“Is it the pain?” he asked when he finally became aware of her tears. She shook her head negatively and gently pulled the cloth back out of her mouth. It was still bloody but a good deal less so than the previous one.

“I am no longer Deutzani,” she said after a long moment of trying to control her self, still her voice sounded shaky and weak. “They tried to kill me. I know it was not B’dall’s idea…it came from my King. He was angry when I told him of my intentions to stay on Noble Island and become a Tar.” She watched Gwaynn’s face closely, but did not see the hurt she was hoping would appear there. She began crying once more, this time a bit harder. Gwaynn struggled to find the right thing to say or do, feeling very uncomfortable, but in the end he just sat quietly with his head down.

“We could never be together could we?” She asked.

Gwaynn’s head jerked up and he glanced at her, but her eyes held his with such intensity that he found he could not look away. His mind raced as he tried to find a way not to hurt her yet again, but then, like rapids coming upon a deeper channel, his mind grew quiet and he smiled at her.

“No. I cannot see how,” he whispered. “I will be the King of Massi one day. I’m not sure my people would accept a Deutzani Queen.”

She lay quietly in her bed, still looking at his face, but now her eyes darted about as if trying to take him all in at once. “I thought a King could do as he pleased.”

Gwaynn actually laughed a bit. “You’d be surprised. It is not the position of freedom that most think it is.”

Vio sighed. She’d known the answer to her question even before she’d asked it, but somehow she wanted to hear the reality of it from his mouth.

“Then I will indeed stay here on Noble Island, if they will have me, and study to become a Tar.”

“You will make a great one,” Gwaynn answered, sad but relieved that they had past the barrier that had so long stood before them. Without a word he reached out and took her uninjured right hand in his. He squeezed it and she squeezed back hard.

“Stay with me?”

Gwaynn nodded.

ǂ

Gwaynn stayed with her all that afternoon and evening. Late that night she held him captive with her large brown eyes and nearly begged him not to leave her. Her pleas reminded him so much of his twin sister Gwynn that he could not help but relent and stay the night.  Alynn, Pugg’s wife, brought Gwaynn a blanket and he moved a second cot close to Vio’s. Lying there, he held her hand as he had his sister’s, back when they were younger and he was so afraid of the dark.

He was surprised how nice her hand felt in his and in the dark he was extremely aware of her breathing and any tiny movement she made, which given her injuries, where few. Despite her pain and injuries Vio fell asleep quickly. Gwaynn rested quietly beside her thinking and listening to her slow even breathing. He was tired himself but it took several hours for him to finally relax and follow her in the world of dreams.

He woke suddenly and fully, at first unaware of where he was exactly. Vio’s hand was still loosely in his, and for a long moment he believed it to be Gwynn’s. He lay still; at a loss as to why he had awakened so quickly, but then he became aware of another presence in the tent. At first he suspected it was Pugg, or perhaps Alynn come to check on Vio, but whoever was present was moving too carefully, too stealthily to be a friend. Without thinking Gwaynn grabbed his kali from under his cot and jumped to his feet. It was not completely dark; the interior of the tent was lit very dimly by the large gibbon moon, which allowed Gwaynn to see the dark outline of the attacker.

“Who is there?” Gwaynn challenged loudly, as he moved from the cot to stand in between Vio and the stranger.

No answer came except for a quick attack from the dark figure before him. Gwaynn sensed rather than saw the blow coming. He sidestepped and parried it with his left hand. Two more quick blows came at him, one missed completely and Gwaynn instinctively blocked the other. He could still see the vague outline of his enemy though only his arms and head stood out against the relative brightness of the tent walls.

“Gwaynn!” Vio whispered urgently through the pain in her mouth, awaken by the clash of swords.

Gwaynn made no answer; his entire concentration was on his dark, nameless opponent. Another blow came and again Gwaynn blocked it, not moving away, not giving any ground, stubbornly remaining between the attacker and the helpless girl behind him.

The assassin before him attempted to circle past, but Gwaynn moved easily to block his way. But when the next attack came it was relentless and though Gwaynn managed to block many of the blows, one grazed his chin and another hammer blow fell against his right thigh. He grunted as it landed and fell off to the left, not feeling pain, but knowing that he had taken a serious injury to his leg. He knew he was in trouble if the fight continued for much longer.

His attacker, however, did not press his advantage but instead darted past Gwaynn and made a lunging attack at Vio.

“Gwynn!” Gwaynn yelled, confused.

Vio saw the attack coming, gasped and lunged from the cot and onto the floor. She landed with a yelp of pain, but the blow missed her and she was safe for a moment, the cot shielding her from her assailant.

Gwaynn moved forward as the attacker reached down, and roughly tossed the cot aside, then prepared the killing blow to the girl at his feet.

Gwaynn must have made some noise, however, because at the last minute the dark shape turned to face him. Gwaynn did not care. It was his turn to attack. He was suddenly wide-awake and very angry, tired of having those who cared for him killed and taken away. He moved in with no fear, no hesitation. His attack came in three furious blows, the first throwing his opponents left kali from his grip the next ringing strongly against the right and the third slicing threw the neck of the dark shape before him.

In the darkness, Gwaynn saw the figure before him stagger. His lone kali fell with a thud to the grass floor of the tent. A strange sucking sound could be heard, as if someone was trying to pull a boot free from the mud, then the head of the stranger flopped back as if on a hinge. The body wavered for a moment then fell straight down and slightly on top of Vio. She screamed…loudly.

Gwaynn stood completely still, staring at the dark mass lying before him, as Vio continued to scream, though how long it took him to become aware that she was screaming his name, he could not have said. He had killed. He had taken someone else’s life. It was a shock and the feel of it was completely different from the way he had always dreamed it would be. Throughout his early childhood, he’d played at war; played at battle and killing. As a child, he’d saved countless damsels, slain more enemies than could be counted, and always in his daydreams he had felt victorious, strong, and happy. Now, however, in the reality of the event, he felt slightly nauseous, dizzy, and….happy.

The tent finally came into the light and Gwaynn realized there were people around him. Pugg and Alynn were suddenly there bending and helping Vio from beneath the corpse. Tar Kostek and Amon silently studying him, and Tar Nev, one hand on Gwaynn’s shoulder and the other running through his own bushy hair. As always, there was a slight smile on the face of his teacher.

Gwaynn moved forward as if in a dream, wanting to know the identity of his attacker, wanting it to be Navarra as he never wanted anything else in his life, for then some of the pain in his life would be over, behind him. He limped forward, bent and saw instantly that it was not the Executioner; it was instead B’dall of the Deutzani, this year’s katas champion.

XI

The following morning Gwaynn found himself bandaged up and on board the Carol-Anne, on his way to Lato Island. As he suspected, he had a serious stab wound in his right thigh, but Alynn cleaned it and carefully placed a poultice of moss and other herbs directly on the wound to pull out any possible infection and to aid the healing process, then she wrapped his thigh tightly.

“You clean this every other day, and pack it in tightly,” Alynn instructed giving him a small bag filled with bandages and the wet moss.

“We’ll see he’s taken care of,” Nev said and Gwaynn noticed the shy look of respect Alynn gave the Tar.

Gwaynn thought he might have some deep reservations about boarding another trireme after his last experience, but now as he lay comfortably in a hammock on the bustling deck he felt no such apprehension. He was not surprised to find that he had complete confidence in Jon, for it was obvious that the man knew his way around his ship. Gwaynn watched as the crew loaded the last of the goods and supplies that they would be taking with them. The pace was a bit frantic because the launch was a few days early, but Jon, at Nev’s urging, quickly made arrangements for their departure. They could have made the trip by Traveler, but Jon would not hear of it, and insisted that he be allowed to ferry them the thirty miles east to the island of the Scholars.

Gwaynn sat quietly out of the way, enjoying the blue skies, the soft breezes and the pleasant smells of the sea. He watched quietly as the crew loaded and stored their goods and ware. Nev was off attending some business of his own, but assured Gwaynn he would be back well before they were scheduled to pull anchor. Gwaynn didn’t mind he needed some time alone to think. He went through the battle with B’dall over and over again in his mind, sifting through what he could remember, concentrating on the points where he’d made the mistakes that had led to his injures. He had no illusions that he was indestructible, and knew that with only a few minor changes, he would be the one now lying dead in the tent. He had been lucky…good yes, but also lucky.

“Nev also likes time with his thoughts after he has killed,” Jon said taking a seat on the deck next to Gwaynn without asking, but Gwaynn hardly felt that the man had to ask; after all, it was his ship. Jon sat, flipping a knife over and over again, catching it by the handle deftly in his palm each time.

“I keep going over the fight in my mind,” Gwaynn said, watching the twirling knife.

Jon nodded, and took a moment to direct a sailor storing rope near the main hold. “Yes, I thought from the look on your face you just might be.”

Jon cocked his head. “Tell me Gwaynn, how old are you now?”

Gwaynn frowned; surprised that he had to think about it before answering. He and Gwynn were about month and a half from their sixteenth birthday when Solarii fell and Gwynn had died. He had turned sixteen shortly after arriving on Noble Island. “What day is it?” He finally asked.

“You don’t know what day it is?” Jon asked with a smile. This lad was going to go far. Jon could tell he was all business, but then Jon had never known his brother to make a rash decision.

Gwaynn shook his head with a rueful smile of his own, and then his face lit up. The Competitions were always held mid March, culminating on the fifteenth, the ids. “March sixteenth?” he asked tentatively.

Jon laughed and slapped his leg. “Close my man, it is the eighteenth,” he said and threw the knife up high, spinning quickly before catching it again.

“Well that would make me sixteen. I won’t turn seventeen until July first,” he said not smiling, his thoughts turning melancholy. It was hard to believe that nearly a year had past since Gwynn’s death, his Mother’s death, and that awful day on the scaffold. He thought about it in silence for a spell, reliving those last horrible moments. In some ways it seemed a lifetime ago, and in another way it seemed only yesterday. Time, he thought with a haunted laugh. It was like time moved at different speeds…at least in him, in his memories and thoughts.

Gwaynn’s eyes suddenly widened as his mind plunged over the falls of understanding. If he could control himself, he could control time, speed it up, slow it down. At first it did not seem possible, but he knew subconsciously his mind had already achieved the impossible countless times. During moments of intense concentration, pressure and action, came such clarity of thought that it was beyond time. When he was under duress or endangered, time seemed to slow and even stand still. He relived the fight with B’dall once more, focusing on the moment of his attack. Time had slowed in the dark tent. He remembered back, to the moment he knew what B’dall would do next; he remembered being in control. He concentrated on the moment when the fight began to slow. At first nothing appeared to happen and then Gwaynn closed his eyes reliving the fight on the beach with Navarra, the Executioner. He still felt the sea breeze, could feel the rocking of the ship, and through the twine of the hammock he could feel the vibrations caused by the footfalls of the crew around him, but all of this slowly faded as he remembered and relived.

Gwaynn opened his eyes suddenly. The breeze was gone, but more eerily so was the sound of the lapping sea against the ship and the sounds of the crew around him. All about him, complete silence. It made Gwaynn shiver as he glanced around. Jon was talking to him, but his mouth was moving very slowly and no sound was coming from his mouth. The knife he was flipping was near its apex, hardly turning. Even Jon’s hair was barely rippling in the stillness. Gwaynn smiled. He could feel in his mind what to do. He understood completely now that Nev was not keeping the feather from falling at all. The feather continued to fall just as it always had. Time indeed had split in two, one path moved quickly and the other much, much slower. Gwaynn felt a swift and suddenly awe for the man who’d chosen to be his teacher. Gwaynn flexed his mind, adjusting his own time frame and Jon paused and then talked slower still, until Gwaynn could barely discern any movement from the man beside him at all.

To Gwaynn, the entire world suddenly became surreal. This could not be happening. But it was, and more than that, it was easy. Gwaynn smiled and yelled out for joy. The sound of his voice was hollow, dead. He heard it only through the interior of his body and not through the air itself. He frowned, shivered again, and attempted to climb from the hammock. Pain shot through his injured leg, so he settled back down, but he did lean over and carefully snatch the knife out of mid-air, before fully reclining back once more. Gwaynn smiled and concentrated on returning his pace of time to normal, but for a long moment nothing happened. Time was still passing slowly. Panic flashed through Gwaynn and he had visions of going through his life alone, surrounded by a motionless world, but then all at once Jon was talking, the ship was rocking and the breeze was blowing against his face. Gwaynn’s stomach gave a sharp jolt; much like when he’d stumbled at the top of a long staircase back home.

“Ah!” Jon said in surprise, actually glancing around for the missing knife.

Gwaynn grinned, but then doubled over in pain. His stomach felt hollow and his hands were shaking badly. He looked up at Jon, who was staring at the knife in Gwaynn’s hand with a mixture of fear and awe that Gwaynn was not at all sure he liked. The large man’s breathing was coming in gasps, and without warning his face darkened with anger.

“That…” he sputtered, “is not very polite.”

Gwaynn’s mouth popped open.

“I’d have thought my brother would have taught you better,” Jon added still angry. “A bit of warning before you do your parlor tricks would be nice.”

“I’m sorry,” Gwaynn answered and felt another cramping pain rip through his abdomen. “I didn’t mean to frighten you.”

“Frighten me,” Jon bellowed indignantly. “I’m not frightened, just startled is all. Knife bloody disappeared on me mid-throw. Thought I was going to cut myself. Nev was always pulling such nonsense back in his younger days. Mother never could get used to it. And let me tell you,” he added pointing a large dirty finger at Gwaynn. “None of us much cared for it.”

“I’m sorry,” Gwaynn repeated. “I wasn’t even sure it would work. It was my first time.”

“Your first time?” Jon exclaimed, his turned to be surprised. “Well, you seem to have got it down quite right. My brother couldn’t have done better.”

Gwaynn smiled weakly at this.

“Suppose now you’re bleeding hungry?”

Gwaynn nodded. “Famished,” he managed to say in the middle of another gripping cramp. He found it hard to believe that slowing time for such a small duration could take so much out of him after all, he had barely even moved.

Jon laughed. “Serve you right if I just let you starve,” he quipped, but he stood and moved aft, then quickly returned with some hardtack and salted pork, plus a skin of fresh water. Gwaynn ate it all in silence and without pause. Jon had to fetch food two more times before Gwaynn felt sated. When he was finished he promptly fell into the deepest sleep in nearly a year.

ǂ

Nev woke him late that evening. Gwaynn was surprised that he had slept the entire morning and afternoon away, and was even more incredulous when he realized that the Carol-Anne had already left the dock and was well across the harbor. Stars were just beginning to appear in the sky with regularity as Gwaynn hobbled over and leaned against the railing next to Nev and together they watched the lights of Euter disappear in their wake.

All around them, the crew of the Carol-Anne were hard at work, some pulling oars and others working the rigging until they cleared Noble Island and moved out farther into the Inland Sea. Jon was barking orders while handling the steering oar himself. He guided them smoothly along the northern shore of the island that had been Gwaynn’s home for the past year, and except for the lights of Euter, it was an indistinguishable dark mass gliding slowly past.

“Jon tells me you’ve been doing tricks,” Nev said leaning carelessly over the railing in order to watch the spray of the sea in the moonlight.

Gwaynn smiled, but in the darkness no one noticed. “Just one,” he answered softly.

“And?”

“It nearly killed me,” Gwaynn answered, exaggerating.

“And?”

“It is not something to be done lightly.”

“No, a talent used only when necessary, to finish a fight or run away from one,” Nev answered. “It would be disastrous otherwise.”

Gwaynn nodded, completely agreeing. If he had moved through the fabric of time much longer he was sure he would have lost all his strength.

“We will practice on Lato. You must be able to concentrate while otherwise distracted.”

“When will we get to Lato?”

Nev smiled. “Not long, maybe three hours. We will be there long before sunrise, but Jon will not dock until daylight. One more thing, you must not perform any tricks for the Scholars even though at times you may want to very badly.”

Nev paused for such a long time that Gwaynn thought he was done making his point, but then with a deep breath he continued.

“Most Scholars are a bit full of themselves, and though they possess great knowledge, they are undisciplined, timid and mostly avoid any kind of action,” he explained. “They will not hesitate to share their opinion, however, nor will they hold their tongue if they believe you are in the wrong. Don’t let their arrogance bait you.”

“I won’t,” Gwaynn answered, his mind already churning over the strange warning.

ǂ

Gwaynn wasn’t sure he would be able to sleep that night, but he did, and well. However he woke while it was still dark, with the sun just bringing a hint of light to the east. He limped up on deck surprised to find both Jon and Nev already awake.

“Ah, come lad. You must see this,” Jon barked in the stillness of the night. “Awe inspiring it is.”

Gwaynn joined them at the rail and waited. No other words were spoken. The three of them watched as the sky slowly brightened and illuminated first the dim outline of what was to be the new island in Gwaynn’s life. He could just make out the circle of the harbor which surrounding the ship on three sides. Taking his cue from the two older men, he remained quiet.

Little by little the land before them came into focus in the cool morning air. Gwaynn could make out the forested hills plainly against the brightening sky, colorless at first but then the sun broke the horizon and flashed a spotlight on the tips of the highest land mass. First the greens of the trees, brilliant in the clear morning air, sprang out

against the dark, then as the sun moved higher still, dazzling white buildings of marble appeared, strung all along the hillside like pearls on a necklace. But Gwaynn had eyes only for the building near the top of one hill, enormous and blazing white. It was a massive rectangular building with a large portico and vaulted roof, completely surrounded by large majestic columns. Gwaynn stood blinking at the bright building, ignoring the rest of the island as it lit up before him.

It was beautiful, all of it, the deep greens of the trees sprinkled with bright colored flowers, set off the white marble buildings, and all framed by sparkling white beaches. But Gwaynn’s attention kept returning to the large building at the top of the hill.

“It’s called the Parthenon,” Jon explained. “They say it’s a perfect copy of a famed building from Old Earth.”

“It’s amazing,” Gwaynn answered, meaning it.

They docked an hour later and were met by Master Renault and a large group composed equally of men and women. Master Renault was the highest-ranking Scholar of the group, second only to Master Putal, who was still on Noble Island for the last day of Competition week.

Gwaynn immediately noticed that Master Renault was much younger than Putal, maybe even younger than Tar Endid. The man was tall and thin, with long dark hair pulled back and tied with a leather thong. He wore a simple white shift, which hung down well past his knees, and was tied in place with a dark purple sash at the waist. On his feet were sandals that laced high up onto his calves. In fact his entire entourage, men and women were dressed exactly alike. The only thing that differed was the color of the sash. After looking about at the welcoming party, Gwaynn was surprised at the young faces he saw sprinkled within the middle aged and the old. For some reason he believed all Scholars to be ancient, wizened old men.

“Jon Baal!” Master Renault stepped forward greeting the much larger man with a smile and a brief hug. “It has been too long.”

Jon returned the hug and nodded. “Nearly a year Renny, nearly a year.” Others also greeted Jon, who was clearly as welcome and loved here as much as he was on Noble. Finally Renault looked to Nev and Gwaynn.

“My brother Tar Nev,” Jon said by way of introduction and all the chattering stopped and as one the Scholars bowed, which Nev returned, “and his student Gwaynn of Massi.”

With this announcement a murmur began, then subsided. Tar Nev’s refusal to take on a student these many years was known all across the land. The group bowed to Tar Nev, and then they all turned and bowed to Gwaynn, who, though slightly nervous, returned the honor. Master Renault stepped forward and bowed once more. “Master Putal has sent word ahead of your pending arrival. We are honored.”

Renault clapped. “Kent, Elise,” he said and two young Scholars stepped forward. “Please show Master Gwaynn his quarters, and give him a quick tour of our fair city. I have things to discuss with Tar Nev.”

Kent was shorter than Gwaynn with such blond hair and blue eyes that for a moment Gwaynn was reminded of Mille and the rest of Leek family. Kent smiled and Gwaynn noticed that the sash about his waist was yellow. Elise was also short, extremely, with long brown hair also tied in ponytail. At first Gwaynn took her to be a very young girl, petite in all ways, but then he saw that her breasts were well formed. She noticed his attention and poked them out a bit farther. Gwaynn quickly looked up, slightly embarrassed. She smiled at him knowingly, and he quickly realized that though she was petite, she was probably older than he was. She bowed, a green sash at her waist, then reached out and took Gwaynn’s hand.

“Come Gwaynn,” she said with a smile, as Kent took his other hand. He was immediately led away from Nev and Jon, but looked back to see his Master smile and nod to him, so he went willingly.

“We were so excited when we heard you were finally coming,” Kent said as they moved up the road made of dark red bricks. Both students noticed the limp in Gwaynn’s gait, and slowed their speed, but otherwise they ignored it.

“Yes, we were terribly disappointed when you decided to stay on Noble after the Council meeting,” Elise added.

“You knew about that?” Gwaynn asked, surprised.

Kent laughed and Elise smiled at him. “Of course,” Elise answered. “There are so few Lovers, not like the other islands. Most people shy away from true knowledge and study.”

Gwaynn noted the smugness in her voice and was reminded instantly of Nev’s warning.

“Lovers?” Gwaynn asked, cocking his head.

Elise giggled and squeezed his hand tighter.

“Lovers of Wisdom,” she explained with a coy smile. “It is what we call ourselves.”

“Are you a Lover Gwaynn?” Kent asked, with a smirk of his own.

“I’m sure he is,” Elise commented, but Gwaynn said nothing.

The two led him past the dock side warehouses, all of which looked to be made of granite, but all the buildings were whitewashed so they gleamed just as brightly in the early morning sky as the marble buildings farther up the hill.

The road they followed meandered back and forth, cutting across the hill as they slowly rose higher and higher. Down near the docks were the smaller homes of the locals who supported the Scholars, but the higher up the hill you went, the more impressive the homes became. It wasn’t long before they encountered the dormitories of the young Scholars. These were larger multi-storied buildings sectioned into small apartments, which housed four students each. It was into one of these that Kent and Elise led Gwaynn.

“You will be staying with us in our apartment,” Kent explained as they entered a large foyer dominated by a fountain. The fountain was of a man standing with his arms spread wide with four jets of water coming from the tips of his fingers. In front of the fountain was a plaque. “Galen Dawkins” it read and below that it quoted. “The Universe was created perfectly imperfect.”

“You know of Galen?” Kent asked with a smirk as if testing Gwaynn. Gwaynn knew he was considered the father of modern reason. He also knew that Tar Nev believed he was the man who led the people to the Inland Sea, but he decided it was best not to give away too much information on this point.

“I have heard of him,” was all Gwaynn said.

Kent frowned, hoping for a better reaction. “Your belongings will be brought up later,” he said and the three of them began to climb a large winding staircase. Gwaynn made the climb very slowly, having trouble with his injured leg. It was growing very sore and tired, but he didn’t want to say anything. Along the way they met several other young students before finally reaching the third and top floor. The staircase ended at an open square balcony that overlooked the foyer and fountain below. There were four large white doors directly in the middle of the four walls. They entered the one directly to the right of the staircase, and immediately stepped into a small living space. Gwaynn was surprised to find that the walls were painted a brilliant sky blue, and sprinkled throughout the blue were white puffy clouds that seemed to drift about the room; near the base of the wall treetops could be seen, and in a few of these colorful birds. There were several soft pieces of furniture positioned about and a cabinet on top of which a porcelain water pitcher stood. In each corner there was a large potted plant, and candles were everywhere, on the wall sconces and on the tables, which hovered near each chair like a shy child clinging to its mother.

“They let us decorate our apartments however we wish,” Elise said proudly. “This is your room,” she added pulling him to the right. They entered a small room, complete with one bed, a small dresser and an end table. The room was an exercise in white; white walls, white bedspread, white dresser and table, with a white water pitcher placed on a white linen cloth. On the far side of the room were two doors made of glass panes, partially hidden behind sheer white drapes. Elise quickly walked over, pulled the drapes and opened the door. Gwaynn followed out onto a small balcony. He stood there a moment looking out over the town below and beyond that, the Inland Sea in the distance.

“You will be able to decorate it any way you choose,” Kent said. “My room’s sea foam green.”

“Purple!” Elise stated excitedly.

“You may leave those here if you wish,” Kent added, motioning to the kali that hung at Gwaynn’s belt.

Gwaynn smiled for the first time. “Not likely,” he said softly.

“There is no need for them on Lato,” Elise insisted, a concerned look on her face. “Surely you feel no danger from us?”

The smile fell from Gwaynn’s face. “No. You have been…kind,” he answered in all seriousness.

“If you stay,” Kent piped in. “Master Putal will take them away from you.”

Gwaynn shrugged. “He may try, but if he does you may have a one armed Master.”

“Oooh,” Elise said her eyes widening, and Kent’s face went a shade paler. They spent a long uncomfortable moment in silence then Elise slowly reached out and grabbed Gwaynn by the hand, trying to give support, as his limp grew worse. She waited for Kent to do the same, and eventually he did so and together they helped Gwaynn from the room, moved out of the apartment and back down the stairs. Once outside they immediately headed farther up the hill, passing more and more students as they went. Everyone greeted them and welcomed Gwaynn to the island. He felt a bit like a celebrity. They walked slowly and rested often. As they went Elise and Kent named the buildings they passed and expounded on what was studied in each. The subjects were many, from horticulture, husbandry, medicine, architecture, shipbuilding, politics, and astronomy. Near the top of the hill, but well below the Parthenon, was the largest building Gwaynn had ever visited. He stood gaping before an enormous entrance, which was flanked by two mighty columns. They climbed the stairs and walked up onto a large veranda that stretched in both directions, curving out of sight before actually ending. “Terra Libri,” a sign said, and below that “West Entrance.”

“This is the library. The treasure of Lato and all the lands of the Inland Sea,” Elise said as they stepped through the doors.

“The building wraps completely around the mountain,” Kent said proudly. “If you walk the length, it’s over four miles, and you end up exactly where you started.”

Inside the entrance sat an elderly woman at a large, sturdy white desk. She greeted them with a smile but said nothing. The three stepped farther inside but then stopped in the middle of a long, slowly curving hallway that was perhaps thirty paces wide. The ceiling was high, easily twenty feet above them and all along the interior wall there were shelves and shelves of books, floor to ceiling; the shelves doing a slow curve to match the walls of the massive hall. Large floor to ceiling windows dominated the exterior wall offering a magnificent view of the island and letting in streams of natural light. The windows were spaced only about five feet apart and continued on for as far as Gwaynn could see in either direction. Comfortable reading chairs were arranged in clusters near the large windows, but only a few were occupied at the moment. From where he stood, Gwaynn could now see more books than he ever had in his life, more than he ever even dreamed existed. The only break or interruption in the endless wall of books was the double doors directly opposite the large Entrance through which they come.

“Classrooms,” Elise explained, watching Gwaynn closely, “cut into the mountain.”

Gwaynn looked left and then right for as far as the curved hallway would allow and then without prompting he began to walk to the right, his eyes never leaving the vast wall of books. He did not say anything and Kent and Elise followed along behind in silence, remembering through him, their first trip to the Land of Books, which is what the students called the building. They walked nearly a mile before coming to another break in the bookshelves, another set of interior doors.

“Incredible,” Gwaynn said and stopped before the door marked “South Entrance.” This time there was an old man sitting at an identical desk at the entrance.

“It goes on like this all the way around?” Gwaynn asked, awed.

Both Elise and Kent nodded, all smiles, clearly proud of the building and their association with it.

“Yes,” Kent said. “Someday I may even read them all.”

“How many books are there?” Gwaynn asked in a hushed tone.

Elise giggled and shrugged her small shoulders. “All of them,” she said, “if not the originals, then copies.”

Gwaynn stood amazed, until Elise grabbed his hand again and led him out the south entrance.

“Come, I want to show you the Observatory,” she said and Kent grabbed his other hand and together they moved back into the sunlight. They had to backtrack a bit, once outside the Land of Books and soon came to a large ramped roadway, which led over the library and then higher up the hill. Gwaynn could see the Parthenon, closer and large beyond belief. For the first time in his life began to suspect that he might not be truly educated in the ways of the world. Before they reached the jewel of Lato however, they burst out into a very large park, nearly a mile across. All through the park ran many narrow pebbled pathways, and along the paths there were benches, statues and gardens of exotic plants and flowers. All of the pathways ran like spokes to a central square where at present there were several groups of students gathered.

“This is the Forum,” Kent explained. “It’s where many Masters openly teach and discuss topics with any student interested. There are many lively discussions.”

They passed a few groups and Gwaynn eavesdropped as they strolled by, but nothing much made sense to him. They also passed numerous marble busts of scholars, some Gwaynn had heard of, but many were strangers to him. He stopped to read every name and quotation and was taken with a few of them. Someone named Charles Darwin said, “Ignorance more frequently begets confidence than does knowledge.”

“Father of Evolution,” Elise commented, as if that explained everything, “Old Earth.”

Another bust of a Thomas Jefferson said, “It does me no injury for my neighbor to say there are twenty gods or no God.”

“Former leader,” Kent said, “Old Earth.”

“Do you have much information from old earth?” Gwaynn asked, truly impressed.

“Oh yes,” Elise said. “There are books and books. In fact, most of our knowledge comes down to us from Old Earth.”

Gwaynn just stared at her. It was said that the first men Traveled from old earth nearly six thousand years ago. “How is that possible?”

“Most of the volumes in the Land of the Books are copies from Old Earth,” Kent replied, puffing his chest out as if claiming responsibility for the feat.

“But that was nearly…”

Elise giggled. “Yes, thousands of years ago…Did you know that our year 3,198 is measured from the death of the man responsible for Traveling to the Inland Sea for the very first time?”

“Galen Dawkins,” Kent stated proudly.

Elise smirked.

Gwaynn just frowned at them both, but was distracted as they began to climb the steps up to the Parthenon. The building was incredible, immense and powerful, and Gwaynn could not keep himself from reaching out and touching one of the massive columns. It took all three of them holding hands and stretching out fully to encircle it. Inside of the long row of columns was a deep portico, which also spanned the entire building on all sides, and spaced evenly throughout were additional busts or sometimes-full statues of those who came before. There were many more here that were not so obscure, and Gwaynn had heard of most. A great many were ancestors who came during the relative near history, the Second Age of Man, but there were still a few from the far past of whom Gwaynn had no knowledge. One of the largest was of a bushy haired man with a thick mustache.

“Albert Einstein,” the plaque read and beneath it “E=mc.” And beneath that- “The Eternal mystery of the world is its comprehensibility.”

The name and formula meant nothing to Gwaynn, and without a comment Elise pulled him on. They toured the entire exterior before finally going inside to find one incredibly large rectangular room filled with vast amounts of paintings, etchings and drawings as well as other sculptures, but what dominated the entire inner area was a gigantic green marble statue of Galen Dawkins. Gwaynn stood with his mouth partially open as he stared at the magnificent piece of work. It was easily ten times his height and sat up on a large high base. Gwaynn doubted that the top of his head would have made the knee of the statue. On the base, as seemed to be the norm, was a plaque apparently made of gold. “The Ultimate sin is placing religion before reason.”

It was a famous saying; one Gwaynn’s father had quoted often, though mostly he substituted the word ‘religion’ for ‘ignorance.’

They continued to look about for a time. Many visitors came and laid flowers at the feet of the giant statue; others like Gwaynn and his new friends just looked about and contemplated the masterworks on display.

After the Parthenon, they visited the Observatory and Elise made Gwaynn promise that he would accompany her that night for a viewing of the stars. “Tonight,” she informed him, “is supposed to be crystal clear.”

With the tour mostly complete, they ate lunch in a small shop at the edge of the forum and listened to a speaker as he ran through the history of the Cassini, a land and people just to the north of the Deutzani. Gwaynn thought he would have become enchanted with the island if he had been allowed to visit when he was younger… He shook his head to clear away such thoughts and wondered at Nev’s whereabouts, not knowing that he would not see his mentor for another three days.

ǂ

“I received an envoy from the Toranado,” High King Mastoc began from his large, ornate throne. The chair was placed up high on a dais in order to look more imposing to those he granted audience. King Arsinol was aware of the trick, and made use of it in his own throne room, but knowing the secret did little to lessen the affect. The presence of nearly fifty elite Temple Knights standing guard around the room, added to the intimidation that engulfed the chamber. Arsinol silently wished Navarra was by his side, or even on the Island, but Weapons Masters were strictly forbidden on the King’s Island. Arsinol made due with Ja Brude, who knelt low beside him.

“They say Prince Gwaynn of the Massi was seen alive during the Competitions on Noble,” Mastoc continued. Arsinol made no comment.

“You may rise,” Mastoc finally said and gratefully the King of the Deutzani stood. Lately his knees bothered him greatly, but he was careful to show no sign of weakness to the High King.

Arsinol looked from the High King to the young Queen at his side, Queen Audra, his own daughter. She was gazing directly at him but her face remained flat, showing no emotion at all despite the fact that this was the first time she had seen her father in the six months since the wedding. She was growing heavy with child.

“We have heard those rumors too, your Majesty,” Arsinol answered.

“Rumors,” Mastoc began and his face darkened in anger. “Rumors you know to be true.”

Arsinol bowed his head and gritted his teeth. “Yes, Majesty.”

The High King sighed. “You assured me the royal line of Massi would end in the war, and now I come to find that the youngest Prince escaped to Noble. Word has also reached me that he’s escaped two more bungled attempts on his life!” he said tersely, starting in a low voice but gradually ending in a roar.

Arsinol cursed silently, acutely aware of Ja Brude wringing his hands beside him.

“This cannot get out,” Mastoc said still quite loudly. “Fear of my Knights will only go so far. If the Toranado and the Palmerrio ever aligned themselves…” he left the consequences unsaid, although everyone in the room knew that while the Knights were the elite force in the land, their numbers were their weakness. There were just not enough of them to subdue all the kingdoms of the Inland Sea.

“The rumors must end,” King Mastoc said with finality.

“We could send a message to Sinis,” Arsinol interjected. “We know he has fled to Lato.”

Mastoc shook his head. “I would not trust this with those assassins,” he answered, meaning the Executioners, “braggarts all. Their tongues would wag for sure. No, I will send Captain Hothgaard. He will know what men to choose for such a delicate mission.”

“You are aware,” Arsinol began, pausing to lick his lips. His mouth was suddenly dry, “that the boy is studying with Tar Nev.”

Arsinol forced himself not to drop his eyes as those of the High King latched on to him. The High King’s anger grew at the mention of his former Weapons Master.

The Traitor!  Mastoc thought, his face going red. The High King stared down at Arsinol for what seemed an eternity to the Deutzani King, his eyes boring into him. Finally Arsinol could take no more and glanced to his daughter, the Queen. She had a small smile on her face, as if she enjoyed watching his discomfort. There was no light or mercy in her eyes.

“I will send Hothgaard to deal with the boy; Nev can wait,” Mastoc eventually said, when he felt he could master his voice.”

“You begin to prepare for the invasion of Toranado if we fail,” the High King added.

Arsinol’s head flew up. “Invasion…of Toranado?”

The High King nodded and gave a slow smile. “Use the money you are stealing from the Massi.”

Arsinol blanched and then answered. “It cannot be done,”

The King studied him a moment. “It may well have to be, if either of us is to survive this.”

ǂ

Tar Navarra gazed through the small window of his cabin as the ports of Solarii slowly approached. A week had past since the end of the Competitions. A storm had hit the day after the final ceremonies and travel by trireme had been delayed. But even when the worst of the storm had past, the sky did not clear. Even now it was raining light and steady, the clouds low, gray and uniform, covering the earth like an old wool blanket. The weather matched Navarra’s mood. He was still stewing about Arsinol’s summons to the King’s Island and his own dismissal. He didn’t like be excluded, but he had little choice, only those invited dared to step foot on the High King’s Island. Executioners were not immune to death. So he sat in his cabin and waited, thinking about the Prince of Massi. Navarra was not surprised the boy had somehow managed to defeat B’dall, even though the later was this year’s best with katas. Navarra had faced Gwaynn personally and knew his skill was growing rapidly. He did, however, think that the odds were still with B’dall; after all, he had been training on Noble almost constantly for the last eight years. Noble, apparently, wasn’t everything.

Navarra blinked, the ship was fast approaching land. Standing on the dock was Sergeant Lindsay, patiently waiting for him. The Executioner’s curiosity peaked and he stood and went out onto the deck and into the rain.

Lindsay raised a hand in greeting that Navarra did not return. He merely waited impatiently until the ship was tied off and the gangplank was finally lowered. The Executioner was the first person off.

“I have news,” Sergeant Lindsay said by way of greeting. Navarra said nothing, just waited.

“It seems that Afton Sath’s late wife had some relatives near the town of Millvale,” the Sergeant hurried already aware of his superior’s foul mood.

Navarra raised an eyebrow.

“And the two made frequent visits to the hot springs nearby during the final years of her life.”

Navarra waved his hand, signaling Lindsay to get to the point.

“Thomas Fultan was her brother,” he finally said, and Navarra felt the air run out of his lungs.

“The Fultan’s,” he whispered and his first thought was of the eldest daughter, the one with the hair like fire and earth. What was her name? Ah, Samantha, yes. Then his thoughts strayed to the little one and his face darkened. He had been deceived by a child, and a very, very young one at that.

“Take the men. Pay a visit to the Fultan’s. Kill the servants but secure the family and wait for my arrival. I have matters to attend to, but I won’t be more than a half day behind you. If all goes well I should arrive tomorrow about mid-day.”

Lindsay nodded smiling, very glad that he was not a Fultan.

ǂ

On Lato, Gwaynn was surprised that he was completely at ease with his surroundings and the longer he stayed on the island the more he was being seduced by its people and their philosophy of learning. He was sure if his father would have sent him here as a child he would have grown up very happy, but now, that was not to be. He’d spent the past week with Elise, Kent and a host of other students and teachers. He followed them about learning bits and pieces of a dozen different subjects. He learned more about the history of the planet than he believed was possible. Through the telescope at the Observatory, he viewed the mountains and valleys of the moon, plus the planet Jupiter, its largest moons and the rings of Saturn. An entire new world of peace and learning was opening for him, yet everywhere he went he carried his kali. No one thus far tried to take them from him.

It was not until his eighteenth day on the island that he began to spar again with Nev, and even then he did so gingerly, favoring his left leg. They practiced in a closed gym sanctioned by Master Putal himself, who approved the place upon his return from the Competitions. On the days they manipulated time, Nev would bring large sacks of fruits, cheese and bread.

Gwaynn quickly improved his control, but he was still having difficulty succeeding while under the extreme duress of one of Nev’s attacks. Nev on the other hand could move from one point to another with seeming lightning speed even under the most determined attack.

“You seem to be adjusting well to life of Lato,” Nev said as they stood a few feet apart, circling slowly and panting from the effort. Nev studied the young man’s movements carefully; Gwaynn was beginning to push him, something he had thought impossible just a year ago.

Gwaynn nodded. “I like it here. I like the pe…” he stopped talking as he attacked furiously, striking high, then low, left and right in a seemingly random pattern. It took nearly all of Nev’s skill to parry the blows.

“You should not stop talking before you attack,” Nev said and in the middle of the admonishment slowed time and jumped from before Gwaynn to behind. Nev knew the move was too fast for the eye to follow, at least in normal time. But somehow, Gwaynn managed to drop and block the blow intended for the back of his right shoulder and then he struck out so quickly at Nev’s shins that the older man had to skip back awkwardly.

Gwaynn stood, still coming, but Nev held up a hand, laughing. “I need to eat.”

“You told me never to use time unless it was to end a fight or run from one,” Gwaynn scolded.

Nev laughed all the more, though he had to bend at the waist as the hunger cramps hit him. “I used it to end the fight; you just blocked the killing blow. No one else could have done such a thing.”

Gwaynn shrugged.

“It’s not natural,” Nev added.

This time Gwaynn laughed. “What is natural?” he asked becoming serious. “Master Jann says that with each decision we make we create a New World. She says life is like the branches of a tree, and we decide where the branches grow. She even suspects that in every decision we face we also create other realities. Each reality is anchored in our decisions. Each different decision means a different reality. She claims that there are an infinite number of realities all marching along next to ours, some are almost indistinguishable from the one we live in, while others may be radically different, depending on the scale of the decisions.”

Nev nodded. “Yes, so Galen has said. Sounds intriguing, does it not.”

“I think I like the idea of a reality where Gwynn is still alive, a reality where I’m still whole,” Gwaynn said, and took a bite from a date.

Nev sat quietly for a moment considering. Yes, it was a very comforting thought. “I think I may have to meet this Master Jann,” he finally said.

Gwaynn smiled again. “You’d like her. Her hair may be bushier than yours.”

Nev nodded again, but uncharacteristically remained somber.

“Don’t become too attached to this place,” he finally said and Gwaynn’s smile dropped from his face. Nev regretted driving it away. Gwaynn smiled so little.

“It may not be good for the people of Lato if we stayed over long,” he added.

Gwaynn sighed, but said nothing, and after a moment ate another date.

ǂ

Tar Navarra rode up the lane to the house. Kronos, his mount, kept to a slow walk and Navarra did nothing to speed him up. Today he was Death, the Black Horseman himself. And death should never hurry. He knew the family would be watching, dreading his arrival and his slow approach would be excruciating. Sergeant Lindsay was waiting out front with the other men; the Fultan’s were all trussed up tight, all on their knees, facing his way. The servants were swinging gently from the large oak tree out front, their hands tied behind their backs. Navarra smile inwardly, as Sergeant Lindsay rode out to meet him.

“He’s gone to Koshka,” the Sergeant informed him. “He spent several nights here then moved on. The middle girl broke just before we hung Murl…the cook.”

“Koshka,” Navarra said slowly, letting the word roll off of his tongue. He rode to the opposite side of the oak and dismounted as if he didn’t have a care. He had never heard of the town, but as he moved slowly down the family’s line he knew he would soon have all the answers. He studied them closely. The little girl watched him with wonder, the middle girl kept her head down and from the look and smell of her; she’d urinated on herself sometime earlier. Navarra crinkled his nose. Thomas likewise had his head down. The only Fultan eyeing him with any life was the eldest daughter, her expression blazing. His heart skipped a beat when he looked into her eyes. She was just as alluring as he remembered, and the fact that she was facing death with courage made her even more so…at least in his eyes.

Navarra stopped before Thomas, who didn’t move. “Koshka?” he whispered to the man.

Thomas raised his head. “Yes, please. He went to Koshka to hide. He is an old man and has no heart for war.”

Navarra cocked his head and then turned to Sergeant Lindsay. “Where is Koshka?”

“Deep to the southwest, along the Scar Mountains, maybe fifty miles south of Manse,” he answered.

“You and the men get started now. Use all speed. If I do not catch up with you before you arrive, you may begin persuading the locals to reveal his whereabouts. I shouldn’t be more than a day behind you, however.” Navarra ordered…his blood suddenly hot in his veins.

“Now?” Lindsay asked, confused.

“Now,” Navarra confirmed, “at once.”

Sergeant Lindsay’s brows creased momentarily, but still he turned and ordered his men to prepare the mounts. Navarra walked over to Kronos and removed the block from the horse’s flanks and began to assemble it not far from the two swinging corpses. He moved slowly, wanting to draw this out. After a few moments Lindsay and the men assembled on horseback near the waiting family. Navarra looked up, nodded and they immediately moved out. The Executioner waited until they were well on their way and completely out of sight, then he turned. Only Samantha and the little girl were watching him. The middle girl…Arabelle he believed her name to be, was crying a bit harder now. Navarra smiled at the little one, and unbelievably, she smiled back at him. He walked slowly over and then behind her. He knelt down on one knee so that his face was directly behind her head. Her little arms were tied tightly behind her back and he watched for a moment as her small, red fingers wiggled about.

“Do you know who Uncle Afton Sath is today?” he whispered reaching out to cup her chin with one hand, and with his other he grabbed a handful of her pretty brown hair.

He felt her shiver. “Umhmm,” she mumbled an affirmative.

“And would you like a sugared biscuit?” he asked very softly.

She giggled.

“Good girl,” he said and with a quick jerk, pushed her chin one way, and pulled her hair in the opposite direction. Her neck snapped easier than he was expecting, and he twisted her face so far around that he was able to watch as her eyes rolled back in her head, showing only whites. Arabelle began to scream as he stood and pulled the little one by the hair. He dropped her at the base of the old oak. She landed with her head at an odd angle to the rest of her body, her white pupil-less eyes still twitching.  He would rather have cut her head off, his preferred method of execution, but she was too small for the block. Arabelle, the screaming one however…

He moved in front of her and grabbed her by the hair. Her shrieks grew louder.

Music to my ears, Navarra thought and a small smile flittered across his face. He pulled Arabelle kicking and squirming across the yard. She fought surprisingly hard for such a little thing, and kicked him repeatedly in the shins until he lifted her head and slammed it down hard on the solid wooden block, stunning her. The girl groaned softly as he turned and maneuvered her head into a shallow depression and then he secured it tightly with a strong leather thong. He wrapped another thong quickly around her ankles a few times to hold her legs together and still. Once in place, with her hands tied behind her back, she was completely helpless. Her nose was bleeding slightly as he moved back to Kronos, and with great care unwrapped his axe.

He turned, enjoying the wild look in Arabelle’s eyes. As he approached she whimpered softly and began breathing in and out very rapidly. He knelt by her and brushed a lock of hair from her face. “It will be over very quickly,” he cooed. She just looked at him, her eyes going blank from shock. He sighed and stood, disappointed. He knew he would get no more reaction from her; once their fear reached a certain point the doomed shut down completely. He raised his axe, took a quick look back at Samantha. He smiled at her, and with a smooth practiced motion brought the axe down. It thumped loudly in the quiet morning air, and Arabelle’s body jumped and immediately fell away from her head.

‘A clean stroke,’ he thought with pride.

“Bastard!” Samantha yelled behind him. He turned, still smiling, and pointed to himself in surprise.

“Your turn is coming soon enough,” he replied, and pulled the headless body of Arabelle over and dropped her next to her younger sister, blood still flowing lightly from the severed neck. Next, he bent and began to arrange the body to his liking. He turned Arabelle on her back, then removed the thong at her ankles and spread her legs slightly.  He then returned to the block and removed her head. He purposefully carried it by the hair letting the stump of the neck drag in the dirt just a bit and then he placed Arabelle’s head in the crotch of her legs so that her dead, blank face pointed past her feet and directly at the remaining two victims. He again brushed the hair out of the dead girl’s face, almost lovingly, then stood and turned.

Samantha said nothing, did not even look at him, rather her eyes remained fixed on the face of her dead sister, fascinated. Arabelle’s eyes seemed to stare right through her. She groaned and sucked up a bit of snot, only then realizing that she was crying.

The Executioner walked toward his two remaining victims and Samantha felt a wave of terror course through her body. It was like nothing she had ever experienced before and she felt as if she might faint. Instead, when the man was close enough she spat at him, hitting his pants. He ignored her, however, and with one hand grabbed her father by the hair and placed the other hand under his left shoulder and then pulled him to the block. Samantha watched stunned, as her father did nothing to try to stop the killer. He made no move to escape until his head was secured and then he strained at his bonds as if suddenly coming out of a dream, but by then it was too late. The Executioner tied his feet, and then moved to pick up the axe.

Tears flowed from Samantha’s eyes, blurring the scene. She blinked quickly, desperate to clear her vision, though why she could not have said.

“Please!” she shouted as loudly as she could when the Executioner picked up the huge, deadly looking axe. He turned, smiled at her again, and then with an effortless stroke, he cut her father’s head from his body.  Samantha’s eyes were open, but she did not see the blood, did not see as the Executioner pulled her father’s body until it lay next to Arabelle’s, nor did she noticed as he placed the head so that her father too, was staring at her.

Samantha was no longer crying when she felt the Executioner grab her by the hair and begin to pull her to the block. He jerked her roughly from her knees and her body dropped violently down and she blinked from the pain in her scalp. Her face was just inches from the ground so that when she began screaming her breath blew up small puffs of dirt. She began to fight and squirm but no matter which way she turned the pain continued to grow. She felt certain her scalp would give away, but as suddenly as it had started the pain was gone.  A strong hand gripped her by the neck and lifted her head and torso. When she saw the block beneath her she panicked again and kicked out, fighting now in earnest, but with her hands tied it was futile. As her head was forced down, Samantha screamed again, rage suddenly filling her. She could see and smell the blood left by her father and sister, but nothing she did seemed to matter and her head was soon in place. The dark wood of the block was cooler than she expected and actually felt good against the heat of her skin. She dimly felt the Executioner place a knee in the center of her back, holding her still as he tied the leather thong about her head, securing her in place. Once in position, Samantha felt truly helpless. Her head was held tightly, and she found herself focusing on the feel of the wet, warm blood of her family on her cheek. Her breathing was coming in rapid little gasps, which made her think of Arabelle. She could not turn her head and could only look one way. Unable to move, she stared at Murl’s dangling feet. The cook’s left foot was bare. Somewhere along the line she must have lost a shoe, and Samantha found her attention riveted by the toes of her former friend.

A noise behind her suddenly grabbed her attention. She strained against the leather thong but her head was fixed in place, her eyes darted down, but she still could not see the Executioner. He would have to come to the side to kill her and fear swelled in her that he was already in position on the opposite side. She closed her eyes waiting for the blow, but then she felt his hands on her legs, felt her skirts being lifted up.

“No!” she yelled and tried to kick out, but he was already positioned safely between her legs where she could not get at him. Her skirts came all the way up, and he piled the heavy fabric up on her back and atop of her tied hands, then she felt him ripping at her undergarments. They pulled away very easily, and suddenly she could feel the cool air of the day on her upper thighs and buttocks.

“No!” she yelled again as his hands ran over her bare legs, touching her everywhere at will. She squirmed and felt the skirts fall back down, but they were quickly yanked up once more, and with a shock as great as any she felt that day, one of his fingers entered her.

Samantha gasped as the Executioner leaned his face very close to her ear and laughed quietly. “You are ready,” he said as he moved his finger in and out of her painfully. “I knew you were like me.”

“Stop,” she pleaded, her voice hoarse, and she began squirming once more.

“Yes, I like it when you move,” he whispered and then his finger was out of her. She could hear him fumbling with his clothes, and she panicked once more.

“Please,” she begged, but he just chuckled. She bucked as hard as she could and felt her skirts fall back down, but they were hoisted up and then she felt him trying to enter her. It was all so quick she didn’t have time to register what was happening. She felt him thrust against her…close, and then with a sharp pain he was deep inside her.

She screamed, but he ignored her and began the rhythmic pumping of rape. She began to cry, but he did not stop until her skirts fell back once more. She heard him curse and withdraw, tugging at her clothes. They came up quickly enough and once more he was in her. She stopped fighting, and just cried her sobs keeping time with the incessant pounding and then her skirts fell again. He growled in frustration, and to Samantha’s surprise she felt the bonds at her wrists cut. Her hands instantly fell to her side and began to tingle as blood rushed back into them. She moved them to the block, using her arms to take some weight from her neck and shoulders. Once again her skirts were lifted, this time farther up nearly over her head, and then he was in her again, moving frantically now. He continued for a few minutes more, though for both of them it felt like much longer and then she felt his hot seed as it was released deep inside her. He collapsed down on her back, his weight hurting her neck, but she forced herself to make no sound. He remained where he was for several long moments, breathing heavily into her ear.

“I’m not through with you yet,” he whispered and suddenly the weight of him was off of her. She dared not move and strained to hear his movements. Unbelievably she heard his steps receding. Hope flared in her. Was it possible that he had forgotten about her hands? Surely not. He’d just cut her bonds a few minutes prior, but then she heard the telltale squeak of the front door to the house and knew he’d gone inside. Frantically she reached up and felt around the block for the leather thong. It was wrapped about a hook of sorts and it took her several long moments to unwind it and free her head. As she worked, her ears strained against the sound of his return, but the door had not open by the time she was free. She immediately came up on her knees, pushed her skirts down and glanced at the house. The Executioner was nowhere in sight, so Samantha stood and looked about for a weapon, any weapon. Her eyes fell on his axe, but she knew instantly that she would not be able to lift it, let alone swing it with any force. She took a few steps to the right, then turned and moved a few steps back the other way. She was beginning to panic all over again, when she spotted the wooden handle Wellman had been working on for a smaller, much lighter axe. She ran to it. The handle was about three feet long, but when she lifted it she knew it would have to serve. Even though it had no head on it, it was heavy, made of strong wood, oak probably. She lifted it, then moved to the far side of the main door and waited, standing just as close as she could to the house. He would have to come out the door for her to have any chance. If he went out the back and walked around the house, she knew she was lost.

She stood very quietly, her body shaking slightly, but her arms were cocked and waiting…and still waiting, but he did not emerge. She was about to move when she heard the creak of the door. She swung just before she saw him, estimating where his head would be. She was not wrong. Even though he jerked at the last moment out of reflex, the handle struck him directly across the bridge of the nose. He staggered, but did not fall back into the house as she expected, instead he took a few staggering steps out in front of her. She swung again, hitting him on the back of the head this time and finally he went down. He lay at her feet unconscious, but she swung three more times, big overhead swings like when she’d killed the bull snake in the garden. Blood was coming from the Executioner’s nose and from behind his right ear. She started to turn away but then swung two more times, hard blows but poorly aimed, striking the downed man once on the top of the head and again on the right shoulder. She immediately dropped the ax handle and considered finding a knife to make sure the Executioner was truly dead. But she was afraid to get to close to him, afraid to touch him and then her hands started to shake uncontrollably and her mind began to shut down.

She turned, refusing to look at the body at her feet and entered the house. She moved mechanically without real thought and retrieved her father’s bow, all the arrows, which amounted to three sheathes of twelve, and his hunting knife. She then bolted up the stairs to where she and Arabelle shared a room and threw as many of her clothes as she could manage onto her bed, making sure to include the heavy workpants her father allowed her to wear while working with the animals in the winter. She wrapped them all up in one of her blankets and quickly tied off the ends and hauled them all downstairs, feeling slightly ridiculous carrying such a large bundle. Next she went to the kitchen and quickly packed all the bread and salted meat she could.

When she was finished, she took a quick peek outside, but the Executioner still lay unmoving.

‘He’s dead,’ she thought with disbelief but couldn’t make herself check, couldn’t make herself go near him.

Her arms full, she moved to the barn and saddled Bane, their big roan. Then she threw a pair of saddlebags on Nancy, their mule, also tying the clothes and food onto the mule’s back. She quietly led them out of the barn, grabbing several canteens as she went. She filled them with water from the trough, not wanting to waste the time to pump fresh water, and glanced at the Executioner but then her eyes found her father, and sisters and began to fill with tears. She shook them clear; saddened that she would not be able to bury her family. Then her eyes fell on the large black horse nibbling at the grass which grew under the oak.

She moved to Bane and pulled out the bow. She fought the urge to kill the animal but in the end her body moved as if it had detached itself from her mind and senses. She notched an arrow, pulled it back as far as she was able, and aimed at the horse’s chest, just where it joined with the neck. Her arms were still shaking uncontrollably and she fought against the involuntary movement…wanting a clean kill.

“Forgive me,” she whispered, feeling slightly guilty though days later she would not remember anything from this morning clearly. After several seconds she finally let the arrow fly. She’d always been good with the bow, a natural shot, her father repeatedly told her, and on this occasion it was no different, despite the tremors in her arms. The arrow struck true, and the horse bolted and screamed in pain. It ran off shaking its head as it went. Samantha glanced at the Executioner. He was lying prone, still bleeding and without thinking she notched another arrow but suddenly her shaking increased.

‘He’s dead,’ she thought, and was suddenly overwhelmed with fear that the Executioner would suddenly stand and chase after her and she would be unable to do anything but shake. In a daze, she removed the arrow and placed it back with the others.

Her mind went blank. She did not see the Executioner, did not see her dead family and without knowing how, she swung herself up on Bane and headed down the lane. Once moving she had no conscious thoughts of where she would go, her body just acted and guided the animals of its own accord.

When she got to the end of the lane, she did not use the road that led to Millvale; instead she crossed it and moved out into the field. She headed south first, before moving west toward Koshka. She was only dimly aware that she needed to avoid the Sergeant and all those men ahead of her. She had not ridden even a quarter of a mile before she was sobbing uncontrollably. Her grief was so complete that she neither knew nor cared which direction Bane headed.

XII

Gwaynn walked slowly with Elise back from the Observatory to their rooms. His leg was feeling much better and with the exercise he was getting with Nev most afternoons he felt sure it would be back to normal shortly. The night was clear and cool, perfect for viewing the distant stars and galaxies. Gwaynn was fast becoming as enthusiastic about the night sky as his small female companion. Kent and a few other students had joined them, but they’d all departed together around midnight, leaving him and Elise alone to wait for Orion to move higher into the night sky. Gwaynn was eager to see the Orion Nebula, and Elise was eager to show it to him. They studied it for almost an hour until the moon rose over the horizon and though it was far from full it shone brightly, as if competing for attention.

“Oh, I’m so tired,” Elise said stifling a yawn, though the truth was her nerves were buzzing, very aware of the young man walking beside her. Her interest in Gwaynn had grown steadily over the past week, though from the very first she’d found him very easy to look at. It was his natural intellect, calm demeanor and the fact that his interests somewhat mirrored her own that seemed to steadily draw her closer and closer to him. And, of course it didn’t hurt that he was mysterious and strong. The only thing she disliked about him was his constant need to carry about those barbaric kali. No matter how she tried to persuade him to leave them behind, insisting that Lato Island was safe, he’d always nod to her in agreement, but then bring them along anyway. The weapons bothered her but they also made him stand out against the rest of the Scholars.

It did not discourage her in the least that, as yet, he had given no sign of interest in her. She could change that; after all she had with Kent, who was her on again off again lover. Gwaynn was tall and well built though Elise could tell he was young for his size. Young and shy, she liked her men like that; it gave her a bit more control.

Gwaynn made no reply in return just mumbled an agreement, obviously distracted by something.

“I hope you are not too tired,” she said, a little too coyly, hoping to at least hold his hand a bit.

Gwaynn again made no answer just continued to walk.

“Gwaynn!” Elise said, not accustomed to being ignored when she was alone with a boy.

Gwaynn turned to her and frowned. “Keep walking,” he said in a low voice.

“Of course,” she replied. “I’m not that tired.”

“Keep walking and talking,” Gwaynn said, and suddenly Elise could tell he was a bit tense. She smiled, thinking she was the cause of his nervousness. Well, she would give him something to be nervous about.

“Act normal,” he added.

“I certainly will,” she replied and slipped her arm through his. Surprisingly he didn’t act attracted or repelled.

“Good,” was all he said. They moved down a hill and then around a slight bend. They were approaching their building. “Don’t look back,” he added, and it was Elise’s turn to frown.

She was about to ask why when two dark shapes appeared out of the bushes up ahead. Gwaynn slowed to a stop and she with him. Gwaynn looked back, and she followed his gaze. There were three more shapes moving quickly toward them from behind.

“Who are you?” Elise said loudly, somehow hoping that they were students or Masters, but instinctively knowing that they were not. No one answered, and her fears were confirmed when Gwaynn slowly drew his kali.

“Kneel down and move slowly to the other side of the bench behind you,” Gwaynn whispered in her ear like a lover. “Hide in the bushes if you must, but while I live; do not move.”

She couldn’t believe he sounded so calm, and began to wonder if perhaps she had misjudged his lack of interest. She did as he said without question, and gawked as the men slowly approached from both sides. Gwaynn stood unmoving between them, waiting for them with an apparent lack of concern.

The two groups of men, three from the rear and two from the front came to a stop about ten paces from Gwaynn. They said nothing. Three were holding their own kali, and two had long swords.

Gwaynn waited patiently, his breathing slow and easy. He was immensely thankful that the men had decided to corner him on such a narrow pathway. It would make it easier for him, especially when he had them both behind and in front of him. He studied the men as they approached, trying to read the nuances of their movements as Nev had taught him. One of the men in front, the one with a long sword, he was clearly the leader and the most aggressive. Gwaynn expected him to attack first, as did the other men, and after only a few seconds he complied.

Elise screamed, but Gwaynn did not hear it, instead he concentrated on the first attack. It was clumsier than he had expected, but he wasted no time to analyze it. He ducked under the stroke and dove past the leader, tucking into a roll as he went by. He struck out at the back of the leg of the man trailing the leader. The man yelled out and collapsed as Gwaynn smoothly continued to his feet, now facing four standing opponents all in front of him. He slowly backed up, getting some distance between him and the man on the ground. He did not want to worry about getting his tendons cut from someone who no longer posed any real danger.

The leader and his three companions followed, now moving after him with a bit more caution. Elise remained as quiet as possible as they approached her hiding spot; one of them glanced her way and she stifled another scream, then the man shifted and began moving her direction. Elise gave a squeak of terror but Gwaynn was already moving, blocking blows and racing quickly through the first two assailants and in a flash set about attacking the trailing pair. Though surprised, one of them managed to block Gwaynn’s blow, but the man who had moved on Elise lost his head. It fell and rolled under the bench she was hiding behind. Elise retched, her eyes locked on the blood draining from the stump of neck as the body fell to the ground.

Gwaynn, however, did not pause, but continued to press the attack. There were only three now, and they seemed very slow to Gwaynn. He blocked another blow from the leader, before slicing almost entirely through the right arm of another assailant. The arm hung from a thin sliver of meat and skin, and the hand attached to it popped open and dropped the kali it had held. The man screamed, and fell back holding his wound, blood pouring through the fingers of his good hand. He continued to scream until he too lost his head.

Elise cried out again and Gwaynn spun. The leader had suddenly changed tactics. He pulled back his sword and was attempting to grab a hold of Elise, who was desperately trying to keep the bench between them. Gwaynn rushed forward, though he instinctively knew that he would not get to Elise in time; the man was closing on her too fast. But without conscious thought, Gwaynn felt time slow around him. In a fraction of a second he tore forward, covering the entire distance in less than a heartbeat and without hesitation he thrust his blade into the exposed back of the leader. To Gwaynn the move occurred naturally; to Elise and her attacker, the movement was blindingly fast. The leader of the group crumpled and dropped to the ground, dead, his heart pierced. Gwaynn slowed and turned to face his lone opponent, but not before slicing open the throat of the wounded man on the ground after he made a pitiful lunge at Gwaynn’s right leg.

“Who are you?” Gwaynn asked the lone survivor, as hunger cramps gripped his mid-section. He tried to ignore them, and forced himself not to bend at the waist. His legs were shaky and it felt as if all the strength had gone out of his arms. “Who are you?” he repeated, the menace plain in his voice.

The man did not answer. He was sweating and circling, clearly trying to get to the far side of Gwaynn, who apparently was standing between him and his supposed freedom.

“You have seconds to live,” Gwaynn stated, hoping the man would just surrender. He did not want to kill this man, but would not hesitate to do so. What he truly wanted was answers, plus he was reluctant to fight in his present state.

“If you do not speak, you die. Who are you?”

“My…my name is Valent,” the man said. “Valent Torbors.”

“And?”

The man did not answer instead he attacked, clumsily. Gwaynn blocked the thrust, and in real time, used the powerful wrists he had developed over the months of practice with the heavy wooden katas. He struck out as hard as he could and the man’s right kali flew from his hand. The man stood there stunned looking down at his empty hand. His will to fight flagged. He knew he had no hope of defeating this…this.. boy. He groaned in despair, but even so attacked yet again, but this time he charged for the girl. Gwaynn was expecting such a maneuver, but how he could not say. He sprang forward and stabbed the man just below the right collarbone. The man hissed with pain and swung with his left at his killer. Gwaynn blocked it with his right kali then yanked his left from the man’s chest. The man screamed and staggered. Gwaynn spun and lashed out; removing the man’s left hand at the wrist. Valent screamed again and lunged at Gwaynn, who drove one kali into his groin and the other back into the man’s chest. Valent slumped immediately and fell to the ground, and in this universe at least, was no more.

Gwaynn stood panting for a moment then he heard Elise whimper. He went to her and knelt down, hunger pangs making it hard to think. She was crying, and looking from him to the decapitated body in front of her and back again.

“There…there were five of them,” she said, disbelief in her voice.

“They were poorly trained,” Gwaynn gasped, the pain in his abdomen growing.

“They were not!”  A voice declared from behind him. Gwaynn stood shakily to see Tar Nev walking briskly down the path, followed by Master Putal, Master Jann, and a gang of sleepy students. Nev arrived first and knelt to look at the first man he came to. He nodded mostly to himself and looked up at Gwaynn and smiled.

He pulled up a sleeve on the right arm of one of the dead men, and pointed out the distinctive tattoo. “They were Temple Knights,” he said simply and the crowd around them gasped. Temple Knights were the most seasoned, well-trained troops in the entire Kingdom…yet they were not Weapons Masters, and clearly not Tars.

“Temple Knights?” Gwaynn asked looking down at the carnage he had caused but then he shrugged.

“I think our time here has come to an end,” he said to Nev, clearly saddened by the fact.

ǂ

Samantha rode due south throughout the rest of the day, only coming out of her stupor when the daylight began to wane. She did not spur Bane into a run, though at times she wanted to, instead she let him pick the pace, saving his energy for when she might truly need it. The sun was still an hour from setting when she reached the spot where she planned to camp for the night. She knew the game trail she’d been following very well. It was a short cut to the town of Dunn. Her father could not take it with the wagon when he was carting ale, but they would often come this way on horseback. When she was younger, Wellman would take her out into the woods to camp, swim and fish. This path led to their favorite swimming hole. It was a familiar spot and she felt safer because of it. The game trail crossed the Clearwater creek some four hundred feet from a large rock fall, which created a deep clear pool. She crossed over the creek while it was still shallow and moved off the game trail, traveling along the south side of the rushing water. She passed the swimming hole then turned out into the woods but rode only about twenty-five more feet. She stopped when she came to a steep bluff. At the base there were a number of boulders strewn about, like toys left behind by a careless child. Samantha led the animals through the boulders until she came to a flat clear section of rock, which was hidden from both the creek and the game trail, by the spattering of boulders. In the center of the space was a well-used fire pit, and directly next to the bluff was a pair of boulders, upon which a large slate of flat rock rested creating a natural roof, protection from all but the most serious rain. Samantha started to cry, thinking of the many times she had camped here with her father, Wellman and Arabelle.

She fought back the tears and dismounted. She removed her belongings from Nancy and then the saddle from Bane, going through the motions in a mental fog, trying not to think because it brought only pain. When the animals were free, she led them carefully back to the creek and allowed them to drink their fill, and as they did she quickly stripped off her clothes. The air was chilly for the end of March, but the water was not iced over. She dipped a toe in to test it first; it was cold…very cold, but without any hesitation she jumped and went straight in over her head. The shock of the cold water was far greater than she had anticipated, and she almost yelled out under water. She broke the surface with a loud gasp that scared Nancy, who shied away momentarily before returning to drink again. Samantha’s first inclination was to head for the bank as quickly as possible and leave the frigid water behind. The cold attacked her skin and nerves like a thousand tiny knives, but it also felt wonderfully clean. She forced herself to stay and then rubbed her cold hands over her body, down her belly, and between her legs, wanting to wash away the feelings of sickness and guilt. Despite her efforts and the cleansing effects of the water, Samantha began to suspect that she would never feel truly clean again.

It wasn’t long before the cold began to numb her skin, and she made her way quickly to the bank and climbed out onto land. In all she was only in the water for a few minutes, but still the air felt strangely warm at first then she began to shiver uncontrollably. She picked up her clothes though she did not put them on while she was wet, instead she grabbed one of the blankets she had brought along and wrapped up in it. She seized Bane’s halter and led him back up into the safety of the boulders, then leaned against him for several moments for his warmth. Finally she hobbled him, and walked back down to the creek and did the same for Nancy. It was beginning to grow dark in the forest, but before it was completely black, she collected a good supply of dead wood, shivering all the while, and carried it to the shelter.

Samantha started a small fire just outside the overhang, and though she knew it was dangerous, that the fire could be spotted, she welcomed its warmth. She kept it small, however, and huddled close by. She snuggled in the warm wool blankets, pulling her feet up close and hugging her knees. She leaned against one of the large boulders and stared into the flames. She was sure she would not sleep, and was afraid even to close her eyes, terrified her mind would play out the day’s events over and over. But in the end, the exhaustion caused by the cold and the fear of the day’s events won out. As the fire and blankets warmed her, she grew drowsy and closed her eyes. She was asleep almost immediately. Just as she feared, her dreams were full of blood and killing, but mercifully she did not remember them.

ǂ

Tar Navarra woke just as she crossed the Clearwater creek. At first he was confused, not accustomed to waking up with his face in the dirt. He tried to move, but the pain in his head and shoulders convinced him to remain still for a moment. When he attempted to rise again he did so with much more care. His head was pounding as he reached up and gingerly touched his nose, which felt enormous. Blood was crusted in his nostrils and over his upper lip and mouth. Suddenly it came back to him and he looked over at the family stacked neatly beneath the oak. He glanced around the area. The girl was gone. Fury hit him like a wall of water and he gritted his teeth, but immediately stopped because of the pain it caused. He carefully reached around and felt the back of his head and found a large knot near the base of his skull. Blood was dried behind his ear and on his neck also. The girl had beaten him hard, but she was a fool for not killing him when she had the chance.

He stood and a wave of nausea went through him. His knees were shaking slightly, but as he began to move around his strength came back rapidly. The sun was just kissing the horizon, which meant he had been unconscious for approximately five hours. He grunted, amazed that he could have been out so long; the girl had put a walloping on him. He moved carefully over to the water pump, and pumped out fresh water. He was very thirsty and drank in large gulping mouthfuls and then he used more water to gently clean his wounds. He felt along the bridge of his nose, quiet sure it was broken, but he did not mind. He imagined it would make him look even more imposing.

He made his way over to the block and saw that the girl had not taken any of his weapons. His axe was where he had dropped it and his kali were still at his waist. He looked about for Kronos, but did not see him. He whistled loudly, but the stallion did not respond. Navarra frowned and then walked around the house and barn, whistling several more times, but there was still no sign of the horse. He was sure the girl could not have taken him, for Kronos was a well trained warhorse and would have fought if need be. He checked the barn on the off chance she had somehow managed to corral him, but the barn was empty of animals.

He decided to leave his axe, placing it just inside the door of the house. The block would also have to stay. He would return and retrieve them at a later time. Without a mount he began walking down the lane. He took time to study the tracks on the road in the fading light, and was able to pick out the girl’s as they left the road and took off across a field. She was riding a large horse and pulling a smaller one behind.

Good, he thought. Two animals will make tracking her easier. He was feeling thoroughly embarrassed about his present situation and cursed inwardly. To have a slip of a girl best him like that was completely unthinkable and something he would definitely not let get around. He thought of Samantha and how good her body felt that afternoon. He was sure she’d been just as excited as he. Perhaps that was why she did not kill him, in any case, he had already decided to enjoy her once more before he killed her, and kill her he would. There was no help for that now. Still if she was anything like him, they could have fun before the end…

His mind stopped in mid-thought, because there along side the road was Kronos, lying on his side, clearly dead. Navarra seethed and moved closer to find out the cause. He saw the wound in the horse’s chest almost immediately, though because the arrow had broken off at some point and he had to dig into the flesh to find out the source of the wound. He found a length of shaft and the arrowhead lodged deep in the horse’s lungs.

‘Damn girl,’ he thought to himself and pounded his fist against his thigh. She would pay dearly for this, and as his anger grew he started off toward Millvale, this time walking much faster than customary. He was impatient to begin tracking her, but had already decided that after he commandeered a horse in Millvale, he would head first to Solarii. Though it would cost him time, he would fetch his dogs before continuing after the girl. He was sure she would fear his dogs, and after she was dead he would enjoy watching them eat her.

ǂ

Samantha woke with the sun already on her face. She went from a deep sleep to panic almost instantly, standing so fast she slammed her shoulder into the rock overhang. Wincing from the pain, she scanned the area, silently berating herself for her carelessness. For the moment, however, she seemed to be safe, but there was no telling just how close the Executioner could be by now, if he was even alive. Her spirit sank. In her heart she knew he still lived. She should have killed him; she should have made sure. Now she would have to run without truly knowing whether he was chasing or not. She felt sick and would have thrown up if she had anything in her stomach. She quickly rolled up her belongs, making sure to pack everything tightly. The fire was long out but she still grabbed up several handfuls of dirt and threw it on the coals. Bane snorted and she looked over at him.

“You could have woken me,” she scolded, but Bane just snorted again. Beth was always startled when he snorted, but then laughed; believing Bane was playing with her. Thinking of her smallest sister, Samantha began to cry, softly at first but then uncontrollably. She cried for nearly a quarter of an hour before final managing to pull herself into some semblance of control.

She saddled Bane and packed up Nancy as fast as she was able then led them on foot back to the game trail she had been following. She looked north first, afraid she might see the Executioner just yards away, but the forest was empty. She sighed with relief and began to head south once more, this time at a faster pace. The woods in this area were still familiar to her and she made good time, but through it all, in the back of her mind she kept wondering how close the Executioner was behind her. He could be close. He might even have passed her in the night.  It was quite possible for she had only come about six miles from her home. She shook her head at her own foolishness, disgusted by her weakness. She rode at a trot for almost an hour, trying to make up for lost time until the path came to the edge of a clearing. The trail ran parallel to the clearing, just inside the tree line. She continued to follow it, but doing so made her feel exposed. She hated being so close to the open. She knew she must travel like Afton Sath, cross-country, away and out of sight of as many people as possible. Anyone she saw, or anyone who saw her was a potential informant, and she knew from personal experience how persuasive the man who followed her could be.

“Sam!” a voice yelled from deeper in the woods, up the hill to her left. She jerked out of her thoughts, cringing. She looked about, still riding, but now she heard the rustling of leaves.

“Sam!” she heard again behind her and turned to see Lonney Madres, the son of a farmer who regularly sold hops to her father. They lived about three quarters of the way to Dunn. He was younger by a few years, but even so he was aggressive in his advances toward her. But she had always found him more amusing than threatening. He was tall, very thin and a bit awkward. He had a slightly lopsided face, which he inherited from his father, and shaggy, straw colored hair that always looked as if it had never been combed, today was no exception.

“Sam stop!” He insisted for she had kept riding. Finally, knowing it was pointless now, she reined Bane to a halt. She remained silent, however, a little surprised to find that she could not make herself talk.

Lonney was on foot and ran the rest of the way down the hill, and then up along side of her. He patted Nancy as he passed, eyeing the pack on her back. “What are you doing way out here?” he asked, panting a bit from his exertion. He had a bow in his hand and a quarrel of arrows on his back.

Samantha felt her eyes begin to tear up, so she quickly turned her head away from him. “Just riding,” she answered and was proud of the fact that her voice barely wavered.

“What’s wrong?” Lonney asked sounding very concerned. Obviously her voice had wavered more than she thought.

“Nothing,” she answered growing angry with him and all his questions, “just riding.”

“With both Bane and Nancy?” Lonney asked, wondering if she thought he was an idiot like Hub, the man from Dunn who soiled his pants three times a week.

Sam nodded sheepishly, realizing how foolish she was being. She would need a better cover story in case she ran across anyone else.

“Does your father know?” Lonney finally asked, wondering what mischief she was up to now.

Sam jerked as if he had hit her. She stared at him then suddenly burst into tears. Lonney backed away quickly, like she was Hub, with soiled pants. She cried for a good minute before calming a bit. She looked at Lonney through tear-laden eyes and would have been amused at his expression but for the grief in her heart.

“My father is dead,” she whispered, flinching as she spoke, as if saying it aloud somehow made it real.

Lonney gasped. “How?”

Sam ignored him for a moment. “And Arabelle…and Beth,” she added. “Plus they killed Wellman and Murl.”

“Who?” Lonney stammered, shocked.

“A Deutzani Executioner,” she answered drying her eyes, “yesterday.”

They both remained in stunned silence for a moment before Lonney looked up at her, sad excitement in his eyes. “My father will want to know about this,” he said. “You must come home with me and tell him what has happened.” He expected her to agree, but she just shook her head.

“No, I can’t come to your house,” she answered. “Afton Sath came to ours, and the Executioner followed. He’s after me. He will follow me, and I will not lead him to your family. He will kill them.”

Lonney frowned. He had not considered this but then suddenly his face brightened. “Are you running south?”

Sam shook her head again. “I can’t tell you,” she answered.

Lonney frowned again, feeling as if she didn’t trust him.

“You might be killed for such information,” she added, reading his face easily. He brightened again, happy that she was showing such concern for his well-being. Then he got an idea.

“Are you at least going south as far as Stanton falls?”

Sam took a moment to think. She would go past the falls as she turned southwest traveling along the Clearwater creek to where it joined the Scar at Lynndon. If she continued on this pace she would reach the falls sometime late tomorrow morning, possibly the early afternoon.

“Yes, I will be passing the falls,” she finally answered, shrugging to herself. If he guessed she would be going to the falls it wouldn’t be hard to guess she was going to Lynndon, after all it was the only place to easily ford the Scar River within thirty miles.

“I’ll bring my father,” he said, now very excited. “We will meet you there at mid-day tomorrow.”

He patted her leg then began to move off out of the woods and across the field.

“If you are not there within an hour of mid-day, I will leave,” she yelled after him, suddenly relieved that she had met him; perhaps Mr. Madres will have some idea of what she should do.

“We’ll be there,” he yelled after her, then turned and ran all out away from her.

ǂ

It took two days to coordinate the move back to Noble Island. They went by Traveler, appearing just outside the main hall. Tar Amon was waiting for them.

“Welcome back,” he said with a genuine smile for each.

Gwaynn glanced around, but no one else from Noble Island was present. Amon was with a tall, handsome older woman, with incredibly long silvery-blonde hair. She was looking at Gwaynn with a mixture of curiosity and concern.

“This is Zarina Aleecia,” Amon said. “She is the leader of the Travelers.”

“Well met, Prince Gwaynn Massi,” she said her voice smooth and deeper than he expected.

Gwaynn’s eyes went wide with surprise, but he bowed slightly at the waist. He was immediately concerned that she knew his true identity, but made no effort to deny it. He was also mildly amused that the Zarina bowed to him in return. “You’ve had an eventful year,” she added.

Gwaynn shrugged, thinking he would not have chosen those words to describe the nightmare of the past year.

“You have many enemies,” she said, “and the list is growing longer. But do not count the Travelers among them.”

“I thank you,” he finally spoke, wondering where all this was going.

“We would like to assign a Traveler to you personally, for your protection,” she explained, aware of his confusion. Gwaynn gaped at her for a moment, for this was a very rare offer. In all, there were only about a dozen or so Master Travelers. The number of acolytes was unknown to most outside the Isle of Light. To have a personal Traveler was very expensive, and as far as Gwaynn knew only the High King himself managed such a thing. Gwaynn’s father, as well as the rest of the royal families made do with Speakers, who could communicate at long distances, but not actually create the power needed to move through space. The Speakers would summon a Traveler, and then the family would pay.

Gwaynn frowned and forced himself not to look over at Nev.

“I am honored,” he said, but he was not at all sure he wanted or needed a Traveler tagging along. In fact, he was sure he did not. It would be too easy to be a spied upon, too easy for someone to track his movements if the Traveler was untrustworthy. “I will consider it,” he added.

Both Tar Amon and Zarina Aleecia frowned, but no more was said about it.

“If you have no objections,” Gwaynn said, now addressing Tar Amon. “I would like to pay my respects to Leek and his family, and if it would not be too much trouble to Master Kostek and his students. Is Vio still in the infirmary?”

“No, she’s up and about. Her arm is still in a sling and will be for another few weeks, but she insisted on running last week and has been everyday since,” Amon answered, the pride in his voice obvious to all. “Vio is here and a few others, but most of the students are still away, and will be for another two weeks before the beginning of the next training year.”

“Oh yes,” Gwaynn said, remembering that the students were given a lengthy break between training years.

“Vio is probably with Tar Kostek. You’re welcome to go and visit. I’m sure Leek’s family would be happy to have you move back in.”

Gwaynn wanted to say something, but the presence of the Zarina held him back, so instead he just nodded and took his leave. He walked quickly, his limp hardly noticeable now, and headed toward the Mele Quarter.

He saw Vio well before she was aware of him. She was sitting, watching Krys spar with Tar Kostek. Looking at her slim back, narrow shoulders and short black hair he finally came to peace with his decision to return to Massi. He could not hide any longer, could not fool himself into believing that staying on the islands would bring safety.  To stay would only put those he’d grown to care about in mortal danger. Gwynn, Karl, Mille, had all met their end, plus there were the attacks on Vio and even Elise. He was a danger to them all.

Krys and Kostek were sparring with katas, and so were not aware of his approach, but when he came close enough Vio must have sensed something and turned around. She stared into his eyes for a long, startled moment, then smiled and spun around to face him. Her nose still had a slight bulge in it, but her bruises were gone. She wore a sling as Master Amon had said, and her wrist was heavily taped. Despite these injuries she jumped from the stool she had been sitting on and rushed to him. She lifted both arms and though the sling retarded her movement a good deal, managed to give him a hug, then kissed him on the cheek and stepped back to look at him.

“You’re taller,” she said, though they had only been separated about a month. It was true, however, that since his arrival on Noble Island he had grown a great deal. Where he once looked her directly in the eyes, now he gazed down at her.

“She’s right,” Tar Kostek said and grabbed Gwaynn’s arm by way of greeting. “You are taller.” Gwaynn shook his former teacher’s hand, and then turned to Krys, who made a slight bow, one that Gwaynn returned.

“How are you?” he asked, directing the question at Vio.

She smiled and shrugged. “Healing. Pugg believes I will be able to take this off in another couple weeks,” she added, indicating the sling.

“Great,” Gwaynn said, then turned to Tar Kostek. “May I borrow her for a while?” he asked. “Just until you’ve finished sparring.”

“But of course,” the elder man answered with a knowing smile. He glanced at Vio whose face was now tinted pink, but when he looked back at Gwaynn, he noticed no such flush. The boy was growing up quickly.

Gwaynn placed his hand on Vio’s good arm, just above her elbow and led her away from the two sparring warriors and out toward the beach where a life time ago, they had started their runs. Vio felt tiny electric shocks where his fingers met her skin. Her mind was racing, but not in any coherent fashion. She walked with him in silence, wondering just what was on his mind. She looked up at him, but his profile gave away nothing.

They landed on the path, which led up a rise and then down through the dunes of the beach and ultimately to the Inland Sea.

“I won’t be staying,” he said just as the sea came into view.

Vio felt her heart sink seemingly all the way to her toes. They moved down the sandy hill toward the beach below. “Where will you go?” She asked, dreading the answer she knew he would give.

He half smiled. “Massi. It’s time I went home. Being on the Islands hasn’t kept anyone from trying to kill me.”

“The Deutzani will hunt you there,” she said, and it was clear from the statement that she no longer considered herself a Deutzani.

Gwaynn nodded. “And I will hunt them.”

Vio sighed as they moved out onto the beach and down close to the water. They moved in and out on the very edge of the waves walking west, both watching the sea birds gliding and dipping around them. Without warning and as easily as sliding into an old pair of boots, Gwaynn’s hand slipped into hers. She was surprised and warmed, but for the first time with him she did not read more into the gesture than was there. He would go to Massi, and she would stay on Noble.

“Why did you come back?” she finally asked. He stopped walking and took her other hand in his.

“Jon, Nev’s brother will land in Hymnia in two days. I will meet him there, but before I went I wanted to say good-bye to my favorite Tarina.”

It took her a brief second to understand that he was talking about her, and as the realization dawned on her, he leaned forward and kissed her, softly at first but with a growing passion, fueled by need and denial.

The kiss lasted only a few seconds, far too short for either of them, but Gwaynn broke away, and with great discipline turned about and began to lead her back in the direction that they had come. Neither said anything, for both understood the necessities of their positions. Life had separated them and life would keep them apart. When they reached the bottom of the path, which led up through the dunes, they saw Krys waiting at the very top of the hill. Still holding hands, they did not hurry and Krys made no move to come down and meet them.

“Master Amon told us about the Temple Knights,” Krys said once the two had approached close enough for normal conversation. Gwaynn could not help noticing the sound of awe in his voice. Vio noticed also and looked at Gwaynn for an explanation.

He just shrugged.

“Gwaynn was attacked by five Knights on Lato,” Krys said with a questioning look on his face. He would stop if he received any signal for Gwaynn to do so. Gwaynn’s face, however, just carried a bemused smile.

“He killed them all.”

“They’re overrated,” Gwaynn answered. “They may be a dominant force on horseback and as an army, but on foot, they don’t stack up to either of you. Perhaps they could defeat a weak weapons master, but it would take more than one.”

Krys frowned. “Master Kostek thinks very highly of them. He claims that the Deutzani could not have surprised and defeated the Massi without the help of the Temple Knights.”

Vio blushed at the turn of the conversation, but she said nothing and just stared at Gwaynn in wonder.

“Perhaps…and perhaps I was just lucky, but I’m telling you both now. I have faced graver dangers.”

The three of them moved back up the path and toward the main hall of the Mele Quarter. “Will you head for Mount Erato to continue training with Tar Nev?” Krys finally asked. Up ahead, Gwaynn could see the entire Leek family out of their house and waiting to greet him. Little Mari was already running his way.

“No, I’m going to Massi,” Gwaynn said simply. “And I would like you to come with me.”

Vio gasped, and Krys just looked stunned, but Gwaynn smiled and scooped up the running Mari and twirled her around. “You are so lovely,” he said, “by far the prettiest girl on the island.” Mari giggled. “Well, maybe it’s a tie,” Gwaynn added as an afterthought, “with Vio, Karin, Deidre and Shari.” Mari giggled more at that. Her mom, though beautiful in her own eyes, was not to be considered a pretty girl.

“What about my training?” Krys asked, secretly delighted to be going home with his King, and to begin taking upon himself the title of Massi Weapons Master.

“I will finish your training,” Gwaynn answered in such a serious tone that neither Krys nor Vio questioned it.

XIII

Tar Navarra rode into Solarii just after midnight on a dirty brown sway back he was forced to appropriate in Millvale. The horse, if you could call the beast that, was the best readily available animal in the town, and he could not waste time searching about for something better. He reached Solarii in a very bad mood, and to make it worse he was challenged, albeit briefly at the gate. Though the guards there said nothing, Navarra could feel their eyes going from him, to the horse and back. They undoubtedly were laughing at this very moment. Navarra tried to put it from his mind as he headed directly to the stables. No one was up at the moment, but it took only moments for him to find a stable boy sleeping in one of the empty stalls. Navarra kicked him on the upper thigh.

“Who…” the boy yelled, immediately alert. He sat rubbing the wounded spot on his leg, an angry retort on his lips, but he wisely closed his mouth when he recognized the Executioner.

“Saddle my horse,” Navarra ordered with a glare.

The boy stood up quickly. “Which…”

“Chaos. Have him ready in ten minutes,” Navarra barked, though Chaos was a mare. “I’m going to find something to eat and collect my dogs.”

The boy blanched at the thought of the large canines, which followed the Executioner about at times. The dogs were well trained, but whenever he was close to them he could swear they were salivating for a taste of his flesh, wanting nothing more than to attack and eat him. He got to work right away.

It was near one in the morning when Navarra finally left Solarii again. Chaos, a big dapple gray mare, trotted easily into the night with Vesania and Furia, the dogs, trotting along behind. Navarra would have liked to sleep, but the girl was already a full day ahead of him and he wanted to be back at the Fultan estate before noon tomorrow. He would travel another hour or so to an inn outside the hamlet of Danbridge. It started to rain before he was half way there and so he arrived cold, wet and angry.

He pounded on the door and woke an innkeeper named Lou, who was smart enough not to protest. In turn, Lou woke his son to rub down the horse. The dogs, much to the innkeeper’s dismay followed the large man dressed in black inside and up to the room at the top of the stairs. Lou started a fire as Navarra took off his wet clothes and hung them on a rack to dry.

“Wake me at sunrise,” Navarra said as the man was leaving. “Knock. If you try to enter they will kill you,” he added, motioning to the dogs. They happily jumped up on the bed as the Executioner climbed under the covers. He found sleep immediately.

ǂ

Samantha arrived at Stanton Falls nearly an hour before noon, and though Nancy and Bane could use the rest, she still chafed at the thought of not moving on. She could feel the Executioner coming, and for the thousandth time wished she had put an arrow in him instead of his horse. With a sigh, she dismounted and allowed both animals to drink and then she led them a short way to a field where tiny new shoots of grass were just appearing. She hobbled them so they wouldn’t wander too far and then moved back to the falls. Stanton Falls were not high as waterfalls go, only about twice the height of a man, but the river was wide and the falling water created a thunder of noise making it impossible to hear anyone approaching. She moved onto a flat, damp rock far enough from the falls so that she would not get overly wet from the mist created by the falling water, then she knelt carefully on the water’s edge. She put her hair completely in the cold water to rinse off some of the dirt from her travels. She combed her fingers through it and when her hair felt relatively clean she twisted it dry as best she could then moved out into the meadow. She took the short ropes from the legs of Bane, but stayed near him in case she had to leave quickly.

The time past slowly, but thankfully Mr. Madres and Lonney arrived before noon. Samantha was extremely relieved to see them. She smiled shyly as they rode up to her. Lonney smiled back.

“I’m sorry to hear about your family,” Mr. Madres said, immediately all business.

Samantha’s heart sank as she was brought back to her sorrow. She nodded, but said nothing.

Mr. Madres didn’t say anything more on the subject, just dismounted and moved to Lonney’s horse and removed a couple of large saddlebags. He placed one set over his horse and another over Bane, then still without saying anything, removed the pack from Nancy then led her to Lonney and handed him the reins.

“What?” Samantha started, but stopped as the older man held up a hand.

“Lonney, take the mule and head back home.”

Sam could tell that Lonney did not want to, but he nodded. “Yes, father,” he said and took one last look at the girl in front of him before turning and heading back the way he had come.

When he was out of sight he turned to her. “I didn’t want him to know exactly where I’m taking you, though he is a smart lad, and has probably worked it out already.”

“Mr. Madres,” Sam answered, dismayed at the departure of Nancy, “why…”

“Tomm, my name is Tomm,” he said, glancing at her as he packed her things into the saddle bags. She was a striking girl, and apparently tougher than she looked, or else smarter.

“Tomm,” she said, feeling strange about using his name. “Why did you take Nancy?”

He moved back to his horse and mounted smoothly. Samantha did likewise.

“You were leaving very distinctive tracks,” was all he said and then began to lead her off to the north following the river toward Lynndon. “One horse leaves much more ordinary tracks than a horse and a mule.”

Samantha didn’t say anything. It was obviously true. “But won’t the Executioner follow Lonney now?”

Tomm sighed. “Possibly, if he is a poor tracker, most likely he will follow us. He knows you are fleeing undoubtedly to the ford at Lynndon. Once he realizes this, he will make to the ford at all possible speed.”

“Where are you taking me?” she asked as Tomm broke them into a trot, with luck they would reach the ford in the early evening tomorrow.

“To the ford,” he answered. “But hopefully we will get there sooner than the Deutzani killer.”

“And then?”

“I will leave you there with a group of soldiers. Afton Sath has them watching the ford for any large troop movements. Sath’s building up an army of his own, but it will take time, and patience to collect and train them all.”

“An army?” Samantha said, very surprised. She’d assumed the Deutzani had tight control over all of Massi.

Tomm shrugged. “I wouldn’t call it that just yet, but we are working hard to get a network across the land so we can recruit and send anyone able out west. The Toranado have begun to supply us weapons…small quantities so far. They fear the Deutzani. They are moving most through the Scar Mountain passes.”

“The Toranado?”

“Yes and there are other rumors still…coming from the Islands, rumors that Prince Gwaynn still lives. If they are true it will make Master Sath’s job of pulling the people of Massi back together much easier.”

“You think it is true?” She asked as they rode briskly on. “Could Prince Gwaynn still be alive?”

Tomm shrugged. “Don’t rightly know, but it could be the reason the Toranado are so eager to help us. Without an heir, they would view our lands as forfeit,” he explained with a great show of suspense, “But it would seem they do not.”

They rode in silence for nearly a mile before Samantha glanced over at her new companion. “Are you apart of all this…with Uncle Sath?” She asked then felt foolish for asking so obvious a question.

Tomm puffed up and nodded, then reached behind him and into his saddlebag. He pulled out an apple, and tossed it carefully to Sam, who was gratified that she snatched it out of the air quite nicely. He pulled out another and took a bite. “I’m the contact for Dunn and the surrounding area. I’m too old to be a soldier, but Lonney may go off and join in the next year or so.”

They ate their apples in relative silence, and just rode at a steady pace, which allowed them to cover a good distance. For the first time since the death of her family, Samantha began to feel a little hope and a growing confidence that she might escape with her life. Although her new found confidence would have melted away if she knew how quickly the man following her was gaining.

ǂ

Navarra reached the Fultan’s estate just before Samantha reached the falls. He paused at the house only for a short time to collect his axe. He moved the block into the barn for it would slow him down and in any case the Fultan girl would not get such a ritualized execution. The dogs sniffed about the bodies of the Fultan family as he worked, but he called them away as he finished, then he moved down the lane, following the girl’s tracks as he went. He was thankful that it had not rained very hard last night or tracking her would be much harder. Once he was off the lane and onto the field he dismounted and showed the tracks to the dogs, and they took up the business of tracking. They followed her easily, and he was shocked when about an hour later he came across her first campsite, less than six miles away. He shook his head, smiling at the girl’s recklessness. If he’d known she was so close and moving at such a slow pace he would have returned immediately from Millvale and started out on his own. Even with that damned sway back, he would have caught up with her by now.

‘No matter,’ he thought as he left the campsite and continued on, he would have her within the next couple of days. He rode on throughout the afternoon and it didn’t take him long to realize that she had picked up the pace the following day, but he still believed he was gaining on her rapidly. He followed her tracks along the river, not stopping for food and only once for water. The dogs drank also, but they were eager to continue after their prey.

About an hour before sundown, the dogs, which normally ranged far ahead of him, trotted back and began to move alongside. Navarra smiled. It was their signal that something or someone was up ahead. They were well trained to wait for his command before initiating any contact, but when he gave that command they were relentless. He pulled Chaos into a walk, moving as quietly as possible, and it wasn’t long before he heard voices up ahead. They were close, maybe a few hundred paces ahead. He dismounted and tied Chaos to a tree near the river then crept forward slowly and almost immediately realized that all the voices he heard were male. It was unlikely that the Fultan girl was present, but perhaps those up ahead would know of her passing. He moved carefully off the path and into the nearby woods. Vesania and Furia slunk low at his side, their breathing coming easily despite they’re growing excitement. It took nearly five minutes of silent maneuvering before he could actually see that it was a group of five men sitting around a small fire a few paces off the path. There was no sentry and they were all talking animatedly. Navarra watched them for several moments and was about to step out, when one of them said “Afton Sath.”

He quickly crouched back down and reassessed the men before him. One was wearing a short sword about his waist, but most of the others just carried knives. Although the local Massi were still allowed to carry knives and bows, swords and kali, weapons specifically designed to kill other men, were forbidden. It was a law the Deutzani strictly enforced, though it would take many years before most of the weapons were rounded up. Navarra spotted a bow leaning against an oak not far from the man sitting to the right of the fire. With only a look to Furia, he sent the dog off to the right, with the complete confidence that he would attack the man with the bow before any of the others. Navarra gave the dog nearly a minute to move into position, then suddenly stood up and walked into the clearing. Vesania went with him. He was able to move about five feet out of his hiding place before one of the men spotted him. They stood as one.

“Good evening,” Navarra said softly, barely loud enough to be heard. The men said nothing and just looked back and forth between him and the dog at his side.

“You were saying something about Afton Sath, I believe,” Navarra continued, still moving forward. Instantly the short sword was out, along with three knives. The man by the bow lunged for it, but before he even got close Furia bolted from the bushes and leaped for his throat. The man instantly went down, his screams mingling with the growls and snapping of the attacking dog. For a split second, the attention of the men facing Navarra was drawn to the commotion in their rear, and neither the Executioner, nor Vesania missed their opportunity. The dog attacked the man nearest her, while Navarra drew his kali and went after the one with the sword. The man was better than expected and blocked his first attack, but as Navarra glided by he lashed out at a man wielding a knife. The man went down with a slit, like a new smile, in his neck. Vesania furiously attacked one of the other knife wielding men, dragging him down by one bloody arm. The last man backed away a few paces before moving forward in an attempt to help his screaming friend. This left the man with the sword facing the Executioner alone.

A moment later the man had lost his sword and most of his right arm. He screamed and went to the ground allowing Navarra to move off to the other men engaged with the dogs. Soon, with very little effort the two occupied with Vesania were also dead, while Furia was trying her best to rip the throat from the man who had made for the bow. The man was using all his strength to hold off the snarling dog, his hands and arms bloody from numerous scratches and bites.

Navarra whistled and immediately Furia pulled back, leaving the man groaning and bleeding into the leaves on the ground.

Navarra knelt down next to the owner of the sword. His right inner forearm sported a large gash from elbow to wrist and was bleeding freely. The man was cradling it next to his body. He looked into Navarra’s face hoping to find compassion, but seeing none.

“Your name?” Navarra asked quietly. He was a young man, barely able to grow a beard, but his shoulders were broad and strong.

“P…Pater,” the man stammered.

“Pater,” Navarra said sweet and smooth. “I need to know where Afton Sath is.”

The man hesitated, looking from Navarra, then to the fierce looking dogs at his side.

“Pater,” Navarra repeated and when he still did not say anything, the Executioner gave the slightest nod of his head and at once both dogs leaped, not at Pater, but at the man still down and groaning by the bow. Navarra allowed Pater to turn just a bit and watch as the dogs tore into his friend. Vesania caught his arm and the man screamed loudly, before Furia managed to get to his throat. She tore into him, and with a wet ripping sound, pulled most of the skin and veins loose. The screaming stopped abruptly, but the man still kicked spasmodically while the dogs began to feed.

“Pater,” Navarra repeated softly, but still the young man jumped. “You know what I want.”

Pater swallowed, finding it hard to take his eyes from the grizzly scene before him. Navarra reached up and placed a hand on his chin and slowly moved his face so the man’s eyes met his.

“Pater, where is Afton Sath?”

“He…he,” Pater stammered still distracted by the sounds coming from behind him. Pater stopped talking for a moment.

“I will let them have you next Pater.”

“I don’t know for sure,” Pater answered and Navarra clucked his tongue.

“He’s in the mountains somewhere around Koshka,” Pater said hurriedly. Navarra smiled at the confirmation. At least Thomas Fultan had not lied to him.

“And just what is he doing in the mountains around Koshka?” Navarra asked and Pater looked at him for a moment as if he couldn’t believe the question.

“Raising an army,” Pater answered.

“And have you perhaps seen a girl pass by this way?”

“A…a girl?”

Navarra smiled again, knowing immediately this man had not crossed paths with Samantha Fultan. He reached out and grabbed Pater’s left arm. He held it in place with a strong grip, as he slowly sliced through the man’s neck. Navarra reveled as Pater’s shock quickly turned to fear and panic. Navarra continued to watch, a smile never leaving his face.

“Thank you Pater,” Navarra crooned and stood, completely oblivious to the thrashing and kicking of the dying young man. He went and collected Chaos and rode back up along the path. He whistled and at once Vesania and Furia stopped feeding and trotted over to their master, blood and gore still clinging to their jaws.

ǂ

Gwaynn grabbed his bags and prepared to board the Carol-Anne, waiting patiently for it to be pulled close to the docks. Jon, as always, supervised the entire process. Krys waited expectantly on Gwaynn’s right and on his left stood Vio, Tar Nev, and finally Tar Kostek. Tar Amon was away at the moment on the Isle of Light.

Gwaynn could feel Vio’s disappointment as if it was a physical thing, or perhaps it was his own disappointment he was feeling, not only for having to leave behind friends but also his teachers. Tar Nev had told him two days prior that he would not be going and would return to his isolation. Gwaynn was surprised, somehow he always envisioned Nev being with him, teaching him, but Nev was adamant that there was little more left to teach, and what there was, Gwaynn could learn on his own.

“I’ve been out in the world too long as it is,” Nev had said. “It’s distracting me from my thoughts.”

Gwaynn did not acknowledge the statement; he just sat silently with his former teacher.

“If you ever truly need me, however, I believe there is a Speaker in Cape. Send word and I will come.” Nev added and smiled.

As soon as the ship was within range the plank was fitted into place, Gwaynn stepped forward, but then stopped and turned to face three of the most important people in his life. All three stared back, two with obvious pride and the smallest with a hint of sadness.

“Take care,” Vio said stepping forward. She kissed him on the cheek, not wanting to do anything else in front of her Tar. “Stay alive,” she added, as he buried his face into the crook of her neck for a moment but then reluctantly withdrew.

“I’ll come back for your Tarina ceremonies,” he answered.

“Be careful,” Kostek and Nev said as one. He shook both their hands.

“Remember you are not invincible,” Nev warned with a worried look. “Recklessness will be your worst enemy. Underestimate no one.”

Gwaynn nodded, and then turned and made his way aboard, Krys by his side.

“I still have trouble believing I’m going home,” Krys commented as they stood by the rail and watched Jon Baal’s crew unload a few crates of goods, while loading still others. It did not take long for it was not a planned trading stop.

“I’m not sure it will feel like home to me,” Gwaynn answered. He was having reoccurring reservations about returning to Massi. He had strong doubts that he would have even left Lato had it not been for the consistent attacks aimed at him while he was on the islands.

When all the goods had been transferred, Jon came by. “All ready Master Gwaynn?” he asked, his face showing just a touch of the constant smile that resided there.

“We’re ready,” Gwaynn answered, then realized now there would be no going back.

Jon gave the order and the gangplank was pulled aboard and stowed, and the ship was nudged away from the dock until it floated far enough away for oars to begin the work of moving the Carol-Anne. Gwaynn and Krys continued to watch their friends and teachers slowly recede as they put more and more distance from them and Noble Island. Gwaynn stood by the rail until at last he saw Vio and the others turn away and begin walking from the pier.

Gwaynn immediately turned to Jon. “Jon, I would like you to take us to Heron,” he said.

Jon looked at him surprised and Krys joined him, though Gwaynn’s new Weapons Master said nothing. “Not Cape?” Jon asked.

Gwaynn shook his head negatively.

“Heron has a much stronger Deutzani presence,” Jon warned.

“Yes, but they will not be looking for me,” Gwaynn explained. “And if, by chance word has gotten out from Noble of my destination, as it has in the past, then I will be landing in a far different location.”

Jon nodded. “Clever boy,” he said with a smile. “But you will still need a bit of work fitting in with the local crowd. I’m sure we can round up some old sea clothes that would be a bit less conspicuous than the outfits you have on.”

Both young men were wearing the gray trousers and capes, which were trimmed in the royal blue of Noble Island, along with long white cotton shirts that were cinched at the waist with a strong leather belt that, in turn, held their kali.

“And you will be needing to hide those,” Jon said, nodding toward the weapons. “They are strictly forbidden for any but the Deutzani in Massi. I will get you to Heron; you see that you live through the landing.”

Gwaynn took a deep breath and nodded back to Jon, grateful for the information and advice. They both watched as the big man moved down the ship. He walked about with grace despite the rolling of the deck, the seas higher than normal, and headed to the stern where he would guide the Carol-Anne toward its new destination.

Gwaynn led Krys to their small cabin, which was located below deck, in order to stow their belongings. Toward the middle of the second deck there was another ladder which led to the mid-oars and eventually down to the lower oars. Gwaynn led him to the rear holds, however, near where the Captain and officers slept. Their cabin was larger than Krys expected, but was still cramped and both had to stoop so as not to bang their heads on the low ceiling.

“Heron will be well watched,” Krys said, though he was not overly worried about arriving at the port. “But we shouldn’t have much trouble, though you’ve added a few miles to our trip overland,” he added and placed his bag in a corner.

Gwaynn nodded. “You’ve warned Paulo of my arrival?”

During the break between sessions, Krys had returned to Massi as ordered. He had stayed with Paulo and Karla for a few days before moving on to his own home. In all he’d only stayed in Massi for two weeks before returning to Noble. “Yes, but I’m not sure he will be expecting you so soon. He may not have heard word from Master Sath yet.”

Gwaynn shrugged, and dropped his own bag next to Krys’. He moved his feet wider apart as the ship rolled. The rolling seemed to be getting more severe. “That can’t be helped,” he answered. “Once we’ve gathered horses and supplies we’ll move to the south and try to contact him.”

Krys rubbed his hands through his sandy blonde hair, and took a couple of steps back as the ship rocked again. They frowned at each other, then as one, moved to the door and up onto the deck. There were gray, fast moving clouds overhead, which steadily grew darker toward the southwest. They moved carefully to the wheel, both navigating the pitching deck with all the grace of men used to firm land beneath their feet.

Jon smiled as he watched them struggle against the ever changing angle of the ship.

“Squalls coming,” he said matter-of-factly as the reached him. Both put a hand on the rail to steady themselves.

“Bad?” Krys asked, as Gwaynn turned a fearful eye on the approaching clouds.

Jon shrugged. “Don’t believe so,” he answered. “The Carol-Anne has yet to let me down. Don’t worry lads she’s a steady lass…wide hips she has.” He laughed, as did several of the nearby sailors.

“Nothing like wide hips to hold ya firm, eh Captain?” One of the sailors said. “You boys will learn that soon enough.”

Gwaynn turned to him, his face very serious. “Boys?” he asked, his right hand going to the hilt of his kali.

The sailor’s face blanched. He knew about Tar Nev and heard stories of his only pupil. “No offence, young Master,” he quickly added.

Gwaynn broke into a grin, and Jon erupted with laughter.

“You won’t offend me if you get me through this storm,” Gwaynn answered, still smiling at the man. “Let’s ride her wide hips, and then perhaps you will call me a man.”

ǂ

It took a day and a half to reach Lynndon, and though Tomm had done nothing to warrant her suspicion, Sam made it a point to sleep on the far side of the small fire they built the first night. She vaguely wondered if she would ever trust any man again. If Tomm noticed anything strange about her behavior he did not let on and for that, at least, she was grateful. They came into the town by the northeast, and almost immediately stopped at the blacksmith near the very edge of town. The Scar, which separated the Massi plains from the plateau, loomed above the town. Samantha gazed at the massive cliff face, her eyes tracking first east then west. The rock face went on for as far as the eye could see in either direction and was starkly beautiful, dominated by various shades of red, orange and brown. It was a daunting natural barrier.

“You ever seen the Scar before?” Tomm asked.

Samantha shook her head. “No, but my father used to talk about it.”

“Talk’s not the same,” he answered back.

“No,” Samantha said and then tied Bane’s reins to the hitching post with some trepidation. Deutzani soldiers were plainly visible milling about in the town as she looked down the main thoroughfare. She was relieved that she did not see Sergeant Lindsay or any of his men. As they moved to the entrance of the shop, a large sweaty man with massive forearms appeared in the doorway.

“Wake,” Tomm said with a nod. Wake nodded back, looking from Tomm to Samantha, his eyes lingering on her for a long while before returning to Tomm.

“She needs to get out west,” Tomm said, thus explaining their presence. Wake looked over at Samantha once more, eyes moving up and down before resting on her face. He stared at her for so long that she grew uncomfortable and crossed her arm over her chest. She was not at all sure she liked or trusted this dirty, gruff looking man before her.

“What she done?” Wake asked, his voice sounding as rough as his hands.

Tomm took a step closer. “She’s Sath’s niece,” he whispered and Wake’s entire demeanor changed. Everyone knew it was not wise to cross a Weapons Master.

He nodded and gave her another once over with his eyes. “Give me another hour and I’ll take her up,” he said and turned to head back inside.

“She has an Executioner on her tail,” Tomm said as he walked behind the large man. “He’s already killed her entire family…she got away.” Samantha followed along behind, thankful to be out of the exposed street.

Wake turned back quickly, as if Tomm had poked a fork in his backside. “An Executioner!” He said louder than he wished, even though they were now inside the dark interior of his shop. He frowned then looked again at Samantha.

“How’d ya get away?” he asked, sounding a little impressed.

Samantha hesitated a moment, unsure of how much to tell them. “He didn’t tie me very well, and when he went to get a drink I hit him over the head with an axe handle.”

“He’s not dead?”

Samantha shrugged. “I don’t know…maybe,” she added not wanting to mention her moment of cowardice while he was unconscious.

“Should’ve made sure,” Wake said as he took off his apron, and dropped his tongs in the fire. “Should’ve killed him.”

“I killed his horse,” she answered, suddenly mad at his presumptions.

“His horse,” Wake answered with surprisingly high-pitched laugh.

Sam nodded.

“That’ll piss him off for sure,” Wake said still laughing as he led them back out into the street and next door to the stables. “Meet me at Bert’s on the top of the Scar. I’ll be along in an hour or so,” he added before moving into the stables. “I’d rather not be seen with you…no offence.”

Samantha shrugged. “Of course not,” she answered and headed back to Bane. Tomm followed along. “Aren’t you worried about being seen with me?” Sam asked.

Tomm shook his head. “I’m not from Lynndon, and will be gone soon. It’s not likely the soldiers will remember or take any notice of me,” he said as he mounted his own horse then led her slowly through town. There were Deutzani soldiers about, but not as many as Sam feared.

“Aren’t they watching the bridge?” she whispered quietly after they had passed through town. The river was in sight, though it was dominated by the Scar that soared above them all. The Scar was a rift in the land, separating the lowland plains from the Plateau above, then finally the mountains. It was said to be over four hundred feet high in places, and ran from the Scar Mountains in the east all through Massi and finally ended at the Outer Sea somewhere in Deutzani.

Tomm shrugged. “They should be, but they don’t have much of a presence here at Lynndon. They probably don’t think the Massi could raise much of a threat, or cross the western part of the land undetected. I’ve heard they have garrison at Manse.”

Samantha nodded. Manse was home to the main crossing between the plains and the Plateau. Most of the main roads that crisscrossed the country of Massi led to the much larger town of Manse. Samantha held her breath, hoping that the Lynndon Bridge would not be closely guarded. She was not at all confident that she could pass a close inspection without giving her fear away, but she could see from a distance that the way was open, and she breathed a sigh of relief.

The bridge was made of stone with large arched piers going down into the water. It was not wide, but there was room for two horses to walk side by side. Even so, Samantha reined in Bane, who was a large horse and let Tomm proceed across in front of her. Samantha studied the bridge and the river below it as they crossed. On the right, the river was full of large rocks and flowed fast with a lot of white water, but on the left of the bridge there was a small roaring waterfall. At the bottom of the falls the river formed a deep, slow pool before finally continuing its journey to the east. The Scar dominated the view ahead and Sam had to crane her neck to see to the very top of the cliff face. It was magnificent, probably over two hundred feet high here. The rock face was filled with many shades of red and brown, and here and there was a bit of orange, yellow. She was surprised to see some green also, which came from stubborn plants clinging to the sheer cliffs like a climber suddenly afraid to move either up or down.

Once on the far side of the bridge, the Scar loomed over them and Samantha had a moment of panic, worried that the whole Earth might fall down on top of her. But as they moved to the west along side the river the worry began to fade, replaced by a new one as they began to move up a narrow path. They went higher and higher at a steep angle and were not even a quarter of the way to the top before Sam had to force herself not to look down, though she never considered herself to be afraid of heights. However, by the time they were near the summit she was beginning to reconsider her fears, but the sure-footed Bane carried her safely up to the Plateau. Once on level ground she looked out in amazement over Lynndon and the Massi plains beyond. The view was incredible. The land and the sky above seemed to open up before her.

Tomm stopped next to Sam and together they looked out across the land. “Never get tired of it,” he said.

“It’s like you can see the whole world,” she answered. They stayed silent for several minutes, just looking, and then they turned in unison and headed for a group of buildings just up the road. All along the way there were wagons in various stages of repair, some were like new, some were broken and rusted out, and strewn all about were parts of wagons lying in the tall grass as if growing, like weeds. Out back, behind the main building, Samantha could see a corral of sorts. It held numerous pack animals, which were milling about, stirring up dust. They moved toward the largest building, which had two doors in front though they were not near each other, and in the middle of the porch roof there was a faded sign that said, “Bert’s Feed and Grain.”

As Sam and Tomm approached they spotted no signs of life other than the pack animals out back, but just before they reached the front of the main building an old woman emerged. Hiding just behind her was a young boy, perhaps eight or nine years old. The woman glared at them for a moment, moving the unlit wooden pipe she had in her mouth from side to side. Finally her eyes gleamed with recognition as she looked at Tomm.

“Seen you before,” she said pulling out the pipe and pointing at him with it. “Been a spell.”

Tomm didn’t smile, but he did nod. “Over a year,” he answered. “Wake’s coming,” he added, but the woman only returned the nod. Without another word she turned and moved back into the building. Tomm looked over at Sam and shrugged. She wasn’t sure what to make of the meeting, but Tomm dismounted and tied off his horse and with only a slight pause Sam did likewise.

“Since the Deutzani, Bert doesn’t like strangers much,” he whispered. The boy was still standing, half in and half out of the doorway watching them, but he fled inside as they moved up and onto the porch.

“Lyle there, warned me you was coming,” Bert said from the dark recesses of the building.

Lyle must be the boy, Sam thought as she followed Tomm inside. It took a moment for her eyes to adjust, but when they did she saw a large room filled with more things than she would have believed possible. Heaped in stacks, everywhere, were all types of supplies, from grain, wood, and cloth, to barrels of ale, tools and just junk. There seemed to be no organization to any of it, some of it was piled higher than Samantha was tall. Tomm moved toward the back of the building following one of the narrow winding paths, which snaked through the mess like tendrils. Sam followed and spotted Lyle hiding behind a stack of barrels over to the right. They did not go down the path leading to him, however, and instead continued on toward the back. They went all the way to the very rear and through a door. It was like passing into another world. A small fire was burning in the fireplace on the far side of the room, which also contained a large, soft looking bed, a pair of over-stuffed chairs and a small table flanked by two benches. The room was extremely clean, brightly lit and remarkably free of clutter. Bert was sitting at the table opposite the doorway, her back to the fire. She motioned for them to take the bench opposite her, as she used a long thin stick to light her pipe. She puffed deeply a few times to be sure it was lit, and Sam thought she smelled a hint of sass-a-frass in the smoke.

“You both running?” She asked and then began to pour them all hot tea.

Tomm shook his head. “No, just her,” he answered. Bert studied the girl before her a moment. She could have been pretty, though it was hard to tell with her hair a tangled mess. She did have striking eyes though.

“Lyle!” She yelled, causing Sam to jump and spill a bit of her tea on her hand where it burned for a moment. She set her cup down and sucked on the hurt until it went away. Lyle appeared shyly at the doorway.

“Grab me a brush, then go and keep an eye out for Wake.”

Sam heard small feet rush from the room behind her; they returned in a moment and the boy dropped a brush on the table, staring for a split second into Samantha’s eyes. He gave a quick smile and then was off again at a run.

“It’s for you,” Bert said nodding toward the brush. “Don’t look like you’ve tended your hair recently.”

Sam stared at the old woman for a moment then slowly picked up the brush. It felt strange in her hand, like something from another time. She began to slowly work the tangles from her hair. It took a good deal of brushing. She was a bit self-conscious at first but the other two just sat and talked softly until the boy finally rushed in.

“Wake’s coming,” he said, happiness plain in his voice. He paused again to look at Samantha, who was still working at tangles, but now the brush was pulling through her hair much easier. Tomm stood, and she immediately did likewise. She made to hand the brush back to Bert, but the old woman just scoffed.

“Keep it,” she said gruffly and hoisted herself to her feet. “Can’t have Massi women running about the land looking like savages.” She moved past Sam and Tomm and led the way through the maze of supplies and back out into the sunshine. Lyle was nowhere to be seen, but the woman didn’t seem worried. And after a few moments the boy appeared at the edge of the Scar running just ahead of Wake, who was riding a large mare.

“Good luck,” Tomm said to Samantha; the statement came sudden and was very unexpected. “Keep moving as fast as you can. You get to the Scar Mountains and you’ll be safe.”

“You’re leaving?” Sam asked, not realizing until this very moment how attached she had become to his company the past few days.

Tomm nodded. “Have a farm to look after, and I can’t be gone too many days or the Deutzani might get suspicious. They’d take it out on my family. Wake will take you into the Briar, and one of the soldiers will take you on.” He paused for a moment, the hurt look on her face very clear to him. “You’ll be safe enough if you just keep moving.”

Wake rode up just as Tomm began to move back the other way. “Follow a different route home,” he warned. “If she’s got an Executioner on her tail it wouldn’t be wise to bump into him.”

Tomm chuckled as he went by. “I’ll take the round-about way for sure, and avoid anyone I see. You take care of her,” he added, tipping his head Samantha’s way.

“Oh, I will,” Wake answered and then turned his attention to her as Tomm made his way back to the Scar. Wake looked at her for a long time, though Sam could only hold his eyes for a brief spell.

“Quit ya staring,” Bert said loudly. “The girl ain’t growed another head.”

Wake grunted but finally looked away. “She’s fixed her hair,” he said by way of explanation. “Come girl,” he added and started down the road away from Bert’s. Samantha hesitated for a moment, until Bert walked over and patted her leg. “Don’t pay him no mind. He don’t mean any harm. Mona…his wife, past a few winters back. She had hair like yours, reddish I mean. That’s all.”

Sam looked at the back of the retreating man then turned and smiled at Bert. “Thank you…and thanks for the brush.”

“Not a bother,” Bert answered then turned and headed back inside. “Lyle!” she yelled once she was out of sight, and Lyle came scampering from the Scar waving as Sam turned and headed after Wake.

Wake led her about a mile up the road, and Sam contented herself to remaining just behind him to discourage any conversation or long stares. Wake seemed not to notice that she didn’t join him, and did not even look back as he veered left and into the thicket that lined the side of the road. She followed without a word and was surprised when he seemed to be taking her farther and farther into the tangle of surrounding bushes, all of which appeared to sport small red berries and long, sharp thorns. Wake finally stopped before a very imposing stand of foliage. Here the bushes grew tall, higher than even she was on horseback. Wake dismounted with only a glance back at her.

“Why are we stopping?” She asked, growing uneasy once again.

“Going into the Briar,” he answered curtly, as if the question shouldn’t have been asked. He pulled a thick pair of gloves from his back pocket, put them on then with relative ease began to move several large clumps of the briar bushes out of the way. Of course they were not bushes at all, just cleverly formed barriers woven to look like the surrounding foliage.

“Keeps out the nosey,” Wake said, and led his horse through the gap in the sticker bushes. Samantha passed through also and then he put the camouflage back into place.

He led her through the maze of bushes on paths just wide enough to accommodate the horses; several times Samantha received a sharp prick on her legs as they passed through some of the smaller gaps. Twice more he dismounted and moved false bushes, before they finally emerged from the tangle. Up ahead of Wake, Samantha could see a cabin of sorts with a few makeshift tents around it. There was a small fire burning in the center of the dwellings and around the fire sat three men. As they approached she saw the two of the men were older, one very old and the other less so. She couldn’t guess at their ages. She was not very good at estimating such things when the person was over thirty, but she could tell they were well past their prime, and both a good deal older than Wake. The third man was young, probably no more than five years older than she was. They remained seated and watched curiously as she and Wake approached.

“Sath’s niece,” Wake said by way of greeting. “Samantha,” he added and gave her an awkward glance. Sam smiled back suddenly feeling guilty about her mistrust of him. All three men stood, and the eldest came forward with a smile of his own.

“Samantha?” he asked.

Sam nodded. “Samantha Fultan,” she answered softly. “My father was Thomas Fultan.”

“Thomas Fultan!” Wake exclaimed. “I love his ale. Why didn’t you say he was your father?” He added, suddenly looking at her as if she were somehow famous.

“You didn’t ask,” Samantha answered bemused by the turn in Wake’s face, for it was suddenly all smiles.

“Samantha,” the eldest man said taking her right hand as she dismounted. She was surprised that his touch carried with it not even the slightest revulsion. “My name is Otter

Bergman. You will be safe here until the scouts return, then we will take you to your Uncle.”

ǂ

Just before sundown Navarra came to the spot where Samantha had parted from her mule. At first he was confused, but quickly worked it out from the tracks that the horse that carried Samantha continued to follow the Clearwater Creek. He was positive she was following the waterway that eventually led to the Scar, and Lynndon. The mule she had foolishly taken with her was now being led back to the northwest but he was positive she had not fled in that direction. No, she would try to cross the Scar and move to the west, probably to Koshka and Afton Sath.

Navarra found a suitable place not far along to make camp, and quickly settled down for the night.

“Sleep well,” he said to his dogs, as they huddled close to him and the fire. “Tomorrow,” he added, having made the decision not to continue following the river but to break out across country, following a more direct route to the crossing, “we ride hard and fast to Lynndon.”

XIV

The Carol-Anne landed in Heron after nearly three days and nights at sea, and despite Jon’s misgivings and the healthy presence of Deutzani soldiers, no one paid Gwaynn or Krys any special attention. The ship was unloaded quickly with the help of the Massi Prince and his new Weapons Master. Gwaynn thought it prudent to stay with the ship and its crew as they got a feel for the area around the dock, plus it might look odd if two crewmen disembarked just as the heavy work was about to begin. Once the unloading was finished, however, Jon released nearly all of his men for a few days of land living. He kept a skeleton crew to watch over the ship, himself included, though he insisted on coming with the two young men as they traveled to meet up with Paulo and Karla.

It felt strange to Gwaynn, walking the very streets he fled from over a year ago. In some ways it felt like a lifetime, but when they finally came across the house of Paulo, it seemed as if he had hardly been away.

“Yes,” Karla said as she answered the door, at first not recognizing the young man who filled the frame, but then she looked past him, and saw Krys who had visited only a few weeks prior. Her eyes flew back to Gwaynn and darted about his face like bee looking for nectar.

“Gwaynn?” She asked hesitantly, hardly believing that this was the same boy who had cried in her arms that awful night after Solarii’s fall. She started forward to take him into her arms once more but then hesitated. Gwaynn, reading her thoughts, stepped up and hugged her.

“I’m sorry about Karl,” he said softly in her ear. “I know what it is like to loose family.”

Karla hugged tighter as tears welled in her eyes. “Come in, come in,” she said breaking the embrace and discreetly wiping away the tears. “Paulo will be so happy to see how tall you’ve gotten…just like your father.” She led the way in and they all followed, but it was nearly an hour before Paulo got word and joined them. He arrived just as Jon was taking his leave to return to the Carol-Anne.

“Watch yourself. I land at Heron, normally twice a year,” Jon said gripping Gwaynn’s hand firmly. “If you need me, leave word with Paulo, and I’ll get it.”

Gwaynn returned the grip. “Thanks for everything.”

As soon as the door shut Gwaynn immediately turned to Paulo. “Anything from Afton Sath?”

Paulo shook his head. He was having a hard time with the fact that now he had to look up at Gwaynn. Paulo studied the young man for a time. Gwaynn was tall, but he was not just a skinny lad; his shoulders and arms had filled out during his time away. Except for the scruff of beard on his chin, he looked the part of a man, and a King. However, it was not the change of body that struck Paulo so acutely. When the boy had left his entire demeanor had been…soft, but now there was something hard in his eyes. There was also the way he carried himself, there was now an air of confidence about him that was lacking before. The boy had changed, of that there was little doubt.

Paulo sat down and took a cup of tea from his wife. “We sent word nearly three weeks ago, but haven’t heard anything.”

Gwaynn sipped his tea and frowned. “He’s at Koshka?”

Paulo nodded. “In the mountains thereabouts. It does take time to move across the country these days…you can’t be too careful.”

“What is the Deutzani presence like in the west?” Gwaynn asked, his tone no longer a boy’s.

Paulo stared into his Prince’s eyes. “Not strong, but growing. They have an army at Cape, but it hasn’t moved much in nearly six months. They supply it by sea, and every now and then the commander will send out raiding parties inland. They seem to be more worried about the Toranado than the Massi.”

“An army at Cape,” Krys said with a smile for Gwaynn’s foresight. “No doubt the longer ride was the way to go. And what is Afton Sath doing about the army?”

Gwaynn glanced at Krys, noting the steely look in his eyes. Krys reflected his own desire to strike back at the enemy, and for that he was very thankful. But Krys was young, younger in experience than Gwaynn, though chronologically he was nearly two years older. And though Gwaynn considered himself more experienced, he realized that he was also young, and as Nev had warned, the young were prone to recklessness. They would have to be cautious, and ever mindful of that fact.

“We’ll need horses,” Krys said, his tone growing more demanding until Gwaynn reached out and put a hand on his forearm.

“Horses?” Paulo asked, seeing the look that past between the two young men, and suddenly his heart soared. Gwaynn was the leader of the two. He was leading, without words, but he was leading. All at once it hit him that the King of Massi was in his home, and it flustered him.

“Yes,” Gwaynn said nodding. “We will stay here tonight, but leave at first light. Arrange it for me Paulo.”

Paulo blinked. “Of course M’lord, but what if Sath comes to find you?”

Gwaynn shrugged. “Then send him after. We head directly for Manse, then on to Koshka.”

Paulo nodded. “As you say,” he answered. “There’s a logger in Manse, name’s Lonogan Bock. He’s the contact in the area if you haven’t come across Master Sath by then,” he added and tried to bow though he was sitting at a table.

Gwaynn smiled at him and then quickly stood. “Karla, what can we do for our supper?”

ǂ

Samantha felt better in the morning. Otter had given her sole possession of one of the tents, where she could wash her face, brush off her clothes and sleep in privacy, and since she had admitted to being the daughter of Thomas Fultan, Wake had treated her like something precious. His looks and actions however, seemed more like fawning and less like leering to her, and for that she was grateful. She woke to find Scot, the youngest of the three soldiers, busily cooking up some eggs and flapjacks. She emerged from the tent dressed in the skirts she’d not worn since the day her family was killed. Her pants were filthy and she was hoping to at least rinse most of the dirt off of them, before she moved on.

Scot watched her as she walked to the fire. Her new confidence began to falter under his gaze. “You look better,” he said, giving her a shy smile. “I mean…  yesterday…you…you looked tired,” he quickly added.

“Thank you,” she answered and sat opposite him, on one of the large logs ringing the fire pit.

“Don’t listen to him,” Otter said rounding the far side of the small cabin. He and Martin, the other old soldier, were carrying wood. “You were a vision yesterday, and an even lovelier one today,” he added, dropping his load next to the pit. Martin nodded, but Scot just blushed.

Samantha smiled, but it quickly fell away from her face, as she spotted Wake rounding the corner, over his shoulder he carried a very large axe. Suddenly her breath was coming in gasps, as painful memories abruptly hit her once more. Wake noticed the stark look of terror in her eyes, and at first was confused and just a little bit hurt. But understanding came quickly to him and he leaned the axe against a nearby tree then came slowly to her side, approaching as if she were a skittish animal.

“He used an axe,” the large man said softly in his husky voice, “didn’t he?”

Samantha did not answer at first; she was still trying to get a hold of herself. Never in her life, not even on the day of the executions, had she felt such overwhelming fear, and it took her several moments to realize that she had wet herself, just a little. Her face colored in embarrassment, but she did not move and said nothing.

Wake sat down next to her and very slowly and deliberately reached out and petted her hair. He worried she would shy from him, like a rabbit in a trap and she flinched at first, wanting nothing more than for him to stop, but she said nothing. Her voice had left her for the time being, and gradually she began to relax to his touch.

“They hung Murl and Wellman…our servants,” she said speaking so softly that all the men had to lean in to hear her voice over the crackling fire. “But when he…when he came…” she abruptly stopped speaking, and remained silent for so long that they thought she was finished, but suddenly she was talking again. “He broke Beth’s neck, but used the axe on my father and Arabelle. He tied me to the block…but not very well.” She abruptly stopped talking and stood up, looking in turn at the four men before her. She studied their faces, and all at once she knew they meant her no harm.

“He went into the house for a drink and just left me there tied by my dead family, but I got away and hit him. I hit him hard.” Her voice cracked, but before she could cry she turned and fled off away from them. She ran through the sparse woods until she reached the edge of the Scar, down below and to the left was the bridge and beyond that the town of Lynndon. She looked out again at the world, amazed at just how far she could see. She sat down, and was soon joined by Martin and Wake.

“It’s my watch,” Martin said carefully, afraid she might get upset once more, but Wake just sat by her. He handed her some food and water that she ate without comment, and the entire time Wake just sat, close but not too near, saying nothing. She shook her head, surprised that she found his presence such a comfort when yesterday he only filled her with fear.

When she finally went back to the camp it was near dark. Wake followed her; having stayed with her the entire day, though the rest of the soldiers had come and gone with their shifts. They ate a light supper, again in silence, but when it began to lightly rain she stood to go bed, suddenly exhausted. She turned to Wake and touched his hand. “Thank you Wake,” she said softly, but he only nodded, and watched her duck into the tent. They all went to sleep that night unaware that under the cover of darkness, the Executioner had arrived in Lynndon.

ǂ

Gwaynn and Krys left Paulo’s just after sunrise the following morning on two of the finest horses available in all of Heron. Krys protested, believing that the splendid animals would call too much attention to them, but Paulo would hear none of it.

“Bradley,” Paulo said, talking of Heron’s largest horse trader, “put up a hard bargain, but I’d not let my King ride about on a broken down swayback.”

“But…” Krys began to argue. He fell silent with a look from Gwaynn, who despite his friend’s sound judgment felt they needed the best mounts possible. Manse was a good six days ride away and Koshka another two and a half beyond. It would be better to traverse the distance just as quickly as they could, and besides, the black mare he was to get was absolutely beautiful. Paulo also pushed a generous bag of coins into Gwaynn’s hands, and when he tried to return it, the older man just shrugged.

“You can pay me back,” Paulo insisted, so Gwaynn took it gratefully.

Once out of town they rode at a quick pace, though one the horses could easily maintain for hours. Gwaynn’s heart soared. He was home, and felt suddenly free. The morning was cool and started out well enough but the sky soon clouded over and it began to rain just before mid-day. They were soon very wet.

“No sense stopping in the rain,” Gwaynn said, but they both dismounted to at least give the horses a break from their weight.

“It feels strange being back,” Krys said, pulling some salted beef from his pack. He handed a large slice to Gwaynn. “I grew up in Lynndon, but traveled a bit with my father when he drove our sheep to the harbor at Heron.”

“You drove sheep?” Gwaynn asked with a smile.

Krys nodded, ignoring the jab. “Just a few years, when I was nine and ten, before I was called to Noble.”

Gwaynn chuckled, thinking, ‘his Weapons Master, a sheep herder.’

“There’s good money in sheep,” Krys protested, “from the wool and the meat.”

“All right, all right,” Gwaynn said still laughing softly and holding his hands up in surrender.

They traveled down the finger of Massi through remote farmlands keeping clear of any towns or large clusters of population. For two days they stayed clear of anyone on horseback and kept to trails or back roads rather than the main routes. After leaving the finger and moving out into the sparsely populated plains, they set out cross country and only occasionally saw a distance house or barn. They slept out in the open and did not stop in any town or hamlet until they reached the small crossroads town of Bern just an hour before sundown on the fourth day. The rain continued on and off the entire way, and they both were looking forward to finally sleeping with a roof over their heads.

The town only consisted of five buildings, two of which were private homes. There was a barn with a small corral, a modest trading post and a tavern, which doubled as an inn. There were only three rooms total at the inn, and two of those were already occupied, but it was no great hardship for them to share. They were only stopping to get a bite to eat and to sleep. Once the horses were settled in, the two headed into the tavern to grab a bit of food.

Inside the main room there were five tables, a small bar and an enormous fireplace along one wall. At the moment, only a small fire was lit to drive the chill from the damp air. They took the table closest to the fire in an attempt to dry their clothes though they’d left their soggy riding cloaks in the barn with their mounts.

There were seven other people in the main room, a table of three men, apparently locals by the friendly banter they shared with Mel, the tavern owner and Rebecca, his wife. There was also a fat man and his wife, or possibly daughter at another table. The locals, who had grown quiet as the two entered, gradually relaxed, though the loud, friendly talk was for the moment reduced to whispers. At first, Gwaynn was surprised that there were no Deutzani soldiers present in the town, but then he decided that even they could not be everywhere.

“And just where are you two headed?” Rebecca asked as she placed a pot of stew on the table, which was followed by two bowls and a loaf of hard, crusted bread. She was a large middle-aged woman, though she was not particularly fat, instead she was thick, with thick ankles, thick wrists and a thick waist to go along.

Krys quickly grabbed up the spoon and began to dish out a portion of stew. He cast a sideways glance at Gwaynn but said nothing.

“Manse,” Gwaynn answered as Krys put the first bowl of stew before his friend. Rebecca raised one eyebrow and looked back at Krys, who was busy filling his own bowl. In her long life she had learned it was rare for one man to serve another, and the tall blonde young man did not have the air of a servant. In fact, both of the men, though young, had a hard look to them, and her first thought was that they were Deutzani spies, maybe soldiers, but more likely spies. She gave them a quick once over, but spotted no weapons. ‘Definitely spies and not soldiers,’ she thought, though they could have weapons hidden in the large canvas bags they kept close by. Hopefully they were just passing through; hopefully they were going to Manse. She nodded and moved away to get them some ale, casting a warning glance at the three men nearby as she went.

Gwaynn noticed her look and the changed demeanor of the three men, who now stared at them with undisguised suspicion. No one said anything however, as he and Krys began to eat as only ravenous young men can eat. They were just finishing up their second pot of stew when one of the locals walked over to them. He was a large man, much broader in the shoulders than Gwaynn, or Krys for that matter, who was still the larger of the two. The man sat down and placed his cup of ale on the table without waiting for an invitation.

“Where you from?” He asked, taking a gulp.

Gwaynn just looked at the man, but he could feel Krys bristling beside him.

“Not much business of yours,” Krys answered.

The man didn’t seem to be bothered by Krys’ terse answer. Gwaynn just continued to finish up the last of the stew in his bowl.

“Just curious,” the man retorted, a false smile planted on his face. “We like to find out as much as we can about the strangers who travel through these parts. It pays to get to know people.” He added still smiling, if you could call it that, his eyes drilling into Krys’.

Gwaynn reached out and put a hand on Krys’ wrist. The man slowly looked down at the movement and shifted his focus to Gwaynn.

“My name is Gwaynn. This is Krys,” he said with a small smile, but it was at least genuine.

The man said nothing, just continued to stare.

“And yours?” Gwaynn asked.

The man frowned, thinking. If these two were Deutzani soldiers it would not be good to give them his name, but hell they probably already had it anyway.

“Jake,” he finally answered, though he left his sir name out, just as the strangers had.

“Well Jake,” Gwaynn said, loud enough for everyone in the tavern to hear. “I’m from Solarii, and Krys here was just telling me recently that he was from Lynndon, something about herding sheep wasn’t it?” He asked in a teasing voice.

Krys grunted, and shook his head. “Nothing wrong with sheep,” he insisted.

Jake studied the two a moment, confused that neither showed even the slightest bit of discomfort by his aggressive behavior. They could be Deutzani, which would explain some of the confidence. They certainly did not have the look of sheepherders.

“Lynndon?” Jake asked. He knew something of Lynndon. His uncle lived in Lynndon. “How long you live in Lynndon?” he asked, shifting his attention back to Krys.

The man bothered Krys. He was arrogant and rude, but Krys knew Gwaynn wanted to avoid a confrontation. “Til I was about eleven,” he answered.

“Then you must know the name of the blacksmith there,” Jake challenged and the two local men at the far table tensed and moved to the edge of the seats. Much to Jake’s confusion, however, the two in front of him remained completely relaxed and impassive.

Krys’ mind was racing. True, he had grown up in Lynndon, but that was a long time ago, and he was just a child. The name of the blacksmith did not come immediately to his mind, though the man’s face instantly did.

“Large man,” Krys said, the man’s name on the tip of his tongue, “big shoulders,” he added.

“Humph, what blacksmith doesn’t have big shoulders?”

“Hang on,” Krys answered holding up a hand. “Haven’t thought about it for a while, but the name is coming to me.” He was relaxing a bit, and beginning to enjoy himself. Gwaynn just sat, waiting patiently, a slight smile still on his face. These were his people. He knew these men were only a slight danger to him and Krys, but he had no desire to tangle with anyone from Massi. He would eventually need as many men as he could get.

The two at the far table now stood in unison, and Jake was on edge, as if he was just about ready to act, his hand moving to the knife hidden at the small of his back. But again the two young men just sat there, sweet as pie, not a care in the world.

“Wake!” Krys suddenly said his voice louder because of his excitement. “His name was Wake…something.”

The two men who were standing sat slowly back down, and Jake was frowning again. “You knew Wake?”

Krys shrugged. “I was ten…I knew of him.”

Jake relaxed a little. These two could not be Deutzani, or if they were, they had a very good cover story.

“Where’d ya go after Lynndon?”

Krys glanced at Gwaynn, who shrugged his consent. “I went to the Islands,” Krys answered very amused to see Jake’s face go pale.

Jake’s mind was now racing. These two did not have the look or demeanor of a Scholar or Physician, and since they arrived on horseback Travelers could be ruled out, and that left either Weapons Masters or Executioners. Jake’s mind fixated on Executioners since a group of men trimmed in Sinis red had passed through early the previous week.

“The Islands,” Jake answered back as his two friends at the next table turned around to face away from him. Anger at them shot through Jake. It was at their prodding that he’d come over here in the first place. Cowards.

Gwaynn’s smile grew larger. “Noble,” he answered softly.

Jake sighed. “Noble?” he asked, relieved, but still worried.

Gwaynn nodded. “Noble.”

Jake shook his head, then suddenly decided he couldn’t be any closer to death than he had just been, so he leaned in. “You’re not Deutzani?” he asked.

Both Krys and Gwaynn shook their heads, and Jake let out another sigh.

“Weapons Masters?” He asked, then in a flash he remembered someone from Lynndon had been accepted into the training. He remembered Wake bragging about it all those years ago. Krys…the boy’s name might have been Krys.

“Krys,” Rebecca said, coming from around the bar to get closer. “I do remember a Krys getting accepted into the training,” she said.

“At your service,” Krys answered with a slight bow, now fully amused by the man who had joined them.

Jake laughed. It was giddy and high pitched. His relief was so great that the men at the next table joined in. “Boy, when you said the Islands, I could not keep from thinking about the band of Executioners. They came through here last week, but didn’t stop.”

“Luck was with us,” Rebecca added with obvious gratitude.

“Executioners,” Gwaynn said, his voice raised, and eyes suddenly going cold. All talk stopped once again in the tavern, and Jake swallowed hard. The man in front of him never claimed to be a Weapons Master, but if Krys was taking his orders he must be someone deadly.

Rebecca nodded and bravely moved closer, then whispered. “They came through last Monday. They were heading toward Manse. Nasty men, killers all.”

“Anyone named Navarra with them?” Gwaynn asked, his manner still ice.

Rebecca shrugged, growing a bit wary once more. “They didn’t give names, didn’t even stop to water their horses…I’m sorry young master,” she added, and Gwaynn seeing her fear for the first time, eased back his intensity.

“I thank you,” he said standing, and picking up his bag. “Looks like we have another reason to go stop at Manse,” he added to Krys who also stood. “We’ll say goodnight. Tell the boy to have our horses ready at sunrise.”

Rebecca bowed her head in acknowledgement.

Jake and the others watched as the two walked up to the second floor. Relief poured through everyone at the tavern. Jake stood, his joints rubbery, and moved back to his table of friends.

“Way to pick on someone who hunts Executioners Jake,” whispered the fat man at the far table. Everyone turned a looked at Jake for a moment, but then suddenly they were all laughing with relief.

ǂ

Tar Navarra was across the bridge and up the Scar just as the sun rose ever faithful, over the eastern horizon. A cool wind whipped along the water, fluttering his cape as he rode, and the sky was decorated with a multitude of red, orange, and purple tinted clouds, but the Executioner did not notice. All his attention was on the tracks that led to the very top of the Scar. It was an easy trail to follow; the girl’s horse had a slightly raised nail on the left front shoe. It made a deeper indentation than any of the others, a perfect telltale sign of her passing. Luckily the rain had again been light the previous night and had not washed away all of the tracks. The Fultan girl rode past this way. Once on the very top of the Scar, Navarra looked about. He spotted a boy hiding among the wagon parts and high grass. Furia spotted the boy also and went rigid, growling deep and low until Navarra softly whistled, then the dog trotted to catch up. Navarra ignored the boy and moved on to the group of buildings up ahead. He stopped in front of the largest building, which claimed to be “Bert’s Feed and Grain.” No one emerged to meet him so he dismounted, not bother to tie off Chaos, for he was well trained. He climbed the stairs to the porch and was almost in the door.

“What can I do ya for?” a woman’s voice sounded from the corner of the building. Immediately Vesania and Furia were growling, hunching low; they began to slowly approach the old woman. Navarra spoke softly and they stopped walking, but continued to growl and watch her menacingly. Bert paused for only a split second then continued on, struggling with a sack of feed. She carried it up the steps and placed it next to the door, then stood and looked Navarra directly in the eye. There was no sign of fear in her despite his Executioner robes, which annoyed him.

“I’m looking for a girl who past by this way,” he said softly, and moved slightly closer to the old woman, wanting her to react to his presence by taking a step back. She didn’t move.

“A girl,” the old woman answered loudly. “I don’t sell girls here.” She grunted then tried to move by him and enter the store. Navarra stopped her easily by reaching out and grabbing a hold of her right arm. He squeezed hard and she gave a satisfying wince.

“You’re hurting me,” she said, scolding.

“Yes,” Navarra answered and for a moment squeezed harder. “I’m looking for a girl who past by this way,” he repeated even softer.

“A girl?” the old woman asked, fear suddenly in her eyes.

“Ye…” Navarra began but was surprised when suddenly there was a knife in the old woman’s left hand. She made the mistake of raising it high to drive it into his throat, if she had gone for his groin she might have succeeded. Navarra blocked the blow at the last moment then gripped her left wrist and twisted hard until the tendons and bones popped loudly in the still morning air. The knife fell on the hardwood of the porch and bounced away. The woman screamed, but it was cut off as he struck her in the throat with the edge of his hand. It was a killing blow, crushing her larynx. It was a blow he had not intended to make, but his surprise was so great from her near success that he lashed out instinctively. He released her, and she staggered away a few steps, face already contorted and turning blue. She pulled at her throat with her right hand, her left dangling uselessly at her side. The dogs were up and eager, staring at him for permission to continue with the killing, but he gave them an angry look that caused them to fall back, clearly disappointed. Navarra watched the woman as she stared back at him, her eyes wide, death fixed in her sight but then he turned away from her and entered the store, looking for anyone else who might confirm the girl’s passing. He soon came back out onto the porch. The woman was dead; a slight blue tint could be seen around her lips. He only gave her a cursory glance, then moved off the porch and looked in the direction where the boy had been earlier. There was no one in sight, and he briefly toyed with the idea of sending the dogs after him, but in the end he just mounted up and continued on, slowly following the tracks left by the Fultan horse.

The tracks continued on for maybe a mile before they suddenly moved off of the road and into the grass leading toward the tangle of undergrowth. At first he couldn’t figure out exactly where the tracks went. They seemed to end at an impossible tangle of brambles. He began to ride to the south, but the dogs did not follow and began barking behind him. They were standing around the bushes and sniffing about the ground. Navarra rode back, dropped from his horse and began to study the surrounding bushes. It did not take him long to discover the false briar, and though thorns stuck him repeatedly, he moved them out of the way as quickly as he could, smiling. He had her now; she would have no easy way out of this area. The dogs paced back and forth excitedly as he removed the barrier. His hands were bleeding here and there, but otherwise he was uninjured as he climbed back up on Chaos. Vesania and Furia moved to his side, both looking up at him, their furry faces full of eagerness.

“Soon,” he said softly, catching a bit of their enthusiasm, “soon.”

ǂ

Samantha was up early the next morning and ate another breakfast with Wake, Martin and Scot. Otter was just leaving for his watch at the Scar, as she emerged from her tent, though he turned and waved to her through the stunted trees. Sam waved back and even graced him with a small sad smile. The wind was strong this morning and the sky overhead was a maze of fast moving clouds, with ever growing patches of blue appearing between. The ground was wet and slick from the previous night’s rain, but it had been light and Samantha was sure the dampness would burn off before the morning was done.

“When do you think the others will return, so I can move farther west?” She asked Martin, who sat on the log next to her sipping coffee. Wake and Scot sat on the other log on the far side of the fire, which crackled and popped in the early morning breeze.

Martin shrugged. “They are not due back before the end of the week, but most times there’s no set schedule. They leave when they have to and return when they can. We just wait for them, and watch the road.”

Samantha nodded, fighting the nagging feeling to get up and leave on her own. They all sat in silence for a time, Sam only vaguely aware of the furtive looks she was getting from Scot.

“I’ll be heading down today,” Wake suddenly said in the silence, and Samantha looked up surprised.

“Leaving,” she repeated, alarmed at her sudden, growing sense of doom.

Wake caught her eye only briefly, then looked back down at the fire and took a sip of his own coffee. “Need to be back. The Deutzani will grow suspicious if I’m gone too long. Can’t have them nosing about up here.”

Samantha just stared at him for a long time, and when he finally looked up he could see how she’d deflated.

“Perhaps I’ll come up for a visit at the end of the week,” he said almost shyly, “if you’re not gone by then.”

Samantha nodded, wondering how the large man had gained her confidence so quickly. “Wake….” She said but fell silent, and for a moment the others just waited for her to continue, but then Martin leaped to his feet, obviously alarmed. Wake turned and there, leisurely walking toward their camp was an Executioner and a dog. Wake quickly looked about then reached over and retrieved the axe he’d used the previous day. By the time he turned back both Scot and Martin had their knives out and ready. Samantha was still sitting on the log, staring in shock as the man in black approached ever closer.

“Run Mona!” Wake yelled, calling her by his dead wife’s name in his excitement. Sam did not react until Wake moved forward toward the Executioner. He held his axe high, ready for a fight. Sam suddenly came alive and bolted off the log and toward the tent that held her belongings.

Navarra saw her plainly, his heart suddenly beating faster. Perhaps one more time before she died…he thought, then turned his attention to the large man approaching with an axe. Navarra whistled softly and then motioned for Vesania to move off into the brush to the left. He did not want either dog facing this man. They would lose, he was sure. Furia was already somewhere to the right circling around behind the camp.

“You needn’t die,” Navarra said softly to the man who was now almost directly in front of him. “Just give me the girl. She is all I want.”

“My ass,” the man answered back, and though the axe he wielded was a large one, his massive arms and shoulders held it like a toy.

Navarra frowned at the crude language, but could not argue with the sentiments. Despite what he promised, everyone here would die, and he pulled his kali from his belt.

Behind the man before him, Navarra caught sight of Samantha once more, emerging from a tent, a bow in hand. She held it with her left and gathered her skirts about her in her right, and prepared to run.

“Samantha!” Navarra said loudly, and she actually paused and glanced his way. Their eyes caught for a moment and the Executioner felt a tingle in his groin, but then the man with the axe attacked, and she turned to run away from them both. Navarra jumped back from the first vicious blow, and had to skip back two more times as the axe continued back and forth with a great deal of speed and skill. Navarra quickly turned his full attention to the man he was now fighting. He must be careful, a blow from the axe could easily snap a blade or send one of his kali flying off, not to mention slice off an arm…or his head. The man before him was no stranger to fighting, probably a soldier in the past, and from the way he carried himself, a good one.

“Only the girl,” he said again, watching the axe move, and waiting for an opening. The other two men in camp were now moving forward as if suddenly released from their earlier fear and hesitation. Navarra was thankful for his dogs, without them he would have had his hands full with the axe man and these other two fellows.

Navarra whistled and Vesania suddenly bolted from the underbrush to attack the younger of the two trailing men. The young man cried out as the large dog clamped down on his right forearm with powerful jaws. His knife fell to the forest floor. The older of the two quickly turned to go to his young friend’s aid, and when he did Furia hit him from behind. In moments the air was filled with cries, growls and desperate fighting. The noise momentarily distracted the axe man, and Navarra had his opening. He struck quickly, piercing the man’s left shoulder, and slicing his right thigh at almost the same moment. The man groaned, but instead of falling back as the Executioner expected he stepped in, and swung with all his might. Navarra arched backward and spun at the last moment. He felt the wind of the axe ripple past the side of his face and along with it, a slight knick on his right ear. He retreated, as did his opponent, who was pulled off balance from the force of the blow.

“I will kill you Executioner,” the man said in a deep, rough voice.

“Not likely,” Navarra answered softly back, and though he scored a hit, he knew he had been fortunate to avoid the blow moments before.

“You bleed,” the man commented and gestured to the side of Navarra’s head. “Just like any other man.”

Navarra took a moment to run the back of his hand by his right ear, and was surprised to see a good deal of blood come with it. He shrugged.

“So do you,” he answered, looking at the shoulder wound then the wound on the man’s thigh, which was deep and bleeding freely. The man grunted and with a fair amount of grace plunged into an attack once more.

Navarra backpedaled, waiting; though his anger at being kept from the girl was beginning to mount. Behind them, the sounds of growls, bites and cries permeated the camp. Soon that fight would be over, but for now he had to deal with the axe man on his own. Navarra knew as long as he kept his focus and forced the man before him to either defend or attack, he would eventually win this fight. His opponent, though strong, would in time run out of the strength needed to swing the heavy axe so nimbly and when that happened, he would die. Navarra could see these thoughts moving through the eyes of the man before him as blow after blow either missed or were deflected from their mark, and as he began to panic Navarra began to nick and cut him whenever an opening presented itself.

Finally, after much longer than the Executioner would have thought possible, the man’s strength was beginning to truly ebb, but still the man fought on with courage and skill. Navarra cared for none of that however, and began to hate the man for keeping him from the Fultan girl. He had to force himself to relax. She would not escape this time, for there was nowhere for her to go.

The sounds of battle behind them were completely gone, though it took a moment for the two combatants to become aware of it. Navarra, now on the attack, kept the man from looking about, then with only the slightest signals, Vesania and Furia began to growl and bark from directly behind the axe man. The sudden threat caused him to begin to turn, but he never completed it. In a blink, his heart was skewered by Navarra’s left kali. The man sagged immediately with only the briefest moment to realize he was dead.

Navarra paused a moment to look down at the dead man. He was a mighty opponent, skilled and strong. Navarra spit on the dead man’s face, then raised his boot and with all his strength brought in down, crushing his nose. Only then did he look up, and with a slight nod he signaled his dogs to continue the chase, and they tore after the fleeing girl.

Samantha ran in pure panic, not thinking of where she was going until she met Otter running toward the camp. She did not stop, did not say anything, and just ran past him until suddenly without knowing how or why, she was at the very edge of the Scar. She skidded to a stop, her toes just inches from the edge. She glanced down, then quickly behind her, then down once more, thinking she may be able to climb. The Scar

was high and steep, and as she looked over the edge at the swirling water a hundred feet below she realized that even if she had the time, climbing was not an option.

The sounds of attacking dogs could be heard in the distance, but it was the sound of hurried footsteps close behind that caused her to turn from her inspection of the cliffs. But it was only Otter racing back to her side.

“How many?” He asked; her obvious fear made the question of whom irrelevant.

“One,” she answered and pushed by him moving down the Scar looking for a possible way to descend. The sound of dogs increased. “And some dogs,” she added, panic and fear causing her hands to shake violently, and tears to come to her eyes.

“The Ex…Executioner,” she stammered, moving past him the other way. Otter turned to the camp, but was caught up in her panic as she moved back past him again searching the other way. Suddenly the sounds of the dogs ceased, but not with any telltale yelp signaling an animal’s injury or death. Samantha stopped and turned to stare at Otter. The old man stared back at a complete loss as to what to do.

“Ah…ah,” Samantha croaked, but the sound did not adequately verbalize her terror, but for the first time moved away from the Scar. She pulled her bow off her shoulder, moved farther into the dense brush. She pulled an arrow from her quiver, while dropping several others, which came out with the one in her hand. They fell forgotten to the forest floor, as she knelt and with shaky hands tried to notch an arrow. It took her three attempts to seat the string in the notch, and by that time the faint sounds of running dogs could be clearly heard. She sighted down the arrow and back up the trail to camp, and luckily for her, after only a few seconds, two large black dogs tore into view, running full out toward her. Perhaps if she had more time to aim, more time to think, more time for her fear to work on her she would have missed, but as it was she only had an instant and despite her shaking hands the arrow flew true and struck the second dog full in the chest. It let out a brief yelp and skidded in the dead leaves and twigs, which littered the ground.

Sam felt no satisfaction only fear as she fumbled around for another arrow, her search hampered by the fact that she kept her eyes on the dog charging toward her. Finding no arrow at first, however, she risked a glance down. She spotted one a bit to her left and she leaned over and placed a hand on it. She straightened back up and looked to see the dog just beginning to leap; instinctively she ducked down so her nose was inches away from the dirt and felt one paw of the beast graze her back. The dog caught the bow as he flew overhead and her right hand was jerked around behind her so hard she rolled onto her back. She heard a snap, but didn’t realize it was her bow breaking until she staggered back to her knees. Otter screamed as the dog leaped at his throat and caught a hold. The dog’s momentum carried the old man to the ground. The animal’s jaws clamped tighter to the man’s throat before wrenching his powerful head back and forth, back and forth, throwing Otter about on the very edge of the Scar, as if he weighed nothing. The dog finally pulled back and ripped out the throat of the now silent man.

Samantha stared at Otter in horror before the dog’s growling brought her back to the reality of the situation. She knew she was about to die. Her bow was broken and the dog would be on her before she could even pull her knife from her waist. She waited, as the growling dog approached, its hackles raised menacingly.

A low whistle sounded behind her and the dog went still. Sam turned to see the Executioner walking toward her, a slight smile on his face, and real fear flooded back into her. She turned and without another thought, rose and ran full tilt toward the dog. The dog flinched at first, surprised. Prey ran, never attacked. But when Samantha was close, the dog had recovered somewhat and reared up to meet her, but at the last moment she ducked, still running and hit the dog in the mid-section. Her feet continued to churn until to the surprise of the dog they were over the edge of the Scar and out into space.

Furia yelped in fear and twisted free of the girl who was now falling feet first, her skirts bellowing up over her head, mercifully hiding her view of the plummet. She hit the cold water much sooner that she expected and plunged deep, deep into the muddy river and then finally, her feet struck the bottom. The force of her fall caused her knees to buckle slightly and it took an instant for her to realize that she was not dead or even injured, then she pushed upward with all her might and a moment later broke the surface. She sputtered for several seconds then wiped the water from her eyes. The dog also survived the fall and was swimming very slowly toward the far bank. Something in its movements told Sam that it had injured a leg, perhaps more than one, for it was having a hard time making head way against the slow current. Instinctively Samantha looked up, half expecting the Executioner to come falling down after her, but he was still up there, high on the edge of the Scar, gazing down at her. Her heart thumped harder just looking up at him, but after a moment she realized that he was not going to jump. Seeing the drop from below, she could hardly believe she’d done such a thing. She glanced over at the struggling dog, then back up at the Executioner who continued to glare down at her, and then with quiet determination she swam up behind the beast. She fumbled for her knife, which was somehow still in its sheath, drew it and with all her might tried to plunged it into the back of the dog. Swimming in the water made the task more difficult than she expected and the knife sliced through the dog’s hindquarters. The black beast gave a half yelp, swallowed some water and began to splash harder for the bank. Sam settled herself; this time swimming a bit closer and struck. The knife ran deep into the back of the dog’s neck. This time the dog did not yelp, just jerked spasmodically, went under, then rose again before finally disappearing all together beneath the water.

Sam, breathing hard now, looked back up. The Executioner still stood on the very edge of the Scar, watching. She smiled at him and waved, before slowly making her way to the far bank. She climbed from the river, holding her skirts tightly as they tried to fall away from her hips, heavy with water. She looked back up the Scar, but the Executioner was gone. She struggled up the steep dirt bank, but it was not until she got to the top that she realized her shoes were gone. She did not pause to ponder this; instead she began to walk quickly back to the town. However, she did not head directly into Lynndon where there were soldiers, instead she skirted around the east side, keeping low and all the while wishing her clothes were dry. Thankfully it was still very early in the morning; the back alleys were deserted as she circled all the way to the far side of town and into the barn, which stood next to Wake’s smithy shop. There was only one horse inside, in the very last stall. “Bull” a sign said on the crossbeam above and inside was a very large draft horse, whose back came level with Samantha’s eyes. The horse watched her and then skittered about nervously as she entered, and Samantha forced herself to slow down.

“Easy Bull…easy,” she said, and slowly approached one hand held out. Bull eyed her suspiciously, for she was obviously not Wake, but her kind words and soft scratches soon settled him down. The horse was immense, and Sam was not at all sure he was broken for riders until she spotted the saddle draped over one of the walls of the stall. “Wake” was carved into one side, and reading it she had to smile. Yes, this would be a horse Wake would own. She struggled with the saddle, it was large and heavy and it took all of her strength to lift it up over her head and onto Bull, but eventually she managed, and once in place the cinching was easy, she hardly had to bend over to do it. Bull waited patiently for her and then allowed the girl to lead him from the stall and out into the barn. He was excited, for Wake rarely saddled him anymore, only taking him out to pull the large heavy wagon that also sat in the back of the barn.

Sam led Bull over close to a ladder that went up to the loft. There she had to climb two steps before she could place her foot into the stirrup and pull herself up onto the horses back.

“Come on Bull,” she said softly and nudged the horse into a walk. Bull complied, as eager as she to be out of the barn. Once outside, Samantha was afraid she would see soldiers moving about but the streets were nearly empty. There was just one young boy on this side of town. He watched her as she turned her Bull to the west and together they left town at a fast pace. She would head northwest to Manse, the only other place to easily cross the Scar.

ǂ

Gwaynn and Krys entered Manse late the next afternoon. They made straight for the town even though they could have avoided it and crossed the Scar at any number of points within a thirty-mile span. Here, in and around Manse, the Scar appeared and disappeared into the earth, rising and falling much like a sea serpent arching in an out of the water. Even the river was wide and slow which made the crossing that much easier. But the two young men from Noble were not interested in crossing undetected, for they were hunting a party of Executioners.

Manse was a thriving town of nearly forty thousand, making it the third largest metropolis in Massi, and the largest in the interior countryside. Only Cape and the capital Solarii surpassed it. It owed much of its prosperity to the massive amounts of trade goods that moved off the Scar Plateau and down to the plains, lumber being the chief commodity. But several precious metals were mined in the mountains, and animal furs were also traded, plus a fair portion of the horses in Massi were raised on the Plateau.

Gwaynn and Krys rode into the town, surprised by the amount of activity going on at the relatively late hour. There were large numbers of wagons loaded with lumber, some were massive, with teams anywhere from six to ten horses and a few even had as many as twelve. Some of the shops were closed for the night, but many were still open. They passed several taverns on the way into town; all were doing a brisk business, filled with Deutzani soldiers and Massi citizens alike. Gwaynn paid close attention to the interaction of the two groups, and while there seemed to be very little mingling, there also did not seem to be any overt animosity. Gwaynn frowned a little at the apparent peaceful co-existence.

“They’ve been here well over a year,” Krys said reading his friend’s thoughts by his gaze and the look on his face.

Gwaynn nodded, but said nothing until they came across a particularly large wagon filled with trimmed logs. “We’re looking for Lonogan Bock,” he said to a man who was high up on the load, checking the ropes and adjusting them when necessary. The man was burly, with shagging hair and he wore a full dark beard that nearly covered his entire face so that only three holes appeared out of the coarse hair, two for his eyes and one for his nose. The hole at his mouth didn’t appear at first as he studied the two below.

“South side of town, at the very edge along the river. Lonogan Lumber Mill, largest in Manse,” the man answered, his eyes still evaluating the pair before him. He thought they looked a might suspicious, plain clothes, but top notch mounts. The two didn’t usually go together. Horse thieves’ maybe, but these two didn’t have the look of horse thieves either. “You can’t miss it,” he added.

Gwaynn and Krys nodded and moved off unaware that the bearded man continued to watch them curiously.

Gwaynn led them farther into the large town, but eventually stopped at a two-story inn at the corner of two of the major roads. ‘Blackberry Inn,’ the sign said on the balcony above, inside at ground level, was a particularly busy tavern.

“I was hoping we were going to stop soon,” Krys said with a rueful smile. “I’m not used to riding so much,” he added and massaged his backside. Gwaynn laughed and did likewise.

“Lonogan can wait ‘til morning,” Gwaynn answered, still rubbing.

“We can help with that,” a feminine voice said from above, followed by several giggles. They looked up; on the balcony to their right were a pair of middle-aged women, and a young girl. They were all dressed provocatively and if there were any questions about their occupation, their direct, lurid stares would have dispelled them. As it was, neither Gwaynn nor Krys had any questions.

“Thank you miss,” Gwaynn said trying hard not to look up the woman’s skirts while she positioned herself so it would be hard for him not to.

“Miss!” the woman repeated and nudged her friend. “They look a bit young for me.”

“Yeah, but Emm could handle them,” the other woman said then pulled the girl forward to the very edge of the balcony. “Whatcha think Emm?”

The girl was young; though at second glance she was probably older than Gwaynn’s first estimation, close to his age, if not a bit younger. She smiled down at them, a little shyly. Gwaynn guessed she was either very new at the trade, or very experienced, because her smile was full of innocence, either true or manufactured. They said nothing more, just smiled and walked into the tavern, but Krys turned to have another quick look at Emm and to his delight she was still looking down at him, smiling.

They entered the noisy, crowded tavern and made their way with difficulty up to the bar. Like the tavern in Bern this one seemed completely devoid of Deutzani soldiers, though they had passed several large groups of them on their way to the center of town. But unlike the tavern in Bern, this one was packed with people, men, women and even some boys, who appeared to be doing most of the cleaning and picking up after the wide variety of patrons. Gwaynn guessed that most of the crowd consisted of either loggers or trappers from up on the Plateau. But there were also a few men dressed more like local merchants or businessmen, though from the shadier side of town to be sure. Nearly all the men present were either drinking, eating or gambling, or some combination of the three; while most of the women were of the working class variety, and seemed to be spending much of their time either serving the men, or sitting with them in an attempt to part them from their money, either with drink, food or sexual attention.

When they reached the bar, they found it packed with a line of drinkers so serious about the endeavor that they didn’t want to be bothered with a table. The two young men paused to take in the wild atmosphere around them. Gwaynn looked over at Krys, who was smiling ear to ear, and Gwaynn had an idea that his face was a mirror image, and quickly sobered up. He nudged Krys, who turned to him still smiling.

“Ever been in a busy tavern before?” he asked, and Krys looked at him quizzically.

“That smile you’re wearing might attract a little attention. People will think we’re strangers to these parts,” he added then moved in to fill a hole at the bar as it unexpectedly opened up. Krys nodded and stopped smiling, but continued to gawk at all the activity around him.

It took several moments before a woman at the bar finally made her way down to Gwaynn.

“We need a room,” he informed her, having to raise his voice to be heard over the noise of the crowd.

The woman gave him a knowing smile. “How long ya need, sweetheart?”

Gwaynn smiled back. “For the night,” he answered and she made a shrugging motion, and then pointed to the door behind them and to the left.

“Through there,” she shouted. “Go to the desk.”

Gwaynn nodded, and they moved out of the tavern and into a relatively quiet back room. They crossed it and entered a hallway, which led to a quieter lounge area where only a few people were sitting about in large cushioned chairs. There was an elderly gentleman behind a large cherry wood desk, who helped them, took their money and even showed them to their room on the third floor, almost directly above the tavern.

“See to our horses,” Gwaynn said frankly. “They are directly in front of the tavern, a black and a large gray.”

“Of course, sir,” the old man nodded and kept his eyes averted, but they darted about taking in every detail of the two young men. Neither Gwaynn nor Krys noticed the covert looks of the old man as he kept a close eye on the coin purse tied at Gwaynn’s waist. The room was small, but with a solid door and even though there was a floor between the two, the noise of the tavern filtered clearly into the space above. Though the room was modest, it was clean, had two beds and a table with a pitcher of water, and between the beds was a single bedpan.

There was no thought of not heading back down to the tavern, after all they were both young, hungry, and the possibility of sleep at this point was non-existent. So they left their packs with their kali inside, locked their door and made their way back down stairs. They passed the rooms on the second floor, which were reserved for shorter stays, with just a touch of curiosity and envy. But neither voiced such thoughts.

Despite leaving their main weapon’s upstairs, each carried a pair of six-inch knives. Gwaynn placed one in a modest sheath at the small of his back and another in a specially made holder in his right boot. Unless he came across a particularly well-trained soldier he felt sure the knives along with his ability at hand-to-hand would suffice in protection.

When they reentered the tavern, the noise was still just as loud, and though Gwaynn did not notice her, the first person Krys saw was Emm, near one corner. She was standing next to an empty table talking earnestly with the old man who had showed them their rooms. Krys kept an eye on her as they entered and it wasn’t long before the man left, skirting around them just as Emm caught Gwaynn’s eye and called them over. Gwaynn shook his head at her, and began to move toward the bar, when Krys caught his arm.

“Come on,” he said, a hint of desperation in his voice. Gwaynn frowned at his friend, and then took another quick look at the girl. She was attractive in a mousy sort of way, very thin and petite, with light brown hair that was pulled back from her face and sprouting out of the back of her head in a pair of long braids. She also sported a small nose covered in light freckles and large brown eyes. She smiled at them and waved at them more emphatically.

“She has a table,” Krys added without even wondering how a small young girl like her could have commandeered a table on her own in such a crowded place.

“You know what she is?” Gwaynn asked.

Krys scowled for a moment but then smiled sheepishly. “She’s company, and besides not all of us can attract the attention of Vio Valencia.”

It was Gwaynn’s turn to scowl, but he did so as they moved over to the girl and the table.

“I did not have Vio,” he demanded.

“You could have,” Krys snapped back not even trying to hide the hint of jealousy and admiration in his voice.

His tone caused Gwaynn to pause and considered his relation to his young girl friend on Noble. “Perhaps,” he answered, smiling as he remembered Vio’s attraction to him.

“Perhaps,” Krys mimicked, but then fell quiet as they came up on the table and the girl.

“I’m glad you came,” she said and Gwaynn rolled his eyes.

They all sat, Emm moved in close to Krys, his attraction to her was obvious unlike his friend’s sullen demeanor.

“Is this your first time to Manse?” She asked.

“Does it show?” Krys asked in return and Gwaynn rolled his eyes again.

The girl giggled on cue, then held out her hand. “I’m Emm,” she said, and Gwaynn had to give her credit; she was soft, smelled wonderful and her eyes sparkled at each of them.

“Gwaynn,” he said, trying hard not to admit to himself that he enjoy the way her hand felt in his.

“Krys,” his friend added also taking her hand, and holding it far longer.

They sat silently for a while, Gwaynn glancing about at those nearest him, feeling a bit uncomfortable with so many people behind him.

“Here we are,” a woman said as she placed a pan of steaming meat and potatoes on the table, along with four plates. Gwaynn frowned at the number of plates, and was still frowning when the woman returned with four tankards containing a light brown, sour smelling, ale.

“Name’s Dot,” the woman said sitting without being asked. She scooted in so close to Gwaynn that their legs could not help but touch. He moved away, but she appeared not to have noticed.

“You boys look like you’ve traveled far,” she commented as she scooped out some meat and potatoes for the both of them.

Gwaynn shrugged.  The woman was older but far from old; she had yet to reach middle age, though Gwaynn could see a few small wrinkles around the corners of her mouth, and a few more at her eyes. He guessed she was nearing thirty, but could not be sure. He always had trouble with the age of women, especially those older than he.

Dot moved closer to him so that their legs were touching again. “Where are you from stranger?” she asked leaning over to Gwaynn, holding her chin in her hand and giving him a good look down her low cut bodice.

“Solarii,” he heard himself murmur, using all his will to keep his eyes from the breasts of the woman at his side. There was a lot to see, and though he tried not to stare, he found it impossible and after a fleeting look at her breasts, he glanced back up at Dot, who was smiling at him.

“Like them?” she asked and placed a hand on his left leg. Gwaynn immediately stiffened, but didn’t move away; instead he began to eat his potatoes in earnest.

Dot laughed. “You’re a long way from home,” she added and pecked at the food before her. Gwaynn was surprised that she ate like a lady, small bites and with her mouth closed. “I could keep you company,” she added and he felt her hand move farther up his leg.

Gwaynn jerked uncomfortably, but still did not move away, though why he could not say. He did not find her all that attractive, nice looking perhaps and she smelled good, but there was something hard about her eyes that he found troubling. And he was not sure exactly how to deal with her.

“I’m not looking for company,” he finally said and glanced over at Krys for support, but his friend was completely drowning in the charms of the younger woman of the night.

Gwaynn once more moved away from Dot and closer to Krys. He took a sip of ale, trying not to make a face at the taste of the bitter, thick liquid.

Dot did not seem offended by his rejection; in fact, she smiled all the more at him, and moved closer. “That’s fine, honey,” she said and touched his leg again. “Just buy me a few drinks and will have a fine conversation.”

Gwaynn took another sip, completely aware of her hand moving up and down his thigh.

So they ate and drank, though Gwaynn made sure only to have a few, since Krys had thrown all caution to the wind and was now on his fourth tankard, sipping heartily when he was not kissing Emm brazenly. Dot continued to make advances which Gwaynn continued to deflect until Emm suggested they retire up to their room. Krys and Dot immediately agreed. Gwaynn wanted to protest but he was pulled quickly to his feet. He felt suddenly woozy and just a bit tired and was surprised to find that he was unable to formulate his thoughts.

The girls led them out of the tavern and up the stairs, Gwaynn growing dizzier despite his caution with the drink. He swayed and leaned heavily on Dot, whose hands were all over him.

“Hang on there tiger,” she said holding him up while moving her hands across his chest and stomach.

“Well aren’t you well built,” she said delightedly. “Be nice to have a young one. Most of my fair is a bit on the fat side.”

Emm laughed and taking the key from Krys opened the door to their room. The women literally pulled the young men inside and moved them to their separate beds. Both Krys and Gwaynn sat with difficulty; both were dizzy and wavering in place.

The fact that something was wrong dimly fluttered into Gwaynn’s mind, but was soon dispelled as Emm and Dot began to undress before them, and while Gwaynn was a bit more experienced with women than his friend, he was still completely captivated by a set of bare breasts. He glanced at Krys, who was sitting back arms spread behind him, his hands buried in the soft bed for balance. He was breathing fast and staring at Emm who posed in front of him, small pert breasts, with small dark nipples.

Nice breasts, Gwaynn thought, and suddenly fell onto his back and stared up at the ceiling. He was dimly aware of Krys doing likewise.

“They’re nearly done in,” he heard Emm say with a giggle.

Something’s wrong. Gwaynn’s brain screamed at him and he tried to rise, only to feel the soft hands of Dot holding him down.

“Shame, I would’ve liked to have a go at this one,” she said and ran her hands down his belly and over his crotch. Gwaynn felt his pants being opened and then a warm hand cupped his penis and fondled his balls.

‘Something’s wrong,’ he thought again as the hand left his private area and moved to the coin purse at his belt. Alarm rose in him and without conscious thought his right hand moved to his back, drew his knife and had it at Dot’s throat before she even was aware that he was moving.

Dot gasped as he half rose. Gwaynn shook his head, trying desperately to clear it. For a brief moment he stared into the eyes of the woman hovering over him and for an instant she saw death looking back at her through his eyes, but then they rolled back in his head and the boy slumped onto the bed unconscious.

ǂ

Tar Navarra watched from the edge of the Scar as the girl swam slowly over and plunged a knife into Furia, and though outwardly he showed no sign of emotion, inside he was boiling. It didn’t help matters that after the dog had disappeared into the water she looked up and waved to him. He turned and moved away so that he would not scream out in frustration.

Two dogs and a horse! He thought as he hurried back through camp even though he had made a point never to hurry. To hurry was to admit to a lack of control, and that was uncomely for one who dealt out death. Even so he hurried; what did it matter now that those around him were already dead? He hurried because more than anything, he wanted to catch the bitch and bring her into the waiting arms of the Black Horseman.

Rage was blinding him, causing him to rush and perspire, but by the time he reached Chaos he had restored some semblance of calm to his demeanor, not that his passion for the death of Samantha had waned, but his own cool reason was now beginning to assert itself once more. He was close, he told himself, thoughts like frost on a window pane, and when he had her he would take her, rape her in more ways than she could imagine, and then kill her very, very slowly. He leaped up into the saddle, turned and moved back through the briar as quickly as the horse could safely manage. It helped that the obstacles were still removed, but even so it took nearly three quarters of an hour to reach the road.

Once there he proceeded much more slowly. First, he knew he must ascertain whether or not the girl had the courage to re-climb the Scar and pass this way going south. He forced himself to slow down and climb from the back of the horse to study the tracks leading away from Lynndon. It took another quarter of an hour to determine that none were made within the last day, let alone the past hour. Satisfied, he stood and moved back down the Scar, passing the dead old woman, still on the porch. Of the boy he saw nothing.

By the time he rode into Lynndon he was again the calm Executioner, and the fact that he was minus two dogs was beginning to fade into the very recesses of his mind. The townspeople were going about their business, moving here and there on errands. He stopped nearly all of them and asked about the girl, but it was not until he cornered a young boy near the edge of town that he found someone who had witnessed her passing.

“She took a horse from Wake’s,” the boy said. He ran along side as the Executioner rode up to the smithy shop and dismounted. The boy, who had just turned seven, was too young to be afraid, and felt very special helping this tall, dark and obviously very important man to leave well enough alone. He watched as Navarra carefully moved from smithy to barn, studying the tracks in the ground and growing more excited as he spotted the small set he was looking for. She was missing her shoes, her toes clearly visible in one print. He knelt down to examine it more closely and then he reached out, feeling the same earth beneath his fingers. The print was no bigger than his hand. Then he moved to the horse’s prints. They were large, frightfully so. They would be very easy to follow.

Without a word he moved out of the dimly lit barn and back into the daylight. The boy still followed, just a step or two behind.

“Which way did she go?” Navarra asked, thinking of giving the boy a pence for his help.

“She rode west along the Scar,” the lad piped up. Navarra nodded.

“Mister, where are your dogs?” The boy asked. A second later his head was bouncing along in the dirt, the questioning look still on his face. Navarra watched it until it stopped moving, then let out a laugh, feeling better. The boy had died fast, probably without even knowing it was coming. It would have to do…in place of the pence.

XV

Samantha rode at a quick and steady pace. Bull would never be taken for a sprinter, but he was big and strong and carried her weight as if it were nothing at all. He was used to either Wake, or hauling heavy wagons, the girl on his back was hardly noticeable. She used his strength to get as far from Lynndon as possible, riding most of the day, stopping only twice so that they could both drink from the Scar River, which she was following to the northwest. Several times she left the river’s side when she spotted bargemen floating her way, carrying goods along the river to the host of small towns which dotted its banks. They moved slowly, so she had plenty of time to veer off and hide among the foliage until they past. After they were gone she continued to ride until it was well dark and the rocky ground was becoming a danger to the horse. She finally stopped when she spotted a small sandbar by the soft light of the quarter moon. She dismounted and moved down the bank. She was closer to the river than she would have liked. The rushing water created enough noise so that she would not be able to hear anyone coming up on her, but the bar was protected from the wind by the riverbank on one side and the Scar on the other. The sand was fine and soft and afforded a nice place in which to try to get some rest.

Bull was a worry, since she didn’t have a rope to hobble him. She removed his saddle, but had to leave his bridle in place so that she could tie the reins to a stubby bush not far from where she laid her one smelly blanket. She would not light a fire, she could not risk it, but it was relatively warm, and she could half cover herself in any case.

Surprisingly, she slept the sleep of the exhausted, and woke curled in a tight ball against the chill of the morning air, her clothes still somewhat damp. She sat up and Bull snorted at her, obviously displeased. She stood and led the horse over to the river to drink. While Bull was thus engaged, she quickly relieved herself and then moved across the sand bar and climbed the bank to carefully look about the surrounding area. Her heart was hammering in her chest in anticipation of seeing the Executioner riding her way, but thankfully the immediate area seemed empty. She ran back down the sandy bank, holding up her skirts so as not to trip over them, grabbed her blanket and saddle and placed them on Bull as he continued to drink. She hurried, suddenly very sure that the Executioner was close, and that he had not stopped for the night and was almost upon her. After what seemed an eternity to her, but in actuality was only a few minutes she finished and with difficulty raised her leg and placed it in the stirrup and hoisted herself up upon the very large horse. It took a bit of coaxing, but she eventually pulled Bull away from the river and rode him up the bank. She looked around frantically for her pursuer, but again, the immediate area seemed empty, then she turned and headed once more west along the river.

Bull displayed his strength again and they traveled at a quick pace for most of the morning. Samantha encouraged him with kind words and pats on the neck when she was not looking back over her shoulder. The Executioner was coming. She could feel it and her anxiety and fear drove her on, but it was not until around mid-day that a great wave of hunger finally struck her. She had not eaten since the evening before last and up until now had not truly missed food. She had just not given it any thought; her mind and body elsewhere, but time was beginning to take its toll as her stomach clenched several times in painful protest. It was not long before she was thinking of nothing but food. She rode along the river, thinking of fish, and knowing that she was in deep trouble. All she had was a knife; her bow was broken and discarded. She knew she could not take the time to hunt or fish, not with death chasing her. Sam had intended to by-pass Manse and cross over the Scar before she reached the town, but now she knew she would have to risk the danger and move among the people of the town in the hopes of getting food. The trouble was Manse was still at least two days away. She would not make it another two days without food, of that she was very sure. She would have to find something to eat, or she would die of starvation before the Executioner could kill her.

It was still early in the afternoon, when her stomach forced her to leave the river and move nearly a quarter of a mile to the north where there were sparse groups of trees, and high bushes. She hoped to flush a rabbit, a bird or even a squirrel, though how she would catch them she did not know. She knew that if she had to she could live on mice, or even insects, but hungry as she was she was not that far gone yet. Her journey inland paid off far sooner than she expected, though not with any sort of meat, instead she came across a patch of large blackberry bushes. Her mouth watered when she recognized them, though they were still young, reddish and hard, even so she nearly twisted her ankle jumping from Bull’s back, and walking quickly, bare footed to the bushes.

Her fingers, mouth and lips were soon purple from the juice of the bitter berries but Sam was sure she had never tasted anything quite so sweet. Surprisingly it only took about ten minutes of constant eating before her stomach began to settle. Bull snorted, and she remembered that he had not eaten either.

“Sorry Bull,” she said and walked to him and removed his bit. The horse did not go for the berries, but instead moved to a patch of nearby grass and clover. The two of them ate contentedly for another quarter of an hour before Sam moved to Bull and removed the saddle and then the blanket underneath. She put the saddle back on and then began to load the blanket with as many berries as she could pick. She was so involved with the picking that she hardly noticed the weather until it began to rain, sporadically at first, with large wet drops, but then it opened up and drenched her where she stood. She cursed softly; her clothes had almost completely dried from her plunge. But there was nothing to be done for it, so she wrapped the berries up in the blanket and then carefully walked up to Bull. She hated the storm. She hated to be wet, and she was afraid a nearby lightning strike would startle the horse and he would bolt. She knew she was dead without Bull. The horse allowed her to lead him away from the clover and back into a copse of trees in order to find what shelter they could. There were more blackberry bushes here, thick along the tree line. She stopped and let Bull graze once more but she kept one hand on his reins at all times. They were hardly in the midst of the foliage when she heard voices, male voices, carrying through the storm. She froze and looked out beyond the trees in the direction of the approaching men, and her heart nearly sprang from her chest when she caught sight of a group of Deutzani soldiers. There were seven of them in all and they were moving quickly in her direction, likewise trying to find some shelter.

ǂ

Gwaynn woke the next morning confused and in pain. His head pounded as if his heart now lived between his ears. He struggled to a sitting position, the pain so bad he had to fight the urge to throw up. He lost that battle, puking on the floor. The pain increased as he retched and he saw blinding white flashes even though his eyes were closed. He sat quietly on the edge of the bed for several long minutes listening to Krys groan before he finally had the courage to try to stand. Waves of dizziness and nausea hit him almost immediately but slowly subsided as he stood there, very still.

Slowly and carefully he made his way over to the bureau and the pitcher of water. His tongue felt thick, heavy and scratchy as if someone had placed a sand-filled, waterlogged sock in his mouth. With great effort he lifted the pitcher and drank directly from it. The first sip was small, but wonderful, the best water he’d ever tasted. The next drink was larger, and after a moment he began to drink in large gulps. He wanted more, but forced himself to stop, knowing that Krys would be in a similar state when he finally came around.

Gwaynn placed the pitcher back on the bureau, feeling much better, his thirst and much of his dizziness gone. His head was still pounding, keeping time to some sadistic song. He suddenly remembered the women, nude. His hand went instinctively to his belt and found the bag of coins Paulo had given him was missing. He was not surprised, but angry, both with himself and the two who did this to him. His anger exploded into rage when he noticed that their bags were missing. The bags held all their personal belongings, but most importantly, their kali.

“Krys!” Gwaynn shouted loudly, then groaned and held his head in his hands. Gwaynn shuffled back over between the beds and in his effort not to step in his own vomit, kicked his knife, which lay on the floor. He slowly bent down and picked it up with a great deal of satisfaction, then leaned over and punched his friend as hard as he dared in the upper thigh.

“Aaah,” Krys moaned and sat up very fast. His face went from red to pale in a blink. He squinted and grabbed his head, moaned once and then vomited.

“Welcome to the party,” Gwaynn said softly.

Krys continued to vomit until his stomach was empty with Gwaynn struggling not to join in from the sound and the smell. When the retching seemed to be over Gwaynn handed him the pitcher of water, which Krys drank gratefully.

“What happened?” Krys finally asked, placing the pitcher on the floor and bending over to hold his head in his hands.

“They robbed us,” Gwaynn said feeling better by the minute, though his head was still throbbing painfully.

“Robbed,” Krys repeated, dimly thinking of Emm. He was having a hard time believing she would rob him, or anyone.

“Our money and our kali,” Gwaynn answered, his anger growing again.

Krys jumped up, groaning and looked on both sides of his bed. His bag was missing, but Gwaynn was already aware of the fact. He watched, only slightly amused, as Krys’ hands immediately went for his knives, which were still safely in their sheaths.

“How?” Krys asked.

“Drugged, I would say.”

“What now?”

“When we are up to it, I would like to go and talk to the old gentleman at the desk,” Gwaynn said. “I find it hard to believe that the proprietor of this establishment would not be aware of such thievery.”

Krys nodded and stood. “I’m getting more water,” he added and moved to the door. He stopped when Gwaynn put a hand on his shoulder.

“Save the confrontation until we’re ready,” he advised. After Krys had left, closing the door softly behind him, Gwaynn went to the window and tugged it open. The morning was clear and bright but the sun hurt his eyes. Painfully he stuck his head out the window and took a few deep breaths. Manse was already busy with horse and wagon traffic moving about in the street below. He pulled back inside and moved the heavy curtains as far out of the way as he could to allow as much fresh air into the room as possible. The smell inside was atrocious, so he sat on the sill and even considered moving out on the roof, but in the end decided that it was too steeply pitched to be safe. He closed his eyes against the sun and enjoyed the cool breeze against his face. His headache remained but he was recovering quickly, and though his anger was still present, he’d forced it away from the boiling point.

They would find the girls. He was confident of the fact, unless they fled town, but that was not very likely. He was of the mind that they had been targeted because of their youth, and thus a lesser danger than others might be. It smacked of a well-rehearsed crime, one that reoccurred regularly.

Krys opened the door and stepped back inside carrying the pitcher of water, a loaf of bread and hand full of half ripe strawberries. Gwaynn looked at him with a slight smile.

Krys smiled back and shrugged. “Found the kitchens,” he said by way of explanation.

They ate and drank in silence, each feeling much better as they worked their way through the food, and when they were finished they stood as one.

“Let’s go and find our kali,” Gwaynn said.

“Yes, I feel naked without them,” Krys answered, as they headed down the stairs to the main level.

When they hit the bottom of the steps the desk area was empty, but as they approached the old man came out of a back room. He paused, his hesitation obvious and was about to turn around and go back into the room he had just left, but Gwaynn quickly vaulted over the desk and grabbed him by the arm.

“We would like to speak with you,” he said, wincing from the pain the fast movements caused him. Krys moved around and went through the low swinging doors to join them behind the desk.

“What about?” The man said gruffly, but clearly nervous. Gwaynn nodded to Krys, who grabbed one of the man’s arms pinning it behind his back as Gwaynn forced the other up onto the desk.

“What is this?” The old man protested, trying to struggle, but the two strong young men knew all about leverage and pressure points so that his attempts to escape were useless. He soon gave up.

“We would like to find Emm and Dot,” Gwaynn said softly, not aware of the fact that he would have made a fine Executioner.

“Who?”

Gwaynn drew his knife with one hand and squeezed the old man’s wrist until his fingers parted and then slammed his palm flat on the desk. The old man stared at the knife, it was not overly large, but from his close proximity he could tell it was very, very sharp.

“The women?” Gwaynn asked again.

The old man shook his head, and without hesitation Gwaynn brought the knife down and severed the man’s index finger at the second knuckle. The fingertip jumped up and then rolled off the desk. The old man screamed and tried to pull his hand back, but Gwaynn held him easily. In his mind he thanked Tar Nev and his heavy katas and logs.

“Four to go,” Gwaynn whispered in the man’s ear just as his screaming died down. The man was still breathing heavily and Gwaynn leaned in, even closer.

“The women?”

“I…I don’t know,” the old man said, and Gwaynn severed his middle finger. This finger did not roll completely off the desk. The old man screamed again, and redoubled his efforts to get away. He still did not succeed.

“What’s your name?” Gwaynn asked.

“Wha…What?” the old man asked, staring fixedly at the bloody stumps on his hand and then the piece of severed finger. The bone could be clearly seen through the slowly oozing blood.

“Your name?”

“Taylor,” he answered. “Please.”

“Three more Taylor,” Gwaynn said in such a friendly voice that Tar Navarra would have been proud, “at least on this hand. Where are Emm and Dot?”

Taylor gulped and glanced into his young tormentor’s eyes. He saw no mercy there. “They will kill me,” he pleaded.

Gwaynn smiled. “And you think I will not?” Taylor saw the smile and believed him.

“They’re in the loft above the feed and grain store. If you go out the back you will see the stairs,” Taylor said deflating, only wanting to cradle his throbbing hand and make the pain go away.

But Gwaynn did not let him go and held him in place for such a long moment that Taylor was beginning to think the boy intended to kill him even though he had told him the truth.

“If you are in on this little scheme you will stop it now,” Gwaynn said and something in his manner told Taylor not to argue. The boy had metal there was no denying that, and Taylor, old and hardened as he was, found the youngster truly frightening. “I will find out, and then you will lose more than a few fingers.”

With that, Gwaynn released Taylor and moved back around the desk.

“Who are you?” Taylor asked despite his wish for these two young men to be gone. Gwaynn stopped and turned back to look at the old man. He glanced at Krys, who shook his head negatively, but Gwaynn took a deep breath.

“I am your King. I am Gwaynn Massi,” as he spoke he walked closer to the desk. The old man took a step back in spite of himself, his eyes wide, searching the face of the youth before him. It did not take long before recognition dawned.

‘Yes,’ Taylor thought, remembering his one trip to Solarii so many years ago, when he was newly married, and of a much younger age. Arnot was just a prince then and not yet the King or father to the boy before him, but after Gwaynn’s revelation, Taylor could see the resemblance. It was so great in fact, that he was surprised he failed to see it before.

“My…M’lord,” Taylor gasped, now truly frightened, bowing his head and eyes before the royal person before him. But Gwaynn reached slowly across the desk and took hold of Taylor’s chin and gently raised his face.

“You are the first, in all Massi to know the truth,” Gwaynn said softly, looking directly into the old man’s eyes. “The future of Massi now lies with you as well as me.”

It took a moment for the import of what Gwaynn was saying to sink in, but then the old man shook his head in protest. “M’lord…I would never,” he stammered.

“I know Taylor,” the King of Massi answered, and smiled. “I may call upon you again some day,” he added then turned. “But first we must educate a few more of my countrymen.”

And with that he and Krys left the room, heading for the back of the inn.

Taylor stood there, transfixed as thoroughly as if he had gone through a powerful religious experience. The King has returned. He had spoken with him, stayed at his inn, shown faith in him. Taylor was moved. He was changed in more ways than a few lost fingers, and in his mind, losing a few digits was worth it.

ǂ

Samantha stood helpless, completely frozen by terror, as the Deutzani soldiers approached. Closer and closer they came until she was sure she would be found out. They would spot her, or if they came but a little closer they would clear the bushes and spot Bull, mindlessly grazing behind her. They were just fifty yards away, close enough that she could make out their individual faces as she peered through the branches of the bush she knelt behind. But then lighting flashed overhead and a great deep crash was heard soon after. Bull jumped, tugged the reigns loose from her grip, and moved a few more paces away as Sam held her breath and prayed that he would not bolt.

“Not there,” she heard a voice say and her attention turned back to the approaching men. “Not in the trees. Are you all daft?”

The soldiers all came to a sudden stop, though one continued on for a few more paces. Sam could see him plainly. He was young with a square jaw and bright hazel eyes. He was wet and plainly tired, but even so she could tell he would be very pleasant to look at in other circumstances. She found it strange that she could find the enemy, any enemy attractive.

“Come,” the young one said turning in his saddle to look back at the other men, all of whom had come to a complete stop. The rain continued to fall, but its ferocity had lessened a bit. Thunder could be heard rolling about the countryside in the distance.

“No lad,” one of the elder soldiers said. “If lightning should strike it will leave us all dead. We must find shelter elsewhere.”

The young soldier turned back and looked at the cover of the trees and bushes as the other men moved off in the direction of the Scar River. Samantha watched without breathing, but the young soldier still did not turn and follow the others; he continued to stare at the very bush she hid behind. She was suddenly sure he was looking directly into her eyes. He took a sharp breath, and she thought he would yell out, but he released it without a sound. He stared for a few moments more, then turned and without looking back and hurried to catch up with the others. It was still a long time before Sam was able to breath, to be able to believe her luck, and when she stood she felt a sharp pain in her abdomen. She quickly squatted down again to relieve herself. Bull raised his head, slowly chewing and watched her.

Thunder could still be heard in the distance, but the rain was nearly passed. Sam stood, feeling better, her heart finally beginning to slow. She stood and moved quickly toward Bull. The horse watched her come calmly and allowed her to pat his neck gently before leading him to a nearby bush where she tied his reins securely. She then headed back in the direction the soldiers had taken. She was extremely careful to move within the cover of the copse of trees. She wanted to be very sure that the soldiers had moved on far enough that she could continue on her way without being spotted. She had to move nearly a quarter of a mile through the trees before she finally spotted the party, riding south in the distance. The rain continued to fall lightly but the majority of the severe weather appeared to have moved off to the east.

Samantha sighed, and hurried back to Bull, struggled up onto his back and trotted to the north, going a good distance before slowly edging her way back to the river. The berries and the fright had eased her hunger at first, though four hours later she was becoming desperate again. It became painfully apparent to her that not only was she going to have to stop in Manse, but she also realize that she would have to stop on the way and either try to trap a rabbit or other small animal, or perhaps fish. She did not want to stop…ever, not with the Executioner coming from behind. She could feel him gaining. He was coming, ever moving in her mind, and always faster than she was traveling. Suddenly the situation became too much for her and she began to cry in despair. She cried softly at first, but soon broke into huge, raking sobs. She cried about her situation, but mostly for her family and friends. Bull continued on his way unhindered by the emotional outburst taking place on his back, and when stream of tears finally ended nearly a half an hour later, Samantha felt much better. The tears seemed to clear her head so that she could think once more. Hunger was still with her and was still her primary concern. She leaned over and patted Bull softly.

“Good boy,” she said then sat up tall and looked around at her surroundings. The way behind her seemed clear of all pursuit, for which she was very grateful. The rain had stopped but there was another bank of dark clouds moving toward her from the southwest. She studied the oncoming storm for several miles before she finally became aware that the Scar was slowly disappearing into the earth. Her heart skipped a beat, as she realized that she was coming closer to Manse, and it soared as an idea finally came to her. She would indeed cross the Scar River, and climb to the plateau, but she would still ride to Manse and enter the town by the west. Perhaps doing so would throw off her pursuer, and any possible help the people of Manse could give him about a lone fleeing girl.

She rode on scrutinizing the river and the Scar as she traveled, hoping to discover an easy way to cross before the second storm hit the area. She’d already decided that she would cross during the height of the storm, confident that the downpour, if it was hard enough, would wash out any of her tracks. Without dogs it was possible she could lose the man hunting her, at least for a brief while. She didn’t have long to wait before the rain began to fall again but she did not find an easy crossing before the torrents of rain began to pelt her even harder than the first storm. Thankfully however, the thunder and lightning were missing. She was completely drenched again in seconds, her hair clinging to her neck and scalp. She had to cross now…she had little choice. She steered Bull carefully down the steep bank to the edge of the river, which was flowing steadily at this point. Beyond, through the rain, she could not see the Scar at all. She hesitated a moment, then with silent determination she forced Bull into the river. The current, though present, was not nearly as strong as she feared, nor was the river as deep, though Bull had to swim for a few paces through the middle channel. Sam climbed from his back and swam next to him, keeping a firm grip on the saddle as she did so. She squirmed back onto the saddle as he began to find footing once more. It was only moments before she found herself on the far side of the river, cold, shivering and soaked completely through, but happy, and for the first time hopeful as she began to hunt for a way up through the hills of the Scar.

She soon found a way as she reached a bend in the river. There was a path of sorts that led upward through the steep hills that were strewn with large boulders and jagged rocks, which jutted out of the earth as if the Scar, like a drowning man, was fighting to reach the surface one last time. The rain began to ease once more as she moved up the hillside. She pushed Bull, wanting to be off the slopes before the rain completely stopped.

“There are easier crossings up river,” a deep voice said from a nearby outcropping of boulders.

XVI

Gwaynn moved out of the inn and into the back alley with Krys following closely behind. As the old man said, the stairs that led to the loft above the feed and grain store were plainly visible, but as they moved out onto the back porch the door opened behind them.

“M’lord,” Taylor said in a whispered voice. Gwaynn turned and was surprised when he saw the old man holding out a very large sword to him. “It’s mine, from long ago. You must be careful. There are four of them. Fakir is the leader, nasty. He’s the one you must worry about.”

Gwaynn smiled and took the sword then he nodded to the old man. “My thanks Taylor,” he said and raised the sword. “We will return this momentarily.” As he turned he gave the sword to Krys.

“Here, you are better with one of these than I am.”

Krys took it and bowed his head in recognition. The sword felt good in his hand, and for the first time that morning he was feeling like his old self. He twirled the weapon skillfully a few times to get the feel for the balance of the weapon. Taylor, who was still watching and fretting in the doorway, caught this little display of skill and a few of his worries fled from his mind.

The two climbed the flight of steps as quietly as possible but the wooden staircase had been exposed to the elements for a long time and creaked and groaned with almost every step. Gwaynn half expected the door at the top to fly open at any moment, but it remained steadfastly closed, and both young men breathed a sigh of relief as they reached the top undiscovered. There was a window close to the door, but they found it shuttered against the night, and could see nothing of what was in the dwelling beyond.

They paused for a moment, but then a flash of lightning came from above. They looked at one another and just had time enough to smile before the sound of thunder exploded in the air. At that exact moment both of them raised a leg and kicked the door with all of their might. The lock and jam splintered from the force and the door flew open to reveal a man standing not fifteen feet away holding a bow already fitted with an arrow, which was pointed directly at Gwaynn. He released the arrow almost immediately. Gwaynn saw it leave his hand and begin its flight toward his chest, but then everything slowed. Gwaynn saw the man’s eyes. They were wide with excitement behind the on-coming arrow, which despite the slowing down of all else, seemed to be rushing at him alarmingly fast. Gwaynn did not have time to take a step, so he swiveled his body and pulled back his left shoulder. It was not quite fast enough as the arrow cut through his coat and sliced through the top layer of his skin before moving by and burying itself into the wooden post directly behind him with a resounding thunk.

Krys stared at Gwaynn for what seemed an eternity, and then time rushed ahead, normal again.

“Move!” Gwaynn yelled and Krys came unfrozen. The man with a bow also gaped as his arrow missed. It was not possible. He was the best shot in the county, and the man before him was almost close enough to touch. But he quickly recovered from his initial shock, and reached onto the bed behind him for another arrow. He picked it up and turned, not seeing the knife flying through the air toward him. Time did not slow for him, and the weapon buried itself directly in his throat with such force that even part of the hilt entered his flesh. He was thrown back onto the bed as a scream pierced the room.

Krys and Gwaynn rushed in, a bare-breasted woman sat at a table, her fingers in a bowl of fruit that sat before her. She stared at them, eyes wide with terror. It was not Dot or Emm, but that was all the two had time to determine before a second door burst open and another man rushed in, this one armed with a set of kali. Gwaynn recognized them as Krys’ set.

“Ah, there they are,” Krys said, and moved in with a fast elegant attack that Gwaynn could only admire. The man was dead within moments, falling quietly as his heart was pierced clean through. Gwaynn glanced behind to make sure the woman still posed no threat, but she just held up both hands in submission, then he went over to the man on the bed, who was still struggling for air, though weakly now. He grasped the hilt of his knife and pulled it free, air and blood now gurgling from the wound.

“Here,” Krys said, and handed Gwaynn the set of kali. “You’re better with these than I am,” he stated with a smile.

Gwaynn smiled back and nodded at the recognition and then they both moved through the door and into a hallway that contained three doors, one on the right, one on the left and one straight ahead. The door on the left was hanging open, inside on the bed, clearly naked beneath the sheets, was Dot. She gasped, as Gwaynn moved in. Krys nodded to the door on the right and Gwaynn nodded back.

“Please don’t kill me,” she screamed.

“How many more?” Gwaynn asked moving close to her. She cowered as he swung a kali so hard and close to her that it cut a swath of hair from the side of her head.

She screamed again, but as he moved closer she held up her hands and let the sheet fall from her chest, but for once Gwaynn found the sight of breasts uninterested.

“How many?” he yelled at her with urgency.

“I don’t know…four,” she stammered but Gwaynn did not stay to listen as he heard Krys break down the door across the hall. He arrived in time to see his friend pull the sword from another dead man’s chest. This one had not made it from the bed, and the woman with him was less timid than the others. She drew a knife with surprising speed, threatening Krys, but Gwaynn calmly sliced off her head for her trouble.

They moved as one back out the door, careful of the floor, which was becoming slick with blood. Once in the hall they marched up to the lone remaining door and burst into the last room.

A girl screamed from the bed. She was naked as well, and again holding up a sheet to cover her body. It was Emm, but she was alone in the room. Another door, on the far side of the room was open and Gwaynn could see stairs beyond, They led down to what he supposed was the feed store. He moved to the window in time to see a man, still holding up his britches, running through the streets.

“Who was he?” Gwaynn asked the stunned girl on the bed. She remained quiet, staring at the two intruders with wide eyes.

“Who?” Gwaynn screamed at her and she jumped, her gaze quickly shifting to his face.

“His name is Tod,” she blurted immediately. “Tod Ogden,” she added. Gwaynn rushed to her, grabbed her hair and pulled her from the bed. She was completely naked and helpless before them. He dropped her on the wooden floor and raised a kali, his anger breaking over him in waves. Emm screamed from her prone position and held up her hands in capitulation.

“Please!” she shrieked and they all heard the sounds of running feet. Krys moved to the doorway in time to see Dot, wearing only her under things running toward the back room and supposedly the stairs beyond. Gwaynn stood frozen, his kali held high for the killing blow, but as he glanced back down at the naked girl at his feet, his anger had past.

“Please,” she said, beginning to cry.

“Fakir?” Gwaynn asked.

Emm’s mouth popped open for a second, as death began to back away. “He…he sleeps in the room by the back stairs,” she said through her tears. Gwaynn still stood above her with his hand and weapon raised, but she saw something in his eyes that told her he was not going to kill her, so she smiled her shy, sweet smile at him. Anger flared again, and he grabbed a large handful of thick soft hair, and pulled her to her feet and out the door of the bedroom. She screamed and had to walk bent over, but she managed to shuffle along quickly in order to keep her hair from being pulled out of her scalp. Gwaynn pulled Emm down the hallway and Krys followed them back to the far room. When they stopped Emm tried to straighten up, but Gwaynn jerked her hair hard, keeping his arm down so that she had to stay bent, staring at her bare feet.

The woman with the bare breasts still sat at the table with the bowl of fruit. Her eyes were still wide as Gwaynn motioned to the dead man on the bed.

“Fakir?” he asked, and she slowly nodded.

“Are you his woman?” He asked again with enough malice that she began to shake.

She ignored the question. “Please Sir,” she pleaded. “They make us do it…the thieving. They killed two that wouldn’t. Please Sir ever since the Deutz…”

“Silence!” Gwaynn yelled, his anger returning. Thunder boomed in the distance as if echoing his mood. “Are you his woman?” he asked again.

“Please Gwaynn,” Emm said, but yelped as he tugged at her hair once more.

“Yes, I was,” the woman said bravely, for she saw death in the young man’s eyes before her. She was very afraid, and the strong smell of blood in the room did not help to allay her fears. “But she’s done nothing wrong,” she added, nodding at Emm. “Fakir just bought her from her step father not two months ago.”

Gwaynn said nothing but his hold on Emm’s hair loosened slightly.

“Your name?”

“Neece Munger,” the woman whispered.

“Well Neece,” Gwaynn asked, calmly holding up one of his blades, “do you happen to know where we might find another set of these?”

Neece nodded and moving very carefully stood and went to a chest which sat at the foot of the bed. She opened it, inside were Gwaynn’s kali, along with his coin bag, plus a few hundred other coins.

Krys whistled as he moved forward to collect Gwaynn’s weapons for him. Truth was he feared for the woman before him, his friends temper flared quickly but he killed even faster. He removed the kali and the coin bag.

“What of the rest?” Krys asked.

“We take it,” Gwaynn answered, “for the war effort. Find something to put it in.”

He then turned back to Neece, who was quickly pulling a top over her head.

“You will live,” he said simply, “but you will leave town…today. I have friends here that will know if you do not do as I say. If you stay you die, just as Dot and Tod will die.”

Emm gasped, head still down, still looking at her own bare toes. Gwaynn looked down at her naked back but said nothing to her.

“And if I catch you thieving again, you will die very, very slowly,” he added.

Neece nodded and began to slip out of the room.

“Go out through the store,” Gwaynn said and she quickly changed direction and did as he commanded.

“What of me?” Emm asked, but Gwaynn just pulled her hair harder.

“Shut up,” he answered tersely, eating some of the fruit on the table, as Krys packed up the coins. When Krys was finished, Gwaynn pulled Emm behind him and outside to the top of the stairs. It was raining hard now and as the cold air hit her bare skin goose bumps rose prominently. Emm had her arms crossed over her breasts but had to spread them wider to keep her balance as they moved out into the rain and down the stairs.

Taylor was apparently still waiting for them, because he opened the door to the inn with his good hand as they approached and let them pass out of the rain. His other hand was now wrapped in the remnants of a blood soaked shirt. Gwaynn strode in quickly without stopping and Taylor followed behind Krys occasionally getting brief glimpses of the young woman’s naked backside which moved alluringly from side to side as she was pulled along by her hair. And though the little soldier between his legs no longer came to attention, he still found the sight of a young naked woman interesting enough. He wouldn’t let Maybel, his wife, catch him looking however.

Gwaynn stopped before the desk. “How long has she been with Fakir?” he asked Taylor as they came to a stop.

Taylor rubbed his chin, his eyes moving quickly over the girl’s naked body as if trying to memorize it, which for all accounts, he was.

“Couple of months maybe,” he answered and Gwaynn suddenly released Emm’s hair. She stayed bent over for several long moments before she realized she was free and straightened up. Her face was flushed with embarrassment to be naked before three men, and she quickly covered her breasts with one arm and her privates with the other hand. She glanced back at Krys, who was behind her. His eyes rose from her backside until he was looking into her eyes and he jumped like he was a kid caught with a stolen pie. She couldn’t help smiling at him despite her present predicament.

Taylor ogled her until Gwaynn reached out and boxed his right ear.

“Ow,” Taylor complained. “She’s from….”

“Odin,” she said. “Near Cape.”

“Yea, Odin,” Taylor agreed. “Her father came and sold her to Bunker, but he turned around and sold her to Fakir. Fakir took a fancy to her. Fakir’s a bad one,” he added and managed to pull his eyes from the naked girl to glance at the back door.

“Fakir’s dead,” Gwaynn said. “She’s yours,” he added shocking both the innkeeper and Emm.

Taylor licked his lips, eyes back on the girl, but then he thought of his wife. “Thank you Sir, but my tool don’t get sharp no more…” he answered a little wistfully, his eyes roaming over the soft but firm body displayed before him. “But maybe with her…” He added and completely missed the utter look of horror on the young woman’s face because of the simple fact that he never looked into it.

“She’s not for fucking,” Gwaynn snapped. “You’re to raise her as a daughter, a barmaid maybe, but not a whore.”

Taylor shrugged with a chuckle. “Just as well. The missus would’ve killed me quicker than you could manage.” He looked back at Emm. “You’re to explain all of this to her, are you not Sire?”

Gwaynn nodded, ignoring the sharp look he was now receiving from the girl. “Emm you may get dressed now,” he said. “Return promptly.” Then he turned to Taylor. “Go and get your formidable missus. We’ve wasted enough time.”

ǂ

Following behind, Tar Navarra was surprised at the speed that the girl was able to maintain. He expected to catch up with her within a day, but the large horse she was riding appeared to never tire. Still, he was gaining on her steadily, and soon she had to falter. Her bow was broken and discarded, and from what he had gleaned from the boy in Lynndon, she had left in quite a hurry. He believed she probably left without preparing properly for the journey ahead. Panic did that to people. She was traveling along the river, so water would be no problem for her, but food….that could become very troublesome. He could almost hear her stomach growling in the late afternoon air.

The rainstorm, which had passed nearly an hour ago, was only an annoyance. It washed away many of her tracks, but he did not slow down even though there were sometimes long gaps between any sign of her passing. He continued quickly, however, because it was obvious she was heading to Manse in order to cross the Scar. He had stopped only a couple of times to eat, drink and of course, the previous night to sleep. He did not hail the few barges that passed by on the assumption that the girl would have kept out of sight; not exactly knowing who it was working the river.

It was towards the middle of the afternoon when he spotted a group of soldiers riding close along the riverbank. His sharp eyes marked them while they were still nearly a mile away, but the group did not veer course and move to intercept him until they were much closer. He could plainly see the look of disappointment and fear written on their faces as they drew nearer. He moved directly to them.

“I’m tracking a girl, long red hair. She’s riding a large horse,” he said without preamble, doubting that they had come across her. Samantha would either be dead or with them if she had encountered them. Somehow, she had slipped past.

A large balding man, with a simple ring of dark hair that was quickly going gray rode in front of the group.

“We saw no one,” he said simply in a deep baritone voice. He eyed the Executioner nervously as he spoke.

“No one,” Navarra repeated his face flat and emotionless.

“No M’lord,” the man answered fidgeting in his saddle.

“What is your name Sergeant?”

Navarra watched with satisfaction as the man swallowed hard. “Blear,” he finally answered though they all could see he was loath to, but then he straightened and added with as much courage and dignity as he could muster. “Sergeant Hans Blear.”

Tar Navarra regarded him for a long moment. Sergeant Blear felt like a mouse caught directly in the stare of the cold, flat eyes of a snake.

“And Sergeant Blear,” Navarra began in what he felt to be his most dangerously reasonable voice, “what is your duty along the Scar?”

Sergeant Blear remained straight in the saddle. “We are to patrol the Scar.”

“And just what are you patrolling for?”

Blear shrugged. “Any unusual movement, either east or west. Possible counter strikes from the Massi, or a possible invasion from the Toranado.”

“The Toranado,” Navarra repeated without a hint of emotion, though inside he was seething. He had little doubt that the order was true, but it made little sense. Mastoc was a fool as were his Generals. “And what of the locals. Are they to have free passage?”

Blear shook his head. “No sir. It’s the King’s orders that the Massi are not to travel cross the Scar without papers. Trade may continue along the Scar River, and loggers may come and go from Manse, but we are to watch the Scar for any Massi citizens who may be on the run to the west.”

“Ah,” Navarra said as if making a great discovery. “But you saw no one recently in your travels along the Scar.”

“No Sir,” Blear answered his nervousness returning.

“Well, I am following a young girl,” Navarra said stressing the word ‘young’ for the Sergeant and his men. “The tracks of her horse are plain in the sand and mud along the Scar. She passed this way, and is perhaps a half-day ahead of me, perhaps not. She fled from Lynndon and is heading for Manse. How is it that you, whose job it is to watch the Scar for fleeing locals, did not spot her?”

Now more of the soldiers were fidgeting along with their Sergeant. “We…we saw no one,” he repeated. “Mayhap she passed us in the storm,” he added and Navarra too thought that this was likely, but he didn’t say as much.

“Perhaps,” he replied then decided he had wasted enough time terrorizing these soldiers.

“Will you ride all the way to Lynndon?”

“Yes, Sir,” Blear answered. “We stay for three days then travel back to Manse,” he added though the information was not sought after. Navarra waved him away.

“I killed four men on top of the Scar about half a league down from the bridge, Massi spies most likely,” he said not even bothering to try to impress them. “There is a way to them about a league past the supply store up top. Find them, and look for any sign of exactly who they were and then report it to your Captain. Tell him Tar Navarra wishes it brought to the General’s attention.”

“Yes…yes M’lord,” Blear said relief flowing over him as he realized he was not to be killed or even disciplined. Navarra began to move off, but called out behind him.

“And Sergeant, keep a keen eye on the Scar. If you pass another I am hunting I will have your head…and all those responsible.” He glared at all the soldiers in turn before finally swinging around in his saddle and continuing on with his pursuit of the Fultan girl.

ǂ

Samantha swung around, and there behind her, camped beyond a large boulder and beneath a solid slab of granite was a large man, dressed in a pair of long underwear. He was round in the middle, completely bald on top and he sported an enormous bushy mustache, which was just beginning to go gray. He was looking at her, his right eyebrow twitching as his gaze moved up and down her body, which was outlined nicely by her wet clothes. Behind him was a fire built in a small depression well back beneath an overhand, and placed on the surrounding rocks, as close to the fire as possible, lay his outer clothes. On the fire sat a pan of what looked to be black beans, mixed with, by the smell filling the air, bacon. Samantha’s stomach rumbled angrily and clenched so hard she nearly doubled over. Her eyes lingered on the food for a long time before moving to the bow leaning against the back wall of the shelter.

“I’m Cobb,” the man said, his eyes still moving about her body. He had not moved any closer. Sam was sure she would have fled if he had done so. Instead he smiled at her.

“You look hungry,” he added.

Samantha glanced back at his face for a brief moment before returning to the pan of beans. All of her thoughts were now completely on food as her stomach rumbled again.

“I am,” she finally answered, forcing herself to pull her eyes from the pan, and look back at the man confronting her.

“My name’s Cobb. I’m a trader,” he said with obvious pride, and he pointed past her down to the river. Sam turned and looked. There on the bank, she saw a large wooden boat, probably big enough that two men should be working it, but she saw only Cobb.

“I’m Sam,” she answered back, and he smiled at her again. She tried to smile back, but hunger was cruelly gripping her mid-section.

“You’re pretty,” Cobb said, “even a might more than Emm.”

Samantha frowned, and the sudden realization that Cobb was a bit simple finally came to her.

“You look hungry,” he stated once more.

“I am,” Samantha repeated, wishing he would just invite her to have some, but he just stood there looking at her. Finally he looked down at his feet.

“I’d like to have a go at you,” he said in a low voice.

“Wha…what?” Sam asked, though she was sure she had heard him correctly.

Cobb looked up and beamed at her. “I’m a trader. I want to have a go at you. You can have my food. We trade,” he added motioning back and forth between them, obviously very proud of himself for thinking of such a thing.

“A go at me?”

Cobb nodded. “I don’t get a go at anyone but whores,” he stated, just a little angry. “And they won’t let me have a go at Emm. Emm’s not for me. That’s what they say.”

Sam shivered, mostly because the wind on her wet clothes was making her cold, but also from the idea of letting Cobb have a go at her. She even pulled Bull’s head around to leave, but did not spur him on. She glanced back at the food, then again at the bow.

Cobb’s face brightened. “You want to have a go with me?” Cobb asked.

She shook her head. “No,” she answered and he looked crestfallen. “Could I have your bow? I’ll trade you a blanket for it,” she said hopefully.

Cobb frowned. “My bow…. for a blanket. No… no trade. You think Cobb is stupid. Cobb has lots of blankets, not worth a bow any day,” he added, clearly put off.

“I don’t think you’re stupid,” Sam answered hastily, her eyes moving back to the food as if they had a will of their own. She’d not eaten for two days now and had been on the move almost constantly. Hunger was quite literally eating at her brain, making it hard to think of anything else.

“A blanket for some food?” She put forth, though now without much hope. She knew she should leave, but still she sat there, and most shocking to her was the fact that in her hunger, she was actually considering ‘having a go with him.’

“No…no,” Cobb said clearly relishing his part as trader, and though at first she believed others may have taken advantage of Cobb because of his simple nature, now she was not so sure.

“Food…and the bow, for a go,” Cobb finally said, sweetening the deal. “You look nicer than Emm,” he added as if this might help woo her.

Sam thought for a moment…debating, then the reality of the situation thrust itself into the forefront of her thoughts. Was she actually considering letting this man…a stranger no less, be intimate with her? She could not believe it was true, but then her stomach clenched painfully again, obviously casting its vote. She was just as shocked when all at once; she slid from the saddle of her horse.

“Just one go,” she said even now not truly believing what she was doing, but going two days without food, and the prospect of going a third had a way of changing your mindset. She suddenly wished she’d eaten more in the briar but at the time she’d been too sick with worry. Thinking back she realized she’d only eaten two decent meals in the past week. She was not accustomed to going without and she was quickly losing weight and strength.

Cobb nodded vigorously. “One go,” he agreed and put out his hand to shake. She didn’t take it at first.

“And arrows,” she added making sure she was not going to get taken. Cobb frowned again.

“Cobb is no cheat,” he said indignantly. “What good is a bow without arrows?”

“Arrows then…and only one go,” she said and to her complete disbelief she saw herself reach out and shake Cobb’s hand, and it was then that a possible way out of this came to her. She allowed Cobb to pull her closer.

“May I see the bow first,” she began with a sweet smile. “It looks so big I may not be strong enough to pull it back.”

Cobb thought about it for a moment and then smiled back at her. “Yes…yes, Cobb is strong, but you look strong too,” he said and slapped her hard on the back before leading her around the fire and food, to the bow. Her thoughts were momentarily distracted by the sweet smell of bacon until he held out the bow for her to try. Sam forced herself to ignore the food, which was so very close, and collected the bow, then with an easy motion bent and picked up an arrow. She notched it and pulled it back as far as she could. Her arms were shaking, she was much weaker than she had suspected, but she managed to bring the point of the arrow around so that it lined up with Cobb’s midsection. He was smiling at her.

“See…see,” he said. “You are strong for such a little girl.” She continued to hold the arrow pointed at him, and finally his smile began to falter.

“I need your food,” Sam said, and began to back away from him toward the fire, but she made absolutely sure that her aim was still on him. She didn’t want to, but she would kill him if it came to that. But then his face fell, not into fear or anger, but into deep, deep sadness.

“Cobb, I can’t have a go with you,” she said trying to explain. “But I need your food and the bow. Won’t you help me?”

Cobb shook his head. “I need a go…please. You promised. We shook on it,” he answered still sad, and a little indignant.

“Cobb…” she began and then had to release the tension on the arrow. She could not hold it any longer and was afraid that it would be accidentally pulled from her grip. The smell of the food was really getting to her. Her stomach was now painfully clenching almost continuously, and she was beginning to feel faint.

“Please,” Cobb said before she could continue. “Cobb won’t hurt you. Cobb never hurts girls.”

Samantha studied him for a moment longer, then made up her mind and put down the bow. “I have to eat first,” she said, and Cobb beamed at her. His happiness seemed to permeate the entire camp, and she couldn’t help but smile back, though she was far from looking forward to their promised encounter. ‘What does in matter?’ She thought to herself. ‘My virginity is already gone.’ These thoughts left her as Cobb moved past and began to scoop out a helping of beans onto a tin plate. He held it out with a smile.

“Eat,” he said and she didn’t need a second invitation. She took the plate and squatted as close to the fire as she could. The first bite was so hot that she had to spit it back onto the plate when it began to burn her mouth. Cobb laughed, but turned around from where he was sitting and grabbed a canteen full of water. He handed it to her and she took it without a word. She followed the next bite up with a sip of water to cool it, and was sure she had never tasted anything so wonderful, not even the blackberries.

She ate the plate of beans just as quickly as she could, and felt immensely better. She was still far from satisfied, and as the beans cooled and her stomach began to fill she realized that they tasted, in fact, very good.

“These are excellent beans, Cobb,” She held the plate out for more, and Cobb grinned at her, nodding and filled her plate again, but when he was done, she placed the plate on a flat part on the rocky ground and walked to Bull.

Cobb immediately stood up behind her. She glanced back. “No tricking,” she said without a smile. She pulled off the saddle, then the blanket beneath. She patted Bull on the neck then turned back to the fire.

“Cobb, do you have a rope to hobble Bull?” She asked.

“Ummm,” Cobb said with a nod of his head and then he moved off down the path to his boat, still beached along the riverbank. She used the time while he was gone to strip out of her wet clothing. She flattened them out as close to the fire as she could without singeing them, so that they lay next to Cobb’s. She was just wrapping the blanket around her naked body when Cobb returned. She squatted down once more and took up her plate, completely unaware that her right leg was plainly visible up past her knee. Cobb however, was very aware of her soft white flesh and eyed it hungrily as she ate another plateful of delicious beans.

She ate much more slowly this time, trying to put off the inevitable. The sun had set, though the western sky still held a hint of light. Cobb, for his part, waited patiently for her to finish.

She was full when she spooned the very last of the bean juice into her mouth. She looked at the empty plate for a moment, then shyly up at Cobb. He was watching her with an intensity that made her uneasy.

“You won’t hurt me?” she asked again.

“No,” he said huskily, shaking his head. He stood and placed a few more pieces of driftwood on the fire, then turned to her. Samantha lay back on the rock and opened the blanket for his eyes. He stared at her a moment, then pulled down his long underwear.

“I don’t hurt girls,” he whispered, hovering over her, and surprisingly he did not. He moved slow and easy the entire time and only let out a small grunt as he finished. He rolled off of her breathing heavily. Samantha expected to have the overwhelming desire to wash herself like she did after the Executioner had taken her, but when he was done, all she felt was tired. Good to his word, Cobb was soon snoring softly at her back. Sam lay awake for a time, thinking of how much her life had changed these past days, and as the night grew colder she moved closer to Cobb’s large warm body and slowly drifted off to sleep.

ǂ

Gwaynn and Krys found the Lonogan Lumber Mill easily. It was a very large place built directly alongside the banks of the river, with stacks of unprocessed trees piled near a great open ended mill that housed enormous saws, some of which were powered by large waterwheels tucked into the Scar River. There were also dozens of two handed saws powered by men. The smell of freshly cut wood permeated the air as they entered the mill, walking on a soft layer of thick sawdust. They immediately attracted a great deal of attention, and more than a dozen cutters stopped what they were doing to observe the newcomers. However, the two were near the middle of the mill before an extremely large man approached them. The man was easily the largest person Gwaynn had ever met, even bigger than Karl. He was at least a full head taller than Krys, who was a tall young man, but it was the width of his shoulders and thickness of his neck, arms and wrists which truly made him massive. The man had long dark hair which was pulled back and secured with a leather thong behind his back.

The man eyed the two up as he walked toward them. “Looking for work?”

He asked without a smile. He seemed even bigger close up.

“No,” Gwaynn said, taking the lead. “Are you Lonogan Bock?”

The large man let out a bark of a laugh. “Not likely. Name’s Lee Brandt. I’m the foreman of the mill.”

He announced this with obvious pride and held out a hand to Gwaynn, who took it. Lee Brandt immediately began to squeeze…hard. It was his favorite technique, simple, straightforward and very effective. Those who sought Bock had to get through him, and he wasn’t about to let any young pup waltz in and disturb his boss, the greatest person alive in his estimation.

Gwaynn winched and bent over, his free hand going to his other wrist. Lee smiled and squeezed harder, watching as his victim bent down and forward. He waited for either the kicks to begin or for the youngster to fall to his knees in submission. He was ready to protect himself from the kicks, but Gwaynn did neither instead he slowly stood back up.

“Release me,” the young man demanded; his jaw tight from the pain.

Lee laughed and squeezed just a might harder, waiting for the kick.

It never came, instead the stranger tried to pull his hand from Lee’s. The big man smiled and his grip tightened further, but then in easy, practiced movements the young man pulled Lee’s arm straight, turned it slightly then stepped across his body to Lee’s right. Lee’s arm was now somehow twisted, but held straight. He felt the young man’s other hand against the back of his straightened elbow. The hand began to push against the joint, and to Lee’s surprise he was being forced to bend forward, then down to keep from having his arm snapped at the joint. He squeezed the hand in his grip harder, but still he was being forced downward, first to his knees, then his head and face were actually touching the sawdust on the floor. Belated he tried to strike out with his other hand, but his own body effectively blocked any such counter strike. Lee was face down in the dirt looking directly at the muddy boots of the young man who surprisingly had the upper hand. Lee grunted with pain as the force on his elbow continued. The strange young man began to ply greater and greater pressure to his elbow until Lee felt positive that it was very near breaking.

“Can you crush my hand before I snap your arm in two?” Gwaynn said evenly despite the pain pulsing from his injured hand. He stared directly into the face of the big man, who must have seen something deadly in the eyes of the younger one above him, because he immediately released Gwaynn’s hand.  Gwaynn had to force himself not to sigh with relief, but he did flex his injured hand several times. He kept hold of Lee Brandt’s elbow for a moment longer before finally releasing him and stepping away.  Lee did not know it, but at that moment he had never been so close to death, it would only take a slight error in judgment for the Black Horseman to reach out and take him. But to his credit, Lee made no error; he just simply stood up rubbing his arm and looking at the pair of young men who he’d obviously underestimated.

“Where’s Lonogan Bock?” Gwaynn asked again, his hand very close to his knife.

“Who’s asking?”

Gwaynn relaxed a bit. If the big man was talking he was not likely to attack again, but still he kept alert. There was now a small crowd around them, and their faces were not exactly friendly.

“My name’s Gwaynn,” he finally answered and was aware that Krys had bent over and with a smooth motion removed his kali from his bag. There were gasps from the crowd of men surrounding him, and a few even took a couple of steps back. Krys twirled the weapons in a mindless display that proved nothing of the fighting skills of those who performed them, but he knew it would impress the laymen of the group. It did.

“And this is my Weapons Master, Krys Logan,” Gwaynn added with a shake of his head at his friend’s antics.

“Weapons Master?” asked a voice from the right behind the circle of men. They parted immediately and let a middle-aged blond man walk through to join those in the center of the ring.

Gwaynn said nothing just turned to examine the new arrival. From the demeanor of the men around him, he gathered that this was at last Lonogan Bock. Bock was younger than he expected, only around thirty years of age, but had an air of command about him that left no doubt who led these men. He was tall, though only a bit taller than Krys, and was powerfully built, with a strong chest and bulky arms, but even he looked small next to Lee Brandt.

“Weapons Master?” Bock asked again. “It’s a term only royalty uses,” he added coming to a stop, then he glanced at Krys. “Kali have been outlawed by the Deutzani.”

“The Deutzani don’t rule me,” Gwaynn answered forcefully.

Bock laughed a quick short laugh but then sobered almost immediately. “Don’t they? And just what did you say your name was again?”

“My name is Gwaynn,” he said, noticing Bock’s eyes go wide. Bock gave Gwaynn a small negative shake of the head, and a glance like a warning. Gwaynn ignored it, but made ready as he finished. “Gwaynn Massi.”

Bock’s eyes flashed over Gwaynn’s right shoulder, but before anyone else could even react Gwaynn’s knife was out and with one quick step he buried it into the chest of the man Lonogan suspected. The man’s eyes grew wide, but he only had time to flinch before the knife pierced his heart. He slumped onto the soft floor without a sound. Gwaynn removed the knife and whirled back to Bock.

“Any others?” he asked. Bock shook his head, a look of awe spreading over his face. Several of the others including Lee Brandt backed away several steps, and there was a good deal of murmuring in the crowd.

“Only him,” Bock said and then frowned. “No one can move that fast,” he protested, but Gwaynn simply shrugged. He had moved quickly, but also knew that he was capable of moving much, much faster.

“I wish you wouldn’t have done that. We will have to cover his death,” Bock said, looking down at the dead man with an almost sad expression on his face.

Gwaynn shrugged. “Logging is dangerous work.”

“Yes,” Lonogan said with a sigh. “But I still wish you hadn’t done that.”

“He was a Deutzani spy,” Gwaynn answered.

“Yes, but we knew that about him. We may not know the next,” Bock said and then bowed low. The others remained where they were for a long moment, slow to catch on, until Lonogan added. “Welcome home, M’lord.” Soon they were all bowing, at least until Gwaynn put a stop to it. Lee Brandt was the last to rise, red-faced with embarrassment, and trying desperately not to catch Gwaynn’s eye.

“Nothing is more likely to get me killed than men fawning over me,” Gwaynn added insisting that they all treat him as one of their own.

“Afton Sath warned me that you were coming back to Massi,” Bock said as he nodded to Lee, who got the men back to work. “But I had a hard time believing him. He’s out looking for you now,” he added with a glance at Krys.

“May we eat something?” Gwaynn asked noticing the glance. “I’ve used up a bit of energy.”

“Of course,” Bock said with a smile and led them to a large set of stairs at one end of the mill. The stairs led upward to a loft which contained several rooms. Bock kept sneaking looks over at Gwaynn, and occasionally Krys. “You are not what I was expecting.”

ǂ

Samantha woke the next morning to the smell of frying bacon. She rolled over and looked at the fire and the pan resting in the hot coals. Cobb was nowhere in sight. She sat up and finding herself naked beneath the blanket remembered the night before, and what she had done, and all for a plateful of beans. She rubbed her forehead in dismay, then quickly stood and after wrapping the blanket tightly around her body, moved to the far side of the fire to check her clothes. Her shirt was dry and her skirt was nearly so. She looked about for Cobb, but still did not see him, so she removed the blanket and dressed as quickly as possible. She finished and was turning the bacon when Cobb returned, coming up the rocky path, his hat in his hands, and in the hat were half a dozen eggs. He moved carefully, but nearly tripped as he looked up at her and smiled. After that he kept a closer eye on the path and did not look at her again until he was very near the fire.

“Eggs!” he said holding them out to her, a large smile on his face.

Sam couldn’t help but smile back, though she was feeling slightly used and humiliated; much to her surprise however, she still did not feel dirty. She leaned forward and took a peek in the hat.

“Eggs,” she replied. “Where did you get eggs?”

Cobb frowned at her as if she was the simple one. “I’m a trader,” he answered as if this were the answer to all worldly troubles.

After the previous night Sam had to agree. “And a good one,” she said reaching up and taking a couple of eggs. She cracked them into the pan. The bacon grease popped and sizzled as Cobb placed the hat on the ground next to her, beaming at the compliment.

They ate breakfast, which to Sam, easily topped the beans from the previous night, but when they were finished a sense of urgency suddenly struck her and she stood looking about for Bull. He was nowhere in sight.

“Cobb, where’s Bull?”

Cobb was busy cleaning the pan with gritty dirt, removing as much of the grease as he could. He nodded toward the river. “Drinking,” he answered. “Cobb gave him grain. He’s a big horse…hungry horse,” he added still smiling. “Come I will show you.”

He led the way down the path and there, by the large boat was Bull, but he was no longer drinking, instead his nose was in a feedbag. He raised his head, chewing contentedly and watched as Sam and Cobb moved down the hill toward him. Sam was overwhelmed with gratitude. She placed a hand on Cobb’s arm as they hit the sandy soil at the bottom of the hill.

Cobb glanced down at her hand, and suddenly sobered. “Will you come with me?” he asked, suddenly shy.

Sam looked at him, not wishing to hurt him, but having no choice. “No Cobb. I’m being chased by an Executioner.”

Cobb’s eyes grew wide.

“You know what an Executioner is then?”

Cobb shook his head. “A bad man,” he affirmed.

Sam nodded back. “A very bad man. A man who kills people.”

Cobb looked at her for a long moment. “Cobb would take good care of you,” he said with such sincerity that she had to smile at him.

“I know you would, but the Executioner would kill you…and me.”

He considered this for a moment.

She looked up at the large, simple man. “When you leave Cobb, don’t stop for anyone. Keep going; keep in the middle of the river. If you meet anyone, anyone riding alone, just keep going,” she said. Cobb nodded, then went to his boat and began to fill two saddlebags with food, and other essentials for traveling across the Plateau. When he was finished he grabbed the feedbag and led Bull and Samantha back up the hill to the camp. He quickly saddled Bull, something which would have taken Samantha at least twice as long and then he kicked the coals of the fire apart with his boots, covered them with dirt and retrieved the bow and arrows from the back wall. He handed these to Sam.

“Cobb is strong, but not too smart. He would kill me…and you,” he said simply, looking down at her. Sam was thankful that he was not so simple as to be able to think he could take on an Executioner. She looked into his face, wondering how she could have ever been frightened of him. He was so open and honest, utterly without guile. She took his hand and leaned forward to kiss him on the cheek, his bushy mustache scratching her fair skin.

“Thank you, Cobb.”

“You and Bull have food now…in the bags,” he said quickly, then as if not knowing what else to say he began to move back down the hill to his boat.

“Remember what I said,” Sam called after him. “Don’t stop for anyone. He may be close behind. Cobb raised his hand in acknowledgement, but did not stop or turn around. Sam smiled to herself, then struggled up onto Bull and moved up higher and onto the Scar Plateau.

XVII

Lonogan Bock, on horseback, followed along apprehensively as three of his largest wagons rolled slowly across the bridge leading to the Plateau above. Each empty wagon had six horses pulling it, and though the horses had an easy time of it going this direction, on the way back, loaded with freshly cut logs, they would need all of their strength. Two horses were tied to the rear of the middle wagon and followed along amiably. They were the only clue that the two young men who actually drove the wagon were not exactly who they appeared to be. If the Deutzani guarding the bridgehead became suspicious Bock would just claim to be trading out horses for his scouts and trappers. If that failed he had enough coin to turn their heads. Bribery and black marketers thrived under the new system of rule, and any man who wished to be successful in a business soon learned who could be persuaded to look the other way for a few pence.

But the guards at the bridge just waved the party on without at a second glance, after all, the Deutzani needed the trade; as conquerors the tax income was theirs by right. They would only be undermining themselves to stand in the way of commerce. The local governor knew such things, but it did not keep him from growing rich on extortion…just not rich enough to attract the attention of King Arsinol.

Bock watched the two new young men handle the team as they reached the foot of the long hill which would eventually lead to the flat Plateau above. He studied Gwaynn very closely. The boy had determination, strength and resolve, and these were not attributes he’d been told to expect. Afton Sath, his commander now for nearly twelve years, described the young prince as talented, but soft, with feelings as sensitive as any girl’s. In fact, Sath had mentioned several times that he had wished it had been Gwynn who had survived, truly believing that she was the stronger of the two.

But after Gwaynn’s encounter with Lee Brandt, Bock was forced to reevaluate his preconceptions. It was something he continued to do the entire day yesterday as he tried to talk his prince out of moving up on the Plateau and chasing foolishly after a party of Executioners. Bock was surprised when Gwaynn had asked about them, but he told what he knew, that they had entered Manse nearly a week prior, but had since left, though when, he could not be sure. Word had it that they were on their way to Koshka. He never would have believed that these two young men were actually chasing after Executioners or he would not have been so free with his information. He wanted the two to hold up and wait for Sath to return from Cape, but Gwaynn would hear none of it.

“He can find us just as well at Koshka,” Gwaynn had said and even intended on crossing the Scar River on his own. It was all Bock could do to convince him into staying the night and leaving with a party at first light. The young prince was impatient, and apparently reckless, not desirable qualities in a leader, but certainly not the simpering, soft, coward he had come to expect. But it was when Gwaynn asked about Tod Ogden and a whore named Dot that Bock began to realize with just whom he was dealing.

“You know them?” Gwaynn had asked.

Bock nodded. “Tough bunch. Led by Fakir, not someone you want to get tangled with,” he advised.

“Fakir’s dead, along with several of his men, and a few of his women,” Gwaynn said without emotion. “Tod and Dot though seemed to lose heart as we were dealing with the others and fled. I want them dead.”

Bock stared at Gwaynn his mouth slightly open. “Dead?”

“Dead,” Gwaynn repeated. “Can you get it done for me?”

Bock nodded. “Fakir’s dead?”

Gwaynn shook his question away with obvious impatience. “There are two others, a whore named Neece…she is to leave Manse and not return. The other is Emm. She is now under the care of the innkeeper Taylor. She is not to be harmed. If she returns to her whoring ways, however, she dies.”

Bock studied Gwaynn and Krys in silence. “I will see to it,” he finally answered, thinking to himself, that whatever Gwaynn used to be; he was no longer soft, far from it.

Once they reached the top of the Plateau and were a little more than a mile away from Manse, the wagons pulled to a stop, and Gwaynn and Krys climbed down. They mounted their fine horses without a word. Bock rode up to Lee Brandt, who was driver of the first wagon.

“Head for the Astoria forest lands,” he ordered and then glanced back at the two young men preparing to leave. “When you return, remain in Manse until Master Sath arrives. Send him on to the Hawser Ranch. I will try to keep these two there.”

Lee smiled at his boss, who he respected above all other men. “Good luck with that job,” he answered then snapped the reins and turned the team until they were heading nearly due west. The other wagons fell into place, one rider from the last wagon hopping up into the middle wagon to take over for Krys and Gwaynn as Bock rode over to join the two young men.

“If we head southwest we should reach Koshka before nightfall tomorrow. There’s a ranch about three miles southeast we use when hauling lumber from Mayfield,” he said swiftly so as not to be interrupted.

“We?” Gwaynn asked without smiling, though inside he was grateful for the guide, and the possibility of sleeping once again with a roof over his head. Despite the fact that he was a prince of this land, he did not know it as he should. He had never been on the Plateau until today and he marveled at its stark flatness. He had a hard time believing that most of the lumber was taken from such a barren landscape; of course he knew that the great forests grew in the shadows of the Scar Mountains which were now visible in the distance.

Bock nodded at him, very serious. “I thought I would accompany you.”

“You mean keep us in sight until Afton Sath arrives.”

Bock shrugged. “As you like, but I know the country. The Deutzani have a garrison both at Colchester and Mayfield, maybe three to four hundred cavalry each. For the most part this is their only presence on the western Plateau. I know their patrol patterns, what roads they use and which they tend to avoid. The Massi plains have been conquered, but the Plateau is as wild as ever, even your father never fully tamed the locals who live here.”

Krys frowned at the man. “The Plateau Massi have always been loyal to the King,” he protested. His years living at the very edge of the Scar had taught him as much, and though the people from above were an independent and sometimes unruly lot, they were never considered to be disloyal to either King or country.

“Fair enough,” Bock answered, “but only after hundreds of years of just rule.”

“Come then,” Gwaynn said. “Show us the way…and if you are to ride along,” he added with a hint of a smile. “You must keep an eye out for Executioners…but remember one thing, Navarra is mine.”

Bock started at the name of the Executioner and Weapons Master to the Deutzani King. He looked into Gwaynn’s face for a sign that he was jesting, but his face was completely serious. Bock nodded, wondering if the young prince truly believed he was a match for the infamous swordsman. Surely not. Master Sath had spoken of Gwaynn’s talent, and though the training abilities of the Tars of Noble Island were renowned, one did not go from a dandy to a wolf in a year and a half. It just wasn’t possible. He glanced at Krys, the Weapons Master, as they trotted along, looking for signs of doubt in his face. He saw none.

ǂ

About twenty miles from Manse, Tar Navarra completely lost the girl’s tracks. He traveled nearly two more miles without a sign before turning back with disgust. He was tempted to ride on to Manse and sleep in a bed for once. He was almost positive that the girl was on her way to the town, but some deeper instinct told him this thought was wrong, and over the years he had learned to trust his instincts, especially when it came to tracking those who ran from death. And so he slowly retraced his steps, guiding Chaos down closer to the river in hopes of catching sight of a print in the mud along the bank. He moved slowly when the river widened, the current slowed and the water grew shallow but spotted nothing, and in disgust was about to turn back when the river deepened. The current appeared strong and Navarra thought it unlikely that the Fultan girl would have dared to cross here but then he happened to look to the far side and caught sight of a deep impression. He stared at the spot for a several moments, while his mount drank. The depression was obviously made when a river boat was pulled up and out of the water. He looked for any sign of prints left by a horse. In the end, the distance across was too great, so with a curse he coaxed Chaos into the water and together they made their wet way to the far bank.

He immediately knew that the crossing had been worth the discomfort he now felt. Horse tracks were plainly visible, large tracks. It was her; she had crossed over sometime the previous afternoon. Despite himself, he was impressed. The girl was nearly a day ahead of him. She was now traveling faster, putting more and more distance between them, at least he thought so until he came across the camp and beyond that a new, fresher set of tracks. No, she was less than a half a day ahead. She had foolishly stopped to early for the night, and apparently got off to a late start. Navarra smiled to himself and moved farther up the steep hillside until finally he reached the large, flat expanse which was the Plateau. He looked around at the low brush and hard flat surface of the land surrounding him and his spirits soared. This type of terrain made for very easy tracking. He would be able to pick up his speed and still follow her trail with relative ease.

He pulled a piece of jerked beef from a saddlebag and chewed on it thoughtfully as he followed her tracks to the southwest. He smiled inwardly, confident that he would have her by tomorrow afternoon, earlier if she was foolish enough to dally again.

ǂ

Bock had not expected to come across the party of Executioners until maybe Koshka, probably later, hopefully never. Chasing after a large group of highly trained fighting men was one thing, actually catching them was another. Bock was a well trained soldier himself, but had seen enough of fighting and death to know that nothing in battle was certain. He’d seen good men fall to a lesser opponent for a myriad of unfathomable reasons, an untimely slip, a lapse in concentration, or just plain bad luck. Warfare was seldom fair. In fact, a good commander did his best to see that it was war-unfair, because of course, the dead could not complain, which left only the living to tell the tales of the glory of battle. And if the glorious end was that your opponent clumsily fell and struck his head on a rock…well what story could not be embellished.

So it was an unpleasant surprise when only half way to Koshka, along the shores of Wren Lake, they came across a group of soldiers. It was late in the afternoon and moving quickly toward evening, though there was still plenty of light as summer drew closer. Bock’s first instinct was to move off away from the lake and men. Gwaynn, however, stopped his mount and removed his kali from his pack. Krys followed suit and then they turned and headed straight toward the soldiers. Bock, with a feeling of trepidation, followed. It was not until they were quite close that the black capes with red trim, the trademark of the Executioners, became plainly visible on several. Bock’s heart skipped a beat as they moved ever closer dreading the moment when the group up ahead would spot their approach. The group was confident and apparently posted no sentry, most were milling about a large fire, but there were some who were swimming in the nearby lake. The soldiers were still not aware of the approaching riders and Bock found their lack of caution disgusting. But as they drew nearer, Bock realized that along with the eight Executioners there were also several soldiers, three or perhaps four. He could not get a sure count while everything was in motion, but it was plain that their little trio would be heavily outnumbered.

“M’lord,” he whispered, growing alarmed that they were still moving forward.

“Gwaynn, if you please,” Gwaynn answered and gave a reassuring glance to his new friend. “Steady…follow our lead.” He added, but Bock’s mind was in turmoil. ‘Follow his lead…straight to death and hell,’ he thought, but made no comment.

They were only a few hundred feet from the camp when the Executioners finally became aware of their approach, and while they did not appear to be unduly alarmed, several of them did pull their weapons from their sheaths. Much to Bock’s relief Gwaynn pulled his horse to a stop some fifty feet from the nearest soldier, now all but those who were swimming had turned to watch their approach. Gwaynn dismounted, as did Krys, and together the two of them began to walk toward the crowd of enemy. Bock climbed from his horse and followed though he was already nearly twenty feet behind them. The Executioners were interested but still showed no true concern, after all it was only three men, and the newcomers were approaching without stealth or signs of unease.

Gwaynn raised his hand in greeting, smiled and moved within a few paces of the nearest before calmly drawing his kali, and rushing in to attack. Krys was a split second behind him, but Bock stopped where he was and watched with utter disbelief. He had not fully realized that an attack was imminent. He had left his sword back on his horse and only carried four throwing knives on his person. He hesitated, not knowing whether he should go back for his main weapon or if such a delay would be disastrous, so for the first few moments he did nothing but stand and watch.

His two young companions moved like nothing he had ever witnessed before, and he’d been fortunate enough to watch Master Sath fight on numerous occasions. Sath was by far the most gifted fighter with the sword or kali he had ever had the privilege to watch, at least until now. Next to these two, Master Sath looked like a gifted, but old man. They made him look stiff and slow. Gwaynn and Krys were like light itself, and before he could even register it Gwaynn had relieved one man of his head and another of his arm, and Krys slightly behind had skewered a man through the throat. They moved with such ease and grace that it appeared that they knew how their opponents would counter before they actually made move to do so. What was truly remarkable to Bock was the fact that even in the midst of the fighting, the chaos of twirling deadly blades, neither youth seemed to be hurried in the least. They seemed to move from place to place as if choreographed.

Another had fallen to Gwaynn’s blade before the man who had earlier lost an arm suddenly, piercingly, began to scream and thrash about. The men swimming turned and saw the ongoing battle and rushed from the water completely naked. Bock’s hesitation finally ended and he rushed around the fight heading toward the men emerging from the water, figuring that even with only four throwing knives he could hold off three naked men. He was dimly aware that Krys had downed another while Gwaynn was locked up, battling an Executioner with a bit more skill, at least the man wasn’t quite so quick to die at any rate. Another soldier was retreating from the lethal pair of fighters and spotted Bock, apparently weaponless moving around the main fight. He instantly changed course to intercept. Bock was aware of him and quickly withdrew a knife and threw, though he knew the distance was probably too great, he just hoped it would put off the advancing soldier.

As soon as the knife left his hand he knew it was low and a bit to the left, but the panicked soldier actually dodged into its path and it caught him just below the right hip. He went down, rolled on his back, crying out, eyes only for his wound as Bock moved past him.

The men from the lake, naked as they were, appeared to be no threat at first, but one raced to a boulder near the waters edge and produced a bow. Bock began to run forward, knowing that if an arrow was notched it could spell trouble for his two companions, but more so for himself, for he was the closest and the one moving in the archer’s direction.

Bock prided himself on his ability to throw knives. It was a talent he constantly honed in and around the mill, throwing at various targets from many distances. But practice against targets that neither moved nor attacked back was utterly different from making a throw when your life truly counted on it. He threw at the man fumbling with the bow, because notching an arrow under duress was also not the easiest thing to do. The knife flew low once again, but this time comically so, and lodged itself into the sand barely half way to the intended target. The miss gave the naked man with the bow courage, and he finally managed to set his arrow. Bock threw again, which started high, but as the man stood, preparing his weapon, the knife caught him in the left eye. He fell backwards without a sound. The other pair of naked men stopped in their tracks and looked down at their dead friend; both were horrified at the sight of the blood and gore oozing down the side of his sandy face.

Bock walked toward them. “Hold!" he commanded and the two remaining men stood completely still, all their attention remained on their dead friend. Bock knew he would have to bluff, having only one knife now at his disposal, so he moved confidently forward and bent to retrieve his embarrassingly short first throw when he reached the knife. He immediately felt better for the two, and without pausing he continued on.

“On your knees,” he barked. The two glanced at him then looked over his shoulder, but something there must have deflated them, because they dropped down in the sand together. Bock continued ahead and ripped the bow from the dead man’s grip then picked up a bundle of arrows.

“Move and you die,” he told the pair and turned back to see if he could help his young friends. Gwaynn was still locked up with his able opponent, while everyone else was down, including Krys. At first Bock could not locate the young Weapons Master among the dead and dying. He ran half the distance, then stopped, notched an arrow and guided it along the path of the enemy Executioner. He watched for less than a minute before realizing that Gwaynn was in no real danger, at least considering the fact that he was facing a skilled opponent with two razor sharp swords.

“Navarra?” Gwaynn asked, hardly out of breath. “Where is he?”

The Executioner remained silent, gasping from his exertions, trying desperately to hold off the next blows that rained his direction and only now realizing that he was being toyed with.

Gwaynn stepped back several steps. The man in front of him used the respite to lean over, hands on his knees, to catch his breath. Gwaynn looked quickly around and spotted Lonogan at his back, bow at the ready.

“See to Krys,” he said, nodding to his right.

“I’m fine,” Krys answered back. “Just a bit indisposed.” Nevertheless, Bock moved over to him, passing several dying men as he did so. Krys had taken a kali through the back of his right thigh from a downed man he’d ignored while engaged with another. The blow surprised the young man from Noble who’d cried out but he refused to go down himself. Luckily the man he was fighting moved forward to take advantage of the injury. Had the man remained patient, the injury and lack of mobility could have been Krys’ undoing, but the fool rushed to attack and Krys was able to kill him with relative ease. Krys did not mourn him and with great effort limped back to the man on the ground, and despite his pleading, Krys ended his life with a quick slash from his kali. He then stumbled and dropped to the sand.

“It’s bad,” Krys said softly to Bock as he knelt beside him, “but I believe it missed the artery.”

Bock studied the wound a moment then nodded. There was bleeding, but he also believed it too close to the inner part of the thigh to threaten the femoral artery, which  when severed, always meant death.

“Lie still,” Bock answered and turned his attention back to Gwaynn who was still standing a distance from his panting opponent.

“Your name Sir?” Gwaynn asked, starting to circle once more. The man did not answer at first and just circled with the youth.

“Lindsay,” he finally managed. “Sergeant Lindsay.”

“I commend your skill Sergeant,” Gwaynn added, then launched the fiercest attack Bock had ever witnessed. He was shocked to see first one kali, then another fly from the Sergeant’s hands. Gwaynn retreated again, and for a moment just twirled his kali in a menacing way while the Sergeant stared at his empty hands…stunned.

“Where is Tar Navarra?” Gwaynn asked again, this time moving forward and resting his blade on the neck of the man who was now utterly defeated.

The Sergeant shook his head. “I don’t know,” he admitted. “He is behind us, should have caught up by now.”

Gwaynn was silent for a moment considering. “Where were you heading?”

The Sergeant shrugged. “Looking for Afton Sath, but we’ve been doing that for over a year.”

“Will Navarra head for the Plateau?”

Sergeant Lindsay nodded, at least until his head flew from his shoulders, mid nod.

Gwaynn did not bother to watch the man die instead he turned and immediately spotted a naked runner, fleeing back to the north along the shoreline.

“Watch him!” he yelled, pointing to the man still kneeling by the lake. Bock waved, watching Gwaynn run to his horse as if he had not been involved in anything strenuous recently. Bock then set about slaying all those suffering from mortal wounds. In between killings he watched the race unfold. The running man was looking back every so often, moving farther and farther away, but once Gwaynn was on horseback he caught up easily. The naked man died quickly, and by the time Gwaynn rode back to kneel by his friend, Bock had finished his grisly duty.

“I’m sorry,” Gwaynn said to Krys, clearly panicked. “I should not have toyed with the Sergeant.”

Krys shook him off. “He needed to be questioned. It was my own fault for idly passing someone not yet dead.”

Gwaynn looked down at the wound and grew pale. The kali was still imbedded in his thigh.

“Should we remove it?” he asked, looking to Bock for the answer. He was skilled at killing, but knew his knowledge of saving a life was lacking.

Bock shook his head. “Not until we can get him some place he may truly rest. We need to get to the Hawser ranch, just southeast of Koshka. I’ll ride and fetch one of the wagons,” he added, already standing and moving back to his horse. He stopped after a few paces. “Keep him still and well watered. I should be back before morning.” He started to move once more then stopped again. “What of him?” he asked, pointing to the young man still kneeling on the ground.

“I’ll see to him,” Gwaynn answered coldly, and stood. “Rest easy,” he said to Krys, and began to move toward the beach as Bock hurried off after a wagon.

The naked man was shaking, cold and obviously very afraid. He looked young, possibly younger than Gwaynn himself. Gwaynn’s intention was to kill the man quickly but his youth surprised him.

“Executioner?” he asked. The Deutzani looked up at him with dark hair and dark frightened eyes and shook his head.

“I’m…I’m a soldier.”

“A soldier in my country,” Gwaynn answered his anger rising again, but something in the boy’s expression stayed his hand.

“Your name please?”

The young man looked hopefully up at Gwaynn and again something was familiar about his expressions. “Van,” the soldier said. “Van Valencia.”

Gwaynn jerked slightly and then laughed. It was something Van did not expect.

“Do you know Vio, Vio Valencia of Noble?”

Van’s face brightened in surprise. “She’s my cousin, her mother and mine are sisters,” the soldier answered and for the first time since meeting this wickedly skilled fighter felt as though he might survive.

“Seems it is your lucky day,” Gwaynn added, realizing he could not knowingly kill one of Vio’s relations, at least not a close relation. “You will leave my country, and never return,” he said.

Van nodded, but would have agreed to anything at that moment.

“But first I would like you to meet one of Vio’s good friends.”

ǂ

True to his word, Bock rode up in a wagon at perhaps two in the morning. Krys was in a bad way by then, in shock, though the blood loss was minimized by leaving the weapon in place.

They loaded him carefully on the wagon with the help of Van, who was now dressed. Bock was surprised the young Deutzani soldier was still alive, and cast a questioning look at Gwaynn, who shrugged.

“He’s a cousin to a close friend,” he explained.

“A Deutzani…a close friend?”

Gwaynn just shrugged again. “Let’s get moving,” he said and climbed up next to Bock, who would be driving the wagon. Gwaynn glanced back at Van, who was sitting next to Krys, and eyeing him with more worry than Gwaynn would have thought possible a few hours ago. The two had hit it off splendidly and exchanged a number of stories about Vio.

“Watch him close,” Gwaynn ordered, “and make sure his wound does not begin to bleed again.”

The ride to the Hawser Ranch was long, dark and at times bumpy since they went by direct route to avoid Koshka and any questions a man wounded with a kali was likely to garner. They were forced to travel overland, since the only road to the Hawser’s was through Koshka, but they made very good time and arrived just before midmorning the following day. Krys was completely out when the lifted him from the wagon and carried him into the main house. Rue Hawser and his wife Carmen worked the ranch with their two sons Olney and Brace, all of them fiercely loyal to Afton Sath and therefore the Massi. Rue and Carmen immediately took charge of Krys, carefully removing the weapon, cleaning the wound and then bandaging their young patient, who took it all with the stoicism of the unconscious. They finally emerged from the sick room nearly an hour later to find Gwaynn up and pacing. Bock was dozing in a chair and Van was snoring softly on a small sofa.

Gwaynn turned to them with obvious concern. Rue smiled, but it was Carmen who held up a hand.

“He will be fine,” she said. “As you suspected the artery was missed. The kali has been removed, and the wound cleaned, as long as he doesn’t contract an infection he should make a full recovery…I’m sorry I didn’t catch your name,” she added. In the rush to help the wounded man introductions had been missed.

“Gwaynn Massi,” he answered. “I am in your debt.”

Carmen blinked and Rue just stood open mouthed, suddenly alert, though a moment before he was weary from the exacting work of stitching up Krys’ wound.

“Gwaynn…Massi?” Carmen asked growing pale. “M’lord?”

“Yes,” Gwaynn answered. “I am in your debt.”

Later that night, Gwaynn endured one last dream of his mother and Gwynn hanging by the scaffold, stomachs ripped open, innards writhing on the ground, two dogs feasting. The surrounding Deutzani soldiers laughed as they watched the canines eat and then Gwynn suddenly seemed to notice Gwaynn and looked up.

“Food for dogs,” she whispered, and dissipated as Gwaynn bolted upright, breath coming in gasps. It was a long time later before he was able to relax enough to fall back to sleep.

ǂ

Samantha found a road and turned to the southwest away from Manse and came across the bodies just before nightfall, a full day after Gwaynn and his party had departed the area. Carrion birds had already arrived at the scene. Finding so much death and so close to dark, completely unnerved her. She was tired and wanted to make camp but was very afraid that the dead men would draw unwanted attention to the area. She moved on and picked up her pace. She patted Bull with sympathy, knowing that he was also getting very tired despite his prodigious strength. She made maybe five more miles before night closed in, very dark, clouds covering the moon, but instead of stopping where she was she moved off the road to the west nearly a half a mile before finally dismounting. She was very sleepy and moved clumsily in the dark, but she took the time to unsaddle Bull and rub him down despite her own exhaustion. Only after he was hobbled and happily grazing did she lay out her blanket and drop down on the hard packed ground. She lit no fire, and fell into a deep sleep without even eating.

She didn’t wake until Bull blew horse spittle and snot all over her face. She sat up quickly, sputtering and disoriented.

“Good morning to you,” she said, wiping the mucus from her face. The sun was up high, nearly an hour above the horizon, and she cursed. She rose and from her pack took an apple which she fed to Bull, who ate it quickly and happily. She saddled him and then struggled up onto his back and started off. As she rode she rummaged through the bag of food from Cobb and found two hard biscuits. Sam ate them dry and made her way cautiously back to the road. There was still no one in sight and as she looked back toward the lake she could see only a few birds circling high overhead in the distance.

Near noon she topped a rise; though she hadn’t been aware that she was even traveling uphill, so gradual was the incline. Below, maybe two miles away, she saw the town of Koshka, and beyond the town, a thick line of trees which extended in either direction as far as the eye could see; the great Scar Forest. She looked back to the town with a frown, trying to decide whether or not just to bypass it. In the end the look of the forest troubled her enough that she decided to risk at least the edge of the town and maybe find someone to give her some information about the way ahead. Even so she still left the road and skirted well around to the west. She would approach Koshka from the south in case she met any soldiers bent on chasing her, that way with luck she could flee away from the Executioner and possibly loose any pursuers in the deep forest.

The trip around took time. It was nearly two hours later when she approached the outskirts. The town was not overly large, and only had perhaps two dozen buildings; the largest stood in the center of town and looked to be three stories. The first building she came to was a granary. Sam stopped and tied Bull’s reins to a hitching post along the wooden walkway. She saw no sign of any soldiers and only a few people sat outside, down near the center of town. She was far enough away to feel relatively safe and those visible did not seem to be paying her any attention. She slowly moved around to the door leading into the granary, trying to appear normal; the smell of chaff was strong inside the dark interior.

“Hello,” she called, though not too loudly. No one answered so she moved farther inside. The darkness deepened.

“Hello,” she said again, this time a bit louder, but there was still no answer. She turned back around to the door, and there framed against the bright sun was a figure peering inside.

“What the hell do you want?” a harsh voice called. “Get the hell out of my grain. What are you doing walking all over it?”

“I…I’m sorry,” Samantha said flustered. She moved quickly to the doorway, blinking against the glare. Blocking her way was a very small, very wizened old man. She couldn’t even guess at his age. His face was a maze of wrinkles, covered in short white hairs, maybe two or three days of stubble. How he could shave at all and not cut himself with such wildly irregular skin was a wonder to her.

“Who are you?” the old man barked much too loudly for her peace of mind, and she held up her hands to try and quiet him.

“My name…is Sam…Samantha Fultan.”

“Don’t know you,” the old man protested. He pushed roughly past her and went inside. She wanted to follow, but remained where she was, and was rewarded by his quick return.

“You still here? What the hell do you want?” He barked at her once again.

Samantha’s anger flared and she stepped in front of the little man. She towered over him by nearly a head.

“I need to find someone,” she said as he tried to push her out of the way again. She gripped his arm.

“Please,” she said in a softer voice. “I’m looking for my Uncle, Afton Sath.”

The old man stopped in his tracks.

“Afton Sath,” he repeated loudly and she winched.

“Shhh,” she said.

“Shhh…shhhhh. Why shhhh?” He demanded.

“Are there any soldiers here?”

“Soldiers?” he asked loudly. “Hell, there aren’t no soldiers here,” he added. “And why didn’t you say you was kin to Master Sath.”

“You know of him?”

The old man looked at her as if she was someone to be pitied.

“Well of course I know him. Who doesn’t?” he barked, and moved around to the back of the building. She followed along behind.

“You need to head out to the Hawser place,” he said, grabbing a bucket and moved back the way he had just come, passing her and heading out into the street.

“Where’s the Hawser place?”

He stopped to look at her again. “You simple?” he asked, and when she shook her head he just sighed.

“You take the Hawser road…” He noticed her blank stare. “You go to the middle of town and take the road going east. Even you can’t miss it. It’s the only road in town ‘cept for the one yo’r standing on. Master Sath is always visitn’ the Hawsers. They can put you in touch.”

“Thank you,” she said grabbing his hands, suddenly bursting with excitement. “Thank you,” she repeated and without thinking she kissed him on the forehead. The old man looked at her, and at first she thought he was going to scream at her. But he smiled and though his face was old, his eyes were young again. He nodded.

“Take care…what’d you say your name was again?”

“Sam,” she replied moving back to Bull.

“Sam,” he repeated and even waved to her as she rode by.

The town had suddenly taken on a wonderful new glow, and for the first time in nearly two weeks she began to think that she might truly be safe. She felt elated and hopeful, at least until she reached the Hawser road, for there on the far side of town was a rider, dressed all in black. She cried out involuntarily at the shock of seeing the Executioner once again, and though he was too far away to make out any of his features, she clearly heard his triumphant laugh as he spurred his horse into a gallop. Samantha didn’t wait, and turning up the Hawser road, she thundered away on Bull. Hope and elation had fled; fear and resignation had come to roost, for she knew Bull had no hope of outrunning the sleek mount belonging to the man pursuing her.

XVIII

The Hawser boys took to Van right away. Though he was Deutzani, he clearly did not have the temperament of a soldier, and everyone believed him when he admitted to being conscripted.

“Not so much by the army and King, as my father,” Van explained. “He never did approved of me, or believe I would ever become a man, at least not one who would amount to anything. So when my older brother Viktor joined the cavalry, father thought it would be a good idea if I joined up with him…I’m not much good on a horse though.”

Restless, Gwaynn was out cutting wood as he remembered the boy’s tale…the boy. As it turned out, Van was not quite a year older than he, but somehow Gwaynn felt much, much older. He sympathized with Van, and under different circumstances thought he would have turned out much the same. His early years were strewn with ripe disappointments for his father, but luckily for Gwaynn, he had two older brothers, both rough and tumble, for his father to dote on. At the thought of his father, Gwaynn shook his head with a rueful smile. He wondered what King Arnot would think of his youngest son now. He would be surprised, no doubt, and yes, he believed his father would be proud, but Gwynn… He didn’t like to think of Gwynn. What would she make of all his killing? In his youth it was Gwynn’s affection, Gwynn’s thoughts and esteem that he hung on. His life revolved around her, and he wondered if he would ever care for anyone, or anything as much. When she lived, Gwaynn was Gwynn and Gwynn was Gwaynn. She was a part of him, the better part.

Gwaynn drove away these thoughts and put down the axe. There was enough wood to last a good while in any case. He was alone. All of the others had left early in the morn on a hunt. They were all gone, all excited and Bock had even taken Van with them. The ranch was deserted except for Mrs. Hawser and Krys, who were both inside. Gwaynn had begged out of the hunt, wanting to be alone with his thoughts. The dreams of his sister the night before had him on edge, and he needed time to settle his thoughts, to meditate on what he was to do now that he was home. Cutting firewood was only a means to get his thoughts moving. He looked around at his surroundings.

The Hawser Ranch was placed in very beautiful spot. The morning fog was burning off, offering a much better view of the surrounding countryside. The ranch backed up to the thick line of trees where the Scar Forest began. He had failed to notice the forest in the dark of the previous night, but the trees hung over the place, not fifty yards from the rear of the main house, and much closer to some of the out buildings. To the south nothing but trees, to the north was the lane they had crossed upon arriving. There were thick hedgerows that ran down either side of the road and hid most of it from view. Also running beside the road, to the south, was a mid-sized creek. It ambled past, directly in front of the house, and on the far side of the road, visible through a manmade break in the hedges, was the vast expanse of the empty Plateau. In that direction Gwaynn could see for miles, all the way to the far horizon.

He sat on the stump of a log, adjusting his kali so that he could sit comfortably. He had decided it was time to wear the weapons proudly, after all he was not subject to Deutzani law, and nor would his people be for long, if he got his way. He needed to find Afton Sath. He knew this. Gwaynn, while he may be very good at fighting, knew that there was a vast difference between single combat and leading an army. He needed someone who knew the tactics of large scale fighting, and the only person left from the old days was Master Sath. Gwaynn had read up on military tactics as much as possible while on Lato, but reading and doing were very different endeavors. Gwaynn decided he would wait for his old teacher here. It was as good a place as any, and better than most. He only hoped that his father’s old Weapons Master had been busy gathering as many men to him as possible. Gwaynn was impatient to get started. He glanced up alarmed when he heard the pounding of approaching horses. He could see a faint dust trail but little else behind the thick hedges. He stood, and began to move slowly toward the bridge that spanned the creek. He moved warily, not wanting to be caught in open by a large patrol of Deutzani cavalry.

ǂ

Bull pounded away from Koshka with all the speed and power he could muster. He sensed the fear in his rider and it opened within him new pockets of energy. But Bull was built more for power than speed, and could feel in his hooves that the horse behind was closing steadily. Bull pressed harder. He hated to lose.

Samantha couldn’t help but glance back regularly as they fled. She thought about trying to use the bow, but knew it was not very likely that she would hit anything, and much more likely she would fall from Bull. If that happened she knew she was dead, so she hung on, crouched down low, and shouted encouraging words into Bull’s ear. She did draw her knife, holding it tightly in her right hand, mindful not to cut into the neck of the horse charging beneath her.

She glanced back and was alarmed to see that the Executioner was only a dozen lengths behind. His black cape was billowing out from the back of his galloping horse, whose eyes were wide with excitement; their prey finally so close.

Sam turned back and ducked her head low.

“Come on Bull,” she yelled and kicked him, though not nearly hard enough for the horse to notice at this point. She spotted a row of hedges which lined the road up ahead and briefly considered veering off into another direction, but there was a creek to the south and crossing it at a gallop would be very dangerous and to the north was nothing but open country. She hesitated, undecided until it was too late and she was between the thick rows of tall bushes. Some part of her mind told her the way was pretty, and she had to bite down a laugh at the thought, not wanting to become hysterical.

She risked a glance back and nearly screamed when she saw the gray face of the horse chasing her even with Bull’s rump. They had gained so fast. Fear now gripped her so hard that tears formed in her eyes blurring her view ahead. She blinked rapidly and that, plus the rush of the wind, allowed them to clear. She was suddenly aware that the Executioner was now pounding down the lane next to her. They were close, necessarily so, for the lane was not overly wide, only little more than a large wagon’s width and on either side the thick hedges hemmed them in.

The Executioner reached out, attempting to grab her. She screamed and kicked at him but only caught air then the horses moved closer and she felt the fingers of the killer brush against her sleeve. She leaned away and kicked out hard again, this time connecting solidly with the gray horse under him. It shied away, nearly going into the hedgerows. She heard the man racing next to her grunt as he held up an arm to ward off the stray branches that whipped at him in passing. His horse veered back toward the middle of the lane, and this time pulled ahead. He reached out again in an attempt to grab Bulls reins. Sam was on the verge of panic when she caught sight of the knife in her own hand. She swiped out at the man bent on killing her. She missed and he quickly became aware of the danger, even still he reached out again, relentless. She swung the knife once more, but this time he pulled back quickly and struck, hitting her in the forearm hard enough that she dropped the knife. She looked back for it in dismay but it was gone in a flash. Her arm was tingling from his blow and when she tried to grip the reins again pain shot through her. She cried out, pounding down the lane now with one hand.

‘It’s coming to an end,’ she thought as the Executioner once more pulled slightly ahead and leaned over to grab Bull’s reins. If he succeeded she was done for, so she jerked Bull’s head away and he veered close to the nearby hedge. It was her turn to be whipped and lashed by stray branches. She yelped in pain as a particularly nasty branch caught in her hair pulling her head back so hard she was nearly unseated.  Somehow she held on with her left hand and in a split second, a good quantity of her hair gave way and was ripped from her scalp.

The move had opened a bit of space between the horses. The Executioner was still slightly ahead, when anger finally surged through Samantha. She reached down and grabbed the reins with her right hand, ignoring the pain, and steered Bull sharply into the other horse. Bull reacted quickly, almost as if he grasped what she intended to do. He turned and charged directly at the horse to his right. And before his rival could react, he struck the smaller, lighter horse, driving him and his rider to the right. They all hit the hedgerow hard and they all came to an abrupt halt. Sam was thrown over the top of Bull, who was falling. She flipped and hit flat on her back, hard, and everything went black.

Screams of a dying horse rang in her ears as she painfully sat up. She was facing the way they were running and she could see a break in the hedgerows up ahead and the corner of a bridge leading south. The screams continued as she tried to clear her head. She glanced back. Bull was up and moving, but he was not using his right front leg. She thought of her bow, but he was hobbling away from her. It was the Executioner’s horse that was screaming. The animal was lying deep in the hedges, a thick branch sticking through its belly. The horse kicked and screamed in obvious agony. There was no sign of the Executioner, but Sam didn’t wait for him to appear and slowly climbed to her feet. Surprisingly everything seemed to work, at least until she tried to make a fist with her right hand. Pain shot up her arm and she desisted, then holding the injured limb close to her body she began to move farther up the lane toward the bridge.

‘If I can get to the forest...if Uncle Sath is at the ranch,” she thought and began to run. Behind her came a great crash in the brush, and despite herself she stopped and turned.

Near his dying horse the Executioner struggled out of the hedges. His face was torn and scratched in a half dozen places, and he had a wild look in his eyes as he peered down at his dying horse.

“Killed another one bastard!” Sam yelled at the top of her lungs, her chest heaving from exertion. She hated the man before her like no other, and wanted to deliver as much pain as she could before he finally killed her.

The Executioner looked up at her, clearly dazed and then he slowly drew his kali. She didn’t wait around, but turned and ran as quickly as she could away from him. He chased after, no longer thinking of his dignity, no longer thinking that an Executioner need never hurry. His only thought was that this girl must die!

Sam reached the break in the hedges and saw a group of buildings to her right, and beyond them the Scar Forest. She veered toward the bridge and was half way across before she noticed a tall young man moving slowly toward her. Sam shook her head.

“Run!” she gasped, not wanting anyone else to die on her account. The man before her, however, did not follow her request. He did stop walking and as she got closer she had the distinct impression that he was amused by her disheveled appearance.

“Easy Miss,” Gwaynn said, shocked by the wild look of the girl running toward him.

“Did your horse throw you?” he asked but she just ran up to him, fear and anger plain on her face. Then, to his surprised, she ran past him, staggering slightly before collapsing in a heap by the firewood. He turned to look at her, wondering just what she was about, but she said nothing. She was breathing hard, but with great effort she rose to her feet once more. She reached out and pulled the axe free from the log it was wedged in. She used her left hand, keeping her right cradled close to her body. When it was out and in her grasp, she turned to look past him.

“Run,” she yelled again, standing tall, defiant, gripping the axe tightly. She looked fierce…and somehow free, no longer afraid, and despite her grubby appearance she was dazzling to his eyes. Her attention was clearly on something behind him so Gwaynn turned, and there on the bridge coming toward him was the Executioner Navarra. Here, before him now was the man who had killed Gwynn; the man who had killed his mother; the man who killed Mille.

“Run you fool. He’s an Executioner,” Sam shouted to him from behind, wondering why the idiot just stood there.

Gwaynn glanced back at her. “I’m in your debt,” he said and with practiced ease pulled his kali from his belt.

“Don’t fight him you simpleton…run!”

But the young man did not answer and instead of running away he actually moved toward the Executioner. Samantha cringed, but noticed that the Executioner’s eyes were also wide with surprise, and despite his previous anger and obsession with her death, now he no longer even looked her way. His eyes were only for the youth in front of him. It was then that she caught sight of something she never expected to see on that face; the face she knew so well; the face she hated, on his face she clearly saw…fear.

Samantha knew she should run, but instead stood perfectly still, holding the axe.

“Navarra,” the young man said, so softly that she could barely hear him. She glanced down at her bare feet, surprised that she was moving forward.

“Prince Gwaynn,” the Executioner called back. “Do I finally get to end the rest of the Massi family line?”

“I’m afraid not,” the young man answered and suddenly the fighting began.

Sam jumped in spite of herself, watching fascinated, as the two dueled. A door slammed behind her and she glanced back to see an older woman in the doorway watching with horror.

Gwaynn struck with all the normal speed he could muster. He would not use his skills with time against the Executioner. He’d come to that decision long ago; it would be far too dangerous. He would have to kill this man the old way, the slow way. So he attacked, and Navarra parried, dodging and spinning, always just out of range, just blocking the deathblow. They circled one another, Gwaynn always on the attack, Navarra always on defense. The two women present watched the deadly dance without a comment or sound.

“I should have killed you first,” Navarra snarled, backing away from another close call. He tried to counter but it was rejected with such authority that he was quickly put on the defensive again.

“Yes, you should have,” Gwaynn answered, breathing easily as if he was taking a stroll through a park.

Navarra backed away; dimly aware of the women watching…the girl watching.

“I will kill you both when I’m through with him,” he yelled and risked a quick glance at the Fultan girl. He was hoping to catch a glimpse of fear in her eyes, but was disappointed. Her gaze was filled with wonder as she watched the boy in front of her. Navarra grimaced and then caught sight of a kali heading directly at his face. He ducked to the side, but not before his right ear was sliced in two. He howled and staggered back, retreating quickly, ignoring the desire to put a hand to his wound; the blood would make his grip on his weapon slippery, and it was all he could do now to hold onto his kali during the constant ringing the boy was sending through his arms. The Prince had grown strong…very strong.

Gwaynn said nothing, just continued to advance, and as on the beach back on Noble, Navarra realized that he must end this soon. The boy had stamina; the boy had strength and skill. Navarra knew that if he was to win he would need luck or use trickery and guile.

He backed away, trying to give himself time to plan, to come up with an idea. He took another slicing blow along his side, right at his hipbone. He jumped away moving clear, then back pedaling he glanced down at the cut in his shirt. He caught a glimpse of open skin and of blood dripping into the top of his pants. He circled around the back of the house with Gwaynn following. Behind him came the old woman and the Fultan girl, still carrying her pathetic axe. He charged forward, catching the boy off guard, even so his blows were blocked with ease. Navarra managed to push the boy hard with his shoulder, before moving quickly away. There was a large fire pit half way between the house and the forest, though it looked to be burnt out. Navarra caught a glimpse of charred lumber and piles of ash. He backed toward the pit, an idea growing in his mind. Gwaynn followed unsuspectingly.

“I still think of your mother’s screams,” Navarra said, gasping for breath and then had to use every ounce of his skill to block the onslaught that followed. ‘The boy’s inhuman,’ he thought and circled around the pit.

“I should have fucked your sister though,” Navarra taunted, but Gwaynn held back wary of this new tactic. “You were fucking her weren’t you…her nice firm body,” Navarra added. Gwaynn wailed in anger, and rushed in to kill the man once and for all. Navarra kicked out hard into the ash, hoping to blind his opponent if only for a moment. The ash flew high and hard, filled with still smoldering embers, and caught Gwaynn full in the face. Several hot pieces struck him, but he closed his eyes just in time.

Navarra smiled, it had worked better than he had hoped. He quickly moved forward on the attack, knowing he had to end this before the boy could recover. He had him though, he was sure. He rushed forward as the boy backpedaled, blinking furiously and wiping his eyes with the backs of his hands, which were now covered in ash and soot.

The boy spun helpless before him. He raised his kali in defense, but his eyes were still blinded and he was blinking, desperately trying to clear them.

“I’m Tar Navarra!” the Executioner yelled and raised his right hand. He dimly heard the Fultan girl scream just as he started the blow that would remove the young Prince’s head. He struck hard; he struck fast. The boy was directly before him, an easy target, but his kali moved only through air and empty space where the boy should have been.

Navarra looked down, thinking the boy must have ducked quickly to the ground, but he was not there.

“You are no one!” A voice said from behind him and Navarra whirled only to see a kali slice through his right wrist. Time slowed for the Executioner then, as he stood and watched his hand fly through the air and land in the grass just beyond the pit. Before Navarra could react another slash and his left kali flew off in the other direction. Navarra raised the stump of his right arm before his eyes, pain swallowing his senses then suddenly the boy was at his throat lifting him up and slamming him hard onto this back, knocking what little wind he had from his lungs.

“Now, you’re just food for my dogs,” Gwaynn whispered into his ear and slammed his right kali up through his sternum and into his heart. Navarra groaned and stared for a moment into the eyes of his enemy. He started to laugh, hiccupped once, blood in his mouth, before dying without another sound.

Gwaynn stood up, now weak and dizzy from his exertions. He stepped back staring at the man on the ground, when all at once the girl approached in a rush. Gwaynn stared at her, her face contorted with anger, pain and bloodlust. She raised her axe with both hands despite her obvious pain, and with three quick blows cut the head from the corpse lying on the ground. She glared down at the body in triumph, looked briefly, wildly, into Gwaynn’s eyes before dropping the axe and staggering away toward the woods. Gwaynn watched her go, staring at her back. From behind, her clothes were filthy, her hair was in tangled knots, her feet dirty and bare, her arms covered in scratches and oozing blood, but he thought…perhaps…she was the most beautiful girl he had ever laid eyes upon.

The End

Content

Parker Richard D. The Black Horseman